9480i, 9143i, 9480i CT And 67xxi Phone Administrator Guide Aastra 9143i

User Manual: 9480i, 9143i, 9480i CT and 67xxi Phone Administrator Guide Aastra Telephones 9xxx Series Manuals - Telecomuserguides.com

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1140

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT
and 67xxi Series Phones

SIP IP
SI
I PHONE
41-001160-04
Rev 02

Administrator Guide
Release 2.5

Aastra Telecom will not accept liability for any damages and/or long distance charges, which result from
unauthorized and/or unlawful use. While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, Aastra Telecom will
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained within this documentation. The
information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice.

Copyright 2009 Aastra Telecom. www.aastratelecom.com
All Rights Reserved.

Software License Agreement
Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a
personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive,
restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for
which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed
to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this
agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as
such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the
fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In
addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the
requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall
not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and
information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in
accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions.
Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display
Software furnished in object code form. Customer shall not modify, copy,
reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or
machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express
written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise
disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether
or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the
property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the terms and conditions of
this agreement. All rights reserved.
Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement
to abide by the terms and conditions contained herein. Removal or modification
of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any
Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of
this Agreement, shall automatically terminate this license. If this Agreement is
terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and destroy or
return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary
information of Seller. In no event shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable
for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of
business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other
pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to
use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

iii

Software License Agreement................................................................................................ iii
Preface
Introduction ..............................................................................................................xvii

.

Audience ..................................................................................................................xvii

.

Documentation ........................................................................................................xviii

.

Chapters and appendixes in this guide .................................................................... xix

.

Chapter 1
Overview
.

IP Phone Models ............................................................................................................1-3

.

Description ...............................................................................................................1-3

.

Model 9143i IP Phone ..............................................................................................1-7

.

Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-11

.

Model 6730i IP Phone

................................................................................1-16

Model 6731i IP Phone

.................................................................................1-19

.

.

Model 6751i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-22

.

Model 6753i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-25

.

Model 6755i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-28

.

Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-32

.

Firmware Installation Information .................................................................................1-38

.

Description .............................................................................................................1-38

.

Installation Considerations .....................................................................................1-38

.

Installation Requirements .......................................................................................1-39

.

Configuration Server Requirement .........................................................................1-40

.

Firmware and Configuration Files .................................................................................1-41

.

Description .............................................................................................................1-41

.

Configuration File Precedence ...............................................................................1-43

.

Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files ............................................................1-44

.

Multiple Configuration Server Support
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

........................................................1-45

.

v

Contents

Contents

Contents

Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods

.

Configuration Methods ...................................................................................................2-2

.

Description ...............................................................................................................2-2

.

IP Phone UI ..............................................................................................................2-2

.

Aastra Web UI ..........................................................................................................2-6

.

Configuration Files (Administrator Only) ................................................................2-17

.

Chapter 3
Administrator Options

.

Administrator Level Options ...........................................................................................3-3

.

Description ...............................................................................................................3-3

.

IP Phone UI Options ................................................................................................3-3

.

Aastra Web UI Options ............................................................................................3-6

.

Configuration File Options ........................................................................................3-8

.

Phone Status ............................................................................................................3-9

.

Restarting Your Phone ...........................................................................................3-13

.

Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration .....................................3-15

.

Basic Settings ........................................................................................................3-19

.

Account Configuration ............................................................................................3-37

.

Network Settings ....................................................................................................3-39

.

Line Settings ..........................................................................................................3-72

.

Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys ......................................3-73

.

Action URI ..............................................................................................................3-74

.

Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-77

.

Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-86

.

TLS Support ...........................................................................................................3-87

.

802.1x Support .......................................................................................................3-91

.

Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................3-94

.

Chapter 4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

.

Overview .........................................................................................................................4-3
Network Settings ............................................................................................................4-4

.

.

Basic Network Settings ............................................................................................4-4

.

Advanced Network Settings ...................................................................................4-30
vi

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Global SIP Settings ......................................................................................................4-70

.

Contents

Description .............................................................................................................4-70

.

Basic SIP Settings ..................................................................................................4-71

.

Advanced SIP Settings (optional) ..........................................................................4-86

.

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings .........................................................4-95

.

RTCP Summary Reports .....................................................................................4-105

.

Autodial Settings ..................................................................................................4-107

.

Configuration Server Protocol ....................................................................................4-112

.

Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol .....................................................4-112

.

Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features

.

Operational Features ......................................................................................................5-5

.

Description ...............................................................................................................5-5

.

User Passwords .......................................................................................................5-5

.

Administrator Passwords .........................................................................................5-9

.

Locking/Unlocking the Phone .................................................................................5-10

.

Defining an Emergency Dial Plan ..........................................................................5-16

.

Time and Date ........................................................................................................5-19

.

Backlight Mode (6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) ................................................5-30
Audio DHSG Headset (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)

..............................5-33

.

.

Live Dial Pad* .........................................................................................................5-35

.

Language

....................................................................................................5-36

.

Locking IP Phone Keys ..........................................................................................5-52

.

Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) .......................................5-53

.

Local Dial Plan .......................................................................................................5-56

.

Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls ............................................................................5-62

.

Suppressing DTMF Playback .................................................................................5-66

.

Display DTMF Digits ..............................................................................................5-68

.

Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone ...............................................................................5-70

.

Stuttered Dial Tone .................................................................................................5-73

.

XML Beep Support .................................................................................................5-75

.

Status Scroll Delay .................................................................................................5-77

.

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing .............................................................................5-79

.

Switch Focus to Ringing Line .................................................................................5-82

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

vii

Contents

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ............................................................5-84
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .....................................................................5-88
UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) .............................................................5-91

.

.

.

Message Waiting Indicator Line .............................................................................5-93

.

DND Key Mode ......................................................................................................5-95

.

Call Forward Mode .................................................................................................5-97

.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)
and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) .......................................5-101

.

Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In .............................5-106

.

Group Paging RTP Settings ................................................................................. 5-111

.

Key Mapping ........................................................................................................5-117

.

Ring Tones and Tone Sets

........................................................................5-121

.

Priority Alerting .....................................................................................................5-126

.

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) ...........................................5-133

.

Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys ................5-145

.

Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI ...........................................5-166

.

Speeddial Prefixes ...............................................................................................5-169

.

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key ...................................5-170

.

Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ........................................................................................5-171

.

BLF Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-177
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys ......................................................................5-179
Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) .....................................5-185

.

.

.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) .....................................5-189

.

ACD Subscription Period .....................................................................................5-199

.

BLA Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-201

.

Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) ............................5-203

.

Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................5-210

.

Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) ..........................................................................5-221

.

BLA Support for Third Party Registration .............................................................5-228

.

P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts ....................................................5-229
BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging

..................................5-230
..........................................5-233

.

.

.

Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the 6751i) ....................................................5-237

.

Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) ..............................................................5-248

.

Call Forwarding ....................................................................................................5-252

.

viii

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

....................................................................5-291

.

Displaying Call Destination for Incoming Calls

Contents

SIP Phone Diversion Display

.........................................5-293

.

Callers List ...........................................................................................................5-296

.

Customizable Callers List and Services Keys ......................................................5-302

.

Missed Calls Indicator ..........................................................................................5-303

.

Directory List ........................................................................................................5-305

.

Voicemail (not applicable to 6751i) ......................................................................5-316
XML Customized Services ...................................................................................5-319
XML Override for a Locked Phone .......................................................................5-363

.

.

.

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments ...................................................5-364

.

Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) ..........................5-366
“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) ..............5-370
Conference Ends and Transfers Remaining Parties
Transferring Two Existing Calls

.

.

................................5-371

.

................................................................5-372

.

Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods,
used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) .....................................5-373
Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module ...................5-376
Chapter 6
Configuring Advanced Operational Features

.

.

.

Advanced Operational Features .....................................................................................6-3

.

Description ...............................................................................................................6-3

.

MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages .............................................6-5

.

SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer ..............................................................6-7

.

Update Caller ID During a Call .................................................................................6-8

.

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-9

.

Auto-discovery Using mDNS ..................................................................................6-10

.

Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) ............................................6-11

.

Missed Call Summary Subscription .......................................................................6-13

.

As-Feature-Event Subscription ..............................................................................6-17

.

Blacklist Duration ...................................................................................................6-22

.

Whitelist Proxy .......................................................................................................6-24

.

Transport Layer Security (TLS) ..............................................................................6-26

.

802.1x Support .......................................................................................................6-31

.

Symmetric UDP Signaling ......................................................................................6-41

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

ix

Contents

Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers .....................................................6-42
GRUU and sip.instance Support ............................................................................6-43
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) ...........6-44

.

.

.

Configurable DNS Queries .....................................................................................6-47

.

Ignore Out of Sequence Errors ..............................................................................6-49

.

“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 .........................................6-50

.

Reason Header Field in SIP Message ...................................................................6-50

.

Configurable “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Optional Headers

.........................6-50

Configurable SIP P-Asserted Identity (PAI)

................................................6-51

Configurable Route Header in SIP Packet

.................................................6-52

Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

.

.

.

.

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone ....................................................................................7-2

.

Configuration File Encryption Method ......................................................................7-2

.

Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files ................................................................7-4
Vendor Configuration File Encryption .......................................................................7-6
Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware

.

.

.

Upgrading the Firmware .................................................................................................8-2

.

Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI .......................................8-2

.

Using the Restart Feature ........................................................................................8-5

.

Using the Auto-Resync Feature ...............................................................................8-7

.

Chapter 9
Troubleshooting

.

Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................9-3

.

Log Settings .............................................................................................................9-3

.

Module/Debug Level Settings ..................................................................................9-4

.

Support Information ..................................................................................................9-7

.

WatchDog Task Feature .........................................................................................9-12

.

Error Messages Display .........................................................................................9-15

.

Troubleshooting Solutions ............................................................................................9-19

.

Description .............................................................................................................9-19

.

Why does my phone display “Application missing”? ..............................................9-19

.

x

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

.

Contents

Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? ......................................9-20

Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"? ..........................................9-20

.

Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? .....9-21

.

How do I restart the IP phone? ..............................................................................9-22

.

How do I set the IP phone to factory default? ........................................................9-23

.

How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? ...................................................9-24

.

How to reset a user’s password? ...........................................................................9-25

.

How do I lock and unlock the phone? ....................................................................9-27

.

Appendix A
Configuration Parameters

.

Setting Parameters in Configuration Files ..................................................................... A-6

.

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters ............................................................. A-7

.

Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu ..................................................................... A-7

.

Network Settings ..................................................................................................... A-8

.

DHCP Option Settings .......................................................................................... A-13

.

Password Settings ................................................................................................ A-15

.

Emergency Dial Plan Settings ............................................................................... A-16

.

Aastra Web UI Settings ......................................................................................... A-17

.

Configuration Server Settings ............................................................................... A-18
Multiple Configuration Server Settings

.

...................................................... A-29

.

Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings ........................................................ A-31

.

Rport Setting ......................................................................................................... A-33

.

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting .......................................................................... A-34

.

Local SIP TLS Port ................................................................................................ A-34

.

HTTPS Client and Server Settings ........................................................................ A-35

.

HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings ....................................................... A-37

.

UPnP Settings ....................................................................................................... A-41

.

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings ......................................................... A-42
RTCP Summary Reports

.

........................................................................... A-47

.

Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings ................................................................... A-51

.

Time and Date Settings ......................................................................................... A-52

.

Time Server Settings ............................................................................................. A-59

.

Custom Time Zone and DST Settings .................................................................. A-61

.

Backlight Mode Settings (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) ................................................ A-71
DHSG Settings (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) ................................................... A-72
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

.

.

xi

Live Dialpad Settings ............................................................................................ A-72

Contents

.

SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ................................................................................. A-73

.

SIP Outbound Support .......................................................................................... A-76

.

Dynamic SIP for Registration and Subscription

......................................... A-77

.

SIP Basic, Global Settings .................................................................................... A-78

.

SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings ................................................................................. A-87

.

BLA Support for MWI

................................................................................. A-98

.

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging

........................................... A-99

.

Centralized Conferencing Settings ...................................................................... A-100

.

SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference ............................................................. A-102
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS .................................. A-103

.

.

Advanced SIP Settings ....................................................................................... A-104

.

Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings ...................................................... A-113

.

As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings ............................................................. A-116

.

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings ............................................................. A-117

.

802.1x Support Settings ...................................................................................... A-126

.

RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings .................................................................... A-134

.

Autodial Settings ................................................................................................. A-139

.

Voicemail Settings ............................................................................................... A-142

.

Directory Settings ................................................................................................ A-144

.

Callers List Settings ............................................................................................ A-146

.

Customize Callers List and Services Key ........................................................... A-147

.

Call Forward Settings .......................................................................................... A-148

.

Call Forward Key Mode Settings ......................................................................... A-149

.

LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings ............................................................................ A-151

.

Missed Calls Indicator Settings ........................................................................... A-153

.

XML Settings ....................................................................................................... A-154

.

Action URI Settings ............................................................................................. A-157

.

XML SIP Notify Settings ...................................................................................... A-163

.

Polling Action URI Settings ................................................................................. A-164

.

Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings

................................................. A-165

.

.................................................................... A-167

.

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting .............................................................. A-168

.

Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls

xii

.................................................. A-169

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Switch Focus to Ringing Line .............................................................................. A-170

.

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .................................................................. A-172

Contents

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ......................................................... A-171

.

.

Stuttered Dial Tone Setting ................................................................................. A-173

.

Call Waiting Settings ........................................................................................... A-174

.

Message Waiting Indicator Settings .................................................................... A-175

.

DND Key Mode Settings ..................................................................................... A-176

.

Priority Alert Settings ........................................................................................... A-177

.

Bellcore Cadence Settings .................................................................................. A-182

.

SIP Diversion Display

.............................................................................. A-184

.

Display of Call Destination for Incoming Calls
Language Settings
Language Pack Settings

......................................... A-185

................................................................................... A-186
.......................................................................... A-188

.

.

.

Suppress DTMF Playback Setting ...................................................................... A-198

.

Display DTMF Digits Setting ............................................................................... A-199

.

Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings ................................................... A-200

.

Group Paging RTP Settings ................................................................................ A-204

.

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings ..................................... A-205
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings ............................ A-209

.

.

ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings ................................................................... A-211

.

Park and Pickup Global Settings (not applicable to 6751i)) ................................ A-212

.

Mapping Key Settings ......................................................................................... A-214

.

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters ......... A-217
Softkey Settings for 8 and 11-Line LCD phones ................................................. A-219
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, and 6755i .............. A-228
Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT ...................................................... A-233
Handset Feature Key Settings (9480i CT and 6757i CT) .................................... A-240
Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i,
6757i CT) and M675i (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) .............................................. A-242

.

.

.

.

.

.

Customizing the Key Type List ............................................................................ A-249

.

Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys ........................................................ A-252

.

Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) ....................................................... A-255

.

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys ....................................... A-256

.

BLF List URI Settings .......................................................................................... A-256

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

xiii

Contents

Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display ........................................... A-257

.

Expansion Module 1 through 3 ........................................................................... A-257

.

Advanced Operational Parameters ........................................................................... A-259

.

Blind Transfer Setting .......................................................................................... A-259

.

Update Caller ID Setting. .................................................................................... A-259

.

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. .......................................................... A-260

.

Single Call Restriction Setting ............................................................................. A-261

.

Blacklist Duration Setting .................................................................................... A-262

.

Whitelist Proxy Setting ........................................................................................ A-262

.

XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) ............ A-263
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i) ................................... A-265
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting .............................................. A-265

.

.

.

XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting .......................................................... A-266

.

Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting ....................................................................... A-266

.

User-Agent Setting .............................................................................................. A-267

.

GRUU and sip.instance Support ......................................................................... A-267

.

DNS Query Setting .............................................................................................. A-268

.

Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests ...................................................................... A-269

.

Optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers
P-Asserted Identity (PAI)
Route Header in SIP Packet

........................................... A-269

.

......................................................................... A-270

.

.................................................................... A-270

.

Configuration Encryption Setting ......................................................................... A-271

.

Troubleshooting Parameters ..................................................................................... A-272

.

Log Settings ........................................................................................................ A-272

.

WatchDog Settings ............................................................................................. A-275

.

Appendix B
Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX

.

IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ................................................................................... B-2

.

Appendix C
Sample Configuration Files

.

Sample Configuration Files ........................................................................................... C-2

.

6757i Sample Configuration File ............................................................................. C-2

.

6757i CT Sample Configuration File ..................................................................... C-12

.

6753i Sample Configuration File ........................................................................... C-29

.

xiv

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Contents

Appendix D
Sample BLF Softkey Settings

.

Sample BLF Softkey Settings ........................................................................................ D-2

.

Asterisk BLF ............................................................................................................ D-2

.

BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF .................................................................................... D-3

.

Appendix E
Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration

.

Multiple Proxy Server Configuration .............................................................................. E-2

.

Limited Warranty
Index
Third Party Copyright Compliance

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

xv

Preface

About this guide
Introduction
This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic
network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 9143i, 9480i,
9480i CT and the 67xxi Series IP Phones (6730i, 6731i, 6751i, 6753i, 6755i,
6757i, and 6757i CT). It also includes details on the functioning and configuration
of the IP phones.
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in
this guide.

Audience
This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and
partners who need to understand how to operate and maintain the IP phone on a
SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information.
This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for
system or network administrators. Prior knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is
recommended.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

xvii

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this guide

Documentation
The IP phone documentation consists of:
•

 SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation
and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and
basic options list customization. Included with the phone.

•

Model 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 67xxi Series SIP IP Phone
Administrator Guide – explains how to set the phone up on the network, as
well as advanced configuration instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide
contains information that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or
network administrator.

•

 SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly
used features and functions for an end user.

This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra product-specific Installation
Guide and the Aastra product-specific User Guide.

xviii

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Chapters and appendixes in this guide
This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes:
For

Go to

An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation
information

Chapter 1

IP Phone interface methods

Chapter 2

Administrator options information

Chapter 3

Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone

Chapter 4

Configuring operational information on the IP Phones

Chapter 5

Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones

Chapter 6

Encryption information

Chapter 7

Firmware upgrade information

Chapter 8

Troubleshooting solutions

Chapter 9

Configuration parameters

Appendix A

Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX

Appendix B

Sample configuration files

Appendix C

Sample BLF softkey settings

Appendix D

Sample multiple proxy server configuration

Appendix E

Creating XML applications

Appendix F

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

xix

Chapter 1
Overview

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information
about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and
configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

IP Phone Models

page 1-3

Model 9143i IP Phone

page 1-7

Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones

page 1-11

Model 6731i IP Phone

page 1-19

Model 6751i IP Phone

page 1-22

Model 6755i IP Phone

page 1-28

Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones

page 1-32

Firmware Installation Information

page 1-38

Installation Considerations

page 1-38

Installation Requirements

page 1-39

Configuration Server Requirement

page 1-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

1-2

Topic

Page

Firmware and Configuration Files

page 1-41

Configuration File Precedence

page 1-43

Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files

page 1-44

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

IP Phone Models
Description
All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to
receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone.
All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and
6757i CT offers the base phone along with a cordless extension.
References
For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model.
The following illustrations show the types of IP Phone Models.

Hold
Redi
al
Go
od
bye
Op

Op

Save
Conf

De

Dire
ctor
y

tio

ns

tions

948
0i

lete

Xfer

L3
L2

L1

Xfer
Co
nf

Ico
m

Mut
e
Serv
ice

s

9480i

9143i
Hold
Redi
al
Go
Op

tio

od
bye

ns

948
0i C

T

Xfer
Co
nf

Ico
m
Serv

ice

s

9480i CT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

6731i

6730i

6753i

6751i

6755i

6757i

6757i CT

Optional Accessories (for all 9xxxi and 67xxi IP Phones)
The following are optional accessories for the IP Phones.

Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Inline Power Injector

1-4

Additional Ethernet Cable
(category 5/5e straight through
cable)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

A Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector supplies 48V power to the IP
phone through the Ethernet cable on pins 4 & 5 and 7 & 8.
Warning: Do not use this inline PoE power injector to power other
devices. See your phone-specific Installation Guide for more information.

Reference
For more information about installing the PoE and additional Ethernet cable, see
your phone-specific Installation Guide.
Optional Accessories (for 6731i and 6751i IP Phones)
The following are optional accessories for the 6731i and 6751i IP Phones.

Power Adapter

Optional Accessories (for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT IP
Phones)
The following are optional accessories for the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
IP Phones.

M670i Expansion Module
for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

M675i Expansion Module
for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT

1-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

The M670i module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6753i,
6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. The M670i provides paper labels for each softkey. Up
to 3 modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the
phone.
The M675i module adds 60 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6755i,
6757i, and 6757i CT (using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit).
The M675i module provides an LCD display for display softkey labels. Up to 3
modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the
phone.
Reference
For more information about installing and using the expansion modules, see your
phone-specific Installation Guide and phone-specific User Guide.

1-6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Model 9143i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 9143i.

Options

Directory

Save

Delete

Conf

Xfer

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7

8

9 WXYZ

PQRS

*

0

TUV

#

L3

L2

L1

Mute

9143i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3-line LCD screen
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
7 programmable keys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Supports up to 9 call lines
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

9143i Symbol Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
Callers List key - Allows you to access the Callers List that stores up to
200 of the last calls received.

Conf

Xfer

Conference key - Allows you to begin a conference call with up to 3 active
call parties.

Transfer key - Allows you to perform blind or consultative transfer of an
active call to another number. In blind transfer, you transfer the call without
waiting for the far end to answer. In consultative transfer, you wait for the far
end to answer before transferring the call.
Redial key - Redials a previously dialed number. The Redial key stores up
to 100 previously dialed numbers you can select from. Pressing the Redial
key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

1-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description

L3

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9143i IP Phone supports up to 3 line keys.

L2

L1

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Options

Directory

Save

Delete

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Specific options
are available to your System Administrator only and are password
protected. Contact your System Administrator for more information.
Directory key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is
your personal phone book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can
enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or
by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your phone.
Each entry can contain a maximum of 16 letters and
numbers.
Save key - Allows you to save entries when storing numbers and names in
Directory. Also allows you to save Option settings when using the
programmable keys.
Delete key - Allows you to remove entries from the Redial, Directory, or
Callers Lists.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-9

Keys

Key Description
Programmable keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that
key. You can program up to 7 keys with a specific function. By default, there
are no functions configured on the programmable keys (keys are
configured as “None”).
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 7 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Mute

*See the Aastra 9143i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

Overview

IP Phone Models

Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP
Phones. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on these models.

35i
Hold
Hold

Redial
edial

35i

Good
oodbye
Hold
Hold

Redial
edial

Good
oodbye

1

2 ABC

D EF
3 DEF

GHI
4 GHI

JKL
5 JKL

6 MNO

PQ RS
TU V
7 PQRS
8 TUV

9 WXYZYZ

Options
Options
Options
Options

1

2 ABC

D EF
3 DEF

GHI
4 GHI

JKL
5 JKL

6 MNO

7

8

9 WXYZYZ

PQ RS
PQRS

*

0

TU V
TUV

#

Xfer
er

Icom
om

Conf
onf

Servi
vices
es

*

0

#

Xfer
er

Icom
om

Conf
onf

L1

L2

L3

Servi
vices
es

L4

9480i

L1

L2

L3

L4

9480i CT

9480i and 9480i CT Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

5 line graphical LCD screen with large backlit display
6 multi-functional, state-based softkeys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Supports up to 9 call lines
Speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description

Good
oodbye

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.

Hold

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Redial

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9480i and 9480i CT IP phones support up to 4 line keys.
L1

1-12

L2

L3

L4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Transfer key - Transfers an active call to another number.

Xfer
er
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Icom

Servi
vicces

Icom key - Begins an intercom call to a remote extension and answers
incoming intercom calls. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have
default softkey 4 configured as Icom.
Services key - Displays a list of Services available to your phone, if
specific services have been configured. The available Aastra services
include Directory & Callers Log. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also
have default softkey 1 configured as Services.
Note: Availability of the services feature is dependant on your phone
system and/or service provider.
Softkeys - 6 state-based softkeys on the 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones.
When you pick up the handset, the following displays on key 1:
Dial - After entering a phone number from the keypad, you can press the
Dial softkey to immediately dial the number.
Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational
Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/
Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.
*See the Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT User Guides for more information about each of these
keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

9480i CT Cordless Handset Features
•
•
•
•
•
•

5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand

10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

1-14

13
15
14
16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions*
Function #

Function Description

1

Receiver

2

Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left

3

Display

4

Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing

5

Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys

6

Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key

7

Dial Pad

8

Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you

9

Headset Jack

10

Status Light

11

Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists

12

Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing

13

Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed

14

Charging Jack

15

Charging Contacts

16

Microphone

*See the Aastra 9480i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Model 6730i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6730i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6730i. The 6730i is
available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6730i with Symbol or Text Keys
6730i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
•

3-line LCD screen

•

8 programmable top keys

•

Press-and-hold speeddial key configuration feature

•

Supports up to 6 call lines with LEDs

•

Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls

•

Headset mode support (via handset jack)

•

AC power adapter (included)

•

Enhanced busy lamp fields*

•

Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

6730i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*.
Symbol Keys

Text Keys
Hold
old

Redial

Key Description
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice redials the last dialed number.

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Speaker

Speaker key - Transfers the active call to the speaker, allowing handsfree
use of the phone. Switched between headset and speaker depending on
audio mode setting.
Options key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your
settings.
Callers List key - Accesses the last 200 calls received.

Callers

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Transfer key - Transfers the active call to another number.
Xfer

Line/Call Appearance keys - Connect you to a line or call. The Aastra
6730i IP phone supports 2 line keys, each with LED indicator lights.
Additional lines (up to 6 in total) can be added to the programmable keys.

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Programmable keys - 8 Top Keys - all 8 keys are programmable.
Keys 5 and 6 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively.
These keys must be made configurable by the System Administrator before
they can be changed.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
6730i IP phone:
1 - None
2 - None
3 - None
4 - None
5 - SAVE - Allows you to save numbers
(preconfigured)and/or names to the Directory. Using this key, you enter the
number, name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the Directory List.
6 - DELETE - Allows you to delete entries
(preconfigured)from the Directory List and Callers List. (Must enter the
Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice to delete
entry).
7 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names
(preconfigured)and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order)
8 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features
(preconfigured)and services through the Services menu.
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 8 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.

*See the Aastra 6730i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-18

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Model 6731i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6731i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6731i. The 6731i is
available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6731i with Symbol or Text Keys
6731i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
•

3-line LCD screen

•

8 programmable top keys

•

Press-and-hold speeddial key configuration feature

•

Supports up to 6 call lines with LEDs

•

Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls

•

Headset mode support (via handset jack)

•

Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer

•

Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters

•

AC power adapter (optional equipment - not included)

•

Enhanced busy lamp fields*

•

Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

6731i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys
Hold
old

Redial

Key Description
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice redials the last dialed number.

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Speaker

Speaker key - Transfers the active call to the speaker, allowing handsfree
use of the phone. Switched between headset and speaker depending on
audio mode setting.
Options key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your
settings.
Callers List key - Accesses the last 200 calls received.

Callers

1-20

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Transfer key - Transfers the active call to another number.
Xfer

Line/Call Appearance keys - Connect you to a line or call. The Aastra
6730i IP phone supports 2 line keys, each with LED indicator lights.
Additional lines (up to 6 in total) can be added to the programmable keys.

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Programmable keys - 8 Top Keys - all 8 keys are programmable.
Keys 5 and 6 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively.
These keys must be made configurable by the System Administrator before
they can be changed.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
6730i IP phone:
1 - None
2 - None
3 - None
4 - None
5 - SAVE - Allows you to save numbers
(preconfigured)and/or names to the Directory. Using this key, you enter the
number, name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the Directory List.
6 - DELETE - Allows you to delete entries
(preconfigured)from the Directory List and Callers List. (Must enter the
Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice to delete
entry).
7 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names
(preconfigured)and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order)
8 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features
(preconfigured)and services through the Services menu.
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 8 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.

*See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Model 6751i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6751i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6751i. The 6751i is
available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6751i with Symbol or Text Keys
6751i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
•

3-line LCD screen

•

1 call appearance line

•
•

Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports 1 call line with transfer capabilities

•

Full-duplex speakerphone for hands-free calls

•

Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer

•

AC power adapter (sold separately)

•

Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-22

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

6751i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*.
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Servi
vices
es

Hold
old

Redial

Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
Hold key again.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.

Save

Delete

Swap

Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves
names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List.

Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and
Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this
key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for
speeddial softkeys.
Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can
press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the
second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active
calls.
The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be
accepted.

Speaker

Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the
handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to
handsfree.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-23

Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you.

Mute

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer
calls when required.
DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join
conferences when required.
Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD.
While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
*See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

Overview

IP Phone Models

Model 6753i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6753i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default programmable
keys on the 6753i.

6753i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3-line LCD screen
6 programmable top keys
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

6753i Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.

L3

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
6753i IP phone supports up to 3 line keys.

L2
L1

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).

1-26

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more
than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top Keys - all 6 keys are programmable.
Keys 1 and 2 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively.
These keys are locked but can be unlocked and made configurable if
required by the System Administrator.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
6753i IP phone:
1 - SAVE

Allows you to save numbers and/or names to the
Directory. Using this key, you enter the number,
name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the
Directory List.
2 - DELETE
Allows you to delete a single entry or all entries from
the Directory List and Callers List.
3 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers
(stored in alphabetical order).
4 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
5 - TRANSFER
Transfers the active call to another number.
6 - CONFERENCE Begins a conference call with the active call.
Notes:
1. For more information about programming the SAVE and DELETE
keys, see “Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)” on
page 5-53.
2. For more information about configuring keys 1 thru 6 to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5 the section, “Softkeys/Programmable
Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.
*See the Aastra 6753i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Model 6755i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6755i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys, default programmable
keys, and default softkeys on the 6755i.

6755i Phone Features
•
•

8 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight
12 programmable keys
— 6 programmable hard keys on the top
— 6 programmable state-based softkeys on the bottom

•
•
•
•
•
•

1-28

4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

•
•
•
•

Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

6755i Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6755i
IP phone supports up to 4 line keys.

L3
L2
L1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without
lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to
switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call
appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter
the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6
programmable functions)
By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory,
Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned
functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform
specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
6755i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES

Accesses enhanced features and services such as
XML applications and voicemail, provided by third
parties.
2 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored
in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - NONE
No assigned function.
6 - NONE
No assigned function.
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.

1-30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20
programmable functions).
By default, the bottom softkeys 2 through 6 have no assigned functions. You
can configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6755i
IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static
softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
1 - DIAL
2 - CONF
3 - XFER

Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.

Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational
Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/
Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.
*See the Aastra 6755i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the 6757i IP Phone. It includes a list
of features, and describes the hard keys and default softkeys on the 6757i.

6757i

6757i CT

6757i and 6757i CT Phone Features
•
•

11 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight
12 multi-functional softkeys
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys

•
•
•
•
•
•

1-32

- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

•
•
•
•

Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*

*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

6757i and 6757i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
6757i IP phone supports up to 4 line keys.

L3
L2
L1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without
lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to
switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.

1-34

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

Keys

Key Description
Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6757i IP Phone.
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable
functions)
- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20
programmable functions)
By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory,
Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned
functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform
specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 6757i IP
phone:
1 - SERVICES

Accesses enhanced features and services such as
XML applications and voicemail, provided by third
parties.
2 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored
in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - NONE
No assigned function.
6 - NONE
No assigned function.
7 - NONE
No assigned function.
By default, the bottom softkeys 8 through 12 have no assigned functions.
You can configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the
6757i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static
softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
7- DIAL
8- CONF
9- XFER

Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.

Note: For more information about programming the softkeys to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module
Keys” on page 5-145.
*See the Aastra 6757i or 6757i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models

6757i CT Cordless Handset Features
•
•
•
•
•
•

5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand

10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

1-36

13
15
14
16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

IP Phone Models

6757i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions
Function #

Function Description

1

Receiver

2

Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left

3

Display

4

Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing

5

Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys

6

Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key

7

Dial Pad

8

Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you

9

Headset Jack

10

Status Light

11

Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists

12

Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing

13

Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed

14

Charging Jack

15

Charging Contacts

16

Microphone

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information

Firmware Installation Information
Description
The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the
following:
•

Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI)

•

Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI)

When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download it
manually.

Installation Considerations
The following considerations must be made before connecting the IP phone to the
network:
•

If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server
is enabled and running on your network.

•

If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the
section, “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24 for manually
setting up an IP address.

To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the model-specific
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide.

1-38

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware Installation Information

Installation Requirements
The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP
phone:
•

SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP
account created for the IP phone.

•

Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN (10/100 Mb)

•

Category 5/5e straight through cabling

•

Power source
— For Ethernet networks that supply in-line power to the phone (IEEE
802.3af):
— For power, use the Ethernet cable (supplied) to connect from the
phone directly to the network for power. (No power adapter required.)
— For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone:
— For power, use the Power Adapter to connect from the DC power port
on the phone to a power source.
or
— (optional) - For power, use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) power
injector. A PoE power injector is available as an optional accessory
from Aastra Telecom. Contact your Reseller for more information.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information

Configuration Server Requirement
A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server.
The configuration server allows you to:
•

Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone.

•

Stores configuration files for the IP phone

Reference
To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, the section,
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-112.
To update the firmware on your phone, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware”.

1-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

Firmware and Configuration Files
Description
By default on startup, the phone downloada its firmware and configuration files
from the configuration server you have set; or you can manually download the
firmware from the configuration server. The phone supports TFTP, FTP, HTTP
and HTTPS configuration servers.
Note: Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server
setup. For more information about manual and automatic download of
firmware, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.” For more
information on changing the download protocol on your phone, see
Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

The IP Phone firmware file (.st) include all the necessary files you need for your
phone.
The firmware consists of the following file:
• .st - This file contains information about the specific IP Phone
model and contains the language packs to load to the phone.
The configuration files consist of two files called:
• aastra.cfg - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone.
• .cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) - This file contains
configuration information about the IP Phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files

The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the
configuration server during bootup of the phone:

IP Phone Model

Associated
Firmware

Configuration Files

Language Files

9143i

9143i.st

aastra.cfg

9480i

9480i.st

9480i CT

9480iCT.st

6730i

6730i.st

.cfg
(for example,
00085D1610DE.cfg)

6731i

6731i.st

6751i

51i.st

lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
lang_pt.txt
lang_pt_br.txt
lang_ru.txt

6753i

53i.st

6755i

55i.st

6757i

57i.st

6757i CT

57iCT.st

(German)
(Spanish)
(Mexican Spanish)
(French)
(Canadian French)
(Italian)
(Portuguese)
(Brazillian Portuguese)
(Russian)

Reference
For more information about loading language files and using the various
languages on the IP phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Language” on page 5-36.

1-42

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

Configuration File Precedence
Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data:
•

The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the
configuration server files, aastra.cfg/.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/.tuz
encrypted equivalents).

•

Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using
either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI

In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied
in the following sequence:
1.

Default values hard-coded in the phone software

2.

Values downloaded from the configuration server

3.

Values stored locally on the phone

The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take
effect.
For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra
Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value was also set differently in one of the
.cfg/aastra.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration
value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the
configuration.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files

Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
The following procedure describes how to install the firmware and configuration
files.
Step

Action

1

If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually
setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4.

2

Copy the firmware file .st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP
phone accepts the new firmware file only if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP
phone.
Note: The  attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 9143i.st, 9480i.st, 9480iCT.st,
6730i.st,6731i.st, 51i.st, 53i.st, 55i.st, 57i.st, 57iCT.st).

3

Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg) to the root directory of the
configuration server.
Note: The  attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone.
(i.e., 00085D030996.cfg).

4

1-44

Note: Restart the IP phone as described in Chapter 3, “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

Multiple Configuration Server Support
An Administrator has the option of specifying whether the phones get their
firmware file, directory files, language packs, TLS certificate files, 802.1x
certificate files, and HTTPS files from the original configuration server or from
another server in the network. This feature allows you to specify the URL of other
servers from which the phone can get this information.
Firmware Files and Multiple Configuration Servers
The firmware file for the phones can be downloaded from the original
configuration server or from another server specified by a URL. You can specify a
valid URL (server IP address) from which the phones get the firmware using a
new parameter called, “firmware server” in the configuration files. If a URL is
specified for this parameter, the phones in the network get the security.tuz,
.cfg, and aastra.cfg files from the original configuration server, and the
firmware files from the server specified in the URL.
Note: The default method for the download of all files and firmware to
the phones is from the original configuration server. The Administrator
must specify a correct server URL for the phones to get their
firmware information from that server. If the URL is incorrect, no
firmware download occurs to the phones from the specified server.

Examples
To download all configuration and firmware files from the original
configuration server:
firmware server:

Leaving this parameter blank downloads all configuration and firmware files from
the original configuration server.
To download all firmware files from another specified server:
firmware server: tftp://10.30.102.158/test1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files

The above example uses TFTP to download all firmware files that exist in the
“test1” directory on the specified server, to the phones.
Note: Specifying the download of a “.st” file is not supported. For
example, the following filename should NEVER be entered as a value
string for the “firmware server” parameter:
firmware server: tftp://10.30.102.158/test1/57i.st

Specifying a Server to Download Firmware Files
You can use the following parameter to specify a server other than the original
configuration server from which the phones get their firmware:
•

firmware server.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Multiple
Configuration Server Settings” on page A-29.

1-46

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

Directory Files, Language Packs, TLS Certificates, 802.1x
Certificates, HTTPS Files and Multiple Configuration Servers
The directory files, language packs, TLS certificate files, 802.1x certificate files,
and HTTPS files can also be downloaded to the phone from a server other than the
configuration server. For each of these types of files, you can specify a URL
(server IP address) from which the phone gets these files. You can use existing
parameters on the phone to specify the URL. For applicable parameters, see
“Specifying a Server Using Existing Parameters on the IP Phones” on page 1-48.
The following table specifies the files that the original configuration server
downloads, and the files that another server can download to the phone.

Files always downloaded from original
configuration server are, by order:

All files that can be downloaded from original
configuration server OR another specified server are,
by order:

security.tuz
.cfg/.tuz
aastra.cfg/aastra.tuz

Directory Files
• directory 1
• directory 2
Language Pack Files
• language 1
• language 2
• language 3
• language 4
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate Files
• sips root and intermediate certificates
• sips local certificate
• sips private key
• sips trusted certificates
802.1x Security Authentication Certificate Files
• 802.1x root and intermediate certificates:
• 802.1x local certificate:
• 802.1x trusted certificates
HTTPS Files
• https user certificates

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files

Specifying a Server Using Existing Parameters on the IP Phones
The following table provides the parameters on the phone that you can use to
download directory files, language packs, TLS certificates, 802.1x certificates,
and HTTPS files from the original configuration server OR from another server in
the network.
Parameters that support the Multiple Configuration
Server feature are:

Type of File
Directory Files

directory 1:
directory 2:

Language Pack Files

language 1:
language 2:
language 3:
language 4:
Valid files names you can specify for languages are:
lang_de.txt
(German)*
lang_es.txt
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt
(Italian)
lang_pt.txt
(Portuguese)
lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
lang_ru.txt
(Russian)

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate
Files

sips root and intermediate certificates:
sips local certificate:
sips private key:
sips trusted certificates:

802.1x Security Authentication Certificate
Files

802.1x root and intermediate certificates:
802.1x local certificate:
802.1x trusted certificates:

HTTPS Files

https user certificates

Reference
For more information on each of these parameters, refer to Appendix A,
“Configuration Parameters.”

1-48

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

Examples
•

Phone Directory Files

The following example downloads no directory:
directory 1:

The following example downloads a company directory from the original
configuration server:
directory 1:companylist.csv

The following example downloads a company directory file from the specified
server in the “path” directory:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv

Note: To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A
FILENAME at the end of the string. For example:

directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv
where “path” is the directory and “companylist.csv” is the filename. If
you do not specify a filename, the download fails.

•

Language Pack Files

The following example downloads no language pack file:
language 1:

The following example downloads the German language pack to the phones from
the original configuration server:
language 1: lang_de.txt

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “lang_de.txt”
(German language pack) from the “path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
language 1:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/lang_de.txt

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files

•

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate Files

The following example downloads no local certificate file:
sips local certificate:

The following example downloads the local certificate file from the original
configuration server.
sips local certificate: phonesLocalCert.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesLocalCert.pem” (local certificate file) from the “path” directory on server
1.2.3.4 using port 50.
sips local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesLocalCert.pem

•

802.1x Security Authentication Certificate Files

The following example downloads no 802.1x local certificate file:
802.1x local certificate:

The following example downloads the 802.1x local certificate for the phone from
the original configuration server.
802.1x local certificate: 8021xlocalCert.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“8021xlocalCert.pem” (802.1x local certificate file) from the “path” directory on
server 1.2.3.4 using port 50.
802.1x local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
8021xlocalCert.pem

1-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Overview

Firmware and Configuration Files

•

HTTPS User Certificate Files

The following example downloads no HTTPS user certificate files:
https user certificates:

The following example downloads the HTTPS user certificates for the phone from
the original configuration server.
https user certificates: trustedCerts.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “user.crt.pem”
(https user certificate file) from the “test1” directory on server 12.43.33.234 using
port 50.
https user certificates: ftp://test:password@12.43.33.234:50/test1/
user.crt.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1-51

Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure
the IP phones.
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular phone model are indicated where required in this
guide.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Configuration Methods

page 2-2

IP Phone UI

page 2-2

Aastra Web UI

page 2-6

Configuration Files (Administrator Only)

page 2-17

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Configuration Methods
Description
You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone:
•

IP phone UI

•

Aastra Web UI

•

Configuration files
Note: Not all parameters are available from all three methods. For more
information about configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and
Chapter 6.

The following paragraphs describe each method of configuring the IP Phone.

IP Phone UI
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and
functions for using and configuring the IP phone. Access to specific features and
functions are restricted to the Administrator. A User can configure a subset of
these features and functions. Users of the IP phones should see their
Model-specific User’s Guide for available features and functions.
Reference
Refer to Chapter 1, the section “IP Phone Models” on page 1-3 for keys specific to
your phone model.
For more information about using the hard keys on each phone, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Locking IP Phone Keys” on page 5-52.
For more information about the softkeys/programmable keys, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys”
on page 5-145.

2-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Options Key
The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone.
Accessible options in this list are for both User and Administrator use. The
Administrator must enter a password for administrator options.
Note: An Administrator can apply a simplified options menu to the IP
phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable the use of an
Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI. These features are
configurable using the configuration files only.

For more information about these features, see Chapter 3, the section,
“Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu” on page page 3-5, and Chapter
5, the section, “Administrator Passwords” on page 5-9.
This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the
user options in the "Options List", see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User
Guide.
The following illustrations indicate the location of the Options Key on each phone
model.
Options Key

Options

9480i
Directory

Hold

Redial

Goodbye

Save

Options
Delete

Conf

1

2

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

ABC

3 DEF

Xfer

1

2

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

*

0

ABC

3

DEF

#

L3

L2

*

L1

0

#

Xfer

Icom

Conf

Mute

L1

Services

L2

L3

L4

9480i/9480i CT

9143i
Options Key
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

13
15
14
16

9480i CT Handset

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Options Key

6731i

6730i
Options Key

6751i

6753i

6755i

Options Key
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

6757i/6757i CT

2-4

13
15
14
16

6757i CT Handset

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Using the Options Key
Step

Action

1

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: Press the Services key on the 6751i and then select Options from the list.

2
3

Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options.
On 3-line LCD phones:
To select an option, press the Enter softkey, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to
the option in the Option List.
On 8 and 11-line LCD phones:
To select an option, press the Select softkey, press 4, or select the number on the keypad that
corresponds to the option in the Option List.

4

On 3-line LCD phones:
Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option, to save the change.
On 8 and 11-line LCD phones:
Use the Change softkey to change a selected option.

5

Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option.

6

Press the Cancel softkey, press 3, press
changes.

, or press

Good
oodbye

any time to exit without saving

From the CT handsets:
Step
1
2
3
4

Action
Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use.

Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options.

To select and change an option, press the r keys.
Press y when done.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Aastra Web UI
An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI.
The Aastra Web UI supports Internet Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers
like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape.
Note: An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a
single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about
enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the
Aastra Web UI” on page 2-16.

HTTP/HTTPS Support
The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) client and server
protocols.

HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound,
video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your
Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an
application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the
foundation protocols for the Internet).
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer. Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers
are configurable using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, the Aastra
Web UI and DHCP Option 66. For more information about configuring
these ports, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-112.
2-6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support
The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data
transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support
the following:
•

Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page
content over a secure connection.

•

Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection.

•

TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server

HTTPS Client
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
•

Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.

•

Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.

HTTPS Server
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•

Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.

•

Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature

allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an
HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to
respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other
operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A
user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the
phone is displaying “Loading Page.......”.
Note: This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key
(softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action
URIs are still blocking.

Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods for
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP Phones have authentication support per RFC 2617 when using HTTP or
HTTPS as download protocols. If a 5i Series phone is challenged by an HTTP or
HTTPS server when the server attempts to download the aastra.cfg file, the phone
automatically sends "aastra" as the default Username and Password back to the
server. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)” on page 5-373.

2-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI
HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window
and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection
occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS
connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays
alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or
changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web
UI.
Notes:
1. The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed
in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS server during the SSL
handshake.

2. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI,
you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
- Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0)
- Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
- HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4, the
sections:
•

“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-112

•

“HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-9

Accessing the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI.
Step

Action

1

Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
The following is an example of the Login screen that displays.

IP address or
host name

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Step

Action

2

Enter your username and password and click

.

Note: For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”.
For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank.
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is
an example of a Network Status screen for the 6757i IP phone.

6757i Network
Status Window

3

You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking LOGOFF.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories
display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status, Operation, Basic
Settings, Advanced Settings.
Note: Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, and
6755i. Softkeys apply to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i
CT. Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
only.

Status
The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP
phone. It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone.
The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on
the phone. The information in the Network Status window is read-only.
Operation
The Operation section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

User Password

Allows you to change user password.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Phone Lock

Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone,
lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone and to
prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password.
Note: You can also configure a softkey to use for locking/
unlocking the phone.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Programmable Keys

9143i - 7 multi-functional programmable keys
6730i - 8 Top, multi-functional programmable keys
6731i - 8 Top, Multi-functional programmable keys
6753i - 6 Top, multi-functional, programmable keys
6755i - 6 Top multi-functional, programmable keys
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

2-12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Heading

Description

Softkeys and XML

9480i/9480i CT 6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6755i
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
6757i/6757i CT 6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Expansion Module 

The M670i has up to 36 configurable keys. The M675i has
up to 60 configurable keys. You can have up to 3 expansion
modules attached to a single phone allowing you to
configure keys for Expansion Module 1, Expansion Module
2, and Expansion Module 3.See your Model-specific User
Guide for applicable expansion modules for your model
phone.
Note: Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i,
and 6757i CT only.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Handset Keys
(9480i CT and 6757i CT
only)

Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset.

Keypad Speed Dial

Allows you to configure up to 9 speeddial keys. These fields
map to the keypad digits 1 through 9 on the phone. You can
also configure additional speeddials on the programmable
keys, softkeys and expansion modules. See your
model-specific User Guide for more information about this
feature.

(Applicable to User and Administrator)

(Applicable to User and Administrator)
Directory

Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from
your IP phone to your PC.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Reset

Allows you to restart the IP phone when required.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
This setting also allows you to set the IP phone back to its
factory default settings or remove the local configuration.
(Applicable Administrator only)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Basic Settings
The Basic Settings section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

Preferences

Allows you to set the following General specifications on the
IP phone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Local Dial Plan (Admin Only)
Send Dial Plan Terminator (Admin Only)
Digit Timeout (Admin Only)
Park Call (not available on the 6751i)
Pickup Parked Call (not available on the 6751i)
Suppress DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Call Waiting
Play Call Waiting Tone
Stuttered Dial Tone
XML Beep Support
Status Scroll Delay
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Preferred Line
Preferred Line Timeout (seconds)
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
UPnP Mapping Lines
Message Waiting Indicator Line
DND Key Mode
Call Forward Key Mode
Use LLDP ELIN

This section also allows you to set:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Account Configuration

2-14

Incoming Intercom Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings (Admin Only; Administrator
can enable these for a User if required)
Group Paging RTP Settings
Key Mapping (Admin Only)
Ring Tones
Priority Alert Settings (Admin Only)
Directed Call Pickup Settings (Admin Only)
Auto Call Distribution Settings (Admin Only)
Time and Date Settings
Language Settings (Only the Admin can specify the
language pack names to load to the phone). Both the
Admin and User can select the language type to display
for the Web UI.

Allows you to configure DND (Do Not Disturb) and/or Call
Forwarding by specific account or by all accounts. Also
allows you to enable/disable specific states for each
account, specify different phone numbers for call
forwarding, and specify number of rings for a “No Answer”
state.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only)
The Advanced Settings section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

Network

Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced
Network Settings, HTTPS Settings, Type of Service DSCP,
and VLAN settings.

Global SIP

Allows you to set global Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, Codec
Preference List Settings, and Autodial Settings that apply to
all lines on the IP phone.

Lines 1 through 9

Allows you to set per-line Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial
Settings that apply to specific lines on the IP phone.

Action URI

Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource
identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events
occur. An Administrator can also specify a URI to be called,
enable polling for the URI, and specify the interval between
polls.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Configuration Server

Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration
server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure
automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/
disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Firmware Update

Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP
phone from the configuration server using any of the IP
Phones supported protocols.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

TLS Support

Allows you to specify SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate
files, local certificate files, private key filename, and/or
trusted certificate filename to use when the phone uses the
TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods

Heading

Description

802.1x Support

Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol
(Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP
phones for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are
EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Troubleshooting

Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the
results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for
analyzing and troubleshooting.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI
The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System
Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if
required using the configuration files. Use the following procedure to enable and
disable the Aastra Web UI.
To disable the Aastra Web UI:

Configuration Files
Step

Action

1

Using a text-based editing application, open the .cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a
single phone. Open the aastra.cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones

2

Enter the following parameter:
web interface enabled: 0
Note: A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone. A value of 1 enables the Web UI.

3

Save the changes and close the .cfg or the aastra.cfg file.

4

Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all
phones.

2-16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following
configuration files:
•

aastra.cfg

•

.cfg

References
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”
For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A,
“Configuration Parameters.”
Using the Configuration Files
When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a
text-based editing application to open the configuration file (aastra.cfg or
.cfg).
Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their
settings in the configuration files.
Note: Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to
configuring parameters using the configuration files.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-17

Configuration files
Step

Action

1

Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to
configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, .cfg or both).

2

Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example,
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory

3

Save the changes and close the configuration file.

4

If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the
IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone.

Locking Parameters in the Configuration File
The IP Phones allow you to lock individual configuration parameters to prevent
an end user from changing the configuration on the phone. This feature allows
service providers to prevent the end-user from changing the values of specific
parameters that would affect the service they provide.
An Administrator can lock parameters on the phone by placing an exclamation
mark (!) before the parameter in the configuration file. For example,

!admin password: 22222
!emergency dial plan: 911|999
You can lock parameters on the phone using the configuration files only. Once the
parameters are locked, they cannot be changed at all during the phones run-time.
The parameters appear as read-only when accessing the Aastra Web UI and the IP
Phone UI. In the Aastra Web UI, they appear grayed out. In the IP Phone UI the
ability to change the parameters is removed. In addition, when parameters are
locked, they cannot be changed via XML.

Configuration Interface Methods

Configuration Methods

Notes:
1.
The “parameter locking” feature applies to Release 2.4 and up. Any
phones that have a previous release loaded on the phone will not be able
to use the locking functionality in the configuration file.
2.
Any parameter duplicated in the mac.cfg from the aastra.cfg is
overwritten by the locking status and the value of the parameter found in
the mac.cfg file.

Limitations
•

A User possessing the Administrator password can bypass the locking of
configuration server details by defaulting the phone.

•

Parameters cannot be locked using XML.

•

Configuration files that include locked parameters are not backwards
compatible

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

2-19

Chapter 3
Administrator Options

About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator
can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to
change or set features and configuration information as required. For all models,
an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration
files to enter and change values.
Note: Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or
Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files.

This chapter provides information about the available Administrator options.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Administrator Level Options

page 3-3

IP Phone UI Options

page 3-3

Aastra Web UI Options

page 3-6

Configuration File Options

page 3-8

Phone Status

page 3-9

Restarting Your Phone

page 3-13

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topic

3-2

Page

Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration

page 3-15

Basic Settings

page 3-19

Account Configuration

page 3-37

Network Settings

page 3-39

Line Settings

page 3-72

Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys

page 3-73

Action URI

page 3-74

Configuration Server Settings

page 3-77

Firmware Update Features

page 3-86

TLS Support

page 3-87

802.1x Support

page 3-91

Troubleshooting

page 3-94

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Administrator Level Options
Description
There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access.
However, there are specific options that an Administrator can access only. These
options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP
phones in a network.
An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files.

IP Phone UI Options
Using the IP Phone UI, you can access the Administrator options at
Options->Administrator Menu using the default password of "22222"

Options Menu
1. Call Forward
2. Preferences
3. Phone Status
4. User Password
5. Administrator Menu
6. Restart Phone
7. Phone Lock

Administrator Menu

Select
Done
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI:
•

Administrator Menu
— Configuration Server
— Network Settings
— SIP Settings
— Factory Default
— Erase Local Config.

References
For information about all other user options in the “Options Menu”, see your
model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide.
For procedures on configuring Administrator Options on the IP phone via the IP
phone UI, see:
Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features”
Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”

3-4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a
more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple
menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the
simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences
between the full menu and the simplified menu.
When setting the “options simple menu” parameter, the menu changes in the
Phone UI only. The Aastra Web UI is not affected.
Full Options Menu

Simplified Options Menu

Call Forward

Call Forward

Preferences

Preferences

Phone Status

Phone Status

User Password

Removed

Administrator Menu

Removed

Restart Phone

Removed

Phone Lock

Phone Lock

Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full
menu to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the
Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings.

Configuring the Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
You can enable the simplified IP Phone UI Options menu using the configurations
files only.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Simplified IP
Phone UI Options Menu” on page A-7.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Aastra Web UI Options
An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These
options display after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser
and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default
username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept
numeric passwords only.) The column on the left side of the screen indicates the
configurable options. A User has limited configuration options as shown in the
following illustrations.
Administrator Web UI Menu

3-6

User Web UI Menu

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web
UI (and are not available for the User to configure):
•

•

•

Operation->Reset
— Restore to Factory Defaults
— Remove Local Configuration Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
— Local Dial Plan
— Send Dial Plan Terminator
— Digit Timeout (seconds)
Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can
configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled by an Administrator)

•

Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping

•

Basic Settings->Preferences->Priority Alerting Settings

•

Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings

•

Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings

•

Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
— Language 1 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 2 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 3 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 4 (entering language pack filename)
Advanced Settings
— Network
— Global SIP
— Line 1 through 9 Settings
— Action URI
— Configuration Server
— Firmware Update
— TLS Support
— 802.1x Support
— Troubleshooting

•

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

References
For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the
Aastra Web UI, see your Model-specific User Guide.
For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting
Your Phone” on page 3-13, and “Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local
Configuration” on page 3-15.
For more information about Advanced Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features.”
For procedures on configuring the Basic Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features.”

Configuration File Options
An Administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
References
For a procedure on using the configuration files, see Chapter 2, the section,
“Configuration Files (Administrator Only)” on page 2-1.
For a description of each parameter you can enter in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”

3-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Phone Status
The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware
version of the IP phone.
You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Phone Status via IP Phone UI
In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the
administrator and do not require a password entry.
The following options display for phone status on the IP phone UI:
Phone Status Screen for 3-Line LCD Display Phones

Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
=Next

=Enter

Phone Status Screen for 8 and 11-Line LCD Display Phones

Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
Select
Done

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

•

IP&MAC Addresses
Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone.

•

LAN Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its LAN port.

•

PC Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its PC Port.

•

Firmware Info
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone.

Phone Status via Aastra Web UI
The first screen that displays after logging into the Aastra Web UI for a phone is
the Network Status screen. This screen also displays when selecting
Status->System Information. The information on this screen is available to the
user and the administrator as read-only.

3-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

The following is a description of the information on the Network Status screen:
•

Network Attributes
Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You
can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field
includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1.

•

Hardware Information
Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.

•

Firmware Information
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone. Information in this field includes Firmware Version, Firmware Release
Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time.

•

SIP Status
Displays information about the SIP registration status of the phone. If there
are accounts configured on the IP Phone, their SIP status displays in this field.
The 6751i displays only one status line. All other model phones display the
status of up to 9 lines.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an
account(s).
Status Condition

Description

Registered

Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy
server.
Example:
Line
1

Backup
Registrar
SIP Account
Status
Used?
9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.com:5060Registered Yes

where
Account Number is “1”
SIP Account is “9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.com” on port “5060”
Status is “Registered”
Backup registrar is used (“Yes”)
SIP Error Number

Displays on accounts when registration fails with the SIP proxy server.
Example:
Line
4

SIP Account
Status
9057604601@anasipproxy.aastra.com:5060401

Backup
Registrar
Used?
No

where
Account Number is “4”
SIP Account is “9057604601@anasipproxy.aastra.com” on port “5060”
Status is “401” - Unregistered if SIP registration fails.
Backup registrar is used (“No”)

Note: The IP Phones can register with multiple server using the same
user name. So the SIP Status information on the Network Status screen
may display the same account with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. For more information, see

3-12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Restarting Your Phone
As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone.
The Restart option allows you reboot the phone when required. A reset may be
necessary when:
•

There is a change in your network, OR

•

To re-load modified configuration files, OR

•

If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified.

You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Restart Phone.

3

For 3-Line LCD Displays:
Press # to confirm.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.

2

Click

3-14

to restart the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s
configuration using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone
Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the
factory. The factory default settings on the phone sets the factory defaults for all
of the settings in the aastra.cfg, .cfg, and local configuration. Performing
this action results in losing all user-modified settings.You can reset a phone to
factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3

Select Factory Default.

4

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2

In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click

.

This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.

3-16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration
You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local
configuration is the last updated configuration you performed using the IP Phone
UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently
user-modified settings. For more information about local configuration, see
Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page 1-43.
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the IP Phone UI

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3

Select Erase Local Config.

4

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UII

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2

In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click

.

This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.

3-18

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Basic Settings
An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and
manage the IP Phone in the network. The following sections identify the options
available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and
Administrator. These tables also identify whether you can configure them using
the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files.
General Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Local Dial Plan

Parameter in
Configuration Files
sip dial plan

Description
A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of
digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone
number. Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters.
For more information on this feature, see “Local Dial
Plan” on page 5-56.

Send Dial Plan
Terminator

sip dial plan terminator

Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator.
When you configure the dial plan on the phone to use
a dial plan terminator (such as the pound symbol (#)),
the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the
handset or after dialing the number on the keypad
before making the call.
For more information on this feature, see “SIP Dial
Plan Terminator” on page 5-58.

Digit Timeout

sip digit timeout

Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the
timeout between consecutive key presses.
For more information on this feature, see. “Digit
Timeout” on page 5-58.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Park Call

Parameter in
Configuration Files
sprecode

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Description
The parking of a live call to a specific extension.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on all phones EXCEPT the 9143i, 6751i,
and 6753i.
To configure the Park feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-62.
To configure the Park feature on a key, see Chapter 5,
the section, “Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the
6751i)” on page 5-237.

Pick Up Parked Call

pickupsprecode

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Picking up a parked call at the specified extension.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on all phones EXCEPT the 9143i, 6751i,
and 6753i.
To configure the Pickup feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-62.
To configure the Pickup feature on a key, see Chapter
5, the section, “Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the
6751i)” on page 5-237.

Suppress DTMF
Playback

suppress dtmf playback

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Display DTMF Digits
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

3-20

Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback
when a number is dialed from the softkeys or
programmable keys.
For more information on this feature, see.
“Suppressing DTMF Playback” on page 5-66.

display dtmf digits

Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on
the IP phone display during a connected state.
For more information on this feature, see. “Display
DTMF Digits” on page 5-68.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Call Waiting

Parameter in
Configuration Files
call waiting

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Play Call Waiting Tone

call waiting tone

Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone
when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes
into the phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-70.

stutter disabled

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
XML Beep Support

Enable or disables Call Waiting on the IP Phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-70.

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Stuttered Dial Tone

Description

Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone
when there is a message waiting on the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Stuttered
Dial Tone” on page 5-73.

xml beep notification

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a
status on the phone. When the phone receives a
status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
For more information on this feature, see “XML Beep
Support” on page 5-75.

Status Scroll Delay
(seconds)

xml status scroll delay

Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between
the scrolling of each status message on the phone.

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

For more information on this feature, see “Status
Scroll Delay” on page 5-77.

Incoming Call Interrupts incoming call interrupts
Dialing
dialing

Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
calls while the phone is dialing out. For more
information on this feature, see “Incoming Call
Interrupts Dialing” on page 5-79.

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Switch Focus to Ringing switch focus to ringing
Line
line
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Enables or disables whether or not the UI focus is
switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the
connected state.
For more information on this feature, see “Switch
Focus to Ringing Line” on page 5-82.

3-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Preferred Line

Parameter in
Configuration Files
preferred line

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Preferred Line Timeout
(seconds)

preferred line timeout

goodbye key cancels
incoming call

Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key
on the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Goodbye
Key Cancels Incoming Call” on page 5-88.

upnp mapping lines

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Message Waiting
Indicator Line

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call
(incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-84.

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
UPnP Mapping Lines

Specifies the preferred line to switch focus back to
when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-84.

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Goodbye Key Cancels
Incoming Call

Description

Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and
Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “UPnP
Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-91.

mwi led line

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) on a single line or on all lines on the phone. For
example, if you set this parameter to 3, the LED
illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you
set this parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice
mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1
through 9).
For more information on this feature, see “Message
Waiting Indicator Line” on page 5-93.

DND Key Mode
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

dnd key mode

Allows you to configure the DND mode to use on the
phone (Account, Phone, Custom) when the DND key
is pressed. You can configure DND for all accounts or
a specific account.
For more information on this feature, see “DND Key
Mode” on page 5-95. Also see Chapter 5, the section,
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-210.

3-22

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Call Forward Key Mode

Parameter in
Configuration Files
call forward key mode

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Description
Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use
on the phone (Account, Phone, or Custom). You can
configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific
account.
For more information on this feature, see “Call
Forward Mode” on page 5-97. Also see Chapter 5, the
section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-252.

Use LLDP ELIN

use lldp elin

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Enables or disables the use of an Emergency
Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from
LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.

Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled
by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different network settings.
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-101.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls

The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify
whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an
Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for
server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the
Intercom call.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in
Configuration Files

Description

Incoming Intercom Settings (all models)
Auto-Answer

sip allow auto answer

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic
answering for an Intercom call. If auto-answer is
enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to
alert the user before answering the intercom call. If
auto-answer is disabled, the phone rejects the
incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the
caller.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

Microphone Mute

sip intercom mute mic

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Play Warning Tone
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Allow Barge In
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

3-24

Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone
for Intercom calls made by the originating caller.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

sip intercom warning
tone

Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the
phone receives an incoming intercom call on an active
line.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

sip intercom allow barge Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
in
intercom calls while the phone is on an active call.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in
Configuration Files

Description

Outgoing Intercom Settings (8 and 11-Line LCD phones)
Type

sip intercom type

Determines whether the IP phone or the server is
responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom
call is being placed. Applicable settings are
Phone-Side, Server-Side, OFF.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

Prefix Code

sip intercom prefix code

The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side
outgoing Intercom calls. This parameter is required for
all server-side Intercom calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

Line

sip intercom line

Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the
configuration from, when making the Intercom call.
The IP phone uses the first available line for physically
making the call but uses the configuration from the line
you set for this parameter.
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set
with the Server-Side option to enable the "sip
intercom line" parameter.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-106.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in
Configuration Files

Paging listen addresses paging group listening
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Description
Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast
addresses to send/receive a Real Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured
multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling.
For more information on this feature, see “Group
Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-111.

Key Mapping
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Map Redial Key To

Parameter in
Configuration Files
map redial key to

Description
Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Redial key returns to its original
functionality.
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Redial
key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain
their original functionality. The Redial key on the
handset is not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-117.

Map Conf Key To

map conf key to

Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Conf
key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain
their original functionality. The Conf key on the
handset is not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-117.

3-26

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Ring Tones
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Tone Set

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Tone Set

Parameter in
Configuration Files
tone set

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Ring Tone

Globally sets a tone set for a
specific country
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-121.

Global Ring Tone

ring tone

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
N/A

Description

Globally sets the type of ring tone
on the IP phone. Ring tone can
be set to one of six distinct rings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-121.

LineN

lineN ring tone

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Sets the type of ring tone on the
IP phone on a per-line basis.
Ring tone can be set to one of six
distinct rings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-121.

Priority Alerting Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Enable Priority Alerting

Parameter in
Configuration Files
priority alerting enabled

Description
Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP
phone for incoming calls and call-waiting calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Group

alert group

When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header
of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring
tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
External

Parameter in
Configuration Files
alert external

Description
When an "alert external" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Internal

alert internal

When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Emergency

alert emergency

When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Priority

alert priority

When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Auto Call Distribution

alert auto call distribution When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of
the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone
is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

Community 1 thru
Community 4

alert community 1
alert community 2
alert community 3
alert community 4

When an "alert community-#” keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone. Available Bellcore
tones are:
0 Normal ringing (default)
1 Bellcore-dr2
2 Bellcore-dr3
3 Bellcore-dr4
4 Bellcore-dr5
5 Silent
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-126.

3-28

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Directed Call Pickup

Parameters in
Configuration Files
directed call pickup

Description
Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup"
feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-133.

Directed Call Pickup
Prefix

directed call pickup
prefix

Allows you to specify a prefix to use for "directed call
pickup" that you can use with a BLF or BLF List
softkey.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-133.

Play a Ring Splash

play a ring splash

Enables or disables the playing of a short "ring splash
tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF
monitored extension. If the host tone is idle, the tone
plays a "ring splash".
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-133.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Auto Available

Parameters in
Configuration Files
acd auto available

Description
Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available
Timer.
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-189.

Auto Available Timer

acd auto available timer

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP
phone status switches back to “available.”
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-189.

3-30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Time and Date
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Time Format

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Time Format

Parameters in
Configuration Files
time format

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Description
This parameter changes the time
to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use
“0” for the 12 hour format and “1”
for the 24 hour format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-19.

Date Format

Date Format

date format

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Time Zone

For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-19.
N/A

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Time Servers

This parameter allows the user to
change the date to various
formats.

time zone name

Custom Parameters:
• time zone minutes
• dst minutes
• dst [start|end]
relative date
• dst start month
• dst end month
• dst start week
• dst end week
• dst start day
• dst end day
• dst start hour
• dst end hour
NTP Time Servers

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

time server disabled

This parameter allows you to set
the time zone code or customize
the time zone for their area as
required.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Zone & DST”
on page 5-20.

This parameter allows you to
enable or disable the Network
Time Server (NTP) to set the
time on the phone.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Time Server 1

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Time Server 1

Parameters in
Configuration Files
time server1

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Time Server 2

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

3-32

This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 1
in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.

Time Server 2

time server2

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Time Server 3

Description

This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 2
in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.

Time Server 3

time server3

This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 3
in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Live Dialpad
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Live Dialpad

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
N/A

Note: This option can
be set by a User via
the IP Phone UI and
by an Administrator via
the IP Phone UI and
the configuration files.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Parameters in
Configuration Files
live dialpad

Description
This parameter turns the “Live
Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
For more information on this
feature, see “Live Dial Pad*” on
page 5-35.

3-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Language
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
WebPage Language
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Parameter in
Configuration Files
language

Description
The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI.
Valid values for all models are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
5 (Portuguese)
6 (Russian)
Valid values for the CT handsets are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
Note: All languages may not be available for
selection. The available languages are dependant on
the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone.
For more information about loading language packs,
see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-36.
For more information on specifying a language to use
on the IP Phone, see “Specifying the Language to
Use” on page 5-39.

3-34

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Input Language

Parameter in
Configuration Files
input language

Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.

Description
Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on
the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this
parameter allows users to enter text and characters in
the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML
applications via the keypad on the phone, in the
language(s) specified.
Valid values are:
• English
• French
• Français
• German
• Deutsch
• Italian
• Italiano
• Spanish
• Español
• Portuguese
• Português
• Russian
• Русский
For more information on this feature, see “Specifying
the Input Language to Use” on page 5-43.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Language 1 thru 4

Parameter in
Configuration Files
language N

Description
The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
lang_de.txt
(German)*
lang_es.txt
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt
(Italian)
lang_pt.txt
(Portuguese)
lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
lang_ru.txt
(Russian)
Notes:
1. The languages packs you load are dependant on
available language packs from the configuration
server.
2. You must reboot the phone to load a language
pack.
For more information on this feature, see “Loading
Language Packs” on page 5-36.

3-36

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Account Configuration
The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and
User to configure “do not disturb” and “call forwarding” by account. You can set
specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD. The
three modes you can set on the phone for these features are:
•
•
•

Account
Phone
Custom

You can set the modes for DND and CFWD in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Basic Settings->Preferences->General, or using the following parameters in the
configurations files:
•
•

dnd key mode
call forward key mode

The following table describes the behavior of the mode settings for DND and
CFWD.
Modes
Account

DND
Sets DND for a specific account. A
pre-configured DND key toggles the account
in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

CFWD
Sets CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a
pre-configured CFWD key applies to the
account in focus

3-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Modes

DND

CFWD

Phone

Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A Sets the same CFWD configuration for all
pre-configured DND key toggles all accounts accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When
on the phone to ON or OFF.
you configure the initial account, the phone
applies the configuration to all other accounts.
(In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are
grayed out but set to the same configuration.)
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes
to that initial account, the changes apply to all
accounts on the phone.

Custom

Sets the phone to display custom screens
after pressing a pre-configured DND key, that
list the account(s) on the phone. The user can
select a specific account for DND, turn DND
ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all
accounts

Sets CFWD for a specific account or all
accounts. You can configure a specific mode
(All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each
account independently or all accounts. On the
3-line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to
ALL On or ALL Off. On the 8 and 11-line LCD
phones, you can set all accounts to All On, All
Off, or copy the configuration for the account in
focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll
softkey.

References
For more information about account configuration of DND and CFWD on the IP
Phones, see Chapter 5, the sections:
For DND:
•

“DND Key Mode” on page 5-95.

•

“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-210.

For CFWD:

3-38

•

“Call Forward Mode” on page 5-97.

•

“Call Forwarding” on page 5-252.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Network Settings
The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories:
•

Basic network settings

•

Advanced network settings
Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only
and are indicated where applicable.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Basic Network Settings
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone
automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate
the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options
manually.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
DHCP

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
DHCP

Parameters in
Configuration Files
dhcp

Description
Enables or disables DHCP.
Enabling DHCP populates the
required network information. The
DHCP server serves the network
information that the IP phone
requires. If the IP phone is unable to
get any required information, then
you must enter it manually. DHCP
populates the following network
information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,
Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP HTTPS, and FTP
servers, and Timer Servers.
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see “DHCP”
on page 4-4.

IP Address

IP Address

ip

IP address of the IP phone. To
assign a static IP address, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.

3-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Subnet Mask

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Subnet Mask

Parameters in
Configuration Files
subnet mask

Description
Subnet mask defines the IP address
range local to the IP phone. To
assign a static subnet mask, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.

Gateway

Gateway

default gateway

The IP address of the network’s
gateway or default router IP
address. To assign a static Gateway
IP address, disable DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.

Primary DNS

Primary DNS

dns1

Primary domain name server IP
address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain
name value can be entered instead
of an IP address. With the help of
the domain name servers the
domain names for such parameters
can then be resolved to their
corresponding IP addresses.
To assign static DNS addresses,
disable DHCP.
Note: If a host name is configured
on the IP phone, you must also set
a DNS.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Secondary DNS

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Secondary DNS

Parameters in
Configuration Files
dns2

Description
A service that translates domain
names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.

Hostname

Hostname

hostname

Specifies the hostname DHCP
Option 12 that the phone sends with
the DHCP Request packet.
For more information, see “Using
Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Phone” on page 4-11.

Ethernet

N/A

LAN Port Link

LAN Port

ethernet port 0

PC Port Link

PC Port

ethernet port 1

PC Port Enabled PC Port PassThru
(3-Line LCD
Enable/Disable
Phones))
(3-Line LCD
Phonesi)
Enable
PassThru Port
(8 and 11-Line
LCD Phones)

3-42

PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
(8 and 11-Line LCD
Phones)

pc port passthrough
enabled

The send (TX) and receive (RX)
negotiation to use on the Ethernet
LAN Port and Ethernet PC Port for
transmitting and receiving data over
the LAN or to/from your PC,
respectively.
For more information on configuring
the LAN and PC port negotiation,
see “Configuring LAN and PC Port
Negotiation” on page 4-24.
Note: The PC Port parameters are
not applicable to the 6730i IP
Phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Advanced Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
DHCP User Class

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
DHCP User Class

Parameters in
Configuration Files
dhcp userclass

Description
Specifies the User Class DHCP
Option 77 that the phone sends to
the configuration server with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this
parameter, you must restart your
phone for the change to take affect.
Any change in its value during
start-up results in an automatic
reboot.
For more information, see “Using
Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone” on page 4-14.

Download Options

DHCP Download
Options

dhcp config option
override

The value specified for this
parameter overrides the
precedence order for determining a
configuration server. Valid values
are:
-1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP
configuration options).
0 (Any)
43
66
159
160
Notes:
1. If the DHCP server supplies
Options 159 and 160, the phones
will attempt to contact the
configuration server given in these
options.
2. You must restart the IP Phone for
this parameter to take affect.
For more information, see “Using
Options 159 and 160 on the IP
Phone” on page 4-17. For more
information about setting DHCP
download preference, see
“Configuration Server Download
Precedence” on page 4-20.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
LLDP Support

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
LLDP

Parameters in
Configuration Files
lldp

Description
Enables or disables Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on
the IP Phone.

Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-101.
N/A

LLDP Packet Interval lldp interval

The amount of time, in seconds,
between the transmission of LLDP
Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The
value of zero (0) disables this
parameter.

Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-101.

3-44

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
UPnP

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
UPnP

Parameters in
Configuration Files
upnp manager

Description
Enables or disables Universal Plug
and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you
can manually configure NAT on the
IP phone and the UPnP manager
will not start.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
(for remote phones)” on page 4-50.

N/A

N/A

upnp gateway

IP address or fully qualified Domain
Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP
address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default
UPnP gateways get discovered on
the network. The UPnP port
mappings are saved to this IP
address so even if the phone
reboots, it will still have the correct
port mappings.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
(for remote phones)” on page 4-50.

NAT IP

NAT IP

sip nat ip

IP address the network device that
enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.

NAT SIP Port

NAT SIP Port

sip nat port

Port number of the network device
that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
NAT RTP Port

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
NAT RTP Port

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip nat rtp port

Description
Indicates the port through which the
RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the
RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.

Nortel NAT

Nortel NAT Traversal sip nortel nat support
Enabled

Enables or disables the phone to
operate while connected to a
network device that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
(optional)” on page 4-32.

N/A

Nortel NAT Timer
(seconds)

sip nortel nat timer

The interval, in seconds, that the
phone sends SIP ping requests to
the Nortel proxy.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
(optional)” on page 4-32.

N/A

Rport (RFC 3581)

sip rport

Allows you to enable (1) or disable
(0) the use of Rport on the IP
phone.
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client
to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP
address and the port from which the
request came.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “RPORT” on page 4-65.

3-46

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
NTP Time Servers

Parameters in
Configuration Files
time server disabled

Description
Enables or disables the time server.
This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time
server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the
configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use
of the configured Time Server(s).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-67.

N/A

Time Servers 1, 2,
and 3

time server1
time server2
time server3
time server4

The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th time
server's IP address or qualified
domain name. If the time server is
enabled, the value for time server1
will be used to request the time
from.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-67.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

HTTPS Settings
Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
HTTPS

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Server Redirect HTTP to
HTTPS

Parameters in
Configuration Files
https redirect http get

Description
Allows or disallows redirection from
the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.

XML HTTP POSTs HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP
POSTs

https block http post xml

Enables or disables the blocking of
XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
Some client applications use HTTP
POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts
these POSTs even if server
redirection is enabled, effectively
bypassing the secure connection.
When this parameter is enabled
(blocking is enabled), receipt of an
HTTP POST containing an XML
parameter header results in the
following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the
client to direct the POSTs to the
HTTPS server through use of the
“https://” URL.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.

3-48

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Client Method

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Client
Method

Parameters in
Configuration Files
https client method

Description
Defines the security method that the
client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL)
handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security
version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between
communicating applications and
their users on the Internet. TLS is
the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer
version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a
commonly-used protocol for
managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Cert Validation

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Validate Certificates

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

https validate certificates Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of certificates on the
phone. When this parameter is set
to 1, the HTTPS client performs
validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
Notes:
1. If you are using HTTPS as a
configuration method, and use a
self signed certificate, you must set
this parameter to “0” (disabled)
before upgrading to Release 2.3 or
later of the IP Phones.
2. If you are using HTTPS and the
certificates are not valid or are not
signed by Verisign, Thawte, or
GeoTrust, the phones fail to
download configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.

Check Expires

Check Certificate
Expiration

https validate expires

Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of the expiration of the
certificates. When this parameter is
set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies
whether or not a certificate has
expired prior to accepting the
certificate.
Note: If the “https validate
expires” parameter is set to
enable, the clock on the phone
must be set for the phone to accept
the certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.

3-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Check Hostnames

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Check Certificate
Hostnames

Parameters in
Configuration Files
https validate hostname

Description
Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of hostnames on the
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.

N/A

Trusted Certificates
Filename

https user certificates

Specifies a file name for a .PEM file
located on the configuration server.
This file contains the User-provided
certificates in PEM format. These
certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
Note: You must disable the “https
validate certificates” parameter in
order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-51

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Type of Service (ToS), DSCP
Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Type of Service
SIPt

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
SIP

Parameters in
Configuration Files
tos sip

Description
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.

Type of Service
RTP

RTP

tos rtp

The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.

Type of Service
RTCP

RTCP

tos rtcp

The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.

3-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

VLAN
You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under
Network Settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

Global Settings
VLAN Enable

VLAN Enable

tagging enabled

Enables or disables VLAN on the IP
phones.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.

Other Priority

Priority, Non-IP
Packet

priority non-ip

Specifies the priority value for
non-IP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.

LAN Port Settings (Port 0)
Phone VLAN ID

VLAN ID

VLAN id

VLAN is a feature on the IP phone
that allows for multiple logical
Ethernet interfaces to send
outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in
IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone,
you configure a VLAN ID that
associates with the physical
Ethernet Port 0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-53

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

Parameters in
Configuration Files
tos priority map

Description
This parameter is based on the
Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting
for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP
(tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos
rtcp parameter). It is the mapping
between the DSCP value and the
VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP,
and RTCP packets.
You enter the tos priority map value
as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priori
ty_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is
0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in
parentheses and separated with a
comma, or with values outside the
ranges, are ignored.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.

3-54

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

PC Port Settings (Port 1)
PC Port VLAN ID

VLAN ID

VLAN id port 1

Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass
packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN
ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged
packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN
where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging on the LAN Port
(VLAN id) as normal but set the PC
Port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The
following example sets the phone to
be on VLAN 3 on the LAN Port but
the PC Port is configured as
untagged.
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
Note: The PC Port parameters are
not applicable to the 6730i IP
Phone.

PC Port Priority

Priority

QoS eth port 1 priority

Specifies the priority value used for
passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-55

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

SIP Settings
The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP
phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring:
•

Basic SIP Authentication Settings

•

Basic SIP Network Settings

•

Advanced SIP settings

•

RTP Settings

•

Autodial Settings
Notes:
1.
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis.
You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or
have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server,
the SIP parameters may need to be changed.

2.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same
account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and
proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription,
and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types
of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA),
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.

3-56

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Screen Name

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Screen Name
(Global and
Per-Line)

N/A

Screen Name 2
(Global and
Per-Line)

User Name

Phone Number
(Global and
Per-Line)

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip screen name
(global)
sip lineN screen name
(per-line)

sip screen name 2
(global)
sip lineN screen name 2
(per-line)

sip user name
(global)
sip lineN user name
(per-line)

Description
Name that displays on the idle
screen. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Custom text message that displays
on the idle screen. Valid values are
up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
User name used in the name field of
the SIP URI for the IP phone and for
registering the phone at the
registrar. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

Display Name

Caller ID
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip display name
(global)
sip lineN display name
(per-line)

Name used in the display name
field of the "From SIP" header field.
Some IP PBX systems use this as
the caller’s ID, and some may
overwrite this with the string that is
set at the PBX system. Valid values
are up to 20 alphanumeric
characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-57

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Auth Name

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Authentication Name sip auth name
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN auth name
(per-line)

Description
Authorization name used in the
username field of the Authorization
header field of the SIP REGISTER
request. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

Password

Password
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip password
(global)
sip lineN password
(per-line)

Password used to register the IP
phone with the SIP proxy. Valid
values are up to 20 numeric
characters. Passwords are
encrypted and display as asterisks
when entering.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

N/A

BLA Number
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip bla number
(global)
sip lineN bla number
(per-line)

Phone number that you assign to
BLA lines that is shared across all
phones (global configuration) or
shared on a per-line basis (per-line
configuration).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
For more information about BLA,
see Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged
Line Appearance (BLA)” on
page 5-221.

N/A

Line Mode
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip mode
(global)
sip lineN mode
(per-line)

The mode-type that you assign to
the IP phone. Valid values are
Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1),
Nortel (2), or BLA (3). Default is
Generic (0).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

3-58

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Basic SIP Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Proxy Server

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Proxy Server
(Global and
Per-Line)

Proxy Port

Proxy Port
(Global and
Per-Line)

N/A

N/A

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

sip proxy ip
(global)

IP address of the SIP proxy server.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

sip lineN proxy ip
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

sip proxy port
(global)

SIP proxy server’s port number.
Default is 0.

sip lineN proxy port
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

Backup Proxy Server sip backup proxy server
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup proxy
server
(per-line)

The IP address of the backup SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is
unavailable.

Backup Proxy Port

The port number of the backup SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy
port is unavailable.

(Global and
Per-Line)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

sip backup proxy port
(global)
sip lineN backup proxy
port
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

3-59

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Outbound Proxy
Server
(Global and
Per-Line)

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

sip outbound proxy
server
(global)

Address of the outbound proxy
server. All SIP messages originating
from the phone are sent to this
server. For example, if you have a
sip lineN outbound proxy Session Border Controller in your
server
network, then you would normally
(per-line)
set its address here. Default is
0.0.0.0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

N/A

Registrar Server

Outbound Proxy Port sip outbound proxy port
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN outbound proxy
port
(per-line)

The proxy port on the proxy server
to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages. Default is 0.

Registrar Server

IP address of the SIP registrar. Up
to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Enables or disables the phone to be
registered with the Registrar. When
Register is disabled globally, the
phone is still active and you can dial
using username and IP address of
the phone. A message "No Service"
displays on the idle screen and the
LED is steady ON. If Register is
disabled for a single line, no
messages display and LEDs are
OFF.

(Global and
Per-Line)

sip registrar ip
(global)
sip lineN registrar ip
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Registrar Port

Registrar Port
(Global and
Per-Line)

3-60

sip registrar port
(global)

SIP registrar’s port number. Default
is 0.

sip lineN registrar port
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Backup Registrar
Server

sip backup registrar ip
(global)

(Global and
Per-Line)

sip lineN backup
registrar ip
(per-line)

Description
The address of the backup registrar
(typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

N/A

N/A

Backup Registrar
Port

sip backup registrar port
(global)

The backup registrar's (typically the
backup SIP proxy) port number.

(Global and
Per-Line)

sip lineN backup
registrar port

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

Registration Period

sip registration period
(global)

The requested registration period,
in seconds, from the registrar.

sip lineN registration
period
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.

Conference Server
URI

sip centralized conf
(global)

Globally enables or disables SIP
centralized conferencing for an IP
phone.

(Global and
Per-Line)

sip lineN centralized conf
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Centralized Conferencing (for
Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-366.

(Global and
Per-Line)

N/A

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-61

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Advanced SIP Settings
In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following
advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are configurable via the Aastra Web
UI and the configuration files on a global basis only.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Explicit MWI Subscription

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip explicit mwi subscription

Description
If the IP phone has a message waiting
subscription with the Service Provider, a
Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or
display icon) tells the user there is a message
on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable
MWI by setting this parameter to 0 (disable) or
1 (enable) in the configuration files or by
checking the box for this field in the Aastra
Web UI. Default is disabled.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Explicit MWI Subscription
Period

sip explicit mwi subscription
period

The requested duration, in seconds, before
the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription
period ends.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Missed Call Summary
Subscription

sip missed call summary
subscription
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN missed call
summary subscription
(per-line)

Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be
incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. Default is
disabled.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
Summary Subscription” on page 6-13.

3-62

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period

sip missed call summary
subscription period

Description
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary
Subscription feature. This parameter is always
enabled with a default value of 86400
seconds. When the phone reaches the limit
set for this parameter, it sends the
subscription again.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
Summary Subscription” on page 6-13.

AS-Feature-Event
Subscription

sip as-feature-event
subscription
(global)

Enables or disables the specified line with the
BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.

sip lineN as-feature-event
subscription
(per-line)

For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.

sip as-feature-event
subscription period

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds,
between resubscribing. If the phone does not
resubscribe in the time specified for this
parameter, it loses subscription.

(Global and Per-Line)

AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period

For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.
Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message

sip send mac

Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the MAC
address of the phone.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-63

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip send line

Description
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the line
number that is being registered.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.

Session Timer

sip session timer

The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses
to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a
session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE
requests to maintain the status' of the
connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
Default is 0.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Timer 1 and Timer 2

sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer

These timers are SIP transaction layer timers
defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate,
in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in
milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction
takes to respond to a request.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Transaction Timer

sip transaction timer

The amount of time, in milliseconds that the
phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to
respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the
phone does not receive a response in the
amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed
out.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

3-64

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Transport Protocol

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip transport protocol

Description
The protocol that the Real-Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to
send out SIP signaling packets.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port

sip local port

Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP
transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric
UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled,
the IP phone generates and listens for UDP
messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP
signaling is disabled, the phone sends from
random ports but it listens on the configured
SIP local port.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
page 4-37.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-65

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Local SIP TLS Port

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip local tls port

Description
Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict with any TCP ports being used. For
example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and
HTTPS on 443/tcp.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
page 4-37.

Registration Failed Retry
Timer

sip registration retry timer

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a
registration is rejected by the registrar.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Registration Timeout Retry sip registration timeout retry
Timer
timer

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that
the phone waits until it re-attempts to register
after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds,
the phone uses a minimum timer of 30
seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Registration Renewal
Timer

sip registration renewal timer The length of time, in seconds, prior to
expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20
seconds before the registration is due to
expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to
the registrar to renew the registration.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

3-66

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
BLF Subscription Period

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip blf subscription period

Description
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

ACD Subscription Period

sip acd subscription period

Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a
software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of
the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

BLA Subscription Period

sip bla subscription period

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero
(0), the phone uses the value specified for the
BLA expiration in the subscribe message
received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of
300 seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-86.

Blacklist Duration

sip blacklist duration

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist.
The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message
to a failed server (if another server is
available) for this amount of time.
For more information about Blacklist Duration,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist
Duration” on page 6-22.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-67

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Whitelist Proxy

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip whitelist

Description
This parameter enables/disables the whitelist
proxy feature, as follows:
• Set to 0 to disable the feature.
• Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this
feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts
call requests from a trusted proxy server
only. The IP phone rejects any call
requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For more information about Whitelist Proxy
see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy”
on page 6-24.

XML SIP Notify

sip xml notify event

Enables or disables the phone to accept or
reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming
from a trusted source, it is recommended that
you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist
Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled,
and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a
server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e.
untrusted server), the phone rejects the
message.
For more information about XML SIP Notify
see Chapter 6, the section, “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-347.

3-68

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

RTP Settings
You can configure the following RTP settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
RTP Port Base

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
RTP Port

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip rtp port

Description
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port. Default is 3000.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

N/A

Basic Codecs
(G.711 u-Law,
G.711 a-Law, G.729)

sip use basic codecs

Enables or disables basic codecs.
Enabling this parameter allows the
IP phone to use the basic Codecs
when sending/receiving RTP
packets. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 0 (disabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

N/A

Force RFC2833 Out
of Band DTMF

sip out-of-band dtmf

Enables or disables out-of-band
DTMF. Enabling this parameter
forces the IP phone to use
out-of-band DTMF according to
RFC2833. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 1 (enabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-69

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Customized Codec
Preference List

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip customized codec

Description
Specifies a customized Codec
preference list which allows you to
use the preferred Codecs for this IP
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

N/A

DTMF Method
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip dtmf method
(global)
sip lineN dtmf method
(per-line)

Sets the dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone on a global or per-line basis.
Valid values are 0 (RTP), 1 (SIP
INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0
(RTP).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

N/A

RTP Encryption
(Global and
Per-Line)

sip srtp mode
(global)
sip lineN srtp mode
(per-line)

This parameter determines if SRTP
is enabled on this IP phone, as
follows:
•

If set to 0, then disable SRTP.

•

If set to 1 then SRTP calls are
preferred.

•

If set to 2, then SRTP calls only
are generated/accepted.

For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.
N/A

Silence Suppression sip silence suppression

Silence suppression is enabled by
default on the IP phones. The
phone negotiates whether or not to
use silence suppression. Disabling
this feature forces the phone to
ignore any negotiated value.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-95.

3-70

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Autodial Settings
You can configure the following Autodial settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Autodial Number

sip autodial number

(Global and
Per-Line)

sip lineN autodial
number

Description
Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the SIP phone number that
the IP phone autodials when the
handset is lifted from the phone
cradle. An empty (blank) value
disables autodial on the phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-107.

N/A

Autodial Timeout
(Global and
Per-Line)

Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the time, in seconds, that the
sip lineN autodial timeout phone waits to dial a preconfigured
number after the handset is lifted from
the IP phone cradle.
sip autodial timeout

If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline),
the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift
the handset. If this parameter is set to
a value greater than 0, the phone
waits the specified number of seconds
before dialing the preconfigured
number (warmline) when you lift the
handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-107.
N/A

Use Global Settings
(Per-line
configurations only)

N/A

For each line, this parameter specifies
to use the global autodial settings of
“Autodial Number” and “Autodial
Timeout”.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-107.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-71

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Line Settings
An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP
network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line).
The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone
model.
IP Phone
Model

Available
Lines

9143i

9

9480i

9

9480i CT

9

6730i

6

6731i

6-

6751i

1

6753i

9

6755i

9

6757i

9

6757i CT

9

On the IP Phones, you can configure the following on a per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI:
•

Basic SIP Authentication Settings

•

Basic SIP Network Settings

•

Advanced SIP Settings (Missed Call Summary Subscription only)

•

RTP Settings (DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only)

•

Autodial Settings (On a per-line basis, you can also enable/disable the “Use
Global Settings” parameter.)

References
For more information about configuring the features listed above on a per-line
basis, see Chapter 4, the sections:

3-72

•

“Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71

•

“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-86

•

“Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-95

•

“Autodial Settings” on page 4-107
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable
keys, or expansion module keys. The available keys for configuration depend on
the IP phone model as shown in the following table.
Softkeys

Expansion Module
Keys

Programmable Keys

9143i

-

Not Applicable

7

9480i

6

Not Applicable

-

9480i CT

6

Not Applicable

-

6730i

-

Not Applicable

8

6731i

-

Not Applicable

8

6751i

-

Not Applicable

-

6753i

-

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6

6755i

6

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6

IP Phone Model

60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i

12

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

-

60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i CT

12

36 to 108* on Base
Station
(Model M670i)

-

60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model M675i)
*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.

The softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key can be set to use a
specific function. Available functions depend on the IP phone model.
Reference
For more information about key functions see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on
page A-217.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-73

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

For information about configuring softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion
module keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-145.

Action URI
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The
Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should
fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item
URIs.
The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following
table.
Action URI

Description

Startup

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a startup event occurs.

Successful Registration

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a successful registration event occurs.

Registration Event

Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when
there are registration state changes.
Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is
repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when
registration is already in a timeout state.)

Incoming Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an incoming call event occurs.

Outgoing Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an outgoing call event occurs.

Offhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an offhook event occurs.

Onhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an onhook event occurs.

Disconnected

Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected
state into the idle state.

XML SIP Notify

Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP
NOTIFY is received by the phone.

3-74

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Action URI

Description

Poll

Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval"
seconds.

Poll Interval

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the
phone to the "action uri poll".

You can set these parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Reference
For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see
“XML Action URIs” on page 5-333.
Action URI Disconnected
The phones allow an Administrator to specify a URI to allow a disconnect event
to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming,
connected, or calling) to an idle state.
Reference
For more information about configuring the Action URI Disconnected parameter,
see “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-344.
XML SIP Notify Events and Action URIs
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content.
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
Reference
For more information about enabling the XML SIP Notify on the IP Phones, see
Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-347.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-75

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll to
command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval
between polls. Configuration of this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Reference
For more information about configuring the polling and polling interval of Action
URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-342.

3-76

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Configuration Server Settings
The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and
software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator
can configure the following parameters for the configuration server:
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

Download Protocol Settings
Download Protocol Download Protocol

download protocol

Protocol to use for downloading
new versions of software to the IP
phone. Valid values are:
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or domain
name for the download servers,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see Chapter
4, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4.
For more information about
download protocols on the IP
Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuration Server Protocol” on
page 4-112.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-77

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Primary TFTP

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
TFTP Server

Parameters in
Configuration Files
tftp server

Description
The TFTP server’s IP address or
qualified domain name. If DHCP is
enabled and the DHCP server
provides the information, this field is
automatically populated. Use this
parameter to change the IP address
or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

Primary TFTP Path TFTP Path

tftp path

Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
Note: Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example,
ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

Alternate TFTP

Alternate TFTP

alternate tftp server

The alternate TFTP server’s IP
address or qualified domain name.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

3-78

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Alternate TFTP
Path

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path

Description
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

Select TFTP

Use Alternate TFTP

use alternate tftp

Enables or disables the alternate
TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

FTP Server

FTP Server

ftp server

The FTP server’s IP address or
network host name. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a
username and password for access
to the FTP server. See the following
parameters for setting username
and password.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-79

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
FTP Path

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
FTP Path

Parameters in
Configuration Files
ftp path

Description
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

FTP Username

FTP Username

ftp username

The username to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support
usernames containing dots (“.”).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

FTP Password

FTP Password

ftp password

The password to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

3-80

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
HTTP Server

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTP Server

Parameters in
Configuration Files
http server

Description
The HTTP server’s IP address. This
will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTP relative path to the HTTP
server. See the next parameter
(http path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

HTTP Path

HTTP Path

http path

Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

HTTP Port

HTTP Port

http port

Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-81

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Download Server

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Server

Parameters in
Configuration Files
https server

Description
The HTTPS server’s IP address.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter
(https path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

Download Path

HTTPS Path

https path

Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTPS server for downloading to
the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

Download Port

HTTPS Port

https port

Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-112.

3-82

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

Auto-Resync Settings
N/A

Mode

auto resync mode

Enables and disables the phone to
be updated automatically once a
day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period. This parameter works with
TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra
Web UI, they are not informed of
an auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP phone
UI are not overwritten by an
auto-resync update.
Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only.
However, the settings in the
Aastra Web UI take precedence
over the IP phone UI and the
configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle)
at the time of the resync check,
the reboot occurs when the
phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature
works with both encrypted and
plain text configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-83

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Time (24-hour)

Parameters in
Configuration Files
auto resync time

Description
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour
period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This
parameter works with TFTP, FTP,
and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this
parameter in the Aastra Web UI,
the values are in 30-minute
increments only.
4. When entering a value for this
parameter using the
configuration files, the value can
be entered using minute values
from 00 to 59 (for example, the
auto resync time can be entered
as 02:56).
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.

N/A

Maximum Delay

auto resync max delay

Specifies the maximum time, in
minutes, the phone waits past the
scheduled time before starting a
checksync.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Days

Parameters in
Configuration Files
auto resync days

Description
Specifies the amount of days that
the phone waits between checksync
operations.
Note: A value of 0 causes the
phone to checksync every time the
clock reads the proper time. A value
of 1 forces the phone to wait 24
hours prior to doing the first
checksync.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.

XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)
N/A

XML Push Server
List (Approved IP
Addresses)

xml application post list

The HTTP server that is pushing
XML applications to the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter
5, the section, “XML Push
Requests” on page 5-326.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-85

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Firmware Update Features
The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download
configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration
server.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•

Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location
Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.

•

Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone
automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the
boot process.

•

Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware,
configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature
can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).

Reference
For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the
Firmware.”

3-86

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

TLS Support
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the
following parameters for TLS Support.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Transport Protocol

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip transport protocol

Description
Specifies the protocol that the RTP port on the
IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling
packets. Default is USP.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-87

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
N/A

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips persistent tls

Description
Enables or disables the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the
server once and re-uses that connection for all
calls from the phone. The setup connection for
Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set
to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from
the phone, this call and all subsequent calls
use the same authenticated connection. This
significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound
proxy server and outbound proxy port
parameters be configured in either the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI
(Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP
Network Settings). There can be only one
persistent TLS connection created per phone.
The phone establishes the TLS connection to
the configured outbound proxy.
2. If you configure the phone to use
Persistent TLS, you must also specify the
Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and
Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate,
and Private Key files are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

3-88

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Root and
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips root and
intermediate
certificates

Description
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and
Intermediate Certificate files to use when the
phone uses the TLS transport protocol to
setup a call.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files
contain one root certificate and zero or more
intermediate certificates which must be placed
in order of certificate signing with root
certificate being the first in the file. If the local
certificate is signed by some well known
certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and
Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just
CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The certificate files must use the format
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

N/A

Local Certificate
Filename

sips local certificate

Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file
to use when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The certificate file must use the format
“.pem”. To create specific certificate files to
use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-89

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Private Key
Filename

Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips private key

Description
Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”.
To create specific private key files to use on
your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

N/A

Trusted Certificates sips trusted certificates Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate
Filename
files to use when the phone uses the TLS
transport protocol to setup a call.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of
trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list
must contain the CA root certificates for all the
servers it is connecting to. For example, if the
phone is connecting to server A which has a
certificate signed by CA1, and server B which
has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone
must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: The certificate files must use the format
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.

3-90

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS Protocols.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.

An Administrator can configure the following parameters for the 802.1x Protocol.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in
Configuration Files

Description

EAP-MD5
802.1x
Mode

EAP Type

eap-type

Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

Identity

Identity

identity

Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-91

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
MD5
Password

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
MD5 Password

Parameters in
Configuration Files
md5 password

Description
Specifies the password used for the MD5
authentication of the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5
Password. The password displays as “*******”.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

EAP-TLS
802.1x
Mode

EAP Type

eap type

Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

Identity

Identity

identity

Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

N/A

N/A

Root and
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename

802.1x root and
intermediate
certificates

Local Certificate
Filename

802.1x local certificate

Specifies the file name that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the
local certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Specifies the file name that contains the local
certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

3-92

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Administrator Options

Administrator Level Options

Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Private Key
Filename

Parameters in
Configuration Files
802.1x private key

Description
Specifies the file name that contains the
private key.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

N/A

Trusted Certificates 802.1x trusted
Filename
certificates

Specifies the file name that contains the
trusted certificates.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

3-93

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options

Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system
administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using
this feature, a system administrator can:
•

Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files

•

Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files

•

Save the current local configuration file to a specified location

•

Save the current server configuration file to a specified location

•

Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)

•

Enable/disable a WatchDog task

•

View Error Messages

Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
Reference
For more information about troubleshooting on the IP Phones, see Chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting.”

3-94

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Chapter 4
Configuring Network and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Features

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and
Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These features are password protected on the
IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. This chapter also includes procedures for
configuring the Network and Global SIP features via the configuration files, the
IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where applicable.
Note: The IP Phone User Interface (UI) procedures in the remainder of
this Guide use the keys on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and/or
6757i CT when configuring Administrator Options. For information on
using the 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6751i, and 6753i keys to configure the
Administrator Options, see Chapter 2, the section, “Using the Options
Key” on page 2-5.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Overview

page 4-3

Network Settings

page 4-4

Basic Network Settings

page 4-4

Advanced Network Settings

page 4-30

Global SIP Settings
Basic SIP Settings

page 4-71

Advanced SIP Settings (optional)

page 4-86

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings

page 4-95

RTCP Summary Reports

page 4-105

Autodial Settings

page 4-107

Configuration Server Protocol
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol

4-2

page 4-70

page 4-112
page 4-112

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Overview

Overview
An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the
phone UI, from the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. Administrator level
options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15.

The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP phones using the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator
password. To configure the phone using the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an
administrator username and password.
Note: In the IP phone UI, the default password is "22222". In the
Aastra Web UI, the default admin username is "Admin" and the default
password is "22222".

References
For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix B,
“Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.”
For sample configuration files, see Appendix C, “Sample Configuration Files.”
These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at
the PBX.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Network Settings
This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include
configuring for:
•

DHCP

•

IP Address (of phone)

•

Subnet Mask (of phone)

•

Gateway

•

Primary DNS

•

Secondary DNS

•

LAN Port

•

PC Port

Basic Network Settings
DHCP
The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network
administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network
parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following
network information:

4-4

•

Subnet Mask

•

Gateway (i.e. router)

•

Domain Name Server (DNS)

•

Network Time Protocol Server

•

IP Address

•

TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone

•

TFTP Path or Alternate TFTP Path if enabled on the phone

•

FTP Server

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

•

FTP Path

•

HTTP Server

•

HTTP Path

•

HTTP Port

•

HTTPS Server

•

HTTPS Path

•

HTTPS Port

The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are
supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure
the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by
the DHCP server.
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the
configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the IP
Phone UI.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select option DHCP.

6

Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).

7

Press Done to save the changes.

4-6

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Aastra Web UI

Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2

Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).

3

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations
Option 66
The IP Phones support download protocols according to RFC2131 and RFC1541
(TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the
DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which
configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration
files.
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the
servers, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for
forwarding the server’s IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If
your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP
address or domain name for your applicable configuration server into your IP
phone configuration.
Options 60 and 43
The Aastra phones also support Option 60 and Option 43 as per RFC 2132.
Option 60 (Vendor Class Identifier) provides the DHCP server with a unique
identifier for each phone model. This enables a system administrator to send the
phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43.
The table below lists the identifier values for each phone model.

4-8

Model

Identifier Value

9143i

AastraIPPhone9143i

9480i

AastraIPPhone9480i

9480i CT

AastraIPPhone9480iCT

6730i

AastraIPPhone6730i

6731i

AastraIPPhone6731i

6751i

AastraIPPhone51i

6753i

AastraIPPhone53i

6755i

AastraIPPhone55i

6757i

AastraIPPhone57i

6757i CT

AastraIPPhone57iCT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a
customized Server Configuration in option 43 (Vendor-Specific information).
Note: If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both
DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43 takes precedence
over Option 66.

Using Option 43 to Customize the IP Phone
A System Administrator can customize the IP Phone(s) in the network by entering
a text string in the phone’s configuration files. The following is an Option 43
example using Linux.
On the startup of the phones, when the DHCP server receives the request with the
information in this example, it allows the 6757i phones to use FTP and the 6757i
CT phones to use TFTP from the same server.
Linux Example
A System Administrator can enter the following in the Aastra IP Phone
configuration file:
option space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
option space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
class "vendor-class-57i" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name "ftp://
username:password@10.10.10.1";
}
class "vendor-class-57iCT" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name "tftp://10.10.10.1";
}
}

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one
of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details.
Protocol

Format

Examples

HTTP

http:///

option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”;
option tftp-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”;

HTTPS

https:///

option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45/path”;
option tftp-server-name “https://httpssvr.example.com/
path”;

FTP

ftp://user:password@ftpserver

option tftp-server-name “ftp://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “ftp://ftpsvr.example.com”;
(for anonymous user)
option tftp-server-name “ftp://userID:password@
ftpsvr.example.com”;

TFTP

tftp://tftpserver

option tftp-server-name “192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “tftpsvr.example.com”;
option tftp-server-name “tftp://tftpsvr.example.com”;

4-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this
option to the configuration server. This option specifies the hostname (name of the
client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name (based
on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions.
Notes:
1.
The hostname of [] automatically
populates the field on initial startup of the phone. For example, for a
6753i, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated as
“53i00085D164435”, where the model number is “6753i” and the MAC
address is “00085D164435”.

2.
If the configuration server sends the hostname back to the phone in
a DHCP Reply Packet, the hostname is ignored.
An Administrator can change the “Hostname” for the DHCP Option 12 via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Select Network Settings.

3

Select Hostname.

4

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then
press DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.

5

4-12

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

Hostname
2

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.

3

Click

to save your changes.

Note: Changing the “Hostname” field requires a reboot of your phone.
4

Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to
the configuration server. This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to
convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's
preferences. For example, you can use the User Class option to configure all
phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the
phones in the Marketing Department. A DHCP server uses the User Class option
to choose the address pool for which it allocates an address from, and/or to select
any other configuration option.
Notes:
1.
If the User Class is not specified (left blank) in the DHCP request
packet, the phone does not send the User Class DHCP Option 77.

2.

Multiple User Classes inside a DHCP Option 77 are not supported.

3.
DHCP Option 77 may affect the precedence of DHCP Options,
dependent on the DHCP Server.
An Administrator can configure the DHCP Option 77 User Class via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.

4-14

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Select Network Settings.

3

Select DHCP Settings.

4

Select DHCP User Class.

5

In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press
DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.

6

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

DHCP User Class

2

In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones. For example,
“admin”. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters.

3

Click

to save your changes.

Note: Entering a value in the “DHCP User Class” field requires a reboot of your phone.
4

4-16

Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone
In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the
phones also support DHCP Options 159 and 160. The IP Phones use the following
order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160,
159, 66.
In addition, an administrator can override this order of precedence by setting a
configuration parameter called, dhcp config option override (configuration
files), DHCP Download Options (Aastra Web UI), or Download Options (IP
Phone UI). Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen
DHCP option and ignoring the other options.
For more information about setting DHCP download preference, see
“Configuration Server Download Precedence” on page 4-20..
Warning: Administrators should review the updated IP phone DHCP
option precedence order and configuration options to avoid potential
impact to existing Aastra IP phone deployments.

Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option Override on the IP
Phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.

3

Select Network Settings.

4

Select DHCP Settings.

5

Select Download Options. The following list displays:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160,
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

159, 66.

6

Choose an option that you want to use to override the DHCP normal precedence order, and press
DONE.

7

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

4-18

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

DHCP Download
Options Parameter

2

In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence
order. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160,
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

159, 66.

3

Click

4

Click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to save your changes.

4-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuration Server Download Precedence
An Administrator can set the phone’s download precedence to ignore DHCP,
(only during the boot when the remote configuration server is contacted) and
use the following precedence instead:
1.

Configuration URI,

2.

DHCP, and then

3.

Direct configuration.

To configure the download precedence, you use the option value (-1) as the value
for the “dhcp config option override” parameter in the configuration files.
Setting this parameter to “-1” causes all DHCP configuration options to be
ignored.
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to configure the DHCP download precedence using
the configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.

4-20

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP
Phone UI.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.

3

Select Network Settings.

4

Select DHCP Settings.

5

Select Download Options.
• Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43,

6

66, 159, 160))

Select the Disabled option and press Enter.
Note: The “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration
files (ignores DHCP options).

7

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the Aastra
Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

DHCP Download Options
Parameter

2

In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select “Disabled” from the list of options.
Note: In the Aastra Web UI, the “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1”
in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options).

3

Click

4

Select Operation->Reset, and click Restart to reboot the phone.

4-22

to save your setting.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Multiple DHCP Servers
The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers.
After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time
period, for more DHCP messages. If the first DHCP offer contains configuration
server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and
continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers. If
the first DHCP message contains no configuration server information, the phone
continues to listen for other DHCP messages. If the second DHCP message
contains configuration server information and other conditions, the phone chooses
the second DHCP message over the initial DHCP message.
Note: If the DHCP Download Options parameter is enabled with a
value (Option 43, Option 66, Option 159, or Option 160), the phone
checks the override option setting before timing out.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Users currently using multiple DHCP servers on a single network could be
affected by this feature.
DNS Caching
The IP phones have the ability to cache DNS requests according to RFC1035 and
RFC2181. The phone caches DNS lookups according to the TTL field, so that the
phone only performs another lookup for an address when the TTL expires.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring Network Settings Manually
If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network
settings manually:
•

IP Address

•

Subnet Mask

•

Gateway

•

Primary DNS

•

Secondary DNS
Note: If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP
protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different
protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-112.

You can configure the network settings using the configuration files, the IP phone
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone.

6

Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask.

4-24

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

7

Select Gateway and enter the gateway address.

8

Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server.

9

Press Done to save the changes.
The IP phone is manually configured.

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2

Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field.

3

Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.

4

Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field.

5

Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS
field.

6

Click

to save your settings.

The IP phone is manually configured.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation
Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs).
You use the LAN Port to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable
to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the
configuration server (your PC).
There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port.
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select the type of transmission you want these
ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support each of the
following methods of transmission:
•

Auto-negotiation

•

Half-duplex (10Mbps or 100 Mbps)

•

Full-duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Note: The PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission
parameters. In the auto-negotiation process, the connected devices share their
speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator
(HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different
transmission rates (such as 10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec), different duplex modes
(half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can
set the LAN and PC Ports on the IP phones to auto-negotiate during transmission.
Half-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier, but not at the same time. For example, on a LAN
using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on
the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in
which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional
line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the
half-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.

4-26

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a
technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on
the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a
bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions). On the IP phones,
you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
Configuring the LAN Port and PC Port
You can configure the Ethernet port transmission method to use on the IP phones
using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select Ethernet.

6

Select LAN Port Link.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

7

Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• FullDuplex 10Mbps
• FullDuplex 100Mbps
• HalfDuplex 10Mbps
• HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.

8

Select PC Port Link.
Note: PC Port Link parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

9

Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• FullDuplex 10Mbps
• FullDuplex 100Mbps
• HalfDuplex 10Mbps
• HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.

10

Press Done (3 times) to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

11

4-28

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2

In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.

3

In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.

4

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Advanced Network Settings
You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address
Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers,
Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI
are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only.

Network Address Translation (NAT)
The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network
Address Translation (NAT). For the IP Phones, specific configuration parameters
allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces
NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant IP
phone configuration parameters.

4-30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Nortel Proxy/Registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally
include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the
firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content.
Note: This IP phone uses RTP port 3000 (the default value) since an RTP
port was not explicitly configured.

SBC or ALG proxy/registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar has session border control (SBC) or
application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone
configuration is required.
Other proxy/registrars
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC
or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip"
and "sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and
the port used for call signaling messages. This information is embedded in
protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT
router private network.
NAT router configuration
You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets
containing the various UDP port values to flow between the private and public
networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT
router must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Nortel Networks NAT
Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their
proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use
NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the
phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP
Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends
SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy.
When you use NAT in your network, a network device (usually a router) provides
a “firewall” division between the public network (usually the Internet) and the
private network, to which the IP Phones are connected. The firewall protects the
network by translating port numbers within packets between the public and
private networks. When using NAT, and an RTP packet arrives at the public side
of the firewall, it is expected to have the NAT RTP port within the packet. If the
packet contains the proper port number, the firewall changes the NAT RTP port
number in the packet to the RTP port number that the phone recognizes, and then
forwards it onto the private network. Often the router/firewall automatically
discovers these various port numbers and other information concerning public and
private sides of the network with the use of the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
Protocol between the phone and the router/firewall.
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)
You can configure Nortel NAT using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-31.

4-32

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select NAT Settings.

6

Select Nortel NAT.

7

Press Change to set either “Enabled” or “Disabled”.

8

Press Done (3 times) to finish.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
9

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2

Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable
NAT for a Nortel network.

3

Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647.
Default is 60.

4

Click

4-34

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
You can also configure a specific NAT address and port on the IP phone using the
configuration files, IP Phone UI, or Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-31.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select Static NAT.

6

Select NAT IP.

7

Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.

8

Press Done to save the setting.

9

Select NAT SIP Port. Default is 51620.

10

Enter the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.

11

Press Done to save the setting.

12

Select NAT RTP Port.

13

Enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.

14

Press Done (4 times) to finish.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
15

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2

Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format.
For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device.

3

Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620.
The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.

4

Enter a NAT port in the "NAT RTP Port" field. Default is 51720.
The “NAT RTP Port” is the RTP Port number of your NAT device.

5

Click

4-36

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal
A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP
Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061
for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports
are:
•

sip local port

•

sip local tls port

You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI. After configuring these parameters, you must reboot the
phone.
If NAT is disabled, the port number also shows in the VIA and Contact SIP
headers.
If you enable NAT, the phone uses the NAT port number (and NAT IP address) in
the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages, but still use the configured
source port.
Note: By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for
outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP
phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If
symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random
ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT
traversal:
•

sip local port

•

sip local tls port

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•

“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-34.
“Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-34.

4-38

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
.

“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” Parameter
2

“Local SIP TLS Port” Parameter

The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060. Change this value if required to a
value greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
3

The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value
greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example:
WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp.

4

Click

to save your changes.

HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer.

When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:

4-40

•

Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.

•

Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•

Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.

•

Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection.

Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can
configure the following regarding HTTPS:
•

Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3)

•

Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function

•

HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone

Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings

Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for
the IP phones.
Note: To enable or disable the IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as
the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-112.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client
and Server Settings” on page A-35.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Configuration Server.

5

Select HTTPS Settings.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Configure HTTPS Client
6

Select HTTPS Client.

7

Select Client Method.

8

Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
•
•

9

SSL 3.0 (default)
TLS 1.0

Press Done to save the changes.

Configure HTTPS Server
10

Select HTTPS Server.

11

Select HTTP->HTTPS.

12

Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.

13

Press Done to save the changes.

14

Select XML HTTP POSTs.

15

Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.

16

Press Done (4 times) to finish.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

17

4-42

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2

Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are:
SSL 3.0 (default)
TSL 1.0

3

Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled.

4

Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is
disabled.

5

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates.
This feature supports the following:
•

Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte signed certificates

•

User-provided certificates

•

Checking of hostnames

•

Checking of certificate expiration

•

Ability to disable any or all of the validation steps

•

Phone displays a message when a certificate is rejected (except on check-sync
operations)

All validation options are enabled by default.
Certificate Management
Aastra Provided Certificates
The phones come with root certificates from Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte
pre-loaded.
User Provided Certificates
The administrator has the option to upload their own certificates onto the phone.
The phone downloads these certificates in a file of .PEM format during boot time
after configuration downloads. The user-provided certificates are saved on the
phone between firmware upgrades but are deleted during a factory default. The
download of the User-provided certificates are based on a filename specified in
the configuration parameter, https user certificates (Trusted Certificates
Filename in the Aastra Web UI; User-provided certificates are not configurable
via the IP Phone UI).
Note: Certificates that are signed by providers other than Verisign,
GeoTrust or Thwate do not verify on the phone by default. The user can
overcome this by adding the root certificate of their certificate provider to
the use-provided certificate .PEM file.

4-44

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Certificate Validation
Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the
certificates are well formed and signed by one of the certificates in the trusted
certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally,
compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected.
If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected. Certificate
validation is controlled by three parameters which you can configure via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI:
•

https validate certificates - Enables/disables validation

•

https validate hostname - Enables/disables the checking of the certificate
commonName against the server name.

•

https validate expires - Enables/disables the checking of the expiration date
on the certificate.

User Interface
Certificate Rejection
When the phone rejects a certificate, it displays, "Bad Certificate" on the LCD.
An Administrator can configure HTTPS Server Certificate Validation using the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring HTTPS Server Certificate Validation

Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS server certificate
validation on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Server
Certificate Validation Settings” on page A-37.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Select Configuration Server.

3

Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation.
The following list displays:
• Enable
• Check Expires
• Check Hostnames

Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
4

Select Enable.

5

Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must set this field to “No” before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.

6

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
7

Select Check Expires.

8

Press Change to toggle the “Check Expires” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Notes:
1. This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
2. If the “Check Expires” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone
to accept the certificates.

4-46

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

9

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname
10

Select Check Hostnames.

11

Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”.

12

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

13

Press

to exit the Options Menu and return to the idle screen.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings.

HTTPS Validation
Certificate
Parameters

2

The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click
the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must disable (uncheck) this field before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.

3

The “Check Certificate Expiration” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificate
expiration, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired
prior to accepting the certificate.
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If the “Check Certificates Expiration” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be
set for the phone to accept the certificates.

4

The “Check Certificate Hostnames” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of
hostnames, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
Note: This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.

4-48

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
5

If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file
name in the format  in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example:
trustedCerts.pem
This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file
contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
Notes:
1. You must disable the “Validate Certificates” field in order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
2. This parameter requires you restart the phone in order for it to take affect.

6

Click

7

If you entered a filename in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, click on Operation->Reset,
and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to save your changes.

4-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)
UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged
into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user
plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP
address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS
URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD).
The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP
and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
The UPnP manager performs its functions when you set the phone to remote
mode. When you switch the phone back to local mode, the UPnP manager
removes any open port mappings and shuts itself down. If you boot the phone in
remote mode, the UPnP manager initializes after the phone obtains an IP address
and before a SIP registration is sent out. If you want to manually configure your
NAT, you must disable UPnP on the remote mode phone.
Note: Enabling UPnP allows the IP phones to access the Internet even if
a firewall has been set on the IGD. This allows the phone to send and
receive SIP calls and XML pushes without interruption. UPnP does not
work with multiple firewalls.

You can enable UPnP on remote IP phones using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Using the configuration files, you can enable
UPnP using the following parameters:
•

upnp manager

•

upnp gateway

•

sip nat rtp port

The “upnp manager” parameter enables or disables UPnP. The “upnp gateway”
parameter is the IP address or qualified domain name of the Internet gateway or
router that stores the port mappings. In the event a phone using UPnP is rebooted,
it will still have the previously set port mappings on the gateway. The “sip nat rtp
port” parameter specifies the RTP port range on the gateway.

4-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

A User or Administrator can specify UPnP on specific lines using the
configuration files (using the “upnp mapping lines” parameter) or the Aastra
Web UI (at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP Mapping Lines).
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling UPnP Mapping on specific lines,
see Chapter 5, the section, “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on
page 5-91.
Configuring UPnP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-41.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select NAT Settings.

6

Select UPnP.

7

Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
This field enables or disables the use of UPnP on the IP Phone.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-51

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

8

Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

9

Select Restart.
.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

4-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

The “UPnP” field is disabled by default. To enable UPnP, place a check in the “Enabled” box.
Uncheck the box to disable this field. This field enables and disable UPnP on the IP phone.

3

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-53

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Virtual LAN (optional)
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for
multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure
a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of
adding and removing tags, and processing the ID and priority information
contained within the tag.
Note: All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP
Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1.

VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these
parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI,
or the Aastra Web UI.
The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP
phones.
Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic
of the different QoSs.
QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This
service differentiation is noticeable during periods of network congestion (for
example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of
network performance.
Port 0 is the Ethernet LAN Port connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet
PC Port used for passthrough to a PC.
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic
receive preferential handling over other traffic classes.
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits
of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a pa rticular per-hop behavior that is
applied to a packet.
4-54

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and
DiffServ QoS for VLAN:
Parameters in Configuration Files

Parameters in Aastra Web UI

Global
tagging enabled

VLAN enable

priority non-ip

Priority, Non-IP Packet

LAN Port
vlan id

VLAN ID

tos priority map

SIP Priority

tos priority map

RTP Priority

tos priority map

RTCP Priority

PC Port
vlan id port 1

VLAN ID

QoS eth port 1 priority

Priority

Notes:
1. In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a
network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone reboots if you modify
the "tagging enabled" (VLAN Enable in the Web UI), "vlan id", or
"vlan id port 1" parameters.

2. When the LAN Port (vlan id) and the PC Port (vlan id port 1)
parameters have the same value, VLAN functionality is compatible with
earlier IP phone software releases.
If you set the PC Port (vlan id port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are
sent to this port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60. For
configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-42.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-55

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping
DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets
using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp",
and "tos rtcp" parameters.
When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1,
VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single
priority for all packets. An administrator can also configure VLAN priority for
non-IP packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter.
Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 26, 46, and 46
respectively, this results in corresponding default VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 4
for RTP, and 4 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN
Priority” on page 4-56).
You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just
the VLAN priority values, or by modifying all values.
The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN priority mapping.
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority

4-56

DSCP
Range

VLAN Priority

0-7

0

8-15

1

16-23

2

24-31

3

32-39

4

40-47

5

48-55

6

56-63

7

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols.
Protocol
Name

Default DSCP
Values in the
ToS Field

sip

26

rtp

46

rtcp

46

Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone.
Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP
parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively. Use the
following procedures to change these settings if required.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service
(ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-51.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select Type of Service DSCP.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-57

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

6

Select Type of Service SIP.
or
Select Type of Service RTP.
or
Select Type of Service RTCP.

7

Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46.
Valid values are 0 to 63.
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-56 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60.

8

Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

9

4-58

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP.

2

Select a Protocol field:
• “SIP”
or
• “RTP”
or
• “RTCP”

3

Enter a value from 0 to 63. Default values are as follows:
SIP = 26
RTP = 46
RTCP = 46
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-60 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60.

4

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-59

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring VLAN (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone.
Notes:
1.
VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can
change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
2.
PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local
Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-42.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Network Settings.

5

Select VLAN Settings.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
6

Select VLAN Enable.

7

Press Change to set VLAN Enable to “Yes” to enable or “No” to disable. Default is “No”.

8

Press Done to save the changes.

9

Select Phone VLAN.

10

Select VLAN Priority.

11

Select Other and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.

4-60

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

12

Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.

To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
13

Select Phone VLAN.

14

Select Phone VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port.
Default is 1.

15

Press Done to save the change.

16

Select VLAN Priority.

17

Select one of the following VLAN Protocols:
•
•
•

18

SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol. Default values for each Protocol
are:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5

19

Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.

To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):
20

Select PC Port VLAN.
Note: PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

21

Select PC Port VLAN ID.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-61

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

22

Enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the PC Port.
Default is 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the PC Port (passthrough port).
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the passthrough port (PC Port) to
4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN Enable: Yes
VLAN Settings->Phone VLAN->Phone VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095

23

Press Done to save the change.

24

Select PC Port Priority.

25

Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port.
Default is 0.

26

Press Done (4 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

27

4-62

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
2

Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the
check box).

3

With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.

To set VLAN ID and priority for the LAN Port (Port 0):
4

Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.

5

Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for
the associated Protocol. Valid values are 0 to 7, Defaults are as follows:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-63

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1):
6

Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this PC Port.
The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging as normal, enter a value for the LAN Port VLAN ID, and then set the PC
Port VLAN ID to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the PC Port
VLAN ID is configured as untagged..

7

Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port in the Priority field. Default is 0.

8

Click

4-64

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

RPORT
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used
with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address from which the
request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of the
request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a
Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall.
A parameter created for the “Via” header called “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a
client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address
and the port from which the request came.
When you enable “Rport, the phone always uses symmetric signaling (listens on
the port used for sending requests.)
Note: Configuring the Rport parameter is recommened for clients behind
a Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall since this parameter
allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the
source IP address and the port from which thre request came.

An Administrator can configure “Rport” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Rport Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to configure Rport on your phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Rport Setting” on
page A-33.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-65

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra
Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

Rport
Parameter

2

In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the
check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking the box).
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source
IP address and the port from which the request came.

3

4-66

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Network Time Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize
the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network.
To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can specify up to three time servers in your network.
Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1.

Configuring NTP Servers (optional)
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers
using the configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-59.

Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone
UI.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Preferences.

3

Select Time and Date.

4

Select Time Server.

5

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

6

Select Timer Server 1, Timer Server 2, or Time Server 3.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Note: The Time Servers are disabled by default.
7

To set a Time Server, press Enable. (Press Disable to disable a Time Server.)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-67

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

8

Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server.

9

Press Done to save the change.

Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers
using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2

Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.

4-68

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

3

Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or
"Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server.

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-69

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Global SIP Settings
Description
The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
settings to register at the IP PBX.
The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that
apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using
the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters
can also be defined for network and user account.
You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI
and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP
phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only.
On the IP Phones, you can configure Basic and Advanced SIP Settings. The Basic
SIP Settings include authentication and network settings. The Advanced SIP
Settings include other features you can configure on the IP Phone.
Reference
For more information about Basic SIP Settings (for authentication and network),
see “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71.
For more information bout Advanced SIP Settings, see “Advanced SIP Settings
(optional)” on page 4-86.

4-70

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Basic SIP Settings
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also
configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the
configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a
different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be
changed.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account
information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify
processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming,
outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged Line Appearance
(BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and
network parameters on the IP phones.
SIP Global Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

SIP Global Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
N/A
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
N/A

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

sip screen name
sip screen name 2
sip user name
sip display name
sip auth name
sip password
sip bla number
sip mode
sip vmail

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI
(see Chapter 5)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
sip backup proxy ip
sip backup proxy port
sip outbound proxy
sip outbound proxy port
sip registrar ip
sip registrar port
sip backup registrar ip
sip backup registrar port
sip registration period
sip centralized conf
(see Chapter 5)

SIP Global Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-71

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-366.
SIP Per-Line Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
N/A
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
N/A

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

sip lineN screen name
sip lineN screen name 2
sip lineN user name
sip lineN display name
sip lineN auth name
sip lineN password
sip lineN bla number
sip lineN mode
sip lineN vmail

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI
(see Chapter 5)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

sip lineN proxy ip
sip lineN proxy port
sip lineN backup proxy ip
sip lineN backup proxy port
sip lineN outbound proxy
sip lineN outbound proxy port
sip lineN registrar ip
sip lineN registrar port
sip lineN backup registrar ip
sip lineN backup registrar port
sip lineN registration period
sip lineN centralized conf
(see Chapter 5)

SIP Per-Line Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-366.

Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable
using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5,
the section, “Voicemail (not applicable to 6751i)” on page 5-316.
4-72

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent
conflicting parameter values from being applied, per-line values always take
precedence over the corresponding set of global values.
For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all
parameters from that set are applied and all parameters from the corresponding
global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are
not defined in the per-line set.
SIP Precedence Example
The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for
storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters.
The following SIP configuration is assumed:
# SIP network block
sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37
sip registrar port: 4020
sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com
sip line3 proxy port: 0

Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone
uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because
those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any
of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters
configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block
parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone
does not use a registrar for that line.
Note: Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a
per-line configuration.

Per-line settings are configurable for lines 1 through 7.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-73

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Backup Proxy/Registrar Support
The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If
the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically switches to the backup
server allowing the user's phone to remain in service.
How it Works
All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is
unavailable, then a new registration request is sent to the backup registrar. This
also applies to registration renewal messages, which try the primary server before
the backup.
Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the
backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI
can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the
previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the
primary proxy is tried before the backup.
You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Outbound Support
The IP Phones support draft-ietf-sip-outbound-15. That specification describes
how a SIP User Agent (UA) behind a firewall, reuses an existing connection
(usually the REGISTER outbound connection) for the inbound request if the
proxy supports it. The UA uses keep-alive packets to monitor the connection
status.
An Administrator can enable or disable this feature using the following parameter
in the configuration files:
•

sip outbound support
Note: TLS and TCP both support this feature. If the Global SIP
parameter “Persistent TLS” is set on the phone, then only one TLS
persistent connection can be established since the phone uses the local
port 5061 for connection. If the Global SIP parameter “TLS” is set on
the phone, more than one connection can be setup since the phone uses
a random local port for connection.

4-74

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Enablling/Disabling SIP Outbound Draft 15 Support.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable SIP outbound Draft 15 support.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Outbound
Support” on page A-76.

Limitations
The following are limitations to this feature:
•

SIP outbound on the phones is only supported for TLS and TCP based
messages. UDP is not supported.

•

The “keep-alive” only works with REGISTER connections.

SIP Server (SRV) Lookup
The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to perform a
DNS server lookup on a SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy.
The IP phone performs an SRV lookup when the IP address of the server is FQDN
and the corresponding port is 0.
For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com",
and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup may return multiple servers, based on
the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary.
However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is
non-zero, then the phone performs a DNS "A" Name Query to resolve the FQDN
into dot notation form.
If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port
5060 is used.
You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and
.cfg) only. The parameters to use are:
•

sip proxy ip

•

sip proxy port

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-75

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Dynamic SIP Registration and Subscription
Afeature on the IP Phones allow an Administrator to change the account
information on a phone and have it dynamically update to the phone when the
phone is inactive (phone not being used) without having to reboot the phone. This
feature tracks the use of the phone’s account so that when the phone becomes
inactive, the new information can be applied. To support this feature, an
Administrator can enable or disable a new parameter called
“dynamic sip” in the configuration files. If enabled, an Administrator can change
information such as, new registrar servers or outbound proxy servers, if required,
and apply the changes without having to reboot the end-user’s phone. This feature
facilitates load balancing on a network.
Note: This feature does not support adding and removing accounts.

When this feature is enabled, an Administrator can update the following
parameters on a phone, and the information is dynamically applied to the phone
when the phone becomes inactive:
• Registrar

• Password

• Registrar Port

• Outbound Proxy

• Proxy

• Outbound Proxy Port

• Proxy Port

• Backup Proxy

• Authentication Name

• Backup Proxy Port

• Username

• Backup Registrar
• Backup Registrar Port

When new account information is applied to the phone, it unsubscribes the old
subscription service. When the phone dynamically re-registers, the subscription
service also dynamically re-subscribes.
Note: ONLY BLF and MWI events support dynamic subscription on
the phones.

4-76

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

How it Works
When an Administrator updates account parameters for a phone from the
configuration server (using the configuration file), the changes are compared to
the existing account parameters on the phone. If the parameters are the same, the
account information sent from the server is deleted and the account on the phone
remains unchanged. If the parameters are different, the new account information
is linked to the old account information and the old account is unregistered and the
phone unsubcribes from the subscription service. The new account is then applied
and the phone dynamically re-subscribes to the subscription services (BLF and/or
MWI supported only).
Note: The dynamic SIP feature performs without having to reboot the
phone.

If an Administrator changes the account information via the Aastra Web UI, the IP
Phone UI, or via an XML Push, the phone checks if dynamic SIP is enabled. If
dynamic SIP is enabled, the dynamic SIP feature proceeds as described in the
previous paragraph. If it is disabled, the user is prompted to reboot the phone upon
the user saving an LCD page or leaving a menu.
An Administrator can enable or disable the Dynamic SIP feature using the
following parameter in the configuration files:
•

dynamic sip

Limitations
The following are limitations of the dynamic SIP feature:
•

This feature does not support the addition and deletion of accounts.

•

This feature does not effect the DND and CFWD state of a line.

Enabling/Disabling the Dynamic SIP Feature
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Dynamic SIP feature.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Dynamic SIP
for Registration and Subscription” on page A-77.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-77

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional)
You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic,
Global Settings” on page A-78 or “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-87

Note: You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.

4-78

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select SIP Settings.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
5

Select Proxy IP/Port.

6

Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.

7

Enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Default is 0.

8

Press Done to save the changes.

Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
9

Select Registrar IP/Port.

10

Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial
using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.

11

Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server.
Default is 0.

12

Press Done to save the changes.

Enabling/Disabling the Use of the Registrar Server
13

Select SIP Register.

14

Press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). Default is “Yes”.
This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network.

15

Press Done to save the changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-79

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

16

Select User Name to enter the username in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for
registering the phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name
for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.

17

Press Done to save the changes.

18

Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header
field.

19

Press Done to save the changes.

20

Select Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen.

21

Press Done to save the changes.

22

Select Authentication Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the
Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.

23

Press Done to save the changes.

24

Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

25

Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

26

4-80

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-81

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action
Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).

To configure SIP authentication settings:
2

4-82

In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

3

In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen
Name” on the idle screen.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen
Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display.

Figure 1
8 and 11-Line
LCD Displays

Services
Dir
Callers
L1

Icom

Screen Name
Screen Name 2

John Smith
Lab Phone
Sat Jan 1 12:18am

Figure 2
3-Line
LCD Displays

4

1

John Burns
Lab Phone
Sat Jun 8 2:55pm

Screen Name
Screen Name 2

In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.

5

In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.

6

In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization
header of the SIP REGISTER request.

7

In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

8

In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-83

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

9

In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks
network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network.

To configure SIP network settings:
10

In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server.

11

In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.

12

In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup
proxy server.

13

In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server.

14

In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully
qualified domain name. This parameter allows all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP
phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server.
Note: If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a
global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP phone uses the global configuration for all lines except
line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line.

15

In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be
sent to the outbound proxy server.

16

In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar
server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can
dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.

17

In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar.

18

In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the
backup registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then
the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.

19

In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar.

20

In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the
registrar.

4-84

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

21

To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-366.

22

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-85

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features
on the phone. The following table provides a list of Advanced SIP Settings that
you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

Explicit MWI Subscription
Explicit MWI Subscription Period

sip explicit mwi subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription period

MWI for BLA Account

sip mwi for bla account (see Chapter 5)

Missed Call Summary Subscription (global)
Missed Call Summary Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)

sip missed call summary subscription (global)
sip lineN missed call summary subscription
(per-line) (see Chapter 6)

Missed Call Summary Subscription Period
(see Chapter 6)

sip missed call summary subscription period
(see Chapter 6)

AS-Feature-Event Subscription (global)
AS-Feature-Event Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)

sip as-feature-event subscription (global)
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)

AS-Feature Event Subscription Period (see Chapter 6) sip as-feature-event subscription period
(see Chapter 6)
Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)

sip send mac (see Chapter 6)

Send Line Number in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)

sip send line (see Chapter 6)

Session Timer

sip session timer

T1 Timer
T2 Timer

sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer

Transaction Timer

sip transaction timer

Transport Protocol

sip transport protocol

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port (see page 4-37)

sip local port (see page 4-37)

Local SIP TLS Port (see page 4-37)

sip local tls port (see page 4-37)

Registration Failed Retry Timer

sip registration retry timer

Registration Timeout Retry Timer

sip registration timeout retry timer

Registration Renewal Timer

sip registration renewal timer

4-86

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)

sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5)

ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)

sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)

BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)

sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)

Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6)

sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6)

Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6)

sip whitelist (see Chapter 6)

XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)

XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-87

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Reference
Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-104 for a description of
each of the above parameters.
For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features.”
Configuring Advanced SIP Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP
phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP
Settings” on page A-104.

4-88

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action
For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

1

Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-89

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting
Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone.

3

If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period”
field, enter the requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400.

4

Enable the “MWI for BLA Account” to enable or disable a BLA configured line to send an MWI
SUBSCRIBE message for the BLA account.
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled
in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi
subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying MWI
does not change.

5

Enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.

6

If you enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field, then in the “Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. Default is 86400.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription Period” is configurable on a global basis only.

4-90

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

7

Enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or
ACD features.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
on page 6-17.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription ” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.

8

If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the
phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. Default is
3600.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
on page 6-17.

9

Enable the “Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message” and the “Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message” fields by checking the check boxes.
(Disable these fields by unchecking the check boxes. Default is disabled for both fields).
For more information about these message features, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/Line
Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” feature is configurable on a global basis only

10

In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the
status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.

11

In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone
session. These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a
request. Default is 4 seconds.

12

In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the
call server (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends.
Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
Note: If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed out.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-91

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

13

In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time
Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP), UDP, TCP, Transport Layer Security (TLS) or Persistent TLS. The value
“UDP” is the default. For more information about TLS, see “RTP Encryption” on page 4-99 and
Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26.

14

In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the
phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5060.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-37.

15

In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone
sends SIP messages. Default is 5061.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-37.

16

In the " Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800.

17

In the " Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the
phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
Valid values are 30 to 214748364. Default is 120.

18

In the " Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration,
that the phone renews registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new
REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration.
Valid values are 0 to 214748364. Default is 15.

19

The “BLF Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-177.

4-92

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

20

(For Sylantro Servers) The “ACD Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of
3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “ACD Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-199.

21

The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds.
This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses
the default value of 300 seconds.
For information about setting the “BLA Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-199.

22

(For Broadsoft Servers) The “Blacklist Duration” field is enabled by default with a value of 300
seconds (5 minutes). Valid values are 0 to 9999999.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
For information about setting the “Blacklist Duration”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration”
on page 6-22.

23

Enable the "Whitelist Proxy" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For information about setting the “Whitelist Proxy”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on
page 6-24.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-93

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

24

Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).

Enabling this parameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.
For information about setting this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on
page 5-347.
25

4-94

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets
sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to
reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which
codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints
to monitor packet delivery, detect and compensate for any packet loss in the
network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for
the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer
encapsulation protocol.
Note: If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the
same port as the RTP voice packets. The phones support decoding and
playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following
DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds

You can set the following parameters for RTP on the IP Phones:
Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

RTP Port

sip rtp port

Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)

sip use basic codecs

Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF

sip out-of-band dtmf

Customized Codec Preference List

sip customized codec

DTMF Method (global and per-line settings)

sip dtmf method (global and per-line settings)

RTP Encryption (global and per-line settings)

sip srtp mode (global and per-line settings)

Silence Suppression

sip silence suppression

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-95

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

RTP Port
RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally
an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call
therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream.
The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for
each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique
RTP port for its own use.
On the IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP port
allocation can be configured using "RTP Port Base". The default RTP base port
on the IP phones is 3000.
For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP
on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002,
5003, etc.
You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of
instructions that together implement one or more algorithms. In the case of IP
telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to
decrease the content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in
kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio. With smaller file sizes and
lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content
over a network more easily.
Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
transmission standards for the following CODECs:

4-96

•

Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or
u-Law companding

•

Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited
linear prediction (CS_ACELP).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and
operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the
default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression
for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size.
Default Codec Settings.
Bit Rate

Algorithm

Packetizatio
n Time

Silence
Suppression

G.711 a-law

64 Kb/s

PCM

30 ms

enabled

G.711 u-law

64 Kb/s

PCM

30 ms

enabled

G.729a

8
Kb/s

CS-ACELP

30 ms

enabled

CODEC

You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic codec" set, which consists of
the set of codecs and packet sizes shown above.
Or you can instead configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using
the defaults.
Note: The basic and custom codec parameters apply to all calls, and are
configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.

Customized Codec Preference List
You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred Codecs. To do this, you
must enter the payload value (payload), the packetization time in milliseconds
(ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp).
Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried
within the RTP packets to the end user at the destination. You can enter payload
values for G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law, and G.729a.
Ptime (packetization time) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within
each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network
bandwidth is used for transfer of the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values for
the customized Codec list in milliseconds. (See table below).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-97

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection
(VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet
contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network
bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice
energy was detected by the VAD.
You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following
example:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off

The valid values for creating a Codec preference list are as follows.
Customized Codec Settings
Attribute

Value

payload

0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a

ptime (in milliseconds)

5, 10, 15, 20.......90

silsupp

on
off

You can specify a customized Codec preference list on a global-basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Out-of-Band DTMF
The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode
according to RFC2833. In the Aastra Web UI, you can enable or disable this
feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default.
In out-of-band mode, the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and
DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets.
You can configure out-of-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.

4-98

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

DTMF Method
A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone
uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the
DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both.
You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
RTP Encryption
The IP Phones include support for Secure Real-time Transfer Protocol (SRTP),
using Session Description Protocol Security (SDES) key negotiation, for
encryption and authentication of RTP/RTCP messages sent and received by the
Aastra IP phones on your network.
As administrator, you specify the global SRTP setting for all lines on the IP
phone. You can choose among three levels of SRTP encryption, as follows:
•

SRTP Disabled (default): IP phone generates and receives nonsecured RTP
calls. If the IP phone gets called from SRTP enabled phone, it ignores SRTP
tries to answer the call using RTP. If the receiving phone has SRTP only
enabled, the call fails; however, if it has SRTP preferred enabled, it will accept
RTP call.

•

SRTP Preferred: IP phone generates RTP secured calls, and accepts both
secured and non-secured RTP calls. If the receiving phone is not SRTP
enabled, it sends non-secured RTP calls instead.

•

SRTP Only: IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only; all other
calls are rejected (fail).

You can override the global setting as necessary, configuring SRTP support on a
per-line basis. This allows IP phone users to have both secured and unsecured
lines operating on the same phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-99

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

If an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call, and the receiving phone is also SRTP
enabled, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure.
If the receiving phone does not support SRTP, the IP phone will send unsecured
RTP messages instead of SRTP encrypted messages. However in this case, the IP
Phone UI does not display the lock icon - indicating a non-secure call.
Note: If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable Transport Layer
Security (TLS). This prevents capture of the key used for SRTP
encryption. To enable TLC, set the Transport Protocol parameter
(located on the Global SIP Settings menu) to TLS.

You can configure SRTP on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Silence Suppression
In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending
voice over a packet-switched system. Silence suppression is encoding that starts
and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth.
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates
whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone
to ignore any negotiated value.
You can configure silence suppression on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.

4-100

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Configuring RTP Features
Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-134.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select SIP Settings.

5

Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.

6

Press Done (2 times) to save the change.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
7

Select Restart.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-101

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
Global Settings.

Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->RTP Settings.
Per-Line Settings.

4-102

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000.
The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the
beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF
tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The
following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds

3

Enable the "Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box. Default is disabled).
Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP
packets.

4

The "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field is enabled by default. Disable this field by
unchecking the box.
Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.

5

Enter a "Customized Codec Preference List". For example,
payload=8;ptime=10;
silsupp=on,
payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
Valid values are:
Attribute

Value

payload

0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a

ptime (in milliseconds)

5, 10, 15, 20.....90

silsupp

on
off

For this parameter, you specify a customized codec list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs
for this IP phone. Default for the “Customized Codec Preference List” is blank.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-103

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

6

Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both.
Default is RTP.
Note: You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis.

7

Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP
Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled.
Note: You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis.

8

The “Silence Suppression” field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the check
box.
When enabled, the phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.

9

4-104

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

RTCP Summary Reports
The IP phones include the capability of enabling/disabling the generation of
RTCP summary reports using the SIP vq-rtcpxr event package. These RTCP
summary reports include voice quality statistics according to
draft-ietf-sipping-rtcp-summary-05 specifications including packet loss, jitter, and
delay statistics, as well as call quality scores. When this feature is enabled, an
RTCP summary report is sent at the end of each call via a PUBLISH message to
the configuration server.
In addition to enabling/disabling the generation of these reports, you must specify
the hostname and port of the entity, known as the collector, receiving the reports.
Similar to the other IP Phone SIP account parameters, the RTCP summary report
parameters can be set on a global or a per-line basis using the configuration files
only.
The RTCP summary report parameters are:
•

sip rtcp summary reports

•

sip LineN rtcp summary reports

•

sip rtcp summary report collector

•

sip LineN rtcp summary report collector

•

sip rtcp summary report collector port

•

sip LineN rtcp summary report collector port

Limitations
The following is a limitation when enabling RTCP summary reports on the phone:
•

The call must be at least 5 seconds long in order to generate the RTCP
extended reports.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-105

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Configuring RTCP Summary Reports
Use the following procedure to configure RTCP summary reports.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTCP Summary
Reports” on page A-47.

4-106

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Autodial Settings
The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial
on an IP phone, the phone automatically dials a preconfigured number whenever
it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions
as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows:
•

Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number
when you lift the handset.

•

Warmline: The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift
the handset before dialing a preconfigured number. If you do not dial a
number within the time allotted, then the IP phone begins to dial the number.

By default, the Autodial feature functions as a hotline. If you want Autodial to
function as a warmline, you can use the Autodial “time-out” parameter to specify
the length of time (in seconds) the IP phone waits before dialing a preconfigured
number.
As administrator, you configure Autodial globally, or on a per-line basis, for an IP
phone. The line setting overrides the global setting. For example, you can disable
Autodial on a specific line simply by setting the line’s autodial number parameter
to empty (blank).
Note: IMPORTANT INFORMATION before configuring Autodial on
your IP phone:

•

Any speeddial numbers that you configure on an IP phone are not
affected by autodial settings.

•

If you configure autodial on your IP phone, any lines that function as
hotlines do not accept conference calls, transferred calls, and/or
intercom calls.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-107

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Configuring AutoDial Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration
files:
Global Configuration
•

sip autodial number

•

sip autodial timeout

Per-Line Configuration
•

sip lineN autodial number

•

sip lineN autodial timeout

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial
Settings” on page A-139.

4-108

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI.
By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all
lines on your IP phone. However, you can also configure Autodial on a per-line
basis.

Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings.

2

In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number that the IP phone dials whenever the IP
phone is off-hook. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone.
For example: 8500

3

In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer as follows:
•

If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.

•

If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30

Valid values are 0 to 120.
4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-109

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Per-Line Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings.

2

Do one of the following actions:

3

4-110

•

To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter
to enable it, then click
to save your changes.

•

To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global
Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3.

In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials
whenever the IP phone is off-hook as follows:
•

If set to -1, then the global autodial settings for this IP phone to this line.

•

If set to empty (blank), then disable Autodial on this line.

•

If set to a valid SIP number, dial the SIP number specified for this line. For example: 8500

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
4

In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows:
•

If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.

•

If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30

Valid values are 0 to 120.
5

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-111

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol

Configuration Server Protocol
You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols:
TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for
which the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS,
you can also specify the port number to use for downloading the phone
configuration. For FTP, you can configure a Username and Password that are
authenticated by the FTP server.
The TFTP setting is the default download protocol. You can configure the type of
protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files, the IP phone
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server, your DHCP server
must support download protocol according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 for
Option 66. For more information, see this chapter, the section, “DHCP”
on page 4-4.

Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration
Server Settings” on page A-18.

4-112

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu.

3

Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4

Select Configuration Server.

5

Select Download Protocol.

6

Select from the following:
• Use TFTP
• Use FTP
• Use HTTP
• Use HTTPS

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Default is “Use TFTP”.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from
the configuration server.
7

Press Done (8 and 11-Line LCD phones) or Set (3-Line LCD phones) to save the changes.

8

From the Configuration Server menu, select from the following. This selection is dependent on the
Download Protocol you selected in step 6.
TFTP Settings
FTP Settings
HTTP Settings
HTTPS Settings

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-113

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

9

Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format).
Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
-

Select Primary TFTP
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Pri TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if
required by selecting the “Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters.

-

From the TFTP Settings menu, select Alternate TFTP and press Enter.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Alt TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath
the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example,
ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

FTP Settings
-

Select FTP Server.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select FTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the
path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:

-

4-114

Select FTP Username.
Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done.
Select FTP Password.
Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done or Set.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

9
(Cont’d)

HTTP Settings
-

Select HTTP Server
Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
Press Done or Set.
Select HTTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Select HTTP Port.
- Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
Default is 80.
- Press Done or Set.

HTTPS Settings
-

Select HTTP Client.
Select Download Server.
Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
Press Done or Set.
Select Download Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Press Done or Set.
- Select Client Method.
- Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0).
For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/
Server Configuration” on page 4-40.
- Select Download Port.
- Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over
HTTPS. Default is 443.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-115

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

9
(Cont’d)

HTTPS Settings (Continued)
- Select HTTPS Server.
- Select HTTP->HTTPS.
- For 3-Line LCD Displays::
Press Change to select “Do not redirect”or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Set.
- For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS. Select “No” to not direct HTTPS
to HTTPS, Default is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Done.
- Select XML HTTP POSTs.
- For 3-Line LCD Displays::
Press Change to select “Do not block” or “Block”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
- For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
Press Change to select “Yes” and block XML HTTP Posts. Select “No” to unblock XML
HTTP Posts. Default is “No”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP
Phone.

Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and
HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
10

Press Done or Set repeatedly until the session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the
configuration settings.

11

Select Restart.

4-116

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Configuration Server Protocol

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

4-117

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and
HTTPS. Default is TFTP.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server.

TFTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “TFTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate
TFTP" is enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the
alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field. You can also enter a path name for the alternate TFTP server in the “Alternate TFTP Path” field.
FTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "FTP Server" fiel.d.
- Enter the path name in the “FTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if
required.
- Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field.
- Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password"
field.

4-118

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

Configuration Server Protocol

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

3
HTTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTP port number in the “HTTP Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
HTTPS
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTPS Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTPS Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTPS port number in the “HTTPS Port” field that the server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over HTTPS.
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.

Reference: For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS
redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
4

Click

to save your settings.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
5

Select Operation->Reset and click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

.

4-119

Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features

About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize
your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for
configuring your phone to use these features.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Operational Features

page 5-5

User Passwords

page 5-5

Administrator Passwords

page 5-9

Locking/Unlocking the Phone

page 5-10

Defining an Emergency Dial Plan

page 5-16

Time and Date

page 5-19

Time Zone & DST

page 5-20

Time Servers

page 5-27

Backlight Mode (6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)

page 5-30

Live Dial Pad*

page 5-35

Language

page 5-36

Locking IP Phone Keys

page 5-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topic

5-2

Page

Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)

page 5-53

Local Dial Plan

page 5-56

Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls

page 5-62

Suppressing DTMF Playback

page 5-66

Display DTMF Digits

page 5-68

Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone

page 5-70

Stuttered Dial Tone

page 5-73

XML Beep Support

page 5-75

Status Scroll Delay

page 5-77

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing

page 5-79

Switch Focus to Ringing Line

page 5-82

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout

page 5-84

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call

page 5-88

UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)

page 5-91

Message Waiting Indicator Line

page 5-93

DND Key Mode

page 5-95

Call Forward Mode

page 5-97

Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)

page 5-101

Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In

page 5-106

Group Paging RTP Settings

page 5-111

Key Mapping

page 5-117

Ring Tones and Tone Sets

page 5-121

Priority Alerting

page 5-126

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)

page 5-133

Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys

page 5-145

Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI

page 5-166

Speeddial Prefixes

page 5-169

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key

page 5-170

Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

page 5-171

BLF Subscription Period

page 5-177
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

About this chapter

Topic

Page

BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys

page 5-179

Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)

page 5-185

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)

page 5-189

ACD Subscription Period

page 5-199

BLA Subscription Period

page 5-201

Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)

page 5-203

Do Not Disturb (DND)

page 5-210

Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)

page 5-221

BLA Support for Third Party Registration

page 5-228

P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts

page 5-229

BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)

page 5-230

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging

page 5-233

Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the 6751i)

page 5-237

Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)

page 5-248

Call Forwarding

page 5-252

SIP Phone Diversion Display

page 5-291

Displaying Call Destination for Incoming Calls

page 5-293

Callers List

page 5-296

Customizable Callers List and Services Keys

page 5-302

Missed Calls Indicator

page 5-303

Directory List

page 5-305

Voicemail (not applicable to 6751i)

page 5-316

XML Customized Services

page 5-319

Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones

page 5-319

Configuring the Phone to use XML

page 5-325

XML Get Timeout

page 5-325

Configuring for XML on the IP Phone

page 5-326

Using the XML Customized Service

page 5-331

XML Action URIs

page 5-333

Polling Action URIs

page 5-342

Action URI Disconnected

page 5-344

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topic

5-4

Page
XML SIP Notify Events

page 5-347

XML Softkey URI

page 5-353

XML Key Redirection

page 5-359

Options Key Redirection (for Options Menu on all phones and
Services Menu on 6751i)

page 5-360

XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction

page 5-362

XML URI for Key Press Simulation

page 5-362

XML Override for a Locked Phone

page 5-363

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments

page 5-364

Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)

page 5-366

“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i)

page 5-370

Conference Ends and Transfers Remaining Parties

page 5-371

Transferring Two Existing Calls

page 5-372

Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)

page 5-373

Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module

page 5-376

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Operational Features
Description
This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a
System Administrator.

User Passwords
A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedures to change the user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If
you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.

Configuring a User Password

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-15.

IP Phone UI
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select User Password.

3

Enter the current user password.

4

Press Enter.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
5

Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

6

Press Enter.

7

Re-enter the new user password.

8

Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->User Password.

2

In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.

3

In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

4

In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again.

5

Click

5-6

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Resetting a User Password
If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a
new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password
to the factory default which is blank (no password).
You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path
Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

In the “Reset User Password” field, click

.

The following screen displays:

3

In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank.

4

In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

5

In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password.

6

Click

5-8

to save the new user password and perform the next procedure.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Administrator Passwords
An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the
configuration files only.
An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP
phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password
enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid
values are 0 (false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key
password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user has to enter a password at
the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain
access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other
password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three
attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle
screen.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to change the administrator password.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-15.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Locking/Unlocking the Phone
A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or
configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or administrator can enter their
password to unlock the phone.
You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the
Aastra Web UI.
You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone:
•

Using the IP Phone UI via the “Phone Lock” option in the Options Menu.

•

Using the Aastra Web UI via the path Operation->Phone Lock.

•

Using the configuration files to configure a key as “phonelock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.

•

Using the Aastra Web UI to configure a key as “Phone Lock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
Note: All of the methods above configure locking/unlocking of the
phone dynamically. Once configured, the feature takes affect
immediately. To unlock the phone, a user or administrator must enter their
password.

5-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent
it from being used or configured.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Lock the phone:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.

3

Press Lock to lock the phone.

Unlock the phone:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
2

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
The phone unlocks.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and
prevent it from being used or configured.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

Lock the phone:
2

In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click

.

The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

4

In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click

.

The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.

5-12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files
Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, or expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”.

Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using
the configuration files.
Configuration Files
To configure a softkey/programmable key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files, see Appendix A,
the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

Reference
To use the lock/unlock softkey or programmable key, see “Using the Configured
Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone” on page 5-15.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key using the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the as “Phone Lock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.

2

5-14

Select a key you want to configure for locking/unlocking the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options.

4

Click

to save your changes.

Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone
After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to
use the key on the IP phone.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Lock the phone:
1

Press the LOCK softkey.
The phone locks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.
An “Unlock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.

Unlock the phone:
1

Press the UNLOCK softkey.
A password prompt displays.

2

Enter the user or administrator password and press ENTER.
The phone unlocks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF.
The “Lock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency
telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact
local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone
number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so
that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a
different emergency number for each of the different emergency services.
You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency
services. Once you specify the emergency number(s) on the phone, you can dial
those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically
dials to those emergency services.
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.

The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones.

5-16

Emergency Number

Description

911

A United States emergency number

999

A United Kingdom emergency number

112

An international emergency telephone
number for GSM mobile phone networks.
In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both
mobile and fixed-line telephones.

110

A police and/or fire emergency number in
Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South
America.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Emergency Dial Plan and Pattern Matching
The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching and prepend
dial plan functionality.
There are two ways to dial a number on the phone:
•

dialing digit-by-digit (i.e., select line and dial)

•

dialing by string (i.e., pre-dial then go off-hook)

When a user dials digit-by-digit, the phone adds every digit to a dialed string and
checks against the dial plan. If the phone is not locked, it checks against the
regular dial plan. If the phone is locked, it checks against the emergency dial plan.
When a user dials by string, (pre-dial, speed-dial, etc., and then goes off-hook),
and the phone is not locked, it checks to see if the number matches the emergency
dial plan. If it doesn’t match, it blocks the call from going through. If the phone is
locked, and the number matches the emergency dial plan it allows the call to go
through.
Adding a pre-pend to a dial plan also works with both dialing digit-by-digit and
dialing by string.
Limitation
The following is a limitation for emergency dial plans with pattern matching:
•

Secondary dial tone is not supported.

You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring an Emergency Dial Plan
Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for
dialing emergency services in your area.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-16.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

2

In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the number used in your local area to contact emergency
services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number.
For example:
911|110.
Default for this field is "x+#|xx+*". You can enter up to 512 characters in this field.

3

5-18

Click

to save the emergency dial plan to your phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Time and Date
In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and
date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time
on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of
configuration applies to each feature.
Feature

Method of configuration

Set Time

IP Phone UI

Set Time Format

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Set Date

IP Phone UI

Set Date Format

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Set Time Zone

IP Phone UI
Configuration Files

Set Daylight Savings Time

IP Phone UI
Configuration Files

Daylight Savings Time (DST) Information
The Aastra IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance
change. This change became affective starting in 2007.
The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in
2007. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will now begin at 2:00
A.M. on the second Sunday in March and revert to Standard time on the first
Sunday in November.
Note: In previous years, the DST began on the first Sunday of April and
ended on the first Sunday of October.

The changes to daylight savings time applies to the U.S. and Canada, but may
impact other countries outside North America.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Time Zone & DST
There are two ways you can set the time zone on the IP Phones.
First Method - You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP
Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration
files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list
of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time
Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-54. The following is an example:
time zone name: US-Eastern
Second Method - You can use the “time zone name” parameter in the
configuration files, and specify a value of “Custom” for this parameter (must use
initial caps). This method allows you to customize the time zone for your area
using additional configuration parameters. The following is an example using
relative time for EST:
time zone name: Custom
The following table identifies the additional parameters you can enter in the
configuration files if you want to customize your time zone.
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
time zone minutes

Description

Example

The number of minutes the time zone is
offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time). This can be positive (West of the
Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the
Prime Meridian). The default is Eastern
Standard Time (EST) with a value of 300
(GMT minus 5 hours).

time zone minutes: 300
Note: For additional values for
this parameter, see “Custom
Time Zone and DST Settings”
on page A-61.

dst minutes

The number of minutes to add during
dst minutes: 60
Daylight Saving Time. Valid values are a
positive integer between 0 to 60.

dst [start|end] relative date

Specifies how to interpret the start and
dst [start|end] relative date: 1
end day, month, and week parameters absolute (0) or relative (1).

5-20

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Custom Configuration
File Parameter

Description

Example

Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST))
dst start month

The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 3
are 1 to 12 (January to December).

dst end month

The month that DST ends. Valid values
are 1 to 12 (January to December).

dst end month: 4

dst [start |end] week

Not applicable to absolute time.

N/A

dst start day

The day of the month that DST starts.
Valid values are 1 to 31.

dst start day: 15

dst end day

The day of the month that DST ends.
Valid values are 1 to 31.

dst end day: 31

dst start hour

The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.

dst start hour: 5

dst end hour

The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.

dst end hour: 23

Relative Time
dst start month

The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 4
are 1 to 12 (January to December).

dst end month

The month that DST ends. Valid values
are 1 to 12 (January to December).

dst end month: 5

dst start week

The week in the specified month in
which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

dst start week: 2

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurance "dst start day" in the
month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurance "dst start
day" in the month
.
.
.
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurance "dst start day" in
the month

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Custom Configuration
File Parameter
dst end week

Description

Example

The week in the specified month in
which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

dst end week: -1

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurance "dst start day" in the
month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurance "dst start
day" in the month
.
.
.
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurance "dst start day" in
the month
dst start day

The day of the specified week in the
dst start day: 2
specified month that DST starts on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday

dst end day

The day of the specified week in the
dst end day: 7
specified month that DST ends on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday

dst start hour

The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.

dst start hour: 10

dst end hour

The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.

dst end hour: 23

5-22

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Example 1
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using relative time (for EST):
time zone name: Custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative
time zone minutes: 300
dst minutes: 60

Example 2
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using absolute time:
time zone name: Custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 0 #absolute

#start of
dst start
dst start
dst start
#End of
dst end
dst end
dst end

DST
month: 3 #March
week: 2 #second full week
day: 1 #Sunday

DST
month: 11 #November
week: 1 #first full week
day: 1 #Sunday

Configuring Time and Date Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the configuration files..

Configuration Files
For specific date and time parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Time and Date Settings” on page A-52.
For specific parameters you can set for custom time zone settings, see Appendix A, the section, “Custom
Time Zone and DST Settings” on page A-61.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Set Time and Time Format:
2

Select Time and Date.

3

Select Set Time.

4

Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone.

5

Press Done to save the time you entered.

6

Select Time Format.
Valid values are 12hr and 24hr.
Note: The default Time Format is 12hr.

7

Press Change to toggle between 24hr and 12hr format.

8

Press Done to save the Time Format you selected.

Set Date and Date Format:
9

Select Set Date.

10

Using the keys on the keypad, enter a date to set on the IP phone.

11

Press Done to save the date you entered.

12

Select Date Format.

5-24

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

13

Select a date format from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY
Note: The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).

14

Press Done to save the Date Format.

Set Time Zone:
15

Select Time Zone.

16

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
Press * to display a list of Time Zone options.

17

Select a Time Zone from the list of options.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-52.
Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.

18

Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.

Set Daylight Savings Time:
19

Select Daylight Savings.

20

Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• OFF
• 30 min summertime
• 1 hr summertime
• automatic
Note: The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.

21

Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.

2

In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• 12h (12 hour format) (default)
• 24h (24 hour format).
Note: The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.

3

In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY
Note: The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.

4

5-26

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Time Servers
A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference
clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network. The time server
may be a local network time server or an internet time server. The Network Time
Protocol (NTP) is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes
time in the network with the time on the time server.
On the IP phones, you can enable or disable a Time Server to be used to
synchronize time on the phones with the Timer Server you specify. An
Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files to
enable/disable the Time Server and specify a Time Server 1, Timer Server 2, and/
or Time Server 3. A User can enable/disable the Time Server using the IP Phone
UI or Aastra Web UI only. The Time Server is enabled by default.
Setting Time Server Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Time Server and optionally set
the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-59.

Setting Time Server Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP
Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Enable/the Time Server by specifying Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Server.

3

Select Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

4

Enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format. Use the available softkeys to help
you enter the information.

5

Click

to save your changes.

Setting Time Server Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP
Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.

To enable/disable Time Server:
2

5-28

The “NTP Time Server” field is enabled by default. If you need to disable the Time Server, uncheck
the box. The Time Server 1, 2, and 3 fields are grayed out when disabled.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
To set Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
3

Note: The “Time Server” field must be enabled to enter values in the “Time Server 1, 2, and 3”
fields.
In the “Time Server 1”, “Time Server 2”, and/or “Time Server 3” field(s), enter the IP address of the
Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3 in your network, in dotted decimal format. Default for this field is 0.0.0.0.
For example, 132.234.5.4

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Backlight Mode (6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)
The 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT have a backlight feature that allows you to turn
the backlight on the LCD:
•

Off - Backlight is always OFF.

•

Auto (Default)- Automatically turns ON the backlight when the phone is in
use, and then automatically turns OFF the backlight when the phone is idle
after a specified length of time.

“The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of
inactivity. The period of time that the phone waits before turning the backlight off
is also configurable.
You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone
UI.
Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on
the IP Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backlight Mode
Settings (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)” on page A-71.
Note: Using the configuration files, you can set the backlight to Off (always off) or Auto (On and then off after
a period of inactivity).

Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the
IP Phone using the IP Phone UI.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Preferences.

5-30

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select Display.

4

Select Backlight.

Display
1. Contrast Level
2. Backlight

- Select
Done -

5

Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone.
Default is “Auto”. Valid options are:
• Off
• Auto (Default)
Note: Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer.

Backlight
Off
Auto

Cancel Done -

6

If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

7

If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer.

Backlight
Off
Auto

Advanced Cancel Done -

8

Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is
idle. Valid values are 1 to 7200 seconds. Default is 600 seconds (equals 10 minutes). When this
period of time is reached, the phone turns OFF the backlight. Use the "Backspace" and/or "Clear"
softkeys to delete entries if required.

Backlight On Time

10 seconds

- Backspace
- Clear

9

5-32

Cancel Done -

Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Audio DHSG Headset (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
DHSG is a standard for telecommunication headsets. The Aastra IP Phones 6753i,
6755i 6757i, and 6757i CT support the use of a DHSG headset.
Aastra’s DHSG headset support has been tested and verified with the following
products:
•

GN Netcom GN 9350, GN 9350e, GN 9120, GN 9125.
All require the GN 14201-10 cable.

•

Plantronics CS60, CS70N, CS351N, and Voyager 510S.
All require the APS-1 cable.

•

Sennheiser BW900. Requires the TCI01 adapter box.

Use of a non-verified DHSG headset solution is at the customer¡¦s own discretion
and the customer should be aware that some DHSG headsets require an optional
cable in order to be electrically DHSG compliant. Aastra is not responsible for
any damage to the IP phone or headset that may result from the use of
non-verified headsets, or from incorrectly connecting headsets or cables.
Warning: Only the Aastra DHSG cable should be connected directly to
your phone. No 3rd party DHSG cables should be connected directly to
the Aastra IP phone.

Any damage caused by connecting a 3rd party DHSG headset cable
directly to your phone will void your warranty with Aastra Telecom.
Reference
For more information about installing a DHSG headset on your phone, see the IP
Phone-specific Installation Guide.
Configuring DHSG on the Phone
You can enable or disable the use of a DHSG headset using the parameter “dhsg”
in the configuration files, or at the location Options->Preferences->Set
Audio->DHSG in the IP Phone UI. Default for DHSG is disabled (OFF).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring DHSG Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to configure the use of a DHSG headset on the IP
Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHSG Settings
(6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)” on page A-72.

Configuring DHSG using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure DHSG using the IP Phone UI..

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Preferences.

3

Select Set Audio.

4

Select DHSG and toggle the DHSG support ON or OFF

5

If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.

6

Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.

5-34

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Live Dial Pad*
The "Live Dialpad" option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or
OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad
OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or
pressing the
initiates a call to that number.
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
A User can turn the “Live Dialpad” ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI only. A
System Administrator can turn it ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI or the
configuration files.
Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Live Dialpad
Settings” on page A-72.

Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Preferences.

3

Select Live Dialpad.

4

On 3-Line LCD phones:
Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

On 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
Press Change to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.
5

Press Done to save the setting.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Language
The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set
the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options,
configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language. The IP phones support
the following languages:

Available Language

Associated Language File
(included in the firmware file when
downloaded from configuration
server)

English

Default (resides on the phone)

German

lang_de.txt

(German)*

Spanish

lang_es.txt

(Spanish)

Mexican Spanish

lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)

French

lang_fr.txt

(French)

Canadian French

lang_fr_ca.txt

(Canadian French)

Italian

lang_it.txt

(Italian)*

Russian

lang_ru.txt

(Russian)*

*German and Italian languages are not applicable to the 6757i CT cordless handset.

Loading Language Packs
You make languages available to use on the phone by loading language packs
from the configuration server to the local .cfg configuration file. You can
use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to perform the download. Each
language pack consists of the IP Phone UI and Aastra Web UI translated in a
specific language.
Loading Language Packs via the Configuration File (.cfg)
Using the configuration files, you specify a language pack to load in the following
format:
lang__.txt
or
lang_.txt

5-36

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

where  is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639
(see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on
page A-190) and  is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166
(see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-190).
The  attribute is optional.
Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the
IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed.

Example
The following is an example of the parameters you would enter in the .cfg
file to load a French, Italian, German, and Spanish language pack to the IP phone.
language
language
language
language

1:
2:
3:
4:

lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_es_mx.txt

The above entries in the .cfg file tells the phone which language packs to
load. When the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then use the configuration
files IP Phone UI to specify which language to display on the IP phone. You must
use the Aastra Web UI to specify the language to use in the Web UI.
References
For more information about specifying the language to use, see the section,
“Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-39.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A,
the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-188.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the
parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.

You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which language
packs to load:

Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from
either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.

5-38

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Specifying the Language to Use
Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to
use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which
language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to
specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to
specify the files for the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedures to specify the language to use on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-186 and “Language Pack Settings” on page A-188.

Notes:
1.
If you specify the language to use on the phone via the
configuration files, you must reboot the phone for the changes to take
affect.
2.
All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP
phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Language.

3

Select English (English - default), Français (French), Español (Spanish), Deutsch (German),
Italiano (Italian), Русский (Russian).

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Notes:
1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language
Packs” on page 5-36.
4

Press Done to save the changes.
The change is dynamic. The IP phone UI displays all menu items in the language you chose.

5-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.

Loading the Language Pack
2

In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a
specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter any of the following in the
“Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in
French, Spanish, German, Italian, or Russian
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
lang_ru.txt
Note: You must have the language pack(s) already loaded to your phone in order to use them. For
more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-36.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section,
“Language Pack Settings” on page A-188.

3

Click

to save your changes.

Specifying the Language to Use in the Aastra Web UI
4

After restarting your phone, log back in using the Aastra Web UI.

5

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

English (English - default)
Français (French)
Español (Spanish)
Deutsch (German)
Italiano (Italian)
Русский (Russian)

Notes:
1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed.
7

Click

to save your changes.

The Aastra Web UI displays all screens in the language you chose.

5-42

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Specifying the Input Language to Use
The 5i Series phones support text and character inputs in various languages
(English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian).
Inputting textual or character information into the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI,
and XML scripts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the
phone. The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. An Administrator can also use the
configuration files to enable this feature. Users can then use text and characters in
a specific language when performing inputs on the phone.
The following tables identify the language characters that a User can enter on the
5i Series phones that support the Input Language feature.
Keypad Text/Character Input Tables
English (default)
Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2

abc2

3

DEF3

def3

4

GHI4

ghi4

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6

mno6

7

PQRS7

pqrs7

8

TUV8

tuv8

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

French
Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ

abc2àâçáåæ

3

DEF3ÉÈÊË

def3éèêë

4

GHI4ÎÏ

ghi4îï

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ

mno6ñóòôö

7

PQRS7

pqrs7

8

TUV8ÚÙÛÜ

tuv8úùûü

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

Spanish

5-44

Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2ÁÀÇ

abc2áàç

3

DEF3ÉÈ

def3éè

4

GHI4ÏÍ

ghi4ïí

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6ÑÓÒ

mno6ñóò

7

PQRS7

pqrs7

8

TUV8ÚÜ

tuv8úü

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

German
Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2ÄÀ

abc2äà

3

DEF3É

def3é

4

GHI4

ghi4

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6Ö

mno6ö

7

PQRS7ß

pqrs7ß

8

TUV8Ü

tuv8ü

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2ÀCÇ

abc2àcç

3

DEF3ÉÈË

def3éèë

4

GHI4

ghi4

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6ÓÒ

mno6óò

7

PQRS7

pqrs7

8

TUV8Ù

tuv8ù

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

Italian

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Portguese
Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

ABC2ÁÀÂÃÇ

abc2áàâãç

3

DEF3ÉÊ

def3éê

4

GHI4Í

ghi4í

5

JKL5

jkl5

6

MNO6ÓÔÕ

mno6óôõ

7

PQRS7

pqrs7

8

TUV8ÚÜ

tuv8úü

9

WXYZ9

wxyz9

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/\@

Russian

5-46

Key

Uppercase Characters

Lowercase Characters

0

0

0

1

1.:;=_,-'&()

1.:;=_,-'&()

2

АБВГ2ABC

aбвг2abc

3

ДЕЁЖЭ3DEF

Дeëжз3def

4

ИЙКЛ4GHI

ийкл4ghi

5

МНОП5JKL

мноп5jkl

6

РСТУ6MNO

рсту6mno

7

ФХЦЧ7PQRS

фхЧч7pqrs

8

ШЩЪЫ8TUV

шщъы8tuv

9

ЬЗЮЯ9WXYZ

ьзюя9wxyz

*

* 

* 

#

#/\@

#/ \@

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Language Input Using the Configuration Files
An Administrator can specify the input language to use by entering a specific
parameter in the configuration files. An Administrator must enter the following
parameter to enable this feature:
•

input language

Use the following procedures to specify the input language to use on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-186.

Configuring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can change the input
language on the phone using the IP Phone UI. The “Input Language” option
appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI.
Example
Preferences
1. Tones
2. Contrast Level
3. Speed Dial Edit
4. Live Dialpad
5. Set Audio
6. Time and Date
7. Language

Language
1. Screen Language
2. Input Language

- Select

- Select
Done -

Language Option

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Done -

Input Language Option

Input Language
1. English
2. Français
3. Español
4. Deutsch
5. Italiano
6. Русский
Cancel Done -

Languages Available

5-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP
Phone UI.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the Options key.

2

Select Language from the Options List.

3

Select Input Language from the Language List.

4

Select the language you want to use on the IP phone for inputting text and characters. Valid values
are:
• English (default)
• Français (French)
• Español (Spanish)
• Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Русский (Russian) ) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.

5

5-48

Press Done when you have selected a language.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Language Input Using the Aastra Web UI
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can also change the
input language on the phone using the Aastra Web UI. The “Input Language”
option appears at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->Language Settings.

2

Select a language from the "Input Language" field. Setting this field allows you to specify the
language to use when entering text in the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or in XML applications on the
phone. Valid values are:
• English (default)
• Français (French)
• Español (Spanish)
• Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Русский (Russian) ) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Language Input for an XML Application
A System Administrator can enable input languages in XML applications using
the  object and the “inputLanguage” attribute.
Reference
For more information about using XML objects for defining input language,
contact Aastra Telecom Customer Support regarding the “Aastra XML
Development Guide.”
UTF- 8 Codec for Multi-National Language Support
The IP Phones and expansion modules include support for ISO 8859-2 (Latin2) of
multi-national languages when displaying and inputing in the IP Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: This feature is not applicable to the handsets on the 6757i CT and
the 9480i CT.

UTF-8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones.

5-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP
Phones.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-51

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Locking IP Phone Keys
The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard
keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When
key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked
key.
You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files only. When viewing
the locked key via the Aastra Web UI, the key is grayed out (disabled) and cannot
be changed. Locking is dynamic for XML pushes.
You use the following “locking” parameters in the configuration files to lock the
softkeys and/or programmable keys on all the phones except the 6751i. The
locking parameters impact existing softkey and programmable key parameters as
shown in the table below.
Locking Parameter

Impacted Parameters

Phone Model Affected

softkeyN locked

softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states

9480i
9480i CT
6755i
6757i
6757i CT

topsoftkeyN locked

topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line

6757i
6757i CT

prgkeyN locked

prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line

9143i
6730i
6731i
6753i
6755i

featurekeyN locked

featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label

9480i CT
6757i CT

expmodX keyN locked

expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line

5-series phones only
(not applicable to the 6730i, 6731i, and
6751i)

5-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Note: The 3-Line LCD phones prevent users from setting a speed dial
key via the Phone UI on a key that has been locked.

Locking the IP Phone Keys using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the
IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-252.

Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)
There are 4 programmable keys on the 6753i phone located to the left of the paper
label. Two additional keys (SAVE and DELETE) can be made programmable by
the Administrator, providing a total of 6 programmable keys if required.
Save Key
Delete Key
Directory
Callers List
Transfer
Conference
6753i Programmable
Keys

If a System Administrator unlocks the SAVE and DELETE keys, these keys can
be configured with the same functions that are available for the other
programmable keys. Only the System Administrator can unlock these keys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-53

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

The Save key allows you to save entries to the Directory and perform a Save-To
from the Callers List. It also allows you to save speeddial information to a
programmable key. You can also use the Save key while using specific XML
applications.
The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Directory List and Callers
List. (Must enter the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice
to delete entry).
By default, the Save and Delete keys are locked so that a user can use them for
saving and deleting only. An Administrator can unlock these keys using the
configuration files, allowing the keys to be programmed with other functions if
required. An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration
file to lock and unlock the Save and Delete keys:
•

prgkey1 locked

•

prgkey2 locked

The value of "0" unlocks the keys, and the value of "1" locks the keys. The default
is "1" (lock).
The following is an example of unlocking the Save and Delete keys using the
configuration files:
Example:
•

prgkey1 locked: 0

•

prgkey2 locked: 0

Once the Save and Delete keys are unlocked, a User can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
IMPORTANT: If you change the functions of the Save and Delete keys, and then
an Administrator locks Keys 1 and 2, the functions are automatically set back to
the default settings of "Save" and "Delete".
Note: The Save and Delete functions are limited to Key 1 and Key 2 on
the 6753i IP phone only.

5-54

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Locking and Unlocking the Save and Delete Keys using the
Configuration Files.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking the
SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)” on page A-255.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-55

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Local Dial Plan
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a
particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and
combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For
instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a
10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number.
Most PBXs support variable length dial plans that use 3 to 11 digits. Dial plans
must comply with the telephone networks to which they connect. Only totally
private voice networks that are not linked to the PSTN or to other PBXs can use
any dial plan.
The Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters. If a User enters a dial plan longer
than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan
of “x+#|xx+*”. You configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the Aastra Web UI or
the configuration files.
The IP phone SIP local dial plan available symbols are as follows:
Symbol

Description

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Digit symbol

;

Allows a secondary dial tone to be audible before dialing a
number.

X

Match any digit symbol (wildcard)

*, #, .

Other keypad symbol

|

Expression inclusive OR

+

0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression

[]

Symbol inclusive OR

-

Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols;
For example, [2-8]

;

Used when a secondary dial tone is required on the phone.
(For example, “9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial one presented

Dial Plan Example
An example of a SIP Local Dial Plan is:
[01]XXX|[2-8]XXXX|91XXXXXX
XXXX|X+.|*XX

5-56

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin
with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit
dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or
any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'.
Prefix Dialing
The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls.
You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list. The phone
automatically maps the pre-configured prepended digit in the configuration, to the
outgoing number. When a match is found, the prepended digits are added to the
beginning of the dial string and the call is dialed.
Note: The prepend digits are also added if the dialing times-out on a
partial match.

You can enable this feature by adding a prepend digit(s) to the end of the Local
Dial Plan parameter string in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI at
Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP
phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2
to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are:
•

1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminated
with “#”.)

•

6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)

•

[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”.)
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.

Example
If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan:
sip dial plan: 1+#,9

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-57

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number:
15551212

the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed
number before the number is forwarded as 915551212.
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.

SIP Dial Plan Terminator
The IP phone allows you to enable or disable the use of the “dial plan terminator”.
When you configure the phone’s dial plan to use a dial plan terminator or timeout
(such as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up
the handset or after you finish dialing the numbers on the keypad before making
the call.
You can enable or disable the dial plan terminator using Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
Digit Timeout
The IP phone allows you to configure a “Digit Timeout” feature on the IP phone.
The Digit Timeout is the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on the
IP phone’s keypad. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a key
on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the key times out
and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive keys before the
timeout occurs.

5-58

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Secondary Dial Tone
The IP phones now support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial
string, obtain a dial tone, and continue dialing. A User or Administrator can
configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone.
You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure
the secondary dial tone. The character string is of the form ".;." , where the period
indicates an arbitrary number of digits and the semicolon indicates that the phone
is to present a dial tone after the previous dialed digit. For example, in the string:
"9;xxxxx"
the user dials “9” to get the outside line, listens for the dial tone, and continues to
dial the applicable number. The “;” tells the phone to present a second dial tone
after the previously dialed digit. “The “xxxxx” in the example tells the phone that
a phone number is dialed after the secondary dial tone is audible.
You can enter the Secondary Dial Tone string in the Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You use the following parameter in the configuration files to configure a
secondary dial tone:
•

sip dial plan

Example
sip dial plan: “9;5551313”

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-59

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan, Dial Plan Terminator, and Digit
Timeout
Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-73.

5-60

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.

2

In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 512 alphanumeric characters) for the
IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits or a “;”to present a secondary dial tone if
required.
Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone
uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”.

3

Enable the "Send Dial Plan Terminator" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by
unchecking the box). Default is disabled.

4

In the "Digit Timeout (in seconds)" field, enter a timeout value. This is the length of time, in
seconds, he phone waits before dialing. Default is 4 seconds.

5

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-61

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
The IP phones (including the 6757i CT handset) have a park and pickup call
feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are
two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•

Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)

•

Using a programmable configuration
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.

The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
The following paragraph describes the park and pickup static configuration on the
IP phones.
Reference
For information on configuring the park and pickup programmable configuration
(using a key), see “Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the 6751i)” on
page 5-237.
Park/Pickup Static Configuration (8 and 11-Line LCD phones only)
Using the static method of configuring park and pickup configures these features
on a global basis for all IP phones connected in the network. You can use the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure a park/pickup static
configuration.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to statically configure
park/pickup:

5-62

•

sprecode:

•

pickupsprecode:

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following fields at Basic Settings->
Preferences to configure park/pickup statically:
•

Park Call

•

Pickup Call

How It displays on the Phone
On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following:
•

When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park"
displays on the first screen of the Phone UI.

•

After pressing the "Park" softkey to park the call, the default label of
"Pickup" displays on the first screen of the phone UI.
Note: On the 6757i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the "Park" and
"Pickup" labels.

The values you enter for the Park/Pickup feature are dependant on your type of
server. The following table provides the values you enter for the “sprecode” and
“pickupsprecode” parameters (configuration files), or "Park Call" and "Pickup
Parked Call" fields (Aastra Web UI).
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server

Park Values*

Pickup Values*

Aasterisk

70

70

Sylantro

*98

*99

BroadWorks

*68

*88

callpark

pickup

ININ PBX

*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-63

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration
(8 and 11-Line LCD phones only)
Use the following procedures to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
static configuration method.
Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the
programmable configuration, but not both.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Park and Pickup Global Settings (not applicable to 6751i))” on page A-212.

5-64

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

Enter a server value in the Park Call field to which incoming live calls will be parked.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-63.

3

Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-63.

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-65

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Suppressing DTMF Playback
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the
suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and
programmable keys.
When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or
programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit
as dialed in the LCD window.
When the suppression of DTMF playback is enabled, the IP phone dials the stored
number and displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing
the call to be dialed much faster.
DTMF playback suppression is enabled by default. Suppressing DTMF playback
can be configured using the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files.
Configuring Suppression of DTMF Playback
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Suppress DTMF
Playback Setting” on page A-198.

5-66

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is enabled.

3

Click

to save your settings.

You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4

Click on Operation->Reset.

5

In the "Restart Phone" field click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.

5-67

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Display DTMF Digits
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable
DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using
the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when
you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing. Each
key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific frequencies. One
tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones and the other from a low
frequency group.
If you enable the Display DTMF Digits parameter, the digits you are dialing from
the keypad or from a softkey or programmable key display to the IP phone’s LCD
display. This parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
You can enable the “Display DTMF Digits” parameter using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Display DTMF Digits
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display DTMF
Digits Setting” on page A-199.

5-68

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.

3

Click

to save your settings.

You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4

Click on Operation->Reset.

5

In the "Restart Phone" field click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.

5-69

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
A call waiting feature notifies the user currently on the phone, of a new incoming
call. You can disable this call waiting feature, so that the new incoming call is
automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. A User or
Administrator can configure this feature.
If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any further
incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call Forward No
Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then forward the call
according to the rule configured. The phone can only:
•

transfer the currently active call
or

•

accept transferred calls if there is no active calls.

If call waiting is disabled:
•

on the 6757i CT bases, and the handset is currently on a call, all additional
incoming calls are rejected on the handset.

•

intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected.

•

pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls.

•

the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the
incoming call is automatically rejected.

•

the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls.

•

the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are made to
the phone at one time.

You can enable/disable call waiting using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.

5-70

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Call Waiting Tone
You can also enable or disable the playing of a short “Call Waiting Tone" when
there is an incoming call on your phone. This feature is enabled by default. If you
have Call Waiting enabled, and a call comes into the line for which you are on an
active call, a tone is audible to notify you of that incoming call. The tone is also
audible to the caller to indicate to that caller you are currently on another call.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if Call Waiting is
enabled.

A User or Administrator can configure this feature. An Administrator can
configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
features on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Waiting
Settings” on page A-174.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-71

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.

2

The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature
allows you to enable or disable the call waiting feature on the IP phone.

3

The "Play Call Waiting Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This
feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting tone on the IP phone.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the “Call Waiting” tone field is enabled.

4

5-72

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Stuttered Dial Tone
You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone
Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling stuttered dial tone, see
Appendix A, the section, “Stuttered Dial Tone Setting” on page A-173.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-73

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

The "Stuttered Dial Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.

3

Click

5-74

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Beep Support
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to enable or disable a beep on the
phone with it receives a status message from an XML application. This beep can
be turned ON or OFF using the Aastra Web UI, the configuration files, or in an
XML script.
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling the XML Beep Support in an
XML script, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-319.
Configuring XML Beep Support
Use the following procedures to enable/disable XML Beep Support.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-154.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-75

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

The “XML Beep Support” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.

3

Click

5-76

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Status Scroll Delay
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to specify the time delay, in seconds,
between the scrolling of each status message (including XML status messages) on
the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before
scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Reference
For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status
messages, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-319.
Configuring Status Scroll Delay
Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-154.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-77

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

In the “Status Scroll Delay (seconds)” field, enter a value, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone. Default is 5 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 25.

3

Click

5-78

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
You can configure whether or not an incoming call interrupts an outgoing call that
is dialing. The “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) parameter or
“incoming call cancels dialing” (in config file) parameter controls this feature.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), an incoming call interrupts the
outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the
incoming call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the phone
does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number you were
dialing continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the incoming call to a
free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all remaining lines are busy) and the
LED for that line blinks. You have a choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer
the incoming call on another line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that
display. If you choose to answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish
the call, and then hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and
finish dialing out.
Notes:
1.
On the 3-Line LCD display phones, you must use the down arrow
key to ignore the call. To answer the call you must press the line key
where the call is coming in.
2.
For all models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the
phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call,
you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required.
3.
This feature works only if the User selects a line for which to dial
out. It is recommended that the Administrator always keeps Live Dialpad
ON in order for the User to have to select a line before dialing out.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-79

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Transfer/Conference Call Behavior
If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone
receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether
the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and
Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one
you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still
displays your dialing screen.
Intercom Behavior
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call, the
enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow Barge In”
setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing intercom call.
On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge In” and
“Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or conference the call.
However, the incoming call goes to an available idle line, and the LED blinks
while you are dialing the second half of the conference or transfer.
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle
line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all
conditions.
Configuring Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Use the following procedures to configure how the IP phone handles incoming
calls that interrupt outgoing dialing.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling how the IP phones
handle incoming calls that interrupt outgoing dialing, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts
Dialing Setting” on page A-168.

5-80

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-81

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Switch Focus to Ringing Line
An Administrator or User can control the behavior of the phone when it receives
an incoming call when it is already in a connected call. By default, the phone
switches focus to the ringing line to enable the user to see who is calling them.
You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the
connected call. You can do this using the “switch focus to ringing line”
parameter in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If you configure the BLF/Xfer key(s) and/or Speeddial/Xfer
key(s) on the phone, you can enable or disable the switching of the
user interface focus to ringing line while the phone is in the connected
state.

Configuring “Switch Focus to Ringing Line”
You use the following procedures to enable or disable “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”, see Appendix A, the section, “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page A-170.

5-82

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
.

“Switch Focus to Ringing Line” Parameter
2

The “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the
box.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-83

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
An Administrator or User can define a preferred line as well as a preferred
timeout. If a preferred line is selected, after a call ends (incoming or outgoing),
the display switches back to the preferred line. Next time you go off-hook, you
pickup on the preferred line. You can specify the number of seconds it takes for
the phone to switch back to the preferred line using the “preferred timeout”
parameter.
An Administrator can configure the “preferred line” and the “preferred
timeout” parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. A User
can configure these parameters using the Aastra Web UI only.
The following table provides the behavior of the preferred line focus feature with
other features on the phone.

5-84

Phone Feature

Preferred Line Behavior

call return

The phone switches back to the focused line immediately after
the call ends.

speeddial

The line is already specified when the speeddial is created. The
phone switches back immediately after the call ends.

conference

For incoming calls, the phone switches back immediately after
the call ends.

transfer

For incoming or outgoing calls, the current behavior is that the
same line used to transfer the call does not change. For incoming
calls, the phone switches back immediately after the call
transfers.

blf

The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.

park

The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.

voicemail

The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.

redial

The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.

dialing

For incomplete dialing on a non-preferred line, the focus does not
change if some digits are entered.
If no digits are entered or digits were cleared, the focus changes
to preferred line after the time out has passed without activities.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Phone Feature

Preferred Line Behavior

caller id

If the "Switch UI Focus To Ringing Line" parameter is disabled,
the User is able to see the Caller ID when the phone switches the
focus to the ringing line.

factory default

Factory default and recovery mode clears the "preferred line" and
"preferred line timeout" parameters, and the phone operates in a
non-preferred line mode.

Notes:
1.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line parameter, it
disables the preferred line focus feature.

2.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line timeout
parameter, the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately.
Configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
You use the following procedures to configure the Preferred Line and the
Preferred Line Timeout on the IP Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred
Line Timeout, see Appendix A, the section, “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page A-171.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-85

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following parameters to configure preferred line focus using the Aastra
Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

Preferred Line
Preferred Line
Timeout

2

In the “Preferred Line” field, select a preferred line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing
calls end on the phone. Valid values are:
•
•

None (disables the preferred line focus feature)
1 to 9

Default is 1.
For example, if you set the preferred line to “1”, when a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the
phone (on any line), the phone switches focus back to Line 1.

5-86

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

In the “Preferred Line Timeout” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line. Default is 0. Valid values are:
•

4

0 to 999

Click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to save your changes.

5-87

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
You can configure the Goodbye key to drop active calls or ignore incoming calls
using the “goodbye cancels incoming call” parameter. This parameter controls
the behavior of the goodbye key when the phone is on an active call and a second
call is presented to the phone.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is
the default, the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), the Goodbye key hangs up the
active call.
For 8 and 11-line LCD phones:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as “answer” and softkey 2 as
“ignore”. You can press the required softkey as applicable.
For 3-line LCD phones:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the LCD window. The
phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the DOWN arrow key, the phone
answers the incoming call.
You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Goodbye Key to Cancel Incoming Calls
Use the following procedures to configure the behavior of the Goodbye Key on
the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the behavior of the
Goodbye Key, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting” on page A-168.

5-88

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-89

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configurable Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls
When a user presses the “Ignore” key on the phones during an incoming call, the
phone rejects the incoming call with a status code of “486 Busy Here”. The IP
phones allow an administrator to configure this status code. You can configure the
status code using the configuration files only.
Note: Valid status codes are based on RFC3261.

Use the following parameter to configure a status code when ignoring incoming
calls:
•

sip ignore status code

Configuring Status Codes on Ignoring Incoming Calls
You can use the following procedure to set the status code sent in the response
when a user presses the “Ignore” key.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Status Code
on Ignoring Incoming Calls” on page A-169.

5-90

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a standard that uses Internet protocols to
enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each
other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device
configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based
on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network
to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD) in
your network. The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the
IGD. HTTP and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
You can enable the UPnP mappings to specific lines on your phone. You set this
configuration using the Aastra Web UI at Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP
Mapping Lines.
Note: UPnP must be enabled on your remote phone before you can
configure the UPnP mapping lines. For information on enabling/disabling
UPnP see Chapter 4, the section, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for
remote phones)” on page 4-50.

Configuring UPnP Mapping Lines
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP mapping on specific lines on the
IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-41.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-91

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

2

The "UPnP Mapping Lines" field is set to 0 by default. If required, change the setting to a specific
line by selecting a line from the list. Valid values are 0 through 10. The line you select is the line that
your remote phone uses to perform Universal Plug and Play on the network you are connecting to.

3

Click

5-92

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Message Waiting Indicator Line
A User or Administrator can configure the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to
illuminate for a specific line or for all lines. For example, if you configure the
MWI LED on line 3 only, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3.
If you configure the MWI LED for all lines, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is
pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
A User can configure the MWI using the Aastra Web UI only. An Administrator
can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
Use the following procedures to configure MWI on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Message
Waiting Indicator Settings” on page A-175.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-93

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.

2

In the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field, select a single line from 1 to 9, or select “All” for all
lines. If you select a single line, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on that
line. If you select all lines, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on any line
from 1 to 9.

3

Click

5-94

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

DND Key Mode
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•

Account

•

Phone

•

Custom

An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Aastra Web UI at the
path Basic Settings->Preferences->General->DND Key Mode. An Administrator
can also set the DND Key Mode using the configuration files.
Note: You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature.

Reference
For more information about how DND works and how you can use it on the
phones, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-210.
Configuring the DND Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the DND Key Mode on the phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DND Key Mode
Settings” on page A-176.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-95

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

DND Key Mode
Parameter

2

In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•

account

•

phone

•

custom

Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.

Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.

5-96

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

Configure a DND key on the phone using the procedures in the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on
page 5-210.

4

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.

Reference
For more information, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-210.

Call Forward Mode
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
•

Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.

•

Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-97

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

•

Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
the 3-line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On
the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or
copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a
CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.

The states you can set for Call Forward are All, Busy, No Answer. You can enable
different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example, you can set
different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then turn them on/
off individually. The behavior of these states is dependent on the mode (account,
phone, or custom) you configure on the phone.
Reference
For more information about how Call Forwarding works and how you can use it
on the IP Phones, see “Call Forwarding” on page 5-252.
Configuring Call Forward Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the Call Forward key mode on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Forward
Key Mode Settings” on page A-149.

5-98

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter

Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still configure Call
Forwarding via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-99

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•

•

•

account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 3-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off.
On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.

Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
3

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.

Reference
For more information, see the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-252.

5-100

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)

and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED is designed to allow for things such as:
•

Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and
Diffserv settings) leading to "plug and play" networking.

•

Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet
endpoints.

•

Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their
network devices, and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software
and hardware versions, serial / asset number).

On the IP Phones, LLDP-MED performs the following:
•

Supports the MAC/PHY configuration (e.g. speed rate/duplex mode).

•

Supports VLAN info from the network policy; this takes precedence over
manual settings.

•

Allows you to enable/disable LLDP-MED if required.

•

Allows you to configure time interval between successive LLDP Data Unit
(LLDPDU) frames.

•

Allows LLDP packets to be received from the LAN port.

•

Allows the phone to use the location information, Explicit Congestion
Notification (ECN) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), sent
by the switch, as a caller ID for making emergency calls.
Note: If the phone receives location information in ECN ELIN format
(10 to 25 numeric string), the phone replaces the caller ID SIP header
with the ECN ELIN value and the SIP URI does not change. The phone
determines if this is an emergency number by checking the emergency
dial plan configured on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-101

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

The following table identifies the configuration parameters for LLDP and ELIN
and which method you can use to configure each parameter. This table also
indicates whether the parameters can be configured by an Administrator, a User,
or both.
Parameter

Method of Configuration

Who Can Configure

lldp

Configuration Files

Administrator

lldp interval

Configuration Files

Administrator

use lldp elin

Configuration Files

Administrator

LLDP Support

IP Phone UI

Administrator

LLDP

Aastra Web UI

Administrator

LLDP Packet Interval

Aastra Web UI

Administrator

LLDP ELIN

Aastra Web UI

Administrator and User

Configuring LLDP-MED and ELIN
Use the following procedures to configure LLDP-MED and ELIN on the IP
phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “LLDP-MED and
ELIN Settings” on page A-151.

Use the following procedure to enable/disable LLDP-MED using the IP Phone
UI.
Note: You cannot configure the “LLDP Interval” or the “Use LLDP
ELIN” parameters via the IP Phone UI.

5-102

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.

2

Select Network Settings.

3

Select Ethernet & VLAN.

4

Select LLDP Support.

5

Press CHANGE to toggle the LLDP setting to Enabled or Disabled.
This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.

6

Press DONE to save the change.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-103

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following procedure to configure LLDP-MED using the Aastra Web UI:

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

LLDP

LLDP Packet Interval

2

The “LLDP” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP, click the check mark in the box to clear
the check mark.

3

In the “LLDP Packet Interval” field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of
LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets.
The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 30.

4

5-104

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

Select Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

Use LLDP ELIN

6

The “Use LLDP ELIN” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP ELIN, click the check mark in
the box to clear the check mark.
This field enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.

7

Click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to save your changes.

5-105

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In
The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP
phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call.
Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server
(server-side).
You can configure incoming and outgoing intercom calls on all phone models. A
User can configure incoming intercom calls only.
Outgoing Intercom Calls
On outgoing intercom calls, an available unused line is found when the Icom
button is pressed. Since this line has no configuration, the phone applies an
existing configuration ("Outgoing Intercom Settings", Line, default is Line 1) to
this line in preparation for placing the intercom call. For example, an outgoing
intercom call can use the configuration of line 1 but places the actual intercom call
using line 9. Only an Administrator can configure outgoing intercom calls.
A phone-side Intercom call indicates the phone is responsible for telling the
recipient that an intercom call is being placed, while a server-side intercom call
means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient. Server-side calls
require additional configuration of a prefix code. After pressing the Icom button
and entering the number to call, the phone automatically adds the prefix to the
called number and sends the outgoing call via the server.
For outgoing intercom calls, an administrator can configure the following
parameters:
Configuration File Parameters

Web UI Parameters

•

sip intercom type

•

Type)

•

sip intercom prefix code

•

Prefix Code

•

sip intercom line

•

Line

Note: To configure outgoing intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-108.

5-106

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Incoming Intercom Calls
You can configure how the phone handles incoming intercom calls. You can
receive incoming intercom calls whether or not there are active calls on the phone.
The way the phone handles the call depends on the incoming intercom call
configuration. The following paragraphs describe the configuration parameters for
incoming intercom calls.
Microphone Mute
You can mute or unmute the microphone on the IP phone for intercom calls made
by the originating caller. If you want to mute the intercom call, you enable this
feature. If you want to unmute (or hear the intercom call), you disable this feature.
Auto-Answer/Play Warning Tone
The auto-answer feature on the IP phone allows you to enable or disable
automatic answering for an Intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone
automatically answers an incoming intercom call. If “Play Warning Tone” is also
enabled, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom
call. If “Auto-Answer” is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
“Delay” before Auto-Answer
The IP Phones include support for the "delay" parameter (in the Alert-Info header,
used in conjunction with info=alert-autoanswer) in order to facilitate auto-answer
functionality. When present, the value of the "delay" parameter specifies the
length of time in seconds an IP phone rings before a call is auto-answered. If this
value of the "delay" parameter set to 0 (delay=0), then an incoming call is
immediately auto-answered. The absence of the parameter is considered as ring
forever.
In order for the delay functionality to operate, you must first enable Auto-Answer
on the IP Phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-107

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Allow Barge In
You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call
to interrupt an active call. The “sip intercom allow barge in” parameter controls
this feature. When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in parameter
(1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default value, an incoming
intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by placing the active call on
hold and automatically answering the intercom call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), and there is an active call, the
phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the call
warning tone. You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
For incoming intercom calls, an administrator or user can configure the following
parameters:
Configuration File Parameters

Web UI Parameters

•

sip allow auto answer

•

Auto-Answer

•

sip intercom mute mic

•

Microphone Mute

•

sip intercom warning tone

•

Play Warning Tone

•

sip intercom allow barge in

•

Barge In

Note: To configure incoming intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-108.

Configuring Intercom Calls Settings
You can configure the Intercom feature using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: An administrator can configure the incoming and outgoing
Intercom feature. A user can configure the incoming Intercom feature
only.

5-108

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for outgoing Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Outgoing Intercom Settings” on page A-200.
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for incoming Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Incoming Intercom Settings” on page A-202.

Aastra Web UI
Outgoing intercom settings
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings.

2

Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box.
Valid values are Phone-Side, Server-Side, Off. Default is Off.

3

If Server-Side is selected, enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the "Prefix Code" field.
Note: For Sylantro servers, enter *96.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-109

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP
phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call.
Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is
made using the first available line at the time of the call.

5

Click

to save your changes.

Incoming intercom settings:
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Incoming Intercom Settings.

2

The "Auto-Answer" field is enabled by default. The automatic answering feature is turned on for the
IP phone for answering Intercom calls. To disable this field, uncheck the box.\
Note: If the Auto-Answer field is not checked (disabled), the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.

3

The "Microphone Mute" field is enabled by default. The microphone is muted on the IP phone for
Intercom calls made by the originating caller. To disable this field, uncheck the box.

4

The "Play Warning Tone" field is enabled by default. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone plays a
warning tone when it receives in incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.

5-110

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

The "Allow Barge In" field is enabled by default. If an active line on the phone receives an incoming
intercom call, the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming
intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.

6

Click

to save your changes.

Group Paging RTP Settings
An Administrator or User can configure a specific key (softkey, programmable
key, or expansion module key) on the phone that allows you to send/receive a
Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from pre-configured multicast
address(es) without involving SIP signaling. This is called Group Paging on the IP
phones. You can specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses.
An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration files to set
Group Paging RTP Settings:
•

paging group listening

•

softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type

•

sofkeyN label

•

softkeyN value, topsoftkeyN value, prgkeyN value, or expmodX keyN
value

An Administrator or User can use the following parameters in the Aastra Web UI
to set Group Paging RTP Settings:
•

Paging Listen Addresses (Path: Basic Settings->Preferences->Group
Paging RTP Settings)

•

 Key (Operation->Softkeys and XML, Programmable Keys, or
Expansion Module Keys)
Note: The Group Paging RTP Settings are dependant upon the setting for
the “Allow Barge In” parameter.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-111

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

How it works
After pressing a configured “Paging” key on the phone, the Phone sends RTP to a
preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). Any phone in the local network
then listens for RTP on the preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). For both
sending and receiving of the multicast RTP there is no sip signaling involved. The
Phone displays the multicast RTP sent/received address(es) to the user.
Note: Multicast RTP is one way only - from sender to the receiver (i.e.
from sender to the multicast address(es) (receiver)).

The phone uses a preconfigured G711 uLaw CODEC for multicast RTP.
For Paging Systems, the phone only plays RTP traffic; users have the ability to
drop a rogue page. The recipient can drop the incoming page if required. The
recipient can also set Do Not Disturb (DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
Note: For outgoing RTP multicasts, all other existing calls on the phone
are put on hold.

For incoming RTP multicasts, the ringing display is dependant on the “Allow
Barge-In” parameter. If this parameter is disabled, and there is not other call

on the phone, then the paging is automatically played via the preferred
audio device (see the model-specific IP Phone User Guide for setting
Audio Mode on the phone).
If there is an existing call on the phone, the call initially displays in the ringing
state. The user has the option to accept/ignore the call. If the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter is enabled, the RTP multicast call barges in, and any existing calls are
put on hold.
If an RTP multicast session already exists on the phone, and the phone receives
another incoming RTP multicast session, the priority is given to the first multicast
session and the second multicast session is ignored. The behavior for the
incoming calls in this case is also based on the setting for the “Allow Barge-in”
parameter. The incoming call is handled as if there were an existing call already
on the phone.

5-112

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Group Paging RTP Settings
Use the following procedure to configure Group Paging RTP Settings using the
configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Group Paging
RTP Settings” on page A-204.

Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications
using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Group Paging RTP Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-113

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

In the “Paging Listen Addresses” text box, enter the multicast IP address(es) and port number on
which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets.
Note: Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (for example,
224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000) If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the
phone.

3

Click on Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Expansion Module Keys.

4

Choose a key that you want to assign as the Paging Key and select Paging from the “Type” field.

5

In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Paging key (for example, “Group 1”).

5-114

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

In the “Value” field, enter a multicast IP address(es) and a port number for the Paging key. When you
press this key, the phone initiates an outgoing multicast RTP session to the specified address(es)
using the specified port. (For example, 224.0.0.2:10000).
Note: When you select Paging for the “Type” field, the “Line” field and state fields are disabled.

7

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-115

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using the Configured Paging Key on the IP Phone
The following procedure describes the use of the Paging key. The procedures
assumes you have already configured the Paging key using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Notes:
1.
Recipient of a Paging call can set a global “Do Not Disturb”
(DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
2.
For incoming Paging, the phones use the Intercom configuration
settings. The incoming Page is dependant on the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter setting and the “Idling/On Call” state.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action
On the IP Phone, press the key you configured for Paging (labeled as “Group 1” in the following
illustration).
Services
Dir
Callers

Icom

Tues Jan1 10:00am

Group 1
LAB
ACD

The phone opens a multicast RTP session and an outgoing OR incoming phone screen displays as
follows:

Paging

00:01

Drop

Press the Drop key to end the multicast RTP session and return to the idle screen.
Note: If you enable global DND on the phone, the incoming multicast RTP session is dropped.

5-116

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Key Mapping
There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are
configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific
User Guide for more information about these key functions.
Notes:
1.
On 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, the Xfer and Conf
keys are hard-coded by default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the
LCD display and cannot be reassigned. The Xfer and Conf labels
display when you lift the handset. To disable these keys, see
“Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys” on page 5-117.

2.

On the 3-Line LCD phones, the Xfer and Conf keys are
assigned by default to available keys, respectively. These keys are
programmable keys and can be reassigned if applicable. To disable
these keys, see “Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys”
on page 5-117.

Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys
You can enable or disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys as required using the
following parameters in the configuration files:
•

redial disabled

•

conference disabled

•

call transfer disabled

Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled).
If this parameter is set to 1, the key is not active and is ignored if pressed by the
user. For "redial disabled" the value of 1 does not save the dialed number to the
"Redial List".
If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user.
This feature is configurable via the configuration files only.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-117

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-214.

Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speeddials
You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial
keys. When the Redial or Conference key is pressed, the number configured for
the key automatically speed dials. If no number is configured, the Redial and
Conference keys return to their original functionality.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If you configure the Redial and Conference keys for speeddialing
on the 6757i CT Base Station, the Redial and Conference keys on the
6757i CT handset retain their original functionality. The Redial and
Conference keys on the handset are not configured for speeddial.

Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as speeddial keys.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-214.

5-118

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.

2

In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will
use to speeddial when the Redial key is pressed.

3

Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the
Conf Key is pressed.

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-119

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial”
The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to
quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can:
•

Press the REDIAL key twice to redial the last number dialed.

•

Press the REDIAL key once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the
REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen.

The “last number redial” feature for the Redial key is static and is not
configurable.
Note: You can use the Redial key during active calls.

5-120

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Ring Tones and Tone Sets
You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones.
Ring Tones
There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set
on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a
per-line basis.
The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of
configuration method.
Ring Tone Settings Table
Configuration Method
Configuration Files

IP Phone UI

Valid Values

Default Value

Global:
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)

Global:
0 (tone 1)

Per-Line:
-1 (global)
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)

Per-Line:
-1 (global)

Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5

Global:
Tone 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-121

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuration Method
Aastra Web UI

5-122

Valid Values

Default Value

Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent

Global:
Tone 1

Per-Line:
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent

Per-Line:
Global

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Ring Tone Sets
In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the
IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country. The
ring tone sets you can configure on the IP phones are:
•

US (Default - also used in Canada)

•

Australia

•

Europe (generic tones)

•

France

•

Germany

•

Italy

•

Mexico

•

Brazil

•

United Kingdom (UK)

•

Russia

When you configure the country's tone set, the country-specific tone is heard on
the phone for the following:
- dial tone
- secondary dial tone
- ring tone
- busy tone
- congestion tones
- call waiting tone
- ring cadence pattern
IMPORTANT: You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Aastra Web UI,
IP Phone UI, or configuration files. However, when using the IP phone UI, you
can set global configuration only.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-123

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP
phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section,
“Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-165 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-167.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

For global configuration only:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Preferences.

3

Select Tones.

4

Select Set Ring Tone.

5

Select the type of ring tone (Tone 1 through Tone 5, or Silent).

6

Press Done to save the change.

7

Select Tone Set.

8

Select the country for which you want to apply the tone set.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, Brazil, Russian, UK, and US.
Default is US.

9

5-124

Press Done to save the change.
The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.

For global configuration:
2

In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, Brazil, Russia, UK, and US.
Default is US.

3

Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field.
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-121 for valid values.

For per-line configuration:
4

In the "Ring Tone" section, select a line for which you want to set ring tone.

5

Select a value from the "LineN" field.
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-121 for valid values.

6

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-125

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Priority Alerting
Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger
pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones.
You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk,
Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra
Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only.
How Priority Alerting Works
When the IP phone detects an incoming call, the phone firmware inspects the
INVITE request in the IP packet for an "Alert-Info" header.
If it contains an "Alert-Info" header, the firmware strips out the URL and keyword
parameter and maps it to the appropriate Bellcore tone.
If there is no keyword parameter in the "Alert-Info" header, or the INVITE
message contains no "Alert-Info" header, then the IP phone firmware uses the
Bellcore standard ring tone.
Asterisk/Broadworks Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for an Asterisk
and Broadworks server are:
Asterisk/Broadworks Server
Ring Tone Keywords
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5

When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone maps the keywords to the default ring tone
patterns.
Example
The following are examples of the the Asterisk/Broadworks Server ring tone
keywords:
Alert-Info: 
or
Alert-Info: 
5-126

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Sylantro Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro
server are:
Sylantro Server
Ring Tone Keywords
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority

When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro
server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone pattern based on the configuration
you set in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Ring Tone Patterns
In IP Telephony, different ringing patterns have different frequencies and
cadences. Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party, before
they pick up the call.
On the IP phones, if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone uses the following Bellcore-specified tones by
default:
Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/Broadworks Servers)
Call Criteria

Bellcore Tones

internal calls

Bellcore-dr2

external calls

Bellcore-dr3

calls with contact list

Bellcore-dr4

calls with specific time frames

Bellcore-dr5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-127

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the
Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria:
Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers)
Call criteria

Bellcore tones for each call criteria

alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

A System Administrator can configure the ring tone cadences if required, using
the configuration files. The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring
tone patterns and cadences.
Nominal
Duration
(ms)

Maximum
Duration
(ms)

2s On
4s Off

1800
3600

2000
4000

2200
4400

Ringing
Silent

Long

630
315

800
400

1025
525

Ringing
Silent

Long
Long

630
3475

800
4000

1025
4400

Ringing
Silent

Short

315
145

400
200

525
525

Ringing
Silent

Short

315
145

400
200

525
525

Ringing
Silent

Long

630
2975

800
4000

1025
4400

Ringing
Silent

Short

200
145

300
200

525
525

Ringing
Silent

Long

800
145

1000
200

1100
525

Ringing
Silent

Short

200
2975

300
4000

525
4400

450

500

550

Pattern

(Standard)

1

Ringing
Silent

Bellcore-dr2

2

Bellcore Tone

Bellcore-dr3

Bellcore-dr4

Bellcore-dr5
5-128

Cadence

Minimum
Duration
(ms)

Pattern
ID

3

4

5

Ringing

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD)
feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call,
the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are
enabled.

Mexican and Brazilian Tone Set Cadences
The following are Mexican tone set cadences.
Tone

Frequency (Hz)

Cadence (on/off)

Dial

425

Continuous

Secondary Dial

425

300/100/300/1300

Ringing

425

1000/4000

Busy

425

500/500

Congestion

425

250/250

Call Waiting

425

100/100/100/10000

Ring Cadence

1000/4000

Brazilian Tone Set Cadences
The following are Brazilian tone set cadences.
Tone

Frequency (Hz)

Cadence (on/off)

Dial

425

Continuous

Secondary Dial

425

300/100/300/1300

Ringing

425

1000/4000

Busy

425

250/250

Congestion

425

500/500

Call Waiting

425

100/100/100/10000

Ring Cadence

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

1000/4000

5-129

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Russian Tone Set Cadences
The following are Russian tone set cadences.
Cadence (ms)
tone pause tone

Tone

Frequency (Hz, dBm0)

Note

Dial

425, -10

Special Dial

425, -10

500/50

Repetitive

Busy

425, -10

500/500

Repetitive

Ringing

425, -10

1000/4000

Repetitive

Congestion

425, -10

200/200

Repetitive

Call Waiting

425, -10

200/600/200

Non-repetitive

Continuous

Configuring Priority Alerting and Ring Tone Cadences using the
Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting and ring tone cadences
on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
• “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-177.
• “Bellcore Cadence Settings” on page A-182.

Note: You can configure Bellcore cadences using the configuration files
only.

5-130

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web
UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.

2

In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).

For Sylantro Servers:
3

Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

4

Group
Internal
External
Emergency
Priority
auto call distribution
community-1
community-2
community-3
community-4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-131

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Call Waiting Tones
Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when
you are already on the phone. A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you
can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold.
The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones.
Bellcore
Call-Waiting Tone

Pattern
ID

Pattern

Minimum
Duration
(ms)

Nominal
Duration
(ms)

Maximum
Duration
(ms)

CallWaitingTone 1

1

Tone On

270

300

330

Bellcore-dr2
CallWaitingTone2

2

Tone On
Tone Off

90
90

100
100

110
110

Bellcore-dr3
CallWaitingTone3

3

Tone On
Tone Off

90
90

100
100

110
110

Tone On
Tone Off
Tone On
Tone Off

90
90
90
90

100
100
100
100

110
110
110
110

Tone On
Tone Off

270
90

300
100

330
110

Bellcore-dr4
CallWaitingTone4

4

For Asterisk and Broadworks servers, call waiting tones are specified by the
default Bellcore tones indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/
Broadworks Servers) on page -127.
For Sylantro servers, call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you
configure in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. See the table Ring Tone
Pattern (Sylantro Servers) on page -128.
Reference
For more information about enable/disabling call waiting on the IP Phone, see the
section, “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-70.

5-132

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call
on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the
Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways:
•

With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by
the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone. (For more
information about BLF, see “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page -171

•

Using XML, a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list
and then pressing a “Pickup” softkey/programmable key. To use the Directed
call pickup feature from an XML application, you must list all ringing
extensions using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu XML object in an XML
script. This allows the user to select the ringing extension from a text menu
without having to dial. The following illustration shows an example of how
this feature displays to the LCD from an XML application.:

Ringing Extensions
201
212
225
234

Pickup

Done
Reference
For more information about using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, contact
Aastra Customer Support regarding the “Aastra XML Development Guide.”

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-133

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension.
The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the
monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed
call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming
call on the monitored extension.
Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support
this feature. For details about Asterisk support, contact Aastra Technical
Support.

Directed Call Pickup Prefix (optional)
The optional “directed call pickup prefix” allows you to enter a specific prefix
string (depending on what is available on your server), that the phone
automatically dials when dialing the Directed Call Pickup number. For example,
for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the “directed call pickup
prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed Call Pickup after pressing a BLF
or BLF/List softkey, the phone prepends the *98 value to the designated extension
of the BLF or BLF/List softkey when dialing out.
How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is enabled with BLF or
BLF/List
1.

Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.

2.

Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.

3.

If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it picks up the ringing line on
Phone B.

4.

Phone C connects to Phone A.

How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is disabled with BLF or
BLF/List

5-134

1.

Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.

2.

Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.

3.

If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it performs a speeddial to
Phone B.

4.

Phone C and Phone A are ringing Phone B on separate lines (if available).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Notes:
1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over
BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call
Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server, the
Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix
code exists in the configuration.

2.

You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List.

3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension
number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension =
1234).
You can enable/disable “Directed Call Pickup” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: The “Directed Call Pickup” feature is disabled by default.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-135

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature
on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-209.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.

2

Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)

3

(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.

5-136

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".

5

Click

to save your changes.

Configuring BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
in the configuration files.
Note: You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-136.

Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the sections:
• “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.
• “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-256.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-137

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call
Pickup in the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.

2

Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.

3

(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.

4

Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".

5-138

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.

6

Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.

7

In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-139

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
8

For 8 and 11-Line LCD softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.

9

In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.

10

Click

11

In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.

12

In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, my6757i-blf-list@as.broadworks.com.

to save your changes.

Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled.
13

Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the BLF
softkey or programmable key.

14

Click

5-140

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
configuration files.
Notes:
1.
Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML
application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable
key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the
“Value” field of the XML key. For information about creating an XML
script, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)”
on page F-6.

2.
You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-136.

Configuration Files
To set XML in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-141

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.

2

Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.

3

(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.

4

Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".

5-142

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.

6

Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.

7

In the "Type" field, select "XML”.

8

For 8 and 11-Line LCD softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-143

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
9

In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD.
For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$.
Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see
Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6.

10

Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the XML
softkey or programmable key.

11

Click

5-144

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
You can configure the softkeys, programmable keys, feature keys, and expansion
module keys that are applicable to a specific phone model, to perform specific
functions on the IP phones.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys in the configuration files,
the “#” sign must be enclosed in quotes.

Softkeys (8 and 11-Line LCD phones)
The 9480i, 9480i CT, and 6755i IP phone have 6 softkeys you can configure to
perform specific functions, The 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones have 12 softkeys
you can configure. With up to 3 expansion modules attached to a 67xi model
phone, you can get an additional 108 softkeys (M670i) or an additional 180
softkeys (M675i) to configure. The following table provides the number of
softkeys you can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of
phone.
IP Phone
Model

Softkeys

Expansion Module
Keys

Programmable
Keys

Lines
Available

Handset
Keys
Available

9480i

6

Not Applicable

-

9

-

9480i CT

6

Not Applicable

-

9

15

6755i

6

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6

9

-

-

9

-

-

9

15

60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i

12

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

6757i CT

12

36 to 108* on Base
Station
(Model M670i)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model M675i)

*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for all 67xi model phones EXCEPT the 6751i.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-145

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

State-Based Softkeys (8 and 11-Line LCD phones only)
Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey
is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include:
•

idle - The phone is not being used.

•

connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold)

•

incoming - The phone is ringing.

•

outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing.

•

busy - The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as
“Do Not Disturb”.

The following table identifies the applicable default states for each type of
softkey you can configure on the IP phone.
Softkey Type

Default States

None

All states disabled.

Line

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Speeddial

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

DND

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

BLF

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

BLF List

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Auto Call
Distribution
(ACD)

idle

Directed Call
Pickup (DCP)

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Group Call
Pickup (GCP)

5-146

XML

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Flash

All states disabled.

Sprecode

connected

Park

connected

Pickup

idle, outgoing

Last Call Return

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkey Type

Default States

Call Forward

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

BLF/Xfer

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Speeddial/Xfer

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Directory

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Callers List

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Intercom

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Services

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

Phone Lock

All states disabled.

Paging

All states disabled.

Empty

idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy

You can enable or disable the softkey states using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the Aastra Web UI, you disable a state by unchecking the box
for that operational state.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to enable and disable
operational states:
•

softkeyN states

You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter. For example:
softkeyN states: idle connected

You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey. In the
following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated with softkey 12:
softkey12
softkey12
softkey12
softkey12

type: speeddial
label: voicemail
value *89
states: outgoing

Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other
softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle
screen at all. For more information about the softkey type of "empty" see
Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 8 and 11-Line LCD
phones” on page A-219.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-147

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuration Example
The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and
the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only
the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown.
softkey1
softkey1
softkey3
softkey3
softkey4
softkey5
softkey5
softkey6
softkey6

type: line
states: idle connected
type: dnd
states: idle
type: line
type: empty
states: connected
type: speeddial
states: connected

The following table shows how the keys in the example above would display on
the IP Phone UI.
Note: The "empty" key type allows a softkey to be removed quickly by
deleting the softkey information from the configuration file.

Softkey

Idle

Connected

Notes

softkey1

Key 1

Key 2

Line displays for softkey1.
Key 1 in connected state is the Drop key. Idle
and connected display as applicable.

softkey2

(not used)

(not used)

Softkey2 is not displayed.

softkey3

Key 2

(not used)

DND displays for softkey3. Idle displays as
applicable.

softkey4

Key 3

Key 3

Line displays for softkey4. Default state
values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing)
display as applicable.

softkey5

(not used)

Key 4 (blank)

A blank displays for softkey5. Connected
displays as applicable.

softkey6

(not used)

Key 5

Speeddial displays for softkey6. Connected
displays as applicable.

Softkeys and programmable keys are configurable using the Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.

5-148

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Programmable Keys (9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, 6755i)
The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you
can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Softkeys

Expansion Module
Keys

Programmable
Keys

Lines
Available

Handset
Keys
Available

9143i

-

Not Applicable

7

9

-

6730i

-

Not Applicable

8

6

-

6730i

-

Not Applicable

8

6

-

6753i

-

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6**

9

-

6755i

6

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6

9

-

IP Phone
Model

60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling
108 softkeys.
**On the 6753i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed only if
Administrator allows.

Softkey/Programmable Key/Expansion Module Key Functions
You can configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones and any
attached expansion module keys to perform specific functions using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies the
available functions of the softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion module
keys on the IP phones. Available functions may vary on each model phone.
The following Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on
the IP Phones and Expansion Modules.
Note: These functions apply to all model phones unless specifically
indicated that the function does not apply. The 6751i IP Phone does not
have programmable keys or softkeys.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-149

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Key Functions Table
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function

Configuration
File Parameter

Aastra Web UI
Parameter

Description

None

none

None

Indicates not setting for the key.

Line

line

Line

Indicates the key is configured for line use.

Speeddial

speeddial

Speeddial

Indicates the key is configured for speeddial
use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a
specific number. Optionally, you can also
configure a speeddial key to dial prefix
numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey,
and the phone waits for you to enter the
remaining numbers to dial out.
For more information about speeddial prefixes,
see “Speeddial Prefixes” on page 5-169.
You can also create speeddial keys and edit
the keys using the IP Phone keypad. For more
information about speeddial keys and editing
speeddial keys, see your Model-specific User
Guide for more information.

Busy Lamp Field
(BLF)

blf

BLF

Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) use. A user can dial out on a BLF
configured key. You can also set a BLF
subscription period.
For more information about BLF, see the
section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on
page 5-171.
For more information about BLF Subscription
Period, see “BLF Subscription Period” on
page 5-177.

5-150

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Busy Lamp Field
List

Configuration
File Parameter
list

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
BLF/List

Description
Indicates the key is configured for BLF list use.
A user can dial out on a BLF\List configured
key.
For more information on BLF, see the section
“Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-171.

Auto Call
acd
Distribution (ACD)

Auto Call
Distribution

(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for automatic call distribution
(ACD). ACD allows the Sylantro Server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP
Phones (agents). You can also set an ACD
subscription period.
For more information about ACD, see the
section “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for
Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-189.
For more information about ACD subscription
period, see “ACD Subscription Period” on
page 5-199.

Directed Call
dcp
Pickup (DCP)/
Group Call Pickup
(GCP)

Directed Call
Pickup

(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for either Directed Call Pickup or
Group Call Pickup. The DCP/GCP feature
allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a
monitored extension(s).
For more information about DCP/GCP, see the
section “Directed Call Pickup/Group Call
Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-203.

Do Not Disturb
(DND)

dnd

Do Not Disturb

Indicates key is configured for "do not disturb"
use.
For more information on DND, see the section
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-210.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-151

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function

Configuration
File Parameter

Extensible Markup xml
Language) (XML)

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
XML

Description
Indicates the key is configured to accept an
XML application for accessing customized
XML services. You can also specify a URL for
an XML key.
For more information on XML, see the section
“XML Customized Services” on page 5-319.

Flash

flash

Flash

Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 6757i CT handset. The
IP phone generates flash events only when a
call is connected and there is an active RTP
stream (for example, when the call is not on
hold).
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Model-specific User Guide.

Sprecode

sprecode

Sprecode

Indicates the key is set to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server.
For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is
configured, then by pressing the key, *82
automatically activates a service provided by
the server. The value you enter for this field is
dependent on the services provided by the
server.
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Model-specific User Guide.

Park

park

Park

Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
For more information on park, see the section
“Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the
6751i)” on page 5-237.

Pickup

pickup

Pickup

Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
For more information on pickup, see the
section “Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to
the 6751i)” on page 5-237.

5-152

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Last Call Return
(LCR)

Configuration
File Parameter
lcr

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Last Call Return

Description
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is set
to be used to dial the last call that came in on
that line.
For more information on lcr, see the section
“Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-248.

Call Forward

callforward

Call Forward

Indicates the key is set to be used to access
the Call Forward menus on the phone.
For more information about call forwarding,
see the section “Call Forwarding” on
page 5-252.

BLF/Xfer

blf/xfer

Call Forward

Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF
key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the BLF/Xfer
feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-179.

Speeddial/Xfer

speeddial/xfer

Speeddial/Xfer

Indicates the key is set to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the Speeddial/Xfer
feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-179.

Speeddial/Conf

speeddial/conf

Speeddial/Conf

Indicates the key is set to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a conference key.
For more information about the Speeddial/
Conf feature, see the section “Speeddial/
Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)”
on page 5-185.

Callers List

callers

Callers List

Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page 5-296.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-153

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Directory

Configuration
File Parameter
directory

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Directory

Description
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
For more information about the Directory List,
see the section “Directory List” on page 5-305.

Icom

icom

Intercom

Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key. For more information about
using the Intercom key, see your
model-specific Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-106.

Conference

conf

Conference

(Applicable to the
6753i only)

Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Model-specific
User’s Guide.
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-366.

Transfer

xfer

Transfer

(Applicable to the
6753i only)
Services

Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
For more information about using the Xfer key,
see your Model-specific User’s Guide.

services

Services

Indicates the key is set to access Services,
such as, Directory List, Callers List, Voicemail,
and any other XML applications configured on
the phone.
For more information about using the Services
key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.

5-154

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Phone Lock

Configuration
File Parameter
phone lock

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Phone Lock

(Not applicable to
the cordless
handsets on CT
models)
Paging

Description
Indicates the key is configured as a phone lock
key, allowing you to press this key to lock/
unlock the phone.
For more information about the lock/unlock
key, see “Locking IP Phone Keys” on
page 5-52.

paging

Paging

Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging
on the phone. Pressing this key automatically
sends a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
stream to pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling.
For more information about the Paging key,
see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on
page 5-111.

Empty

empty

(Not applicable to
programmable keys
or expansion
module keys)

Empty

Indicates the key is configured to force a blank
entry on the IP phone display for a specific
key. If a particular key is not defined, it is
ignored.
For more information about empty keys, see
your Model-specific User’s Guide.

Reference
For more information about key functions for your model phone, see your
Model-specific User’s Guide.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-155

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys
on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-156

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.

2

Select a key to configure.

For Softkeys and Expansion Module Keys:
3

In the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

4

If applicable, enter a label in the “Label” field.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-157

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

If applicable, in the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.

6

If applicable, in the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey.

7

Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states.
Operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used.
To enable/disable an operational state, click the "Idle", "Connected", "Incoming", or "Outgoing"
fields to check or uncheck the box.
Note: Operational states are not applicable to expansion modules.

8

Click

to save your changes.

For programmable keys:
9

In the “Hard Key” field, select the programmable key type you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

10

In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the programmable key. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.

11

In the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the programmable key.

12

Click

5-158

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys
In addition to the softkeys on the 6757i CT, this phone also has handset keys you
can configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure
the handset keys.
Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI
(Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the
handset.

You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT handset with specific
functions using the Aastra Web UI.
The following table identifies the functions available for all 15 handset keys and
the default functions for each key.
Handset Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Key Function
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Icom
Dir
Callers
Xfer
Conf
Public
None

12

None

13

None

14

None

15

None

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Description
Line 1 key - Selects line one
Line 2 key - Selects line two
Line 3 key - Selects line three
Line 4 key - Selects line four
Icom key – Enter handset list to select handset to call
Directory key – Activate directory feature
Callers key – Activate callers feature
Transfer key - Activate transfer feature
Conference key - Activate conference feature
Public key – Toggle between public & private call mode
No function selected. Line 5 key (if available) - Selects line
five.
No function selected. Line 6 key (if available) - Selects line
six.
No function selected. Line 7 key (if available) - Selects line
seven.
No function selected. Line 8 key (if available) - Selects line
eight.
No function selected. Line 9 key (if available) - Selects line
nine.

5-159

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Feature Key Programming Guidelines
The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the
handset:
•

All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed
functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets
paired with that base.

•

A newly registered handset or handset that was out-of-range during the
programming needs to perform an "off-hook and on-hook" sequence in order
for the newly programmed function to be broadcasted to the affected
handsets. Simply press the v key from the idle state to go off-hook. Then,
press the y key to go back on-hook.

•

Duplicate functions can exist in the feature key as there is no filtering or
duplicate checking done on the handset or the base.

•

If no line keys are programmed for the feature key, the handset is restricted to
intercom calls only.

•

If all 12 programmable functions have been programmed to "None", the user
is presented with a List empty message when the feature key is pressed.

List empty
Use web page to
configure

5-160

•

For security reasons, the user has 180 seconds (3 minutes) to complete the
programming. Otherwise, the phone displays the following error:
** Error **: Session expired, Please reload page.

•

For security reasons, the user must submit the page from the same browser
that was used to load the page. If the user tries to submit the page from any
other IP address, the following error displays:
** Error ** Session invalid. Different Client IP Addresses. — Please reload
page

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Handset Feature Key Functions
You can configure the features keys on the 6757i CT handset to perform specific
functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.The following table
identifies the available functions for the feature keys on the 6757i CT handset.
The following Handset Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the
keys on the 6757i CT IP Phone.
Handset Key Functions Table
Feature Key
Function
None

Configuration
File Parameter
none

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
None

Description
Indicates the key is disabled.
This option is available from Web UI only.

Line

line

Line

Indicates the key is configured for line use.

icom

Icom

Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key.

(Lines 1 through 9
are available for
selection)
Icom

For more information about the Icom key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-106.
Directory

dir

Dir

Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
For more information about the Directory List,
see the section “Directory List” on page -305.

Callers

callers

Callers

Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page -296.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-161

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Feature Key
Function
Transfer

Configuration
File Parameter
xfer

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Xfer

Description
Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
For more information about the Xfer key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.

Park

park

Park

Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
For more information on park, see the section
“Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the
6751i)” on page 5-237.

Pickup

pickup

PickUp

Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
For more information on pickup, see the
section “Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to
the 6751i)” on page 5-237.

Conference

conf

Conf

Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Aastra IP Phone
6757i CT User’s Guide.
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-366.

5-162

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Feature Key
Function
Public

Configuration
File Parameter
public

Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Public

Description
Indicates the key is configured to toggle from
public to private mode. A public and private
key can be used when at a line item in the
Directory List. The Private key toggles a
number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory
List to be sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT
accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the
public attribute.
For more information about the public/private
keys, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT
User’s Guide.

Flash

flash

Flash

Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 6757i CT cordless
handset. The IP phone generates flash events
only when a call is connected and there is an
active RTP stream (for example, when the call
is not on hold).
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.

Reference
For more information about features key functions for your 6757i CT, see your
Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-163

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Handset Feature Keys
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT IP phone using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program
the feature keys on your 6757i CT Base Station and all paired handsets.
Use the following procedures to configure the IP phone handset feature keys.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Handset Feature Key Settings (9480i CT and 6757i CT)” on page A-240.

5-164

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Handset Keys.

2

Select the handset key you want to program.

3

Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field.

4

Click

to save the function you selected to the handset key.

The key programming information is sent to the 6757i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets
associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s
list.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-165

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI
An Administrator can configure which key types display in the Aastra Web UI list
for a Softkey, Programmable Key, Expansion Module Key, and/or Feature Key
(CT Models). Currently, in the Aastra Web UI for a phone, you can select a type of
key from a list of approximately 26 key types to assign to a softkey,
programmable key, expansion module key, and/or feature key.
Using the configuration files, you can specify key types to display in the key type
list that apply to a User’s environment.

List of Available Keys Types

5-166

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Example of a
List of Configured Keys Types
(None, Line, XML, Empty)

In addition to being able to specify which key types display in the list, the
Administrator can also determine in which order the key types display.
You can use the following configuration file parameters to control which key
types to display and specify in which order to display them in:
•

softkey selection list

•

feature key selection list

If no value is specified for the “softkey selection list” and/or “feature key
selection list” parameters, the key “Type” list displays all of the key types by
default.
If an Administrator configures specific key types for a phone in the configuration
file, and the phone for which he downloads the configuration to already has key
types configured on it, those key types display in the key list for those keys, in
addition to the key types specified by the Administrator. For example, a phone has
a Park key and a Pickup key already configured on the phone, and the
Administrator downloads a configuration file to the phone that has specific key
types of None, Line, Speeddial, and XML. After the configuration file is
downloaded, the Park key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Park;
the Pickup key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Pickup; all other
keys that were configured as None before the download will show only None,
Line, Speeddial, and XML.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-167

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Notes:
1.
Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone are
ignored.
2.
The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 1 and 2 on
the 6753i and 9143i, and as Keys 5 and 6 on the 6730i and 6731i, unless
your Administrator configured these keys as other functions.
3.
An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the
key types in the configuration files.
5.
After configuring specific key types for a phone, the key types in
the Aastra Web UI display the same for both the User and Administrator
Web interfaces for that phone.

Customizing the Key Type List Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to configure the Key Type List that displays in the
Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Customizing the Key Type List” on page A-249.

5-168

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Speeddial Prefixes
The normal function of the speeddial option allows you to configure a specific
key on the phone to dial a number quickly by pressing the configured key. For
example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration
files:
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1

type: speeddial
label: Office
value: 5552345
line: 1

after you press softkey1 on the phone, it dials the Office number at 555-2345 on
line 1.
A new feature for the speeddial option allows you to configure a preset string of
numbers followed by a “+”. This feature allows the phone to speeddial a prefix
number and then pause to let you enter the remaining phone number. You can use
this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes. For example, if you had the
following speeddial configuration in the configuration files:
softkey2
softkey2
softkey2
softkey2

type: speeddial
label: Europe Office
value: 1234567+
line: 2

after you press softkey2 on the phone, it dials the prefix number automatically and
pauses for you to enter the remaining number using the keypad on the phone.
You can configure the speeddial prefix using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-169

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key
The IP Phones allow you to set a parameter, “speeddial edit” using the
configuration files that allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a
speeddial key or edit a speeddial key from the IP Phone UI. Disabling this
parameter prevents a user from adding or editing a speeddial key.
The default for this parameter is enabled, allowing you to create and edit
speeddial keys on the phone using the Press-and-hold feature, softkeys,
programmable keys, expansion module keys and key pad, speeddial menu in the
IP Phone UI, and the SAVE TO key.
If this parameter is set to disabled, it blocks the user from using any of the features
on the phone to create or edit a speeddial key.
Enabling/Disabling the Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key Using
the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the ability to add and edit a
speeddial key.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys” on page A-256.

5-170

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for
state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP
phone.
Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only.

Example
A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a
worker’s phone use (busy or idle). When the worker picks up his phone to make a
call, a busy indicator on the Supervisor’s phone shows that the worker’s phone is
in use and busy.
BLF Setting (For use with Asterisk)
On 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, the busy and idle indicators show on the IP phone
screen display next to the softkey or programmable key configured for BLF
functionality. When the monitored user is idle, an icon with the handset on-hook
shows next to the BLF softkey or programmable key. When the monitored user is
on an active call, a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
On 3-Line LCD phones, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key
illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The
LED goes off when the line is idle.
Note: You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs on the M670i and
M675i Expansion Modules.

You can configure a BLF key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-171

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

BLF\List Setting
(For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only)
The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the
BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the
IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks
web portal.
In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also
supports the ringing state. When the monitored user is idle, there is a small
telephone icon shown with the handset on-hook. When the monitored user is in
ringing state, there is a small bell icon shown. When the monitored user is on an
active call then a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), the LED lights next to each
BLF programmable key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is
off-hook or unregistered. The LED goes off when the is idle. When the monitored
extension is ringing, the LED flashes.
Note: The Broadworks BLF feature is not the same as the Broadworks
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) feature and does not permit call control
over the monitored extension.

You can configure a BLF/List key on the IP Phones using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. You can also specify a BLF list URI that the phone uses to
access the required BLF list. You can specify a BLF List URI using the “list uri”
parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Aastra Web
UI at the path Operation->Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Expansion Module
Keys->Services->BLF List URI. For more information about the “list uri”
parameter, see Appendix A, the section, “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-256.
Example
A receptionist has a 6757i running Broadsoft firmware that subscribes to a list of
extensions from the BroadWorks Application Server. Each monitored extension
in the list shows up individually on the 6757i screen next to a softkey button. The
softkey icons on the screen change depending on the state of the extensions.
On 3-Line LCD phones running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable key
LEDs illuminate either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of those
extensions.

5-172

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Asterisk BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific
extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter.
Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension
being monitored.
For example:
exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212

Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not
defined already.
For example:
[9995551212]
Subscribecontext=sip

BroadSoft BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on BroadSoft BroadWorks Rel 13 or higher
through the BroadWorks Web Portal. Each user must have the Busy Lamp Field
service enabled for their user. The user must add each desired extension to the
“Monitored Users List” on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a
list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page.
Changes to the “Monitored Users List” are dynamic and the Aastra IP phones are
automatically updated without requiring a restart.
Reference
For sample BLF configurations, see Appendix D, “Sample BLF Softkey
Settings.”

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-173

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring BLFs
Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF\List on the IP phone.

Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
•
•

“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.
“BLF List URI Settings” on page A-256.

5-174

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.

2

Select a softkey, programmable, or expansion module key to configure.

3

In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-175

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

For 8 and 11-Line LCD softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.

5

In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.

6

Click

7

In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.

8

In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, my6757i-blf-list@as.broadworks.com.

to save your changes.

Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled.
9

5-176

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

BLF Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the BLF subscription period:
sip blf subscription period: 

The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1
hour).
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured BLF
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring BLF Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription period on the IP
phone.

Configuration Files
To configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-104.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-177

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field.

3

Click

5-178

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys
The IP Phones have a transfer (Xfer) enhancement feature you can use with the
BLF and Speeddial keys - BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer.
The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored, and once there is
any state change with those extensions, the key shows the status of the monitored
lines. The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or
consultatively.
The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key
configured for speeddialing. After answering a call, the recipient can transfer the
call to an extension by:
1.

Pressing Xfer key

2.

Entering the number of the extension or pressing speeddial or BLF key.

3.

Pressing Xfer key again

The BLF and Speeddial transfer enhancement feature provides a simpler way of
transferring calls using the keys called BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF/
Xfer key combines the BLF and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the
user to transfer calls or use BLF with one key. Similarly, the Speeddial/Xfer key
combines the Speeddial key and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the
user to press one key to speeddial and transfer calls.
Note: It is recommended that you enable the “switch focus to
ringing” parameter when using the BLF and Speeddial transfer key
feature. For more information about this parameter, see “Switch Focus
to Ringing Line” on page 5-82.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-179

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

BLF/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
•

BLF/Xfer and BLF
A BLF/Xfer key can be configured for subscribing to an extension and
monitor the status of the extension, similar to the BLF key functionality.
Changes of the state of the monitored extension are indicated by a LED / Icon.

•

BLF/Xfer and Blind Transfer Calls
When the focused line is in the “Connected” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
transfers the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.
If transferring a call to an extension fails, a message “Transfer Failed”
displays on the phone, and you can reconnect the call (get the call back) by
pressing the line key again.

•

BLF/Xfer and Call forward
When the focused line is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
forwards the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.

•

BLF/Xfer and Speeddial
When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle, pressing the
BLF/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the
extension.

5-180

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Speeddial/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
The Speeddial/Xfer key has the following capabilities:
•

Speeddial/Xfer and Speeddial
When the phone is in the “Idle” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key causes
the phone to go offhook and dial the predefined extension.

•

Speeddial/Xfer and Blind Transfer
When the phone is connected to a call, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key blind
transfers the call to the predefined target.
If transferring a call fails, a message “Transfer Failed” displays, and you can
reconnect the call (get the call back) by pressing the line key again.

•

Speeddial/Xfer and Call Forward
When the phone is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key
forwards the call to the predefined extension.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-181

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Configuration Files
You use the following parameters in the configuration files to configure the
BLF/Xfer key and/or Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP Phone.
Softkey Parameters

Programmable Key Parameters Expansion Module Parameters

softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states

prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line

expmodN keyN type
expmodN keyN label
expmodN keyN value
expmodN keyN line

Top Softkey Parameters
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line

Examples:
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1

type: speeddialxfer
label: BX7801
value: 7801
line: 1
states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy

prgkey1 type: blfxfer
prgkey1 value: 35
prgkey1 line: 1

Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer
key on the IP phone using the configuration files.

Configuration Files
To set a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-182

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Aastra Web UI
You configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or the Speeddial/Xfer Key on the IP phone
similar to configuring a BLF key or speeddial key using the Aastra Web UI. Use
the following procedure to configure BLF/Xfer and/or Speeddial/Xfer.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Keys.
Bottom Keys Tab (6757i example).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-183

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
Top Keys Tab (6757i example)

2

Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF/Xfer key or a Speeddial/Xfer key to, and select BLF/
Xfer or Speeddial/Xfer from the “Type” field.

3

In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the BLF/Xfer key (for example, “BX35”).

4

In the “Value” field, enter the monitored extension (for example, “35”).

5

In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality.

6

On the Bottom Key tab, in the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing,
busy) for which you want to use on the key.
Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys.

7

5-184

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)
The IP Phones allow you to configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion
module key to be used as a speeddial conference key (Speeddial/Conf key) while
remaining in the current call. This key allows a user on a call, to conference
another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the conference call.
For example, while on an active call, a user can use the Speeddial/Conf key to dial
a recording service and have the resulting conference recorded.
Note: If currently in a conference, the Speeddial/Conf key is disabled on
the active call.

How it Works
If you configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion module as a Speeddial/
Conf key, and you press this key while on an active call, the focused line changes
to the dialing line. A Cancel softkey displays on the phone (only those phones
that have LCDs larger then 3 lines), allowing you to abort the conference
speeddial if required. The message "Ringing..." displays below the number when
the far end is ringing. The message "Conf. Unavailable" briefly displays when a
conference is already in progress or when the CT handset is in use. The active call
is not put on hold when the speeddial number is dialed.
Limitations for Speeddial/Conference Key
The following are limitations for the Speeddial/Conference key:
•

The CT handsets are not supported.

•

The feature is not compatible with centralized conferencing.

The softkey/programmable key is called "Speeddial/Conf" in the Web UI drop
down list. In the configuration file, use "speeddialconf" as the softkey type.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-185

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Configuration Files
To configure the Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, you enter
“speeddialconf” for the key type. The following parameters are examples you
can use to configure the Speeddial/Conf key:
softkey1 type: speeddialconf
softkey1 label: Sales
softkey1 value: 5645
softkey1 line: 3
topsoftkey1 type: speeddialconf
topsoftkey1 label: Sales
topsoftkey1 value: 5645
topsoftkey1 line: 3
prgkey1 type: speeddialconf
prgkey1 value: 5645
prgkey1 line: 1
expmod1 key1 type: speeddialconf
expmod1 key1 label: Sales
expmod1 key1 value: 5645
expmod1 key1 line: 3
Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a Speeddial/Conf key on the IP
phone using the configuration files.

Configuration Files
To set a Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-186

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Speeddial/Conf Key using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Sottkeys and XML.
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module Keys.

Speeddial/Conf
Option

2

In the “Type” field, select Speeddial/Conf from the list of options.

3

In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Speeddial/Conf key (for example, “Sales”).

4

In the “Value” field, enter the number that the phone dials when the Speeddial/Conf key is pressed
(for example, “4556”).

5

In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-187

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

For phones with softkeys:
In the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for which you want
to use on the key.
Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys (9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, 6755i).

7

5-188

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)
The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature for Sylantro
servers. The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to distribute calls from a
queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
To use the ACD feature on an IP phone, the administrator must first configure an
an ACD softkey or programmable key. When an IP phone user wants to subscribe
to a queue (in order to receive incoming calls), the user presses the ACD key. The
IP phone UI prompts the user to specify the following information:
•

User ID: the phone number(s) used to login into the queue.

•

Password: the password used to login to the queue.

•

Available/unavailable: Shows the current status of the IP phone. Specifies if
the IP phone user is available/unavailable to receive a call from the queue.
This parameter is set to “unavailable” by default.

When the IP phone user is ready to receive calls from the server, the user logs into
a queue. Depending on the server configuration, the IP phone is either in an
“unavailable” or “available” state. If the phone is set to “available” then the server
begins to distribute calls to this phone immediately. If the phone is set to
unavailable, then server waits until the IP phone user manually changes the phone
status to “available” (using the IP phone UI) before distributing calls.
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The server updates it
database with this new information and no longer distributes calls to this phone.
The IP phone will remain in this state until:
— the IP phone user makes himself “available” again.
— the ACD auto-availability timer expires. This occurs only if the
administrator has configured an ACD auto-availability timer as described
in “ACD Auto-Available Timer” on page 5-190.
The IP phone user can also choose to manually change the phone status to
unavailable, using the IP Phone UI.
Note: It is recommended you configure no more than a single ACD
softkey or programmable key per IP phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-189

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

ACD Auto-Available Timer
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The administrator can
control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an
auto-available timer. When the timer expires, the IP phone status is automatically
changed to available. The default setting for the timer is 60 seconds.
You use the following parameters to configure an ACD Auto-Available Timer in
the configuration files:
•

acd auto available

•

acd auto available timer

Configuring an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Key
You can configure an ACD key on softkeys, programmable keys, and extension
module keys. The following table illustrates examples of configuring an ACD key
on the phone.

Softkey Examples

softkey1 type: acd
softkey1 label: sales
softkey1 line: 1
softkey1 states: idle

Top Softkey Examples

Programmable Key
Examples

prgkey1 type: acd
topsoftkey1 type: acd
topsoftkey1 label: sales prgkey1 line: 1:
topsoftkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey1 states: idle

Extension Module
Examples
expmod1 key1 type: acd
expmod1 key1 label: sales
expmod1 key 1 line: 1

Use the following procedures to configure an ACD key n the IP phone.

Configuration Files
To configure an ACD key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable
Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-190

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer.

Configuration Files
To configure the ACD Auto-Available Timer using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “ACD
Auto-Available Timer Settings” on page A-211.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-191

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring an ACD Key Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD softkey, programmable key, or
expansion module key using the Aastra Web UI. This procedure uses the 6755i IP
phone as an example.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.

2

5-192

In the “Type” field, select Auto Call Distribution.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

In the “Label” field, specify a name for this ACD softkey. The Label helps identify which queue you
are subscribing to when you login. (This field does not apply to the programmable keys on the 6730i,
6731i, 6753i, 6755i and 9143i.)
For example: Sales

4

In the “Line” field, select the line which the IP phone uses to subscribe to the queue.
For example: Line 1

5

Click

to save your changes.

Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD auto-available timer using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings.

2

In the “Auto Available” check-box, click Enabled.

3

In the “Auto Available Timer” field, specify the length of time (in seconds) before the IP phone
state is automatically reset to “available.” Valid values are 0 to 120 seconds. Default is 60.
For example: 60

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-193

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using the ACD Feature on your IP Phone
The ACD feature allows you to login to a phone queue in order to receive
distributed calls on your IP phone. To login to a phone queue, your system
administrator must preconfigure an ACD softkey or programmable key on your
Aastra IP phone.
For models 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, the ACD softkey is labeled according to
your network requirements. Check with your administrator to verify the label
assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. The label usually describes which
phone queue you are accessing when you press the ACD softkey.
For example, suppose the administrator wants to configure an ACD softkey to
allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue. The
administrator assigns the label “Support” to the softkey, so it is easily
recognizable to the IP phone user. When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to
the Customer Support queue, the user presses the Support key and can log in.
Once logged in to the queue, you can make himself “available” or “unavailable”
to take calls by pressing the Available/Unavailable key on the phone UI. The
server monitors your IP phone status. When you set the IP phone to “available,”
the server begins distributing calls to your phone. When you set the IP phone to
“unavailable,” the server temporarily stops distributing calls to your phone.
The icon that appears next to the ACD softkey or programmable key on the IP
Phone UI reflects your current status. In the example shown below, the
icon
shows the current status of this IP phone user as “logged off.”

Services
Dir
Callers

Icom

L1
Mon Jan 2 10:37am
ACD softkey
for this example

5-194

o Support

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

This icon changes when you log on to the phone queue and are available to take
calls. The icon changes again when you are busy with an active call. The table
below describes the meaning of the LED, and each icon, as they may appear on
your IP phone:

Phone Model

Status: Logged In
and Available

Status: Unavailable Logged Out

9143i

Solid Red LED

Blinking red LED

No LED

9480i, 9480i CT

Solid Red LED
icon

Blinking Red LED
Blinking
icon

No LED
icon

6730i, 6731i, 6753i Solid Red LED

Blinking red LED

No LED

6755i, 6757i, 6757i Solid Red LED
CT
icon

Blinking Red LED
Blinking
icon

No LED
icon

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-195

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Logging In to a Phone Queue (8 and 11-Line LCD phones)
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the ACD softkey on your IP phone.
Note: Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP
phone.
The login screen (see below) appears. In this example, the ACD softkey accesses the Customer
Support phone queue and is labelled “Support.”

Services
Dir
Callers

Icom

ACD: Support
User ID:
Password:
Backspace

Log In
Cancel

2

To log into the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.

5-196

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Press the Log In softkey.
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
•

If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.

•

If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.

•

To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”

While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:

4

•

You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or

•

The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.

To Log out of the queue, press the Log Out softkey. The server no longer distributes phone calls to
your IP phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-197

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Logging In To a Phone Queue (3-Line LCD phones - not applicable to
the 6751i))
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the ACD programmable key on your IP phone.

2

To login to the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.

3

Select Login.
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
•

If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.

•

If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.

•

To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”

While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:

4

•

You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or

•

The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.

To Log out of the queue, select Logout.
The server no longer distributes phone calls to your IP phone.

5-198

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

ACD Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the ACD subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the ACD subscription period:
sip acd subscription period: 

The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes).
The default is 3600 (1 hour).
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured ACD
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring ACD Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the ACD subscription period on the IP
phone.

Configuration Files
To configure the ACD subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-104.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-199

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "ACD Subscription Period" field.

3

Click

5-200

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

BLA Subscription Period
The IP Phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
If this parameter is set to zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified in the Subscribe message received from the server, the phone uses the
default value of 300 seconds.
You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring the BLA Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period.

Configuration Files
To configure the BLA subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-104.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-201

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

In the “BLA Subscription Period” field, enter a value, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive
a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value
specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. Valid values are 0 to 3700. Default is
300 seconds.

3

Click

5-202

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)
Aastra IP phones and any attached Expansion Modules support the Directed Call
Pickup (DCP) and Group Call Pickup (GCP) features.
The Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept - or
pickup - a call on a monitored extension. An Administrator or User can configure
this feature using the Aastra Web UI to create a DCP or GCP softkey on the IP
phone. When you configure a DCP softkey, you specify the extension that you
want to monitor. Then, when the monitored extension receives a call, you press
the DCP softkey to “pickup” (intercept) it. If the monitored extension receives
multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of
incoming calls. You select a call from this list, and are connected to the call.
When you configure a GCP softkey, you specify the ring group that you want to
monitor for incoming calls. For example, suppose an Operator configures a GCP
softkey to monitor incoming calls for a specific ring group (extensions
2200-2210). When an incoming call is received on any of these extensions, the
Operator presses the GCP softkey and is connected to the call. If multiple
incoming calls are received simultaneously, the Operator does the following
actions:
•

Presses the GCP softkey. The Operator Phone UI displays the current list of
incoming calls (see below).

•

Selects an extension to “pickup” first.

•

Presses the Pickup softkey. The Operator is connected to the incoming call.

Select an extension
Press the Pickup
softkey to intercept
the call

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

DCP on line:
1. 2201
= Pickup

= Cancel

5-203

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring DCP/GCP Using the Configuration Files
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedures to configure DCP/GCP using the configuration
files.

Configuration Files
To set DCP/GCP in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-204

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedure to configure Directed Call Pickup using the Aastra
Web UI. This procedure uses the 6757i IP Phone as an example.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is
shown as an example.

2

Select a key for which to configure Directed Call Pickup.

3

In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-205

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: DCP2200

5

In the “Value” field, specify the extension you want to intercept when you press this softkey.
For example: 2200

6

5-206

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Group Call Pickup (GCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedure to configure Group Call Pickup using the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: A ring group must be configured on the Sylantro Server in order
for a GCP softkey to function.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is
shown as an example.

2

Select a key for which to configure Group Call Pickup.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-207

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.

4

In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: GCP_A

5

In the “Value” field, enter groupcallpickup.

6

Click

to save your changes.

Using Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup
Use the following procedure for the DCP/GCP on your phone.
Note: Before using the DCP/GCP feature on your phone, you must first
configure the DCP or GCP key. You must identify the extension(s) or
phone number(s) you want to monitor when configuring the key.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Using Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
1

When the monitored extension receives a call, press the DCP softkey to pick up the call.

2

If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.

3

Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
The call is answered.

Using Group Call Pickup (GCP)
1

5-208

When any of the monitored group of extensions receives a call, press the GCP softkey to pick up the
call.
The call is answered.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

2

If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.

3

Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
Press the "Pickup" softkey to answer the call you selected.

Select an extension

DCP on line:
1. 2201
= Pickup

= Cancel

Press the Pickup
key to answer
the call

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-209

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Do Not Disturb (DND)
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•

Account

•

Phone

•

Custom

DND Account-Based Configuration
An Administrator or User can configure DND on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (account, phone, or custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the DND feature.
Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.

2.
You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use
this feature via the phone’s keypad.

5-210

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

The following describes the DND key behavior for each DND mode.
•

Account - DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON
or OFF if DND enabled for that account.

•

Phone - DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF.

•

Custom - DND key displays custom screens on the IP Phone UI. User can
select whether to enable/disable DND per account, enable DND on all
accounts, or disable DND on all accounts.

The following table describes the DND key and Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) LEDs when you enable DND on the IP Phone.
Softkey LED Behavior
for All Modes

MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes

DND key LED RED if current account in
focus has DND ON.
DND key LED OFF when current account
in focus has DND disabled.

MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
DND ON.
MWI LED OFF if current account in focus
has DND OFF.

You can configure the DND softkey and the DND mode (Account, Phone,
Custom) using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Once you configure
DND, you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI.
Important Notes
•

In the Aastra Web UI, the “Account Configuration” page replaces the
previous “Call Forward Settings” page.

•

In the IP Phone UI, the new DND key feature now has new menu screens.

•

If you make changes to the configuration for DND via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-211

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring DND Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure DND on the IP Phone:
•

dnd key mode

•

softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type

•

softkeyN states (optional)
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.

Example
The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the
configuration files:
dnd key mode: 2
softkey1 type: dnd
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy

In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a
“custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you
can customize on the phone. For specific screens that display in the IP Phone UI,
see the section, “Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI” on page 5-216.

Configuration Files
To set DND in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•

“DND Key Mode Settings” on page A-176.
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-212

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring DND Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure DND mode using the Aastra Web UI:

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

DND Key Mode
Parameter

2

In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•

account

•

phone

•

custom

Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.

Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-213

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
4

Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.

5

For each account, enable DND by placing a check mark in the box. Disable DND by unchecking the
box.
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” or “Custom” mode in step 2, you can enable/disable each account or
all accounts as applicable.
If you selected “Phone” mode, the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts.
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 4, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.

5-214

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
7

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.

Softkeys 1 and 2 configured for DND
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone.
8

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-215

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you add a DND key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can
toggle the DND state using the IP Phone UI. Use the following procedure to
enable/disable DND on the IP Phone.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a DND key AND
assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1. If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.

2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND key mode to
“phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.

5-216

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

DND in Account Mode
On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.

1

2

Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96

3

Screenname2
Jan 1 12:96

Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.
On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.

Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1

Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2

Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3

DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am

Tues Jan1 10:00am

DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am

- DND

- DND

- DND

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-217

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

DND in Phone Mode
On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.

1

2

Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96

3

Screenname2
DND On
Jan 1 12:96

Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96

In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1

Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2

Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3

DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am

DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am

DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am

- DND

- DND

- DND

In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
Note: Enabling DND in “Phone” mode toggles all accounts on the phone to DND ON.

5-218

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

DND in Custom Mode
On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.

DND
1. Screenname1

Change
Done
Indicates
DND On

Indicates
DND Off

DND
X
2. Screenname2
Change
Done
DND
3. Screenname3

Change
Done

DND
4. All Off
Done

Set

DND
5. All On
Done

Set

In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable DND
on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account. You use the SET key to
enable/disable DND for all accounts. After making the change, you must press DONE and then
Confirm (#) to save the change. Pressing Cancel (0) cancels the attempted change. The following
screen displays after pressing a DONE key:

Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-219

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

DND in Custom Mode (continued)
On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.
Services
Dir
Callers
DND
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
- Change
- All On
- All Off


X



Cancel -

Indicates
DND On
Indicates
DND Off

Done -

In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. The ALL ON and ALL OFF softkeys allow you to
enable or disable DND on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account selected. After making the
change, you must press DONE to save the change.

If DND is configured on the phone, the softkey or programmable key switches
DND ON and OFF. If the phone shares a line with other phones, only the phone
that has DND configured is affected.
The second line on the screen of the IP phone shows when DND is configured.
When a call comes in on the line, the caller hears a busy signal or recorded
message, depending on the server configuration.

5-220

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to
share a single directory address (DA).
For example, people working at a technical support department could be located
in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when
customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call
can only be answered by one of them.
Once the call is answered, the rest of the phones reflect the status of the call. If the
call was put on "hold" by the original recipient, any one from the group can pick
up the call.
Note: This feature is dependent on the IP telephony system to which the
IP phone is registered and according to draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt.

You can apply BLA on the IP phones as follows:
•

As a single BLA group - One BLA DA is shared among multiple phones.
Only one phone at a time can pick up an incoming call or initiate an outgoing
call on the BLA DA. All phones reflect the usage of the BLA DA. If the call is
put on "hold", any one from the group can pick up the "held" call.

•

As a multiple BLA group - On one single phone, multiple BLA DA can be
associated with different line appearances. Every BLA DA is independent
from each other and follows the same rules as "a single BLA group".

•

As multiple instances of a BLA DA - A "x-line-id" parameter was defined in
draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt to present the incoming call to or place an
outgoing call on the specified line appearance instance. The parameter is
carried in "Alert-Info" header field over the request-URI (INVITE e.g.) or in
the NOTIFY messages to report the status of a dialog.

BLA DA can be configured on a global basis or on a per-line basis on the IP
phones using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-221

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each
model phone.
IP Phone Model

Possible # of BLA
Lines

9143i

9

9480i

9

9480i CT

9

6730i

6

6731i

6

6751i

N/A

6753i

9

6755i

9

6757i

9

6757i CT

9

Configuring BLA
You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Global BLA
You configure BLA on a global basis in the configuration files using the following
parameters:
sip mode
sip user name
sip bla number

You configure BLA on a global basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings:

5-222

•

Line Mode

•

Phone Number

•

BLA Number

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Per-Line BLA
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the
following parameters:
sip lineN mode
sip lineN username
sip lineN bla number

You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9:
•

Line Mode

•

Phone Number

•

BLA Number

Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for
per-line configurations.
For Sylantro Server
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for a Sylantro server, the
value set for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter shall be the same value set for
the "sip lineN user name" parameter for all the phones in the group. For example,
if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for
the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line 1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010 (# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-223

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

For ININ Server
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip
lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user
name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example,
if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name
for the second phone is 10102, etc., you would configure BLA on a per-line basis
for the ININ server as follows:
(# for phone 1 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10101 sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 2 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10102
sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010
sip line1 bla number: 1010

Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).

Use the following procedures to configure BLA on the IP phone.

Configuring Global BLA
Configuration Files
For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-78.

Configuring Per-Line BLA
Configuration Files
For specific per-line parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-87.

5-224

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

For global configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-225

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For per-line configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).

In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option.
2

In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.

3

For global configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
For per-line configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared on a
specific line.

4

5-226

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

BLA Subscription Period
The phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
Reference
For more information about setting the BLA Subscription Period, see the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-201.
Using a BLA Line on the IP Phone
If you have either a global or per-line BLA configuration, and you want to share a
call on the line with a BLA group, you need to press the Hold button before
sharing the call with the group.
For example, if line 1 is configured for BLA, and you pick up a call on line 1, you
must press the Hold button to share the call with the BLA group.
If you pick up a call on line 1 configured for BLA, and another call comes in on
line 2, you can pick up line 2 without putting line 1 on hold. The line 1 call will
be on hold automatically; however it is on hold locally only. The line 1 call
cannot be shared with the BLA group.
Note: The Hold button must be pressed for a call on a BLA line to be
shared with the BLA group.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-227

BLA Support for Third Party Registration
BLA allows an Address Of Record (AOR) to be assigned onto different line
appearances for a group of SIP user agents (IP phones). When a call is made to
this BLA number, the call is offered to all user agents that have mapping to this
BLA. To support this, the IP phones need to support third party registration for the
BLA along with the registration for its own primary appearance number. If the IP
phone has the primary appearance as a BLA, then there is no need for third party
registration.
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for third party registration
and subscription, the third party name must be configured using the “sip lineN bla
number” parameter. For third party registration to work effectively, one of the
lines should register as generic with its own username.
For example, Bob has Alice’s appearance on his phone. Bob’s configuration is as
follows:
#line 1 Bob
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip

line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1

auth name:4082272203
password:
mode: 0
user name:4082272203
display name:Bob
screen name:Bob

#line 2 Alice
sip line2 auth name:4082272203
sip line2 password:

#BLA mode 3
sip line2 mode: 3
sip line2 user name:4082272203

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

#Alice phone number
sip line2 bla number:4085582868
sip line2 display name:Alice
sip line2 screen name:Alice

Alice’s configuration is as follows:
#line 1
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip

line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1

auth name:4085582868
password:
mode: 3
user name:4085582868
display name: Alice
screen name: Alice

P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts
The IP Phones support the BLA specification, draft-anil-sipping-bla-02, which
states that the P-Preferrred-Identity header (RFC3325) gets added to the INVITE
message to indicate the Caller-ID that is used for the call.
Note: The P-Preferred-Identity for BLA accounts is also sent for hold/
unhold messages.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-229

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
The IP Phones have an option for a Busy Line Appearance (BLA) configured line
to send a SUBSCRIBE SIP message for a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI).
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the
phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla
account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription
for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for
the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled,
the priority for displaying MWI does not change.

You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Limitations
The following are limitations of the BLA Support for MWI feature:
•

The phone shows MWI for the first matching identity if more than one line
with different user names has the same BLA account.

•

If a normal line has the same user name as the BLA user of another line, the
phone shows MWI only for the normal line.

Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI.

5-230

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring BLA Support for MWI Using the Configuration Files

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“BLA Support for MWI” on page A-98.

Configuring BLA Support for MWI using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

MWI for BLA Account
Parameter

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-231

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

The “MWI for BLA Account” field is disabled by default. To enable this feature, place a checkmark
in the “Enabled” box.
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be
enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi
subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying
MWI does not change.

3

5-232

Click
affect.

to save your changes and reboot the phone for the change to take

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) is when incoming calls are presented to multiple
phones simultaneously. For example, it is the ability to assign the boss' extension
to a button on the secretary's phone. Calls can be transferred between two phones
with the same extension button by simply putting the call on hold at one phone
and picking it up on the other. Status LEDs light and flash in unison, allowing all
people sharing the extension to see the status at a glance.
The IP Phones include an enhanced SCA for the servers that support call bridging
and allows two or more SCA users to be connected in a call with a third party.
Refer to the following example.
Phone 1

SCA phone 1 answers.
When 2 and 3 pickup,
1 can hangup.

Phone A calls the SCA number and
all the phones in the SCA enironment
ring.
Phone A

Phone 2

SCA phone 2 joins by
pressing SCA line. When
phone 1 hangs up, 2 is still
SCA Environment connected. Phone 2 can
press the line key to
put SCA call on hold
leaving 3 still connected
to 1.

Phone 3

Note: A user can place a call on hold while in an
SCA bridged call, by pressing the SCA line key.

SCA phone 3 joins by
pressing SCA line. When
phone 1 hangs up, 3 is still
connected. Phone 3 can
press the line key to
put SCA call on hold
leaving 2 still connected
to 1.

Using the example above, when a call comes into Phone 1, Phone 2 and Phone 3
can pickup the same call by pressing the SCA line key. Phone 2 and 3 display the
call they are bridging into on the LCD of the phones. Existing SCA parties in a
bridge or one-to-one call hear an audible beep when another party has joined the
call.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-233

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Note: Enabling/disabling the beep is configurable on the server-side.

If a phone is configured for SCA bridging and it attempts to join a call, but the
account on the server does not have this functionality enabled, an error message
displays to the LCD on the phone.
The SCA call bridging feature is disabled by default on all phones. You can enable
this feature on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files only.
Keys States and LED Behavior
There are two new call states on the phones that support SCA bridging:
•

Bridge-active - A bridged call is in progress

•

Bridge-held - The 3rd-party (i.e., non-SCA party) in the bridge is on hold.

The following tables provide the key states and LED behavior in an SCA bridge
call for users involved in an SCA call and users not involved in the SCA call.
Line Keys and Idle Screens
State

Call LED

Call Caller ID Non-Call LED

Non-Call
Caller ID

Idle

N/A

N/A

Off

N/A

Seized

Solid Green

None

Solid Red

None

Progressing (outgoing call)

Green

Called Part7

Solid Red

None

Alerting (incoming call)

Blinking Unselected Red

N/A

Active

Solid Green

Far-end

Solid Red

Far-end

Held

Slow Flashing Green

Far-end

Slow Flashing Red

Far-end

Hold private

Slow Flashing Green

Far-end

Solid Red

Far-end

Bridge-active

Solid Green

Far-end

Solid Red

Far-end

Bridge-held

Slow Flashing Green

Far-end

Solid Red

Far-end

5-234

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Softkey Line Keys

State

Call Icon

Call LED

Non-Call Icon

Non-Call
LED

Idle

Small circle

None

Small circle

None

Seized

N/A

N/A

Sold Circle

Solid Red

Progressing (outgoing call)

Empty circle

Solid Red

Sold Circle

Solid Red

Alerting (incoming call)

Empty blinking circle

Flashing Red

N/A

N/A

Active

Empty circle

Solid Red

Sold Circle

Solid Red

Held

Reverse empty blinking
circle

Slow Flashing
Red

Sold Reverse Circle Slow
Flashing
Red

Hold private

Reverse empty blinking
circle

Slow Flashing
Red

Sold Circle

Solid Red

Bridge-active

Empty circle

Solid Red

Sold Circle

Solid Red

Bridge-held

Reverse empty blinking
circle

Slow Flashing
Red

Sold Circle

Solid Red

9143i Phone LED States
State

Call LED

Non-Call LED

Idle

N/A

N/A

Seized

Solid Red

Solid Red

Progressing (outgoing call)

Solid Red

Solid Red

Alerting (incoming call)

Flashing Red

Flashing Red

Active

Solid Red

Solid Red

Held

Slow Flashing Red

Slow Flashing Red

Hold private

Slow Flashing Red

Solid Red

Bridge-active

Solid Red

Solid Red

Bridge-held

Slow Flashing Red

Solid Red

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-235

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Line key Phone Behavior
State

Call Line Key Pressed

Non-Call Line Key Pressed

Idle

N/A

Attempt to seize the line

Seized

Hang up

Ignore

Progressing

Hang up

Ignore

Alerting

answer

N/A

Active

Hold

Bridge

Held

Retrieve

Bridge

Hold private

Retrieve

Ignore

Bridge-active

Hold

Bridge

Bridge-held

Retrieve

Bridge

Enabling/Disabling SCA Call Bridging Feature
Use the following procedure to enable/disable SCA call bridging on the IP
Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging” on page A-99.

5-236

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Park/Pick Up Key (not applicable to the 6751i)
The IP phones (including the CT handsets) have a park and pickup call feature
that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways
a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•

Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)

•

Using a programmable configuration (using a key)
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.

The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
The following paragraph describes the configuration of a park and pickup key on
the IP phone. For information about configuring the park and pickup static
configuration method see “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-62.
Park/Pickup Programmable Configuration (using a key)
The programmable method of configuration creates park and pickup keys
(softkeys, programmable keys, expansion module keys) that you can configure on
the IP phones.
For all phones (EXCEPT the 6751i) you can set a key as "Park" or "Pickup" and
then:
•

specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI

•

specify a value

•

specify which line to use

•

specify the state of the park and/or pickup keys

For 3-Line LCD display phones (not applicable to 6751i) , you can set a
programmable key as "Park" or "Pickup" and then:
•

specify a value

•

specify a line to use

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-237

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

On 8 and 11-Line LCD Phone UIs
•

When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you
configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI.

•

After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey
displays on other phones in the network. You can then press the "Pickup"
softkey, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call on another phone
in your network.

•

On the Model CTs, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On the
Model CT handsets, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and
"Pickup".

Note: On the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT, the old softkey
labeled "Pickup" has been renamed to "Answer". This softkey uses the
old functionality - when you pickup the handset, you see a softkey labeled
"Answer". You can then press this key to pick up an incoming call. Do
no confuse this feature with the new Park/Pickup configuration feature.

On 3-Line LCD Phone UIs (not applicable to 6751i)
•

When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, you can press the
applicable "Park" programmable key to park the call.

•

After the call is parked, you can press the "Pickup" programmable key,
followed by the applicable value to pickup the call.

You can configure a Park and Pickup key configuration using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.

5-238

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Park/Pickup Key Using Configuration Files
In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the key parameters.
You must specify the "softkeyN value", "prgkeyN value", “topsoftkeyN value“, or
“expmodX keyN value”. The following examples show Park/Pickup
configurations using specific servers.
Examples for Models with 8 and 11-Line LCDs
Server

Park Configuration

Pickup Configuration

Asterisk

softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*

softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**

Sylantro

softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*98
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*

softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*99
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**

BroadWorks

softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*68
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*

softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*88
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**

ININ PBX

softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: inin;callpark
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*

softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: inin;pickup
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**

*When you configure a softkey as "Park", you must configure the state of the softkey as
"connected".
**When you configure a softkey as "Pickup", you can configure the state of the softkey as "idle,
outgoing", or just "idle", or just "outgoing".

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-239

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Examples for Models with 3-Line LCDs (not applicable to 6751i)
Server

Park Configuration

Pickup Configuration

Asterisk

prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1

prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1

Sylantro

prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98
prgkeyN line: 1

prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99
prgkeyN line: 1

BroadWorks

prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68
prgkeyN line: 1

prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*88
prgkeyN line: 1

ININ PBX

prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: inin;callpark
prgkeyN line: 1

prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: inin;pickup
prgkeyN line: 1

Note: The 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, 6755i and 9143i do not allow for the
configuration of labels and states for programmable keys.

Use the following procedure to configure a Park/Pickup key using the
configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey Settings for 8 and 11-Line LCD phones” on page A-219 and “Programmable Key Settings for 9143i,
6730i, 6731i, 6753i, and 6755i” on page A-228.

5-240

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring a Park/Pickup Key Using Aastra Web UI
For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a specific
line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is "connected". The
default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing".
The CT handsets use the park/pickup configuration enabled at
Operation->Handset Keys in the Aastra Web UI. If Park or Pickup are enabled
on more than one line on the base unit, the CT handsets use the first
programmable configuration.
For example, if line 1 and line 6 are configured for park, the CT handsets use the
configuration set for line 1 to park a call.
On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), you configure a Park and/or
Pickup key at Operation->Programmable Keys, and then enter the appropriate
value and line.
Note: Applicable values depend on the server in your network (Asterisk,
BroadWorks, Sylantro, ININ PBX. See the table below for applicable
values.
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server

Park Values*

Pickup Values*

Aasterisk

70

70

Sylantro

*98

*99

BroadWorks
ININ PBX

*68

*88

callpark

pickup

*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.

Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
programmable configuration method and the Aastra Web UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-241

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.

2

Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call.

3

In the "Type" field, select Park.

4

In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey.

5

In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-241.

6

In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.

7

The park softkey has a default state of “Connected”.
Leave this state enabled or to disable, uncheck the check box.

8

Pick a softkey to configure for Picking up a call.

9

In the "Type" field, select Pickup.

10

In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Pickup softkey.

5-242

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
11

In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-241.

12

In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.

13

The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes.

14

Click

to save your changes.

For CT Handset:s
1

Click on Operation->Handset Keys.

2

Pick a handset key to configure for parking a call.

3

In the "Key Function" field, select Park.

4

Pick another handset key to configure for picking up a call.

5

In the "Key Function" field, select Pickup.

6

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-243

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
1

Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
6753i Screen

2

Pick a key to configure for Parking a call.

3

In the "Hard Key" field, select Park.

4

In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-241.

5

For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.

6

Pick a key to configure for Picking up a call.

7

In the "Hard Key" field, select Pickup.

8

In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-241.

9

For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.

5-244

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
10

Click

to save your changes.

You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
11

Click on Operation->Reset.

12

In the "Restart Phone" field click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.

5-245

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature
Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked
call.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Parking a Call
1

While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey.

2

Perform the following for your specific server:
For Asterisk Server:
- Server announces the
extension number where the call
has been parked. Once the call is
parked, press the y key
to complete parking.
For BroadWorks Server:
- After you hear the greeting from
the CallPark server, enter the
extension where you want to
park the call.
For Sylantro Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
For ININ Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.

If the call is parked successfully, the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was
parked, or a hang up occurs. The parked call party will get music on hold.
3

If the call fails, you can pick up the call (using the next procedure) and press the "Park" softkey again
to retry step 2.

Picking up a Parked Call
4

5-246

Pick up the handset on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Enter the extension number where the call was parked.

6

Press the "Pickup" softkey.
If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-247

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)
Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call

return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for
Sylantro servers only.
You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
How it works
If you configure "lcr" on a softkey or programmable key, and a call comes

into your phone, after you are finished with the call and hangup, you can
press the key configured for “lcr” and the phone dials the last call you received.
When you configure an “lcr” softkey, the label “LCR” displays next to that
softkey on the IP phone. When the Sylantro server detects an “lcr” request, it
translates this request and routes the call to the last caller.
Configuring Last Call Return
Use the following procedures to configure LCR on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific last call return (lcr) parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-248

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For the 6757i/6757i CT:
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.

2

Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return.

3

In the "Type" field, select lcr.

4

In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration.

5

The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required.

6

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-249

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For the 6757i CT Handset:
1

Click on Operation->Handset Keys.

2

Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return.

3

In the "Key Function" field, select lcr.

4

Click

5-250

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
1

Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
6753i Screen

2

Pick a key to configure for Last Call Return.

3

In the "Type" field, select lcr.

4

For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration.

5

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-251

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Call Forwarding
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
•

Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.

•

Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.

•

Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), you can set all accounts to ALL
On or ALL Off. On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts
to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all
other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.

You can enable different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example,
you can set different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then
turn them on/off individually).

5-252

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

The following table describes the key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
LEDs when you enable CFWD on the IP Phone.
Key LED Behavior
for All Modes

MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes

CFWD key LED RED if CFWD All, CFWD MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
Busy, or CFWD No Answer is enabled for CFWD ALL enabled.
the account in focus.
MWI LED OFF if CFWD All is disabled.
CFWD key LED OFF if any CFWD mode
is disabled.

You can enable/disable CFWD and set a CFWD key using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. You can set CFWD mode (Account, Phone, Custom)
using the configuration files, Aastra Web UI or IP Phone UI.
Important Notes
•

In the configuration files, the “call forward key mode” parameter in the
section, “Configuring Call Forwarding” on page 5-254 is in addition to the
previous call forward parameter (call forward disabled). You can still use the
previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files.

•

In the IP Phone UI, you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path
Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured CFWD key.

•

If you make changes to the configuration for CFWD via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-253

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Call Forwarding
You use the following parameters to set CFWD on the IP Phone using the
configuration files:
•
•
•

call forward key mode
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
softkeyN states (optional)
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the
path Options->Call Forward.

2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3.
When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for
an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in
order for the mode to be enabled.
Use the following procedures to configure Call Forwarding on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific last call forwarding parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
sections,
• “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-177.
• “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-254

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

:

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.

Softkey 2 configured for CFWD

2

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-255

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.

Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter

Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.

5-256

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•

•

•

account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On 3-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 8 and
11-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the
account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.

Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
5

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-257

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.

7

For each account, enable CFWD state by placing a check mark in one or more of the following
“State” fields:
•
•
•

All
Busy
No Answer

The “All” option forwards all incoming calls for this account to the specified phone number regardless
of the state of the phone. The phone can be in the Busy or No Answer states, or can be in the idle
state. The phone still forwards all calls to the specified number.
The “Busy” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account is in the busy state. The calls are
forwarded to the specified phone number.
The “No Answer” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account rings but is not answered in
the defined number of rings. The call gets forwarded to the specified number.
Note: You can use the “Busy” and “No Answer” states together using different forwarding phone
numbers. If these states are enabled for an account (the “All” state is disabled), and the phone is in
the busy state when a call comes in, the phone can forward the call to the specified phone number
(for example, voicemail). If there is no answer on the phone after the specified number of rings, the
phone can forward the call to a different specified number, such as a cell phone number.

5-258

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
8

For each account, in the “Number” field, enter the phone number for which you want the incoming
calls to forward to if the phone is in the specified state.
If using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter different phone numbers for each
account.
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” mode in step 4, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts
as applicable. You can enter different phone number for each enabled state.
If you selected “Custom” mode, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable.
You can enter different phone numbers for each enabled state.
If you selected “Phone” mode, all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration (All, Busy, and/
or No Answer) as Account 1 on the phone. (In the Aastra Web UI, only Account 1 is enabled. All
other accounts are grayed out but use the same configuration as Account 1.)
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to Account 1, the changes apply to all accounts on
the phone. Using the IP Phone UI, if you make changes to any other account other then Account 1,
the changes also apply to all accounts on the phone. When enabling a CFWD state, you must specify
a phone number for the phone to CFWD to. The number you specify applies to all accounts of the
same mode.
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 6, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.

9

For the No Answer state, in the “No. Rings” field, enter the number of times that the account rings
before forwarding the call to the specified number. Valid values are 1 through 20. Default is 1.
Note: When using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter a different number of rings
for each account. If you use the Aastra Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to “Phone”, all
accounts synchronize to Account 1.

10

Click

to save your changes.

The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-259

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using CFWD Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you enable/disable CFWD using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI,
you can use the CFWD screens that display to the IP Phone UI. You can access the
CFWD parameters by pressing a configured CFWD key (if previously
configured) OR by pressing Options->Call Forward on the phone’s front panel.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a CFWD key
AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still enable CFWD via the IP Phone UI at the path
Options->Call Forward.

2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the CFWD key mode to
“Phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.

5-260

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Account Mode (3-Line LCD Phones - not applicable to 6751i)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
1

Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96

2

3

Screenname2
Jan 1 12:96

Screenname3
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname 2 has CFWD
disabled as indicated by no message displayed, and Screenname3 has “CFWD Busy” enabled.
2

Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.

Indicates
CFWD Enabled

Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled

Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done



Change

Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done

X
Change

Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done

Set

Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done

Set

!

In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled, as indicated by an X.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-261

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
•

All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
4

Press the CHANGE key for the state you selected in step 3. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.

Use

CFWD State
Screen

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

Change

Change

1. Cfwd All

Cfwd State
On
Next

Cfwd State
Off
Next


Set

Set

5

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
mode ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.

6

Press the SET key to save the change.

5-262

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

7

In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD Number
Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Done

Change

Change

Cfwd Number
__
Cancel

Set

8

Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.

9

Press SET to save the change.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-263

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

10

For the CFWD No Answer state, In the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD No.
Rings Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Change

Done

3. No. Rings
Done

11

Change

Change

No. Rings
1
Next


Set

Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call if there is
no answer.

12

Press SET to save the change.

13

Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm

5-264

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

14

Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All changes are saved to the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-265

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Phone Mode (3-Line LCD Phones - not applicable to 6751i)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
1

Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96

2

Screenname2
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96

3

Screenname3
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”
message.
Note: In ”Phone” mode, when you change the call forward configuration for an account, the
change applies to all accounts.

5-266

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

2

Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.

Indicates
CFWD ALL
enabled
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled

Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done

Set

Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done

Set



!



In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured
as indicated by a !

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-267

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select a state using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
•

All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the phone.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the phone.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
4

Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.

Use

CFWD State
Screen

5-268

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

Change

Change

1. Cfwd All

Cfwd State
On
Next

Cfwd State
Off
Next


Set

Set

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.

6

Press the SET key to save the change.

7

In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD Number
Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Done

Change

Change

Cfwd Number
__
Cancel

Set

8

Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.

9

Press SET to save the change.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-269

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

10

For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD No.
Rings Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Change

Done

3. No. Rings
Done

11

Change

Change

No. Rings
1
Next


Set

Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.

12

Press SET to save the change.

13

Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm

5-270

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

14

Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All the same changes are saved to all accounts on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-271

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Custom Mode (3-Line LCD Phones - not applicable to 6751i)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.

1

Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96

2

3

Screenname2
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96

Screenname3
CFWD NoAns
Jan 1 12:96

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”,
“CFWD Busy”, and “CFWD NoAns” messages.
Press the Call Forward key. The CFWD Account screens display. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each account.
Call Forward
1. Screenname1

Change
Done

Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number
configured

Call Forward
X
2. Screenname2
Change
Done
Call Forward
!
3. Screenname3
Change
Done
Call Forward
4. All Off
Done

Set

Call Forward
5. All On
Done

Set

In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has one or more CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.
Screenname3 has one or more CFWD states configured but a specific state has no call forward
phone number configured as indicated by a !. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable CFWD on
all accounts, respectively.

5-272

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

2

Select an account to configure. Press the CHANGE key. The CFWD Mode screen displays. Use the
UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state screen.

Indicates
CFWD All
enabled
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled

Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done

Change

Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done

Set

Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done

Set



!



In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled for the account but has no call forward phone
number configured as indicated by a !.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-273

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
•

All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
4

Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.

Use

CFWD State
Screen

5-274

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

Change

Change

1. Cfwd All

Cfwd State
On
Next

Cfwd State
Off
Next


Set

Set

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.

6

Press the SET key to save the change.

7

In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD Number
Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Done

Change

Change

Cfwd Number
__
Cancel

Set

8

Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.

9

Press SET to save the change.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-275

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

10

For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns

Use

to view

1. Cfwd State
On
Done

CFWD No.
Rings Screen

Change

2. Cfwd Number
Done

Change

3. No. Rings
Done

11

Change

Change

No. Rings
1
Next


Set

Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.

12

5-276

Press SET to save the change.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

13

Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm

14

Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
All changes are saved to the phone for all accounts.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-277

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Account Mode (8 and 11-Line LCD Phones)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1

Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2

Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3

CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am

CFWD Busy
Tues Jan1 10:00am

Tues Jan1 10:00am

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
2

Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers

Call Forward
Mode Screen

Indicates
CFWD Enabled

Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer

- Change
- All Off
- All On


!
X

CopytoAll Cancel Done -

Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled

In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled as indicated by an X.

5-278

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
•

All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-279

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

4

For the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Call Forward
State Screen

Services
Dir
Callers

Change

Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Change the
State

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Change the
Number

Change the
No. Rings

Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

5-280

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

6

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

7

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

8

Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-281

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Phone Mode (8 and 11-Line LCD Phones)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1

Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2

Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3

CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am

CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am

CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1, 2 and 3 have “CFWD All” enabled.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
2

Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers

Call Forward
Mode Screen

Indicates
CFWD Enabled

Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On


!
X

CopytoAll Cancel Done -

Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled

In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.

5-282

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select a state for the phone using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
•

All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD modes.
All On Key - Disables all CFWD modes.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode. For example, if you have the cursor pointing
at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the
CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to
both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-283

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

4

In the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel Done -

Call Forward
State Screen

Change

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel Done -

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel Done -

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel Done -

5

5-284

Change the
State

Change the
Number

Change the
No. Rings

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

6

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.

7

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.

8

Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the configuration applies to all the accounts on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-285

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

CFWD in Custom Mode (8 and 11-Line LCD Phones)
1

Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1

Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2

Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3

CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am

CFWD Busy
Tues Jan1 10:00am

Tues Jan1 10:00am

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

- Call Fwd

In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
2

With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Account
screen displays which lists all the accounts on the phone. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to
scroll through each account.

Call Forward
Account Screen

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
- Change
- All Off
- All On

Indicates
CFWD Enabled


!
X

CopytoAll Cancel Done -

Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled

In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3), Screenname 2 has one or more CFWD states enabled but a specific state has no
call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and Screenname3 has one or more
CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.

5-286

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

Select an account using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
All On Key - Enables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
CopytoAll Key - Copies all settings for the account you select, to all other accounts on the Call
Forward Account screen. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at Screenname1, and you
press the CopytoAll key, all of the CFWD settings for Screenname1 are copied to Screenname2 and
Screenname3.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.

4

After selecting an account, press CHANGE.
The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Services
Dir
Callers

Call Forward
Mode Screen

Indicates
CFWD Enabled

Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On


!
X

CopytoAll Cancel Done -

Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled

In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-287

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Select a state for the selected account(s) using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
•

All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.

•

Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.

•

No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.

Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.

You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the selected account.
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the selected account.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the selected Call Forward mode
(All, Busy, No Answer) to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.

5-288

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

6

Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 4. This displays the Call Forward State
screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Call Forward
State Screen

Services
Dir
Callers

Change

Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Change the
State

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -

Change the
Number

Change the
No. Rings

Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-289

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

7

Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

8

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

9

Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.

10

5-290

Press DONE in the CFWD State screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Account screen to save all changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

SIP Phone Diversion Display
When an outgoing call from the phone is being diverted to another destination
(i.e., via call forward), the phone displays the Caller ID (phone number and/or
caller name) of the new destination and the reason for the call diversion. Similarly,
at the new destination, the Caller ID of the original call destination now displays.
Call Diversion Example
1

Tim calls Mark at x400.

2

Mark’s phone is busy.

3

Mark’s phone diverts the incoming call to another destination (Roger @ x 464).

4

Tim’s phone displays name and extension of where the call is being diverted to and
reason for diverting the call. The screen scrolls between Screen 1 and Screen 2.

5

Roger’s phone accepts the call and displays the name and number of the phone the
incoming call (Tim) and the name (or number) of the original destination (Mark). The
screens scroll between Screen 1 and Screen 2..

See examples of the phones’ LCD below.
The diversion LCD screens scroll every 3 seconds.
diverted to

Tim’s Phone @ x462

Roger’s Phone @ x464
Roger @ 464 receives the incoming call from Tim
divertted from Mark

Tim @ 463 calls Mark’s phone which is busy
and diverts to Roger.
1

2

Roger
464

1

Diverting:
User-Busy

462

Roger
464

- Cancel
- Conf
- Xfer

L1

462

Diverting:
User-Busy

More -

- Cancel
- Conf
- Xfer

8 and 11-Line LCD Phones

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Via:
Mark

3-Line LCD Phones

3-Line LCD Phones

L1

2

Tim
462

More -

L1

464

L1

464

Tim
462

Via:

- Answer
- Ignore

- Answer
- Ignore

Mark

More -

More -

8 and 11-Line LCD Phones

5-291

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Note: If proxy servers exist in the network, it is possible that multiple
diversions can take place on the phones. When multiple diversion
headers are returned in a single 302 response back to the originating
phone, the phone that originated the call (i.e., Tim’s phone in above
example) displays the URI of the newest (first encountered) Diversion
header, but displays the REASON of the oldest (last encountered)
Diversion Header. The phone that receives the diverted call (i.e.,
Roger’s phone in example above) displays the information of the oldest
diverted call (last encountered).

You can enable or disable this feature on a global or per-line basis using the
configuration files only.
Configuring SIP Diversion Display on the Phone
Use the following procedures to configure SIP diversion display on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Diversion
Display” on page A-184.

Limitations

5-292

•

The diversion header assumes that the the ID of the 'diverted' caller is passed
in a URI style manner.

•

This feature relies on the server supporting and generating the Diversion
header; the phone does not generate the header itself.

•

Diversion header parameters such as counter, limit, privacy, screen, and
extension are not recognized or supported by the phone. However, they are
still passed along during the diversion process.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Displaying Call Destination for Incoming Calls
The IP Phones allow an Administrator to enable and disable the call destination
name in the “TO” header of the INVITE message for incoming calls. When this
feature is enabled, the call destination name displays on the LCD of the phone.
This allows the user to easily determine the intended destination of an incoming
call.
Behavior of the Phone
When this feature is enabled, the phone behaves as follows:
IF

THEN

A value exists for the Display Name field in
the “TO” header of the INVITE message for
incoming calls...

the phone displays the call destination
name.

Display Name field is empty...

the phone uses the name specified for the
“Screen name 1” parameter.

“Screen name 1” parameter is empty...

the phone uses the name specified for the
“Display Name” parameter.

“Display Name” parameter is empty...

the phone uses the name specified for the
“SIP User Name” parameter.

“SIP User Name” parameter is empty...

the phone uses the name specified for the
“Call Destination Number” parameter.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-293

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

The call destination information displays on multiple screens that scroll every 3
seconds. The following example shows call destination information on the
phones.
Call Destination Enabled on the Phone
1

2

Bob
0409123456

To:
Alice One

Incoming Phone UI on 3-Line LCD Phones

L1

L1

3456 Alice

3456 Alice

To:
Alice One

Bob
0409123456

- Answer
- Ignore

- Answer
- Ignore

Incoming Phone UI on 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones

Since Call Diversion is enabled on the phone by default, the following example
shows the behavior when call destination is also enabled.
L1

3456 Alice

Bob
0409123456

- Answer
- Ignore

Page 1
Caller Info

5-294

L1

3456 Alice

To:
Alice One

- Answer
- Ignore

Page 2
Call Destination

L1

3456 Alice

Via:
Tim Horton

- Answer
- Ignore

Page 3
Call Diversion

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Note: As shown above, when both call diversion and call destination are enabled,
the formation displays to the phone’s screens in the following order:
Screen 1
Caller info
Screen 2
Call destination
Screen 3
Call diversion

Configuring the Display of Call Destination for Incoming Calls
Use the following procedures to configure the display of call destination for
incoming calls on the IP Phones.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display of Call
Destination for Incoming Calls” on page A-185.

Limitations
The following are limitations of this feature:
•

Any call destination name exceeding the screen length is truncated by the
phone.

•

The CT cordless handsets do not support this feature.

•

Page scrolling every 3 seconds is hard-coded and not configurable.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-295

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Callers List
The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number,
and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Callers List Key on
each type of phone model.
Callers List Key under
Services Menu

Callers List Key

Options

Directory

9480i
Save

Hold

Redial

Delete

Goodbye
Options

Conf

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

5

JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

Xfer

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

*

0

#

4
L3

L2

*

L1

5-296

0

#

Xfer

Icom

Conf

Mute

9143i

GHI

L1

Services

L2

L3

L4

9480i/9480i CT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Callers List Key

6753i

6755i

6757i/6757i CT
You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files.
When disabled, the Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Caller
List key is ignored when pressed.
When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from
the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the
Callers List. You can download the Callers List to your PC for viewing using the
Aastra Web UI.
When you download the Callers List, the phone stores the callerlist.csv file to
your computer in comma-separated value (CSV) format.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-297

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application.

The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on.

5-298

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling Callers List
You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using
the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

callers list disabled

Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is
set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For
6757i and 6757i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed
from the Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Callers List on the IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Callers List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Callers List Settings” on page A-146.

Using the Callers List
Use the following procedure to access and use the Callers List.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

On all phones (except the 6751i):
Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
Press the “Services” key on the phone, and then select “Callers List” from the list of options.

2

Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List.

To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON
receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and
was answered.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-299

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header.
To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3
Delete key.

4

To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.

5

To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save key and enter the line
number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key.

6

To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree key, or
press a line key.

7

To exit the Callers List, press the “Callers List” key again or the “Goodbye” key.

5-300

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Downloading the Callers List
Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web
UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Directory.

2

In the Callers List field, click on

.

A “File Download” message displays.
3

Click

.

4

Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click
.
The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer.

5

Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Callers List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-301

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
The IP phones may have a Callers List key and a Services key (as a hard key or
softkey/programmable key) depending on your model phone. An Administrator
can specify URI overrides for these keys using the following parameters in the
configuration files:
• services script
• callers list script
Specifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom
application instead of the standard function of the Callers List and Services keys.
An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files
only.
Creating Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
Use the following procedure to create customized Callers List and Services keys
on the IP Phone using the configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customize
Callers List and Services Key” on page A-147.

5-302

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Missed Calls Indicator
The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed
calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only.
You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment
as calls come into the IP phone.
When enabled, the number of calls that have not been answered increment on the
phone’s idle screen as " New Calls". As the number of unanswered
calls increment, the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the
Callers List. The user can access the Callers List and clear the call from the list.
Once the user accesses the Callers List, the " New Calls" on the idle
screen is cleared.
Note: The phones also include a “Missed-Calls-Message” field in a
“message summary” event of a SIP NOTIFY message.

Enabling/Disabling Missed Calls Indicator
You can enable (turn on) and disable (turn off) the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

missed calls indicator disabled

Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If
set to 1, the indicator does not increment the unanswered calls.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Missed Calls
Indicator, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Calls Indicator Settings” on page A-153.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-303

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls
Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List.
Once you display the Callers List, the " New Calls" indicator clears.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.

2
3

Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have
the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone.
To clear the line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to clear and press the 3,
Clear, or Delete key (depending on your phone model).
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
The line item deletes from the Callers List.

5-304

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Directory List
The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently
used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the
directory entry.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Directory Key on each
type of phone model.

Directory Key under
Services Menu

Directory Key

Options

Directory

9480i
Save

Hold

Redial

Delete

Goodbye
Options

Conf

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7

8

9 WXYZ

Xfer

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

*

0

#

L3

L2

*

L1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

0

TUV

#

Xfer

Icom

Conf

Mute

9143i

PQRS

L1

Services

L2

L3

L4

9480i/9480i CT

5-305

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Directory Key
Options Key
(Directory is
an option under
Services Menu)

6751i

6753i

Directory Key

6755i

5-306

6757i/6757i CT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Directory List Capabilities
In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers
associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry
which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels
can be up to 14 characters in length.
You can also sort multiple numbers according to preference and perform a
quick-search feature that allows you to enter the first letter that corresponds to a
name in the Directory to find specific line items. The phone displays the first
name with this letter.The quick-search feature in the Directory List works only
when the Directory is first accessed.
Reference
For more detailed information about the Directory Key on your IP phone, and the
Directory List, see your model-specific User Guide.
Administrator/User Functions for Directory List
You can perform the following pertaining to the Directory List:
•

You can enable and disable access to the Directory List using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Directory List does not display on the
IP phone UI and the Directory List softkey is ignored when pressed. This is an
administrator function only.

•

If the Directory List is enabled, you can view, add, change, and delete entries
to/from the Directory List using the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial a
number from the Directory List. This is an administrator and user function.

•

A public and private softkey can be used when at a line item in the Directory
List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A
6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. This is an
administrator and user function.

•

You can download the Directory List to your PC via the Aastra Web UI. The
phone stores the directorylist.csv file to your PC in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. This is an administrator and user function.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-307

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

•

You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This
is an administrator and user function.

The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each
Directory entry.
Enabling/Disabling Directory List
You can enable and disable user access to the Directory List on the IP phones
using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

directory disabled

Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Directory List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set
to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is
disabled. On 3-Line LCD phones, the "Directory" option is also removed from the
"Services" menu.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Directory List on the IP
phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-144.

5-308

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Server to IP Phone Download
You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files. To
activate this feature, you need to add the following parameters to the
configuration files:
•

directory 1: company_directory

•

directory 2: my_personal_directory’

The IP phone recognizes the following characters in a Directory List:
Character

Description

’#’

Pound character; any characters appearing after
the # on a line are treated as a comment

’,’

Comma character; used to separate the name,
URI number, line, and mode fields within each
directory entry.

’"’

Quotation mark; when pound and comma
characters are found between quotes in a name
field or URI number field, they are treated as
regular characters.

A valid directory entry has a name, a URI number, and optional line number, and
an optional mode attribute, all separated by commas. If a line number is not
present, the entry is assigned to line 1. If a mode attribute (public or private) is not
present, the entry is assigned to "Private".
The following directory entries are considered valid:
# our company's directory
# updated 1 jan 2012
# mode = private, by default
#
joe foo bar, 123456789, 6
# line = 1, by default
# mode = private, by default
#
snidley whiplash, 000111222
# the parser ignores the COMMA # in the name
# mode = private, by default
#
"manny, jr", 093666888, 9
# the parser ignores the POUND # chars in the URI number
# mode = private, by default
#
hello dolly, "12#34#7", 2
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-309

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Server to IP Phone Download Behavior
The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents
into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the
NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server.
During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list,
and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list. Any entries in this list that are
not already in the phone's NVRAM are added to the NVRAM and flagged as
being owned by the server.
Likewise, any entries in the NVRAM that are owned by the server, but are no
longer in one of the server's directory files, are removed from the NVRAM.
Entries made from the IP phone UI are never touched.
Directory List Limitations
The following table indicates the maximum characters for each line and field in
the Directory List.
Directory List Limitations

5-310

Maximum length of a line

255 characters

Maximum length of a name

15 characters

Maximum length of a URI

45 characters

Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM

200 entries

Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
with the "public" attribute
(6757i CT only)

50 entries

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Using the Directory List
Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List.
Note: In the following procedure, the location of keys (hard keys,
softkeys, and programmable keys) on the phone are dependant on your
specific phone model. See Chapter 1, Overview, for the keys that are
specific to your phone model.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

On the 9143i and all 67xxi phones (except the 6751i):
Press the DIRECTORY key to enter the Directory List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
Press the Services key, and then select “Directory” from the list of options.
Note: After entering the Directory List, if no key is pressed within 3 seconds, the phone prompts you
to press the first letter in the name of the required directory entry. The phone finds and displays the
first name with this letter.

2

Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List.

To dial from an entry in the Directory List:
3

At a line item in the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f key, or press a line key.
The phone automatically dials the Directory List number for you.

To add a new entry to the Directory List:
4

a

Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey (depending on your model phone) at the Directory List
header screen and perform step 4.
or
Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey at a line item and press the DIRECTORY key again.

b

Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the SAVE key after each field entry.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-311

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

To edit an entry in the Directory List:
5

a

At a line item in the Directory List, press the 3 key.

Note: Use the SAVE key to scroll between the number, name and line entries.
b

Edit the phone number if required and press SAVE.

c

Edit the name if required and press SAVE.

d

Edit the line if required and press SAVE.

e

Press SAVE to save the changes and exit the editing function.

To delete an entry from the Directory List:
6

a

At a line item in the Directory List, press DELETE. The following prompt displays:

“DELETE again to erase this item”.
b

Press DELETE again to delete the entry from the Directory List.

Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.
To delete all entries from the Directory List:
7

a

At the Directory List header, press DELETE or DELETE LIST (depending on your phone model).
The following prompt displays:

“DELETE again to erase all items”.
b

Press DELETE again to delete all entries from the Directory List.

Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.

5-312

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

To copy an entry from the Directory List to a speeddial key
(for 3-Line LCD phones - not applicable to 6751i):
8

At a line item in the Directory List, press the SAVE key.
The "Save to?" prompt displays.
Enter a number from 1 to 9 (associated with the keypad) where you want to save the item as a
speeddial.
Note: You must have a speeddial key previously configured on your phone to use this feature. To
configure a speeddial key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.

9

To exit the Directory List, press the DIRECTORY key again, the GOODBYE key, or the QUIT key
(depending on your specific phone model).

From the CT handsets:
10

a

Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private.

Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the
handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
b

c

To edit an entry, use the Change softkey.
A screen displays allowing you to edit the name, phone number, and line number, as well as the
public/private setting.
To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree
key, or press the Dial softkey.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-313

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone
You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the
configuration server to the IP phone..
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.

Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-144.

Downloading from the IP Phone to the Server
You can use the Aastra Web UI to download the Directory List from the IP phone
to the configuration server.
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.

5-314

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Directory.

2

In the Directory List field, click on

.

A “File Download” message displays.
3

Click

.

4

Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click
.
The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer.

5

Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-315

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Voicemail (not applicable to 6751i)
The Voicemail feature on the IP phones allow you to configure lines with phone
numbers so the phone can dial out to connect to a voicemail server. You associate
the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers configured on each line (1 - 9
lines or 1-6 lines depending on your model phone).
For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum
of 1 Voicemail access phone number.
The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the IP phone that
has registered voicemail accounts associated with them.
Note: The Voicemail list does not display the voicemail access number.

The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of
voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with
or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse
character at the end of the number/URI string.
The end of the Voicemail list displays the number of new voicemail messages (if
any exist).
Configuring Voicemail (not applicable to the 6751i)
You configure Voicemail in the configuration files to dial a specific number to
access an existing voicemail account. The user then follows the voicemail
instructions for listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server
for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are
registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty".

5-316

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

To configure the Voicemail feature on the IP phone (not applicable to 6751i), you
must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

sip lineN vmail:

You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the
phone.
For example:
sip line1 vmail: *97
sip line2 vmail: *95

Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account for line 1, and *95 to access the voicemail account for
line 2.

Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Voicemail
Settings” on page A-142.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-317

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Using Voicemail (not applicable to 6751i)
Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

For all phones (not applicable to 6751i):
1

Press Services on the phone to display the Services menu.

2

From the Services menu, select "Voicemail".

3

Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List.

4

When you have selected a line item, press the d/f handsfree key, 4 Scroll Right key, or press a
line softkey to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number associated with the
line for which the voicemail account is registered.
From a selected item in the Voicemail list, you can also lift the handset (go offhook) to make an
outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number.

5-318

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Customized Services
Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML.
HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was
designed to describe data and to focus on what data is.
The following are characteristics of XML:
•

XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags.

•

XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to
describe the data.

•

XML with a DTD or XML Schema is designed to be self-descriptive

•

XML is a W3C Standard Recommendation

Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
The XML application for the IP phones allows users to create custom services
they can use via the phone’s keyboard and display. These services include things
like weather and traffic reports, contact information, company info, stock quotes,
or custom call scripts.
The IP phone XML application supports the following proprietary objects that
allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display.
XML Object

Description

AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
(for Menu screens)

Creates a numerical list of menu items on
the IP phones.

AastraIPPhoneTextScreen
(for Text screens)

Creates a screen of text that wraps
appropriately.

AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
Creates a formatted screen of text
(for Text screens)
(specifies text alignment, text size, text
static or scrolling)
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen
(for User Input screens)

Creates screens for which the user can
input text where applicable.

AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time
and Date Attributes
(for User Input screens)

Allows you to specify US (HH:MM:SS am/
pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International
(HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY) time/date
formats for an XML user input screen.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-319

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

XML Object

Description

AastraIPPhoneDirectory
(for Directory List screen)

Creates an online Directory List that a user
can browse in real-time.

AastraIPPhoneStatus
(for Idle screen)

Creates a screen that displays status
messages when applicable.

AastraIPPhoneExecute
(for executing XML commands)

Allows the phone to execute commands
(i.e., “reset”, “NoOp”, etc.) using XML.

AastraIPPhoneConfiguration
(for pushing a configuration to the phone)

Allows the server to push a configuration to
the phone.(See page 5-324 for more
information).

AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
(Standard Bitmap Image)

Creates a display with a single bitmap
image according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.

AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
(Menu Image)

Creates a display with a bitmap image as a
menu. Menu selections are linked to keypad
keys (0-9, *, #).

AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
(Icon Menu Image)

Creates a display that has a small icon
before each item in the menu.

Reference
For more information about creating customized XML applications, contact
Aastra Customer Support regarding the “Aastra XML Development Guide.”

5-320

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further
customize your XML applications:
Attribute/Option

Description/Usage

Valid Values

Beep

Enables or disables a BEEP option to
indicate a status on the phone.

yes | no
Default = no

Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
Configuration files (See page 5-323)
Aastra Web UI (See page 5-323)

Note: This value is
case sensitive.

xml status scroll delay (config files)
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (Web UI)

1 to 25
Allows you to set the time delay, in
seconds, between the scrolling of each Default = 5
status message on the phone.
Use with:
Configuration files (See page 5-324)
Aastra Web UI (See page 5-324)

Timeout

Specifies a timeout value for the LCD
screen display.

0, 30, 45, 60
Default =45

Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
XML Get Timeout

Specifies a timeout value, in seconds,
that the phone waits for the far side to
return a response after accepting the
HTTP GET connection.

0 to 214748364
seconds
Default =0 (never
timeout)

Use with:
Configuration Files (See page 5-325)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-321

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Attribute/Option

Description/Usage

Valid Values

LockIn

Specifies whether or not the
information on the LCD screen stays
displayed when other events occur
(such as pressing buttons on the
keypad).

yes | no
Default = no

Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
CancelAction

Specifies a URI that the phone
executes a GET on when the user
presses the default CANCEL key.
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)

5-322

Fully qualified URI
For example:
cancelAction=
http://
10.50.10.117/
ft.xml

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays
You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object
(AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status
Message object, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications.”

When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
You can use the following to enable/disable a status message beep:
•

AastraIPPhoneStatus object (via XML object; see Appendix F)

•

xml beep notification (via configuration files)

•

XML Beep Support (via the Aastra Web UI)

Enabling the beep is an indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives
an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. If you disable the beep, or no
AastraIPPhoneStatus object appears in the status message, then the default
behavior is no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override the attribute
you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
For example, if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep=”yes”,
and you uncheck (disable) the “XML Beep Support” in the Aastra Web UI, the
phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI applies
to the phone immediately.
Reference
For information about enabling/disabling the XML beep in the Aastra Web UI, see
“XML Beep Support” on page 5-75.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-323

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default
time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message.
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can use the following to set the scroll delay for status messages:
•

xml status scroll delay (via the configuration files)

•

Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (via the Aastra Web UI)

Changes apply to the phone immediately.
Reference
For more information about configuring status scroll delay, see “Status Scroll
Delay” on page 5-77.
XML Configuration Push from the Server
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
order for the phone to apply new configuration parameters, you have to enter the
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from
XML scripts on the server. See Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications” for more information about XML configuration scripts and
dynamic configuration parameters.

5-324

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML
script examples, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”.
Configuring the Phone to use XML
You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by
configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones.
The phone performs an HTTP GET on the URI configured in the Aastra Web UI
or configuration files.
You configure the following parameters for object requests:
•

xml application URI

•

xml application title

The xml application URI is the application you are loading into the IP phone.
The xml application title is the name of the XML application that displays on the
Services menu in the IP Phone UI (as option #4).
XML Get Timeout
The IP phone has a parameter called, “xml get timeout” that allows you to
specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a
response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. If the far side accepts the
GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is
rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times
out and will not be blocked.
For more information about configuring this parameter, see Appendix A, the
section, “XML Settings” on page A-154.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-325

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

XML Push Requests
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP
server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees
a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request. It
does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a
list of trusted hosts (or domain names) configured via the Aastra Web UI
(parameter called XML Push Server List) or the configuration files (parameter
called xml application post list). If the request is authenticated, the XML object
is handled by the IP phone accordingly, and displays the information to the screen.
Note: The HTTP Post must contain HTTP packets that have an "xml"
line in the message body. For more information about adding "xml" lines
in HTTP packets, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications”.

Example Configuration of XML Application
The following example shows the parameters you enter in the configuration files
to configure an XML application:
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
xml application title: Aastra Telecom
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com

Configuring for XML on the IP Phone
After creating an XML application, an administrator can configure the IP phone to
use the application using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-154.

5-326

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.

2

Select a key from keys 1 through 20.

3

In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.

4

In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML".

5

In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.

6

In the "XML Application URI" field, enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML
application you want to load to the IP phone. For example, you could enter an XML application called
"http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php" in the applicable field.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-327

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
7

In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display
on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra
Telecom".

8

Click

to save your changes.

The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
9

Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.

10

In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 8, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.

11

Click

to save your changes.

Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.

5-328

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to the 6751i):
1

Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
6753i Screen

2

For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), select an available key.

3

In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box.

4

In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.

5

Click

to save your changes.

The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-329

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
6

Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.

7

In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.

8

Click

to save your changes.

Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.

5-330

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Using the XML Customized Service
After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the
customized service is ready for you to use.
Reference
For more information about customizing the phones using XML objects, contact
Aastra Customer Support regarding the “Aastra XML Development Guide.”
Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone.

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
1

Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.

2

Select "Custom Features".

3

Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in a menu-driven and directory "Custom
Features" screen.
Message services display to the screen after selecting the "Custom Features" option.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.

4

To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press Exit.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-331

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
1

Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML services.
A "Custom Features" screen displays.

2

Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features.

3

Select a service to display the information for that customized service.
Message services display to the screen after pressing the programmable key.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.

4

5-332

To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Action URIs
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP
phone events that support this feature are:
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The
Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should
fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item
URIs.
The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following
table.
Action URI

Description

Startup

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a startup event occurs.

Successful Registration

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a successful registration event occurs.

Registration Event

Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when
there are registration state changes.
Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is
repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when
registration is already in a timeout state.)

Incoming Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an incoming call event occurs.

Outgoing Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an outgoing call event occurs.

Offhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an offhook event occurs.

Onhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an onhook event occurs.

Disconnected

Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected
state into the idle state. For more information, see “Action URI
Disconnected” on page 5-344.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-333

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Action URI

Description

XML SIP Notify

Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP
NOTIFY is received by the phone. For more information, see
“XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-347.

Poll

Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval"
seconds. For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on
page 5-342.

Poll Interval

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the
phone to the "action uri poll". For more information, see
“Polling Action URIs” on page 5-342.

Note: For more information about the XML execute items, see
Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”.

The following table identifies the configurable action URI parameters in the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. This table also identifies the variables
that apply to specific parameters.
Action URIs and Associated Variables
Configuration File
Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Advanced Settings->Action URI

Applicable Variables

action uri startup

Startup

$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$

action uri registered

Successful Registration

$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

5-334

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuration File
Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Advanced Settings->Action URI

Applicable Variables

action uri registration
event

Registration Event

$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$
$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$

action uri incoming

Incoming Call

$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LOCALIP$$

action uri outgoing

Outgoing Call

$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

action uri offhook

Offhook

$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

action uri onhook

Onhook

$$LOCALIP$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LINESTATE$$

action uri
disconnected

Disconnected

$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
For more information, see “Action URI
Disconnected” on page -344.

action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify

$$LOCALIP$$
For more information, see “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-347.

action uri poll

Poll

For more information, see “Polling Action
URIs” on page 5-342.

action uri poll interval

Interval

For more information, see “Polling Action
URIs” on page 5-342.

Variable Descriptions

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-335

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

The following table provides a description of each variable.
Variable

Description

$$SIPUSERNAME$$

Username associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller

$$SIPAUTHNAME$$

Authentication name associated with:
• registered phone

$$PROXYURL$$

Proxy URL associated with:
• registered phone

$$LINESTATE$$

Current line state associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller
• offhook
• onhook
• disconnected

$$LOCALIP$$

IP Address associated with:
• registered phone
• onhook

Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
$$REMOTENUMBER$$

Remote number associated with:
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller

$$DISPLAYNAME$$

Display name associated with:
• incoming caller

$$SIPUSERNAME$$

Username associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller

$$INCOMINGNAME$$

Name associated with:
• incoming caller

$$CALLDURATION$$

Duration of last call. This variable is associated with:
• onhook

Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.

5-336

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Variable

Description

$$CALLDIRECTION$$

Specifies whether the current/last call was incoming or outgoing. This
variable is associated with:
• onhook

Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$

Specifies the state of the phone’s registration. Registration states can
be:
• registered
• unregistered
• expired
• refused
• timeout

$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$

Specifies the code generated during the registration process.
Registration code can be:
"xxx"
where xxx is the 3 digit code; for example, "403". Possible codes are:
•
•

001 (registration successful)
403 (registration failed)

How it works

When a startup, successful registration, incoming call, outgoing call,
offhook, or onhook call event occurs on the phone, the phone checks to see if
the event has an action URI configured. If the phones finds a URI configured, any
variables configured (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$) are replaced with the
value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the phone
executes a GET on the URI. The Action URI binds all variables and is not
dependant on the state of the phone.
For example, if you enter the following string for the action uri outgoing
parameter:
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.pl?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$

and you dial out the number 5551212, the phone executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=5551212

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-337

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=

You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Action URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-157.

5-338

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.

2

Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/startup
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event
occurs.

3

Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful
registration event occurs.
Note: For a successful registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action
URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-334.
The “Successful Registration” parameter executes on the first successful registration of each
unique line configured on the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-339

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

Enter an XML URI in the “Registration Event” field, for when the phone performs registration. For
example:
http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/
actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®code=$$REGI
STRATIONCODE$$
This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event
change occurs.
Note: For a registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-334.

5

Enter an XML URI for an incoming call event in the “Incoming Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call
event occurs.
Note: For an incoming call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs
and Associated Variables” on page 5-334.

6

Enter an XML URI for an outgoing call event in the “Outgoing Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call
event occurs.
Note: For an outgoing call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-334.

7

Enter an XML URI for an offhook event in the “Offhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/offhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event
occurs.
Note: For an offhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-334.

5-340

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
8

Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/onhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event
occurs.
Note: For an onhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-334.

9

To configure a Disconnected event, see the section, “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-344.

10

To configure an XML SIP Notify event, see the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-347.

11

(Optional) You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones. For more information about polling
Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-342.

12

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-341

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll
parameter that commands the phone to perform an XML call at configurable
intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval
between polls using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of
this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Configuring Polling Action URI via the Configuration Files
Use the following parameters to configure the polling Action URI on the IP
Phones.
•

action uri poll

•

action uri poll interval

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-164.

5-342

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring Polling Action URI via the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Aastra
Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.

2

In the “Poll” field, enter a URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds. Enter the value in
a URI format. For example, http://myserver.com/myappli.xml.

3

In the “Interval” field, enter the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri
poll". The value of “0” is disabled.

4

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-343

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Action URI Disconnected
The phones have a parameter, “action uri disconnected” that allow a disconnect
event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing,
incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. This parameter can use the
variable “$$LINESTATE$$”.
Note: The $$LINESTATE$$ variable is optional and not required when
enabling the “action uri disconnected” parameter.

If the Administrator enables this feature (by specifying a disconnect URI),
when a call is disconnected, the phone checks to see if the event has a
Disconnect URI configured. If the phones finds a configured URI with a
$$LINESTATE$$ variable, it replaces the $$LINESTATE$$ variable with the
appropriate line state of the current active line. After all of the variables are
bound, the phone executes a GET on the URI. The following table lists the
applicable values for the $$LINESTATE$$ variable.
$$LINESTATE$$ Value Description

Meaning in a Disconnected URI

IDLE

Phone is idle.

N/A

DIALING

Phone is offhook and ready to dial.

N/A

CALLING

A SIP INVITE was sent but no response
was received.

Error occurred during the call.

OUTGOING

Remote party is ringing.

Call was cancelled.

INCOMING

Local phone is ringing.

Call was missed or cancelled.

CONNECTED

Parties are talking.

Call was successful.

CLEARING

Call was released but not acknowledged.

N/A

The Action URI Disconnect feature allows an Administrator to determine the
reason for the disconnect if required.
Note: If you enable the Action URI Disconnect feature by specifying a
URI, the URI is called when any disconnect event occurs including an
intercom call or a conference setup.

5-344

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Example
If you enter the following string on Phone A for the “action uri disconnected”
parameter:
action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/
disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$

and then Phone A calls Phone B, Phone B answers and then hangs up, Phone A
executes a GET on:
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=CONNECTED

which is what the remote server receives.
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=

An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Action URI Disconnected Feature
Use the following procedure to configure the Action URI Disconnected feature on
the phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-157.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-345

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event.

2

In the “Disconnected” field, enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. Leaving this
field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature. For example,
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
The following table lists the applicable values and descriptions for the $$LINESTATE$$.

$$LINESTATE$$ Value

3

5-346

Meaning in a
Disconnected URI

Description

IDLE

Phone is idle.

N/A

DIALING

Phone is offhook and ready
to dial.

N/A

CALLING

A SIP INVITE was sent but
no response was received.

Error occurred during the call.

OUTGOING

Remote party is ringing.

Call was cancelled.

INCOMING

Local phone is ringing.

Call was missed or cancelled.

CONNECTED

Parties are talking.

Call was successful.

CLEARING

Call was released but not
acknowledged.

N/A

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML SIP Notify Events
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. An
Administrator can enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific
parameter in the configuration files (sip xml notify event) or the Aastra Web UI
(XML SIP Notify).
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new
pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify).
Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content
NOTIFY sip:200@10.30.100.103:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: ;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 
Contact: 
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 115


When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, the XML content is processed as any
XML object. In the above example, the phone calls http://10.30.100.39/XMLtests/
SampleTextScreen.xml after reception of the SIP NOTIFY.
Note: The phone supports all the current XML objects with all

the existing limitations. For example if an
AastraIPPhoneExecute is used, the embedded URI(s) can not be
HTTPS based.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-347

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content
NOTIFY sip:200@10.30.100.103:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: ;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200 
Contact: 
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 0

When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, it will trigger the action uri xml sip
notify parameter, if it has been previously configured using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not
configured, the phone does not do anything.
On the phone side, a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP
NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI.
Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter)
on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server
that is NOT on the whitelist, the phone rejects the message.

5-348

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY using the Configuration Files
To enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event, you can set the following parameter in
the configuration files:
•

sip xml notify event

If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the
phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter:
•

action uri xml sip notify

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-164.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-349

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in
the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
Enabling/Disabling the XML SIP NOTIFY Feature
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

XML SIP Notify Parameter

5-350

Enabling Whitelist Proxy is recommended

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

The “XML SIP Notify" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-351

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring XML SIP NOTIFY using the Aastra Web UI if an Empty
SIP NOTIFY Message Received by the Phone
Use the following procedure in the Aastra Web UI to configure the XML SIP
NOTIFY parameter when the phone receives an empty SIP NOTIFY message.

Aastra Web UI
1

If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically
uses the value you specify for the Action URI XML SIP Notify parameter at the path Advanced
Settings->Action URI.
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.

XML SIP Notify Parameter
2

Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone.
For example:
http://myserver.com/myappli.xml
Note: The sip xml notify event parameter at the path Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced
SIP Settings must be enabled.

3

5-352

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Softkey URI
In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify
variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These
variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs.
When an administrator enters an XML softkey URI either via the Aastra Web UI
or the configuration files, they can specify the following variables:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Note: For a description of each variable in the above list, see

“Variable Descriptions” on page 5-335.
When the softkey is pressed, if the phone finds a URI configured with variables
(in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$), they are replaced with the value of the
appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the softkey executes a
GET on the URI.
Example
For example, if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$

This softkey executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=42512

assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-353

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Softkey URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.

5-354

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
1

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.

2

Select a key from keys 1 through 20.

3

In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.

4

In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example,
"aastra".

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-355

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$SIPAUTHNAME$$
• $$PROXYURL$$
• $$LINESTATE$$
• $$LOCALIP$$
• $$REMOTENUMBER$$
• $$DISPLAYNAME$$
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$INCOMINGNAME$$
• $$CALLDURATION$$
• $$CALLDIRECTION$$

6

5-356

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
For 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i):
1

Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
6753i Screen

2

On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), select an available key.

3

In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.

4

On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i), in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the
IP phone for the XML softkey. For example, "aastra".

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-357

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
5

In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$SIPAUTHNAME$$
• $$PROXYURL$$
• $$LINESTATE$$
• $$LOCALIP$$
• $$REMOTENUMBER$$
• $$DISPLAYNAME$$
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$INCOMINGNAME$$
• $$CALLDURATION$$
• $$CALLDIRECTION$$

6

5-358

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Key Redirection
The IP phones allow the redirecting of phone-based hard keys to XML scripts.
This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial, Transfer (Xfer),
Conference (Conf), and Intercom (Icom) key features, and the Voicemail option
feature, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. This feature allows you
to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP
Phone’s Services Menu. By default, the server-side keys function the same as the
phone-side key features.

The following table identifies the phone states that apply to each key
redirection.
Hard Keys/Options

Redirects in

Conference (Conf)

the connected state

Transfer (Xfer)

the connected and dialing states

Redial

all states

Intercom (Icom)

all states

Voicemail

all states

Notes:
1. If XML key redirection is enabled on the 6751i., the Xfer and Conf
menu items perform redirection.
2. Key remapping takes precedence over redirecting.
3. Disabling the redial, conference, or transfer features on the phone
also disables the redirection of these keys.

The following URI configuration parameters control the redirection of the keys
and the voicemail option:
•
•
•
•
•

redial script
xfer script
conf script
icom script
voicemail script

An Administrator can configure the XML key, redirection URI parameters using
the configuration files only.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-359

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring XML Redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom
Keys, and the Voicemail Option
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Redial, Xfer,
Conf, and Icom keys, and the Voicemail option.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Key
Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)” on page A-263.

Options Key Redirection
(for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 6751i)
The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key (Options Menu on all
phones and Services Menu on the 6751i) to an XML script. This allows the server
to provide the phone with available options, rather then accessing them from the
phone-side. You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key.
You can still access the Options Menu from the phone-side by pressing and
holding the Options key to display the phone-side Options Menu.
The following URI configuration parameter controls the redirection of the
Options Key:
•

options script

IMPORTANT NOTES

5-360

•

If no Options URI script is configured, the local Options Menu on the phone
displays as normal.

•

If you configure password access to the Options Menu, this password is
required when accessing the local Option Menu, but is not required for the
Options Key redirection feature.

•

Pressing the Options Menu for redirection from the server does not interfere
with normal operations of the phone (for example, pressing the options menu
when on a call does not affect the call).

•

If the phone is locked, you must unlock the phone before accessing the
Options Menu redirect feature. After pressing the Options Key, the phone
displays a screen that allows you to unlock the phone before continuing.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

•

On the 6751i, the redirection feature works after selecting “Options” from the
Services Menu. To display the original Options Menu, press and hold the
Services key.

An Administrator can configure the XML Options Key (or Services Key on the
6751i), redirection URI parameter using the configuration files only.
Configuring XML Redirection of the Options Key (Services Key on
the 6751i)
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Options key
(Services key on 6751i).

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Options Key
Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)” on page A-265.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-361

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction
A feature on the IP phone allows you to specify whether the phone is prevented
from going into the off-hook/dialing state when the handset is off-hook and the
call ends.
By default, the phone behaves as follows:
You are in a call using the handset and the phone displays an XML application.
The far-end terminates the call, and a new XML application gets pushed/pulled
onto the display. Since the handset is off-hook and in idle mode, the "offhook idle
timer" starts. When this timer expires, the phone applies dial tone and moves to
the off-hook/dialing state, which then destroys the XML application that was
being displayed.
With the “off-hook interaction” feature you can set an “auto offhook” parameter
that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/
dialing state, if the handset is off-hook and the call ends.
An Administrator can enable (allow phone to enter the off-hook dialing state) or
disable (prevent the phone from entering the off-hook dialing state) using the
“auto offhook” parameter in the configuration files only.
Configuring the Off-Hook Interaction Feature
Use the following procedure to configure the XML application and off-hook
interaction feature.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Off-Hook and
XML Application Interaction Setting” on page A-265.

XML URI for Key Press Simulation
The Phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to
define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the
physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone.
For more information about this feature, see Appendix F, the section, “XML URI
for Key Press Simulation” on page F-60.
5-362

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

XML Override for a Locked Phone
The IP phones have a feature that allows a locked phone to be overridden when an
XML application is sent to the phone. This feature also allows you to still use any
softkeys/programmable key/Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML
application even though the phone is locked. However, any keys NOT associated
with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked.
Also, XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any
softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sent.
To allow the overriding of the locked phone for XML applications, the System
Administrator must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

xml lock override

Configuring XML Override for a Locked Phone using the
Configuration Files

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Override
for a Locked Phone Setting” on page A-266.

Note: A System Administrator can also lock and unlock a remote phone
using the “lock” and “unlock” commands with the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object in an XML application. For more
information about this feature, contact Aastra Customer Support
regarding the “Aastra XML Development Guide.”

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-363

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is
adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. You can
adjust these settings from -10 db to +10 db to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment by using the following parameters in the configuration
files:
•

headset tx gain

•

headset sidetone gain

•

handset tx gain

•

handset sidetone gain

•

handsfree tx gain

•

audio mode

The default setting for these parameters is 0 (zero).
Note: Aastra Telecom recommends you leave the default of 0 (zero) as
the settings for these parameters.

The following table describes each parameter.
Parameter

Description

Headset tx gain

The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the headset microphone to t he far-end party.

Headset sidetone gain

The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
headset microphone to the headset speaker.

Handset tx gain

The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the handset microphone to the far-end party.

Handset sidetone gain

The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
handset microphone to the handset speaker.
(continued)

5-364

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Parameter

Description

Handsfree tx gain

The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the base microphone to the far-end party.

Audio mode

Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio
mode has 4 options:
0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by
pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the
handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again.
1 (Headset) - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls can
be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d /fkey.
2 (Speaker/Headset) - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
3 (Headset/Speaker) - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By pressing
the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the handsfree
speakerphone, and the handset.

Configuring Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
You can configure the audio transmit and gain adjustments using the configuration
files only.
Use the following procedure to configure this feature.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Audio Transmit
and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings” on page A-205.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-365

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)
The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing (Ad-Hoc
conferencing) for Sylantro and Broadsoft servers. This feature provides
centralized conferencing on the SIP server (versus localized, on the phone) and
allows IP phone users to do these tasks:
•

Conference two active calls together into a conference call.

•

When on an active conference call, invite another party into the call.

•

Create simultaneous conference calls on the same IP phone (Sylantro servers
only). For example, the IP phone user at extension 2005 could create these
two conferences, and put one conference on hold while conversing with the
other party:
— Line 1: conference together extensions 2005, 2010, and 2020.
— Line 2: conference together extensions 2005, 2011 and 2021.
When an IP phone user is connected to multiple conference calls, some
outbound proxies have maximum call “hold” time set from 30-90 seconds.
After this time, the call that is on hold is disconnected.

•

Disconnect from an active conference call while allowing the other callers to
remain connected.

•

Ability to create N-way conference.

•

Join two active calls together into a conference call.

•

Incoming or outgoing active call can join any of the existing conferences.

If the administrator does not configure centralized conferencing, then the IP
phone uses localized conferencing by default.
Note: When you configure centralized conferencing globally for an IP
Phone, the global settings apply to all lines. Although, for the global
setting to work on soft lines, the user must configure the lines with the
applicable phone number.

An Administrator can configure centralized conferencing on a global or per-line
basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

5-366

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled, see your Model-specific IP
Phone User Guide.
Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the
configuration files:
Global Parameter
•

sip centralized conf

Per-Line Parameter
sip lineN centralized conf

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing Settings” on page A-100.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-367

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure centralized conferencing using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->Basic SIP Network Settings.

2

In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
•

To disable centralized conferencing on the IP phone, leave this field empty (blank).

•

To enable SIP centralized conferencing on the IP phone, do one of the following actions:
—

If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)

By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@:
. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the port used
is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
conf@206.229.26.60:10060.
— To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@: 

5-368

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
3

Click

to save your changes.

Per-Line Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Line <#>->Basic SIP Network Settings

2

In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
•

To disable centralized conferencing on this line, leave this field empty (blank).

•

To enable SIP centralized conferencing on this line, do one of the following actions:
—

If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@:
.

—

To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@: 

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-369

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i)
The IP Phones support RFC 3911 which allows an additional caller to join an
active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information. This
feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911.
The “SIP Join“ feature provides the following:
•

Security via the whitelist (which is a feature that already exists on the phone).

•

Initiates an offhook action uri when it is answered.

•

Initiates an onhook action uri at call termination.

•

Creates a caller list entry.

This feature is disabled by default. You can enable the “SIP Join” feature by
setting the “sip join support” parameter in the configuration files.
Limitations of the “SIP Join” Feature
The following are limitations of the “SIP Join” feature:

5-370

•

Not applicable to a conference call already in progress.

•

Not applicable to a CT handset that has two active calls.

•

Not applicable to a phone mixing RTP.

•

Allows secondary parties to join calls if they can determine the dialog
parameters. In order to provide security, it is recommended that the
Administrator configure the SIP whitelist.

•

Not applicable while the active call between two parties is in the early dialog
state.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Configuring the “SIP Join” Feature Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure the “SIP Join feature in the
configuration files:
sip join support

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Join Feature
for 3-Way Conference” on page A-102.

Conference Ends and Transfers Remaining Parties
On the IP Phones, a Host can drop from a 3-way conference and let the other two
parties remain connected by pressing a Xfer key.
Notes:
1.
The 3-line LCD display phones (6730i, 6731i, 6751i, 6753i,
9143i) and cordless handsets (CT handsets) do not support scrolling
between lines.
2.
The phones MUST have a Xfer key (hardkey, or configured
programmable or softkey) on the phone.

Reference
For more information about using the 3-way conference and the Xfer key, see the
IP Phone Model-specific User Guide.
Limitations
The following are limitations of this feature:
•

The phone MUST have a Xfer key configured on the phone (programmable
key or softkey)

•

Asterisk SLA does not support this feature.

•

A “xfer script” can override this feature if a custom application is created and
control is given to the server-side.

•

The Caller ID of the dropped Host still displays on the remaining parties’
phones.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-371

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Transferring Two Existing Calls
The IP Phones allow Users to perform a transfer of a call when there are currently
two active calls on the phone. For example, on the User’s phone, there are two
active calls - Call A and Call B. Call B is on hold. The User can perform the
following to transfer Call A to Call B:
1.

Press Xfer key. A new line opens.

2.

Press or scroll to the Line where Call B is on hold.

3.

Press Xfer key.

Call A is transferred to Call B.
Reference
For more information about using the Xfer key to transfer two existing calls, see
the IP Phone Model-specific User Guide.
Limitations
The following are limitations of this feature:

5-372

•

If a user presses the Xfer key but dosen’t continue to transfer the call by
pressing a Line key, there is no indication on the phone that the transfer didn’t
take place.

•

Once the transfer takes place, the phone which has been transferred to, still
displays the original call.

•

For this feature, 3-line LCD display phones (6730i, 6731i, 6751i, 6753i,
9143i) do not support scrolling between lines.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP phones support HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication as defined in
RFC 2617. (The HTTP client supports digest authentication; the HTTP server
does not; the HTTP server supports basic authentication). This feature allows the
phones to interoperate with Broadsoft’s CMS phone configuration tool.
Using the configuration files, you can enable/disable the following parameter to
display a LOG IN softkey which allows the HTTP/HTTPS server to perform
digest authentication:
•

http digest force login - specifies whether or not to display the LOG IN
softkey on the IP Phone UI screen. Valid values are 0 (disabled) or 1
(enabled). Default is 0 (disabled).

If the “http digest force login” parameter is set to 1 (enabled), after the phone
boots, the LOG IN softkey displays on the phone’s LCD. If the user presses this
softkey, a username/password screen displays, allowing the user to enter the
configured username and password that is sent to the HTTP/HTTPS server for
digest authentication by the server. By default, username is “aastra” and
password is “aastra”. You can enter the username and password in two ways:
•

Using the configuration files, you can change the default values for the
following parameters:
— http digest username - specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.
— http digest password - specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.

•

By enabling the “http digest force login” parameter (setting to 1) - the phone
displays the LOG IN key so the user can enter the default username/password
via the IP Phone UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-373

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Configuring Broadsoft CMS Support via the Configuration Files
Configure Broadsoft CMS support on the IP Phone using the following
parameters in the configuration files:
•

http digest force login

•

http digest username

•

http digest password

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTP/HTTPS
Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS” on page A-103.

Using the IP Phone when Broadsoft CMS is Enabled
If you enable the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication feature, the phone behaves
as follows with the BroadSoft CMS tool:
1.

Factory default the phone.

2.

Configure the HTTP or HTTPS server (specify the HTTP or HTTPS server,
path, and port).

3.

Restart the phone.
The first time the phone reboots, the phone is challenged by the server. The
phone sends the default username of “aastra” and the default password of
“aastra” to the server.
The server sends the default profile to the phone. This profile includes the
information “http digest force login: 1”.When the phone receives the profile,
it displays the “Log In” key on the IP Phone UI’s idle screen.

5-374

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

4.

Press the “Log In" key to displays the username/password screen.
Note: On the 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you use the Log In softkey to
log in. On 3-Line LCD phones, you press the right arrow key to log in.

3-Line LCD Phones Login Screens

471348471
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Log In

Please Enter:
Username:
Next

Submit

8 and 11-Line LCD Phones Login Screens
L1

471348471

Tues Jan1 10:00am

Log In -

5.

Please Enter:

Username:
Password:

- Backspace

Cancel -

- abc...

Submit -

Enter a username in the “Username” field (up to 40 characters) and a
password in the “Password” field (up to 20 characters).
Note: The “Username” and “Password” fields accept special
characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. You can also specify domain names
in the Username field (i.e., user@domain).

6.

After entering the username and password, press Submit.
The phone attempts to authenticate with the server. If successful, the phone
reboots and loads the user configuration. If unsuccessful, the phone displays
“Authentication Failed”.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-375

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module
The M675i Expansion Module screen displays softkeys in column format. The
function keys on the bottom left of the Module allow you to display 3 full screens
of softkeys. Each screen consists of 2 columns with the following default
headings on each page:
Page 1

"List 1" and "List 2"

Page 2

"List 3" and "List 4"

Page 3

"List 5" and "List 6"

Softkeys

List 1

List 2

Lock/Unlock
BLF 200
Home (speeddial)

(Press for page 1)
(Press for page 2)
Function Keys

(Press for page 3)

Page 1 Screen

5-376

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

List 3

List 4

Page 2 Screen

List 5

List 6

Page 3 Screen

To use the M675i, press the function key for the page you want to display to the
LCD (page 1, page2, or page 3), and press the applicable softkey.
You can customize the headings on each M675i Expansion Module screen using
the configuration files. You use the following parameters to customize the column
headings:
Expansion Module 1 (3 pages)
•

expmod1page1left

•

expmod1page1right

•

expmod1page2left

•

expmod1page2right

•

expmod1page3left

•

expmod1page3right

Expansion Module 2 (3 pages)
•

expmod2page1left

•

expmod2page1right

•

expmod2page2left

•

expmod2page2right

•

expmod2page3left

•

expmod2page3right

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-377

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

Expansion Module 3 (3 pages)
•

expmod3page1left

•

expmod3page1right

•

expmod3page2left

•

expmod3page2right

•

expmod3page3left

•

expmod3page3right

Example
The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column
headings.
expmod1page1left: Personnel Ext
expmod1page1right: Operations Ext
expmod1page2left: Marketing Ext
expmod1page2right: Logistics Ext
expmod1page3left: Engineering Ext
expmod1page3right: Shipping Ext

5-378

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Operational Features

Operational Features

These settings display to the Expansion Module as shown in the following
illustrations.
Personnel Ext

Marketing Ext

Operations Ext

Page 1 Screen

Logistics Ext

Page 2 Screen

Engineering Ext Shipping Ext

Page 3 Screen

Customizing the M675i Expansion Module Column Display.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display” on page A-257.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

5-379

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features

5-380

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Chapter 6
Configuring Advanced
Operational Features

About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the
configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI.
This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for
configuring each feature.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Advanced Operational Features

page 6-3

MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages

page 6-5

SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer

page 6-7

Update Caller ID During a Call

page 6-8

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode

page 6-9

Auto-discovery Using mDNS

page 6-10

Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only)

page 6-11

Missed Call Summary Subscription

page 6-13

As-Feature-Event Subscription

page 6-17

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topic

6-2

Page

Blacklist Duration

page 6-22

Whitelist Proxy

page 6-24

Transport Layer Security (TLS)

page 6-26

802.1x Support

page 6-31

Symmetric UDP Signaling

page 6-41

Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers

page 6-42

GRUU and sip.instance Support

page 6-43

Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)

page 6-44

Configurable DNS Queries

page 6-47

Ignore Out of Sequence Errors

page 6-49

“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891

page 6-50

Reason Header Field in SIP Message

page 6-50

Configurable “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Optional Headers

page 6-50

Configurable SIP P-Asserted Identity (PAI)

page 6-51

Configurable Route Header in SIP Packet

page 6-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features
Description
This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP
phones:
Feature

Description

MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER
Messages

Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC
address and line number from the IP phone to the call
server, in a REGISTER message.

SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer

Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use the Blind
Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4.

Update Caller ID During a Call

Allows you to enable or disable the updating of the Caller ID
information during a call.

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode

Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set
the maximum boot count on the IP phone.

Auto-discovery Using mDNS

The IP phones automatically perform an auto-discovery of all
servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone
discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by
that TFTP server.

Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i
CT only)

Allows you to enable or disable a single call restriction
between the 6757i CT base unit and a call server.

Missed Call Summary Subscription

Allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone
it was initially directed to.

As-Feature-Event Subscription

Allows you to enable or disable a specific line on the phone
with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.

Blacklist Duration

Allows you to specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone
avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time.

Whitelist Proxy

Allows you to configure the phone to either accept or reject
call requests from a trusted proxy server.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Feature

Description

Transport Layer Security (TLS)

Allows you to enable or disable the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once
and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The
setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call
and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated
connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.

802.1x Support

Allows you to enable or disable the 802.1x Protocol support
on the IP Phones.

Symmetric UDP Signaling

Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060
to send SIP UDP messages.

Removing UserAgent and Server SIP
Headers

Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack.

Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes)
Support (for Sylantro Servers)

IP Phones support Sylantro Server features, like mandatory
and optional billing codes that require the application server
to notify the phone to collect more digits before completing
the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to
support the billing code feature.

Configurable DNS Queries

Allows you to specify the Domain Name Service (DNS)
query method to use when the phone performs a DNS
lookup.

Ignore Out of Sequence Errors

Allows you to configure the phone to ignore CSeq number
errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone.

“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header
RFC3891

The phones support the “early-only” parameter in the
“Replaces” header according to RFC3891.

Reason Header Field in SIP Message

The IP Phones support the receiving of the Reason Header
Field in a SIP CANCEL message, as described in RFC3326.

Configurable “Allow” and “Allow-Event”
Optional Headers

On the IP Phones, an Administrator can enable or disable
whether or not the optional “Allow” and “Allow-Events”
headers are included in the NOTIFY message from the
phone.

6-4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER
packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via
the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. The following two configurable headers
send this information to the call server:
Aastra-Mac: 
Aastra-Line: 

The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers, for example,
00085D03C792. The line number is a number between 1 and 9.
The following parameters allow you to enable/disable the sending of MAC
address and line number to the call server:
•

sip send mac

•

sip send line

These parameters are disabled by default. The parameters are configurable via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the MAC address/Line Number in REGISTER Message

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling MAC address and line
number, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced Operational Parameters” on page A-259.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting.

2

Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).

3

Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).

4

Click

to save your settings.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
5

6-6

Select Operation->Reset and click

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having
two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the
transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee
to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent
before the REFER message.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to force the phone to use
the Blind Transfer method available in software versions prior to 1.4:
sip cancel after blind transfer
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the blind transfer
method, see Appendix A, the section, “Blind Transfer Setting” on page A-259.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Update Caller ID During a Call
It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that
displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the
re-INVITE message. The phone displays the updated name and number
information contained within the Contact header.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to enable or disable this
feature:
sip update callerid:
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring Update Caller ID During a Call

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the update of caller ID
during a call, see Appendix A, the section, “Update Caller ID Setting.” on page A-259.

6-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys
during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP
phone.
You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•

force web recovery mode disabled

Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false).
A boot counter increments after each faulty boot. When the counter reaches a
predetermined value, it forces Web recovery mode. The counter is reset to zero
upon a successful boot.
The predetermined value is set using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•

max boot count

A zero (0) value disables this feature. The default value is 10.
You can configure the boot sequence recovery mode parameters using the
configuration files only.
Configuring Boot Sequence Recovery Mode

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for boot sequence recovery mode, see
Appendix A, the section, “Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.” on page A-260.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Auto-discovery Using mDNS
The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using
mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically
configured by that TFTP server.
An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts
to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user
intervention. When it receives DHCP option 66 (TFTP server), it automatically
gets configured by the TFTP server.
An already configured phone (either previously configured by auto-discovery or
manually configured) added to a network, uses its predefined configuration to
boot up.
Notes:
1. Configuration parameters received via DHCP do not constitute
configuration information, with the exception of a TFTP server.
Therefore, you can plug a phone into a DHCP environment, still use the
auto-discovery process, and still allow the use of the TFTP server
parameter to set the configuration server.

2. DHCP option 66 (TFTP server details) overrides the mDNS phase of
the auto-discovery. Therefore, the DHCP option takes priority and the
remaining process of auto-discovery continues.
3. As the phone performs auto-discovery, all servers in the network
(including the TFTP server), display in the phone window. However, only
the server configured for TFTP automatically configures the phone.

6-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only)
On the 6757i CT and 9480i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single
call restriction between the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and a call server.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from
the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this feature
is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at a time either from the base unit
or from the handset. When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on
either the base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can negotiate
complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding audio at a time.
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Single Call Restriction.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for single call restriction on the 6757i CT
and 9480i CT, see Appendix A, the section, “Single Call Restriction Setting” on page A-261.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.

2

Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).

3

Click

to save your settings.

Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
4

6-12

Select Operation->Reset and click

.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Missed Call Summary Subscription
The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. This feature is called the Missed Call
Summary Subscription and can be set with a timer that allows the phone to use the
feature for a period of time before the timer expires. For this feature to work, you
must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the
server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be
forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls phone B, the server forwards the call
to phone C. With this feature, phone B receives notification from the server that
the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.

Phone A

A calls B

Phone C

Phone B

B fowards call to C

Missed calls indicator increments on phone B.
: Voicemail must be configured on phone B.
Note:

An Administrator can configure this feature on a global or per-line basis, using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Configuration Files
In addition to enabling/disabling the Misses Call Summary Subscription, You can
also configure the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses this feature.
The timer is configurable on a global basis only.
You use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature on a global basis:
Global Parameters
•

sip missed call summary subscription

•

sip missed call summary subscription period

Use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature on a per-line basis:
Per-Line Parameter
•

sip lineN missed call summary subscription

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for Missed Call Summary Subscription, see
Appendix A, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings” on page A-113.

6-14

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
2

The "Missed Call Summary Subscription" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check
the box.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For example, phones A, B, and C are
connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls sip missed call summary
subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded
and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the
above example).

3

The "Missed Call Summary Subscription Period" field is enabled with a default value of 86400. To
disable this field, enter zero (0), or leave the field blank.

4

Click

to save your changes.

Per-Line Configuration
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

Click

6-16

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

As-Feature-Event Subscription
The IP phones support server-side Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward
(CFWD), and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature events.This feature is
called “as-feature-event” and works with the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys.
Notes:
1. The 6751i supports server-side DND and CFWD only.
2. The DND, CFWD, and ACD server-side feature is not applicable to
the CT handset.
This feature is configurable using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
How it Works on the Phone UI
When you enable the “as-feature-event” on the phone, AND you activate a DND,
CFWD, and/or ACD key, pressing the key performs as follows:
•

If the key is configured for an account on the phone, the server applies DND,
CFWD or ACD to that account. (For information about CFWD and DND
account configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration”
on page 3-37).

•

If the key is “custom” configured, a screen displays on the phone allowing the
user to choose the account to apply DND or CFWD. (For information about
CFWD and DND custom configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account
Configuration” on page 3-37).

•

A solid “Message Waiting Indicator” (MWI) indicates if one line/account has
DND or CFWD enabled, and the LED next to the DND/CFWD key is ON. A
status displays on the LCD that indicates the status of the line in focus (for
example, the status of CFWD could be “Call Forward Busy” (CFWDB) or
“Call Forward No Answer” (CFWDNA).
Note: If the ACD key is configured on the phone, and the
“as-feature-event” is not enabled, the phones uses the ACD icons and
LED behavior from a Sylantro server instead.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

When you press the DND, CFWD, or ACD key, only one attempt is made to
enable/disable the “as-feature-event” feature on the server. The message “Trying”
displays on the phone’s LCD after pressing the key. If the attempt is successful,
the idle screen displays. If the attempt is unsuccessful, the message “Failed”
displays. The user can press the softkey again to re-attempt the feature if required.
The following screen displays on the IP Phone UI for server-side call forwarding:
Call Forward
Mode: CFA
Next

Done

For server-side ACD, when you press the ACD softkey, the screen that displays is
dependant on the state of the ACD subscription. Possible state for ACD are::
•

Logged Out - User has the option of logging in.

•

Logged In - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
unavailable.

•

Unavailable - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
available.

ACD Screen For 3-Line LCD Displays:
ACD

ACD

Logged In
Unavail
Log Out

Logged Out
Log In

ACD
Avail

Unavailable
Log Out

ACD Screen for 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones
ACD

ACD

Logged Out

Logged In

- Log Out

- Log In
Cancel -

6-18

ACD

- Unavailable

Unavailable

- Log Out
Cancel -

- Available

Cancel -

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Note: IMPORTANT!

If DND and CFWD are configured to use “Account” mode on the IP
Phone, pressing the DND and CFWD keys apply to the account in focus
as described in Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on
page 3-37.
If ACD is configured on the phone, the ACD softkey applies to the line
for which the key is configured. The ACD softkey must be configured for
the first line of an account. For example, if account 2 has line 3 and line 4
you must configure the ACD softkey for line 3.
Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Configuration
Files
If the phone-side features of the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys are enabled, the
phone uses the existing parameter values for these keys. If the server-side features
are enabled, the phone saves the state of the features from the server on the phone.
Use the following parameters to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone:
•

sip lineN as-feature-event subscription

•

sip as-feature-event subscription period

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings” on page A-116.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->LineN->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, enable the "As--Feature-Event Subscription" field, by
checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).

3

Click

6-20

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

As-Feature-Event
Subscription
Period

5

In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, in the “As-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter
the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits after sending a SUBSCRIBE, to receive a
NOTIFY response from the server side.
Default is 3600. Valid values are

6

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Blacklist Duration
The Blacklist Duration feature helps to reduce unnecessary delays during proxy/
registrar server failures, caused by the IP phone repeatedly sending SIP messages
to a failed server. If you enable this feature, then whenever the IP phone sends a
SIP message to a server, and does not get a response, the phone automatically
adds the server to the blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending messages to any
servers on the blacklist. If all servers are on the blacklist, then the IP phone
attempts to send the message to the first server on the list.
You can specify how long failed servers remain on the blacklist in the IP phone’s
configuration file or in the Aastra Web UI. The default setting is 300 seconds. If
you set the duration to 0 seconds, then you disable the blacklist feature.
Configuring Blacklist Duration Using the Configuration Files
Use the following parameter to configure the Blacklist Duration in the
configuration files:
•

sip blacklist duration

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Blacklist Duration, see Appendix
A, the section, “Blacklist Duration Setting” on page A-262.

6-22

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring a Server Blacklist Using the Aastra Web UI
You use the following procedure to configure Blacklist Duration using the Aastra
Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings

2

In the “Blacklist Duration” field, specify the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains
on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time. Valid values are 0 to 9999999. Default is 300 seconds (5
minutes).
For example: 600
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Whitelist Proxy
To protect your IP phone network, you can configure a “Whitelist Proxy” feature
that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones. When this feature is
enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP
phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server
Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameter to configure the whitelist proxy feature using the
configuration files:
•

sip whitelist

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Whitelist Proxy, see Appendix A,
the section, “Whitelist Proxy Setting” on page A-262.

6-24

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Whitelist Proxy feature using the
Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings

2

The "Whitelist Proxy" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Transport Layer Security (TLS)
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message.
TLS is composed of two layers: the TLS Record Protocol and the TLS handshake
protocol. The TLS Record Protocol provides connection security with some
encryption method such as the Data Encryption Standard (DES). The TLS
Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and to
negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is
exchanged. TLS requires the use of the following security certificate files to
perform TLS handshake:
•

Root and Intermediate Certificates

•

Local Certificate

•

Private Key

•

Trusted Certificate

When the phones use TLS to authenticate with the server, each individual call
must setup a new TLS connection. This can take more time when placing each
call. Thus, the IP phones also have a feature that allows you to setup the
connection to the server once and re-use that one connection for all calls from the
phone. It is called Persistent TLS. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is
established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent
calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay
time when placing a call.

6-26

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Notes:
1.
Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound
proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network
Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per
phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured
outbound proxy.
2.
If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also
specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate
Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.

On the IP phones, an Administrator can configure TLS and Persistent TLS on a
global-basis only, using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Asserted Identity (for Sylantro Servers)
The IP Phones support a private extension to SIP for Asserted Identity within
trusted networks (as defined in RFC 3325).
Note: The phones support PAI header in the UPDATE message,
according to draft-ietf-sipping-update-pai-00. This feature is always
enabled.

If an UPDATE is received with a PAI header from a trusted source, the
phone updates the display with this information. The phone ignores any
PAI received from untrusted entities
This feature allows a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of
authenticated users, and verify that phone messages originate from a Trusted
Identity. Upon receiving a message from a caller in the Trust Network, the IP
phone reads the contents of the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header field and
displays it on the phone UI. This field contains a more accurate description of the
caller identity (extension/phone number) than is contained in the SIP message.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

When an IP phone receives an incoming call, the IP phone does the following
actions:
•

Checks to see if the incoming call is from a registered proxy server.

•

If the call is forwarded via a registered proxy server, then the message has
already been verified and authenticated by the server. The caller is part of the
Trust Network. The IP phone UI displays the caller information contained in
the PAI header.

•

If the call is not forwarded via a registered proxy server - and therefore is not
a “Trusted Entity” - the IP phone UI does not display any trust information
contained in the PAI header.

Configuring TLS Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files:
•

sip transport protocol

•

sips persistent tls

•

sips root and intermediate certificates

•

sips local certificate

•

sips private key

•

sips trusted certificates

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting TLS, see Appendix A, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-117.

6-28

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring TLS Using the Aastra Web UI
To configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI, you must enable TLS or Persistent
TLS first. Then you must define the TLS certificate file names that you want the
phone to use. Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Aastra Web
UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2

In the "Transport Protocol" field, select TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: If configuring Persistent TLS, you must go to Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic Network
Settings and configure the “Outbound Proxy Server” and “Outbound Proxy Port” parameters.

3

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
4

Click on Advanced Settings->TLS Support.

5

Enter the certificate file names and the private key file name in the appropriate fields.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate
certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in
the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate).
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain
the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting
to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by
CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CS2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
Notes:
1. If configuring TLS, you must specify the files for Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates in order for the phone to receive calls.
2. If configuring Persistent TLS, you must specify the Trusted Certificates (which contains the trusted
certificate list). All other certificates and the Private Key are optional.
3. The certificate files and Private Key file names must use the format “.pem”.
4. To create custom certificate files and private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.

6

6-30

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x protocol. The 802.1x protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS protocols.
If 802.1x on the phone is enabled, the following screen displays during startup of
the phone.

>> 10%
802.1x Authenticating....

If the 802.1x failed to authenticate with the server, the phone continues it's normal
startup process using DHCP. However, the network port on the phone may or may
not be disabled, depending on the switch configuration.
Certificates and Private Key Information
•

If the certificates and private key are NOT stored in the phone:
— the phone connects to an open unauthenticated VLAN and the certificates
are downloaded.
or
— the phone connects using EAP-MD5 to a restricted VLAN and the
certificates are downloaded.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

•

If the certificates and private key ARE stored in the phone, the phone uses
them during the authentication process.

•

If the phone uses EAP-TLS for successful authentication, after the phone
reboots, it downloads the latest certificates and private key files to the phone.

•

The private key uses AES-128 to encrypt the private key file.

•

Switch Supplicant Mode - The switch supports the following 2 modes:
— Single supplicant - This mode enables the port once any machine
connected to this port is authenticated. For security reasons, the IP phone
has the option to disable the pass-through port.
— Multiple supplicants - Using this mode, the switch can support multiple
clients connected to same port. The switch distinguishes between the
clients based on their MAC address.

•

Factory default and recovery mode deletes all certificates and private keys,
and sets the EAP type to disabled.

You can configure the 802.1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.

Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.

6-32

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the configuration files.
For EAP-MD5 use:

•

eap type

•

identity

•

md5 password

•

pc port passthrough enabled

For EAP-TLS use:

•

eap type

•

identity

•

802.1x root and intermediate certificates
(use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates)

•

802.1x local certificate
(use 1 local certificate)

•

802.1x private key
(1 private key that corresponds to local certificate)

•

802.1x trusted certificates
(0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2)

Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting 802.1x support, see Appendix A,
the section, “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-126.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the IP Phone UI.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the

certificates and private keys must already be configured and
stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI to load certificates and private keys.

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator password.

6-34

to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

3

On 11-Line LCDs:
Select Network Settings->Ethernet & VLAN->802.1x Settings.
On 3-Line LCDs:
Select Network Settings->Ethernet & VLAN->802.1x Settings.

10. Ethernet & VLAN

4. 802.1x Settings

Ethernet & VLAN Settings
1. LAN Port Link
2. PC Port Link
3. VLAN Settings
4. 802.1x Settings

Next

Enter

Next

Enter

3-Line LCDs

- Select
Done -

11-Line LCDs
4

Select 802.1x Settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

5

Select 802.1x Mode.

802.1x Settings

1. 802.1x Mode

1. 802.1x Mode
2. EAP-MD5 Settings

Next

Enter

2. EAP-MD5 Settings
Yes
Enter
Next

- Select
Done -

6

Select EAP-MD5 to configure the phone to use MD5 authentication;
or
Select EAP-TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication.
4. 802.1x Settings

802.1x Mode

Next

1. 802.1x Mode
Enter

Next

Disabled
EAP-MD5

Enter

802.1x Mode
Disabled
Next

Set

802.1x Mode
EAP-MD5
Next

Set

802.1x Mode
EAP-TLS
Next

Set



EAP-TLS
Cancel Done -

Note: The 802.1x Protocol is disabled by default. If you select EAP-TLS authentication, you must use
the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure the certificates and private key for the phone.
7

Press Done (on 8 and 11-Line LCD phones)
or
Press Set (on 3-Line LCD phones - not applicable to the 6751i).

8

To configure MD5, select EAP-MD5 Settings.

6-36

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

9

Select Identity.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings

EAP-MD5 Setting

Next

1. Identity

Enter

1. Identity
2. MD5 Password

Next

Enter

User Name
|
Cancel

Set

Enter

Password
|
Cancel

Set

2. MD5 Password
Next

- Select
Done -

10

Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings

Username
Username:
|

Next

Enter

1. Identity
Next

Enter

User Name
|
Cancel

Set

Enter

Password
|
Cancel

Set

2. MD5 Password
Next

- Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC
Done -

11

Use the keys as applicable while entering the username; then press Done (8 and 11-Line LCD
phones).
or
Press Set (3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra IP Phone UI
Step

Action

12

Enter the password used for authenticating the phone.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings

Password

Next

Password:
|

Enter

1. Identity
Next

Enter

User Name
|
Cancel

Set

Enter

Password
|
Cancel

Set

2. MD5 Password
Next

- Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC
Done -

13

Use the keys as applicable while entering the password; then press Done (8 and 11-Line LCD
phones).
or
Press Set (3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to 6751i).

14

Press the

6-38

key to save your settings and exit from the IP Phone UI.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.

To configure EAP-MD5:
2

In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-MD5.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.

3

In the “Identify” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.

4

In the “MD5 Password” field, enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
For example, password1.

5

Click

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
To configure EAP-TLS:
1

Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.

1

In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-TLS.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.

2

In the “Identity” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.

3

In the “Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. For example:
root_Intermed_certifi.pem.

4

In the “Local Certificate Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the local certificate. For
example: localcertificate.pem.

5

In the “Private Key Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the private key. For example:
privatekey.pem.

6

In the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the trusted certificates.
For example: trusted_certificates.pem.

7

Click

6-40

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Symmetric UDP Signaling
By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens
for UDP messages using port 5060.
You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone’s
configuration file. When you disable symmetric UDP signaling, then the IP phone
chooses a random source port for UDP messages.
The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages if you
configure a backup proxy server, registrar server, or outbound proxy server.
An Administrator can configure symmetric UDP signaling using the configuration
files only.
Configuring Symmetric UDP Signaling Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric UDP Signaling
in the configuration files:
•

sip symmetric udp signaling

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec,
DTMF Global Settings” on page A-134.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers
Currently, the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent/Server headers to
contain:
Aastra /
You can suppress the addition of these headers by using the following parameter
in the configuration files:
•

sip user-agent

Setting this parameter allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers from the SIP stack.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files only.
Configuring UserAgent/Server SIP Headers
You use the following parameter to specify whether the UserAgent and Server SIP
header is added to the SIP stack.
•

sip user-agent

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “User-Agent
Setting” on page A-267.

6-42

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

GRUU and sip.instance Support
Globally Routable User-Agent URIs (GRUUs) provide a way for anyone on the
Internet to route a call to a specific instance of a User-Agent.
The IP phones provide GRUU support using draft-ietf-sip-gruu-15. A sip.instance
is added to all non-GRUU contacts. By default, this feature is enabled. You can
enable or disable this support using the configuration files.
Limitations of the GRUU Feature
The following are limitations of the GRUU feature on the phones:
•

GRUU-Draft-15 is not compatible with versions prior to GRUU-Draft-10.

•

Phones do not support temporary or phone-created GRUUs.

Enabling/Disabling GRUU and sip.instance Support
Use the following procedure to enable/disable GRUU and sip.instance support.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “GRUU and
sip.instance Support” on page A-267.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)
The IP Phones support Multi-Stage Digit Collection (billing codes) for Sylantro
Servers. Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes,
requires that the application server notify the phone to collect more digits before
completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support
the billing code feature.
Aastra IP Phone users are prompted to enter the correct billing code when they
dial these numbers:
•

External numbers.

•

Eternal numbers dialed using a Speeddial key.

Billing Codes Implementation Notes
Note the following implementation information:
•

IP phone users may enter a 2-9 digit billing code. Billing codes may not start
with either 0 (Operator) or 9 (external calls).

•

When using Sylantro Click-to-Call, IP phone users select a billing code from
a pull-down menu.

•

When placing a call, a secondary dial tone alerts IP phone users to enter the
billing code. The IP phone UI also displays a “Enter Billing Code” message.

•

If an IP phone user redials a number, they do not have to re-enter the billing
code. The billing code information is maintained and processed accordingly.

•

If an IP phone user enters an invalid billing code, the call fails.

Mandatory versus Optional Billing Codes
This release of the Aastra IP phones supports two types of billing codes:
Mandatory and Optional. The Sylantro server configuration determines which
type of billing code is used on the IP phones.
•

6-44

Mandatory billing codes: Calls are not connected until the user enters a valid
billing code. The user dials the phone number. When prompted for billing
codes, user dials the billing code.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5500. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
6172385000#300
Using mandatory billing codes, if the user is configuring a Speeddial number,
then they enter the number using the following format:
%23
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign required
by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped character by
using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an external number that
includes a mandatory billing code becomes:
%23
•

Optional billing codes: The user dials an optional billing code by dialing
*50, followed by the billing code digits. When prompted for additional digits,
user enters the phone number.
For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 500, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5000. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
*50500#6172385000
If the user is dialing configuring a Speeddial number, then they enter the
number using the following format:
*50#
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign
required by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped
character by using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an
external number that includes an optional billing code becomes:
*50%23

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Numbers Not Requiring Billing Codes
Billing codes are not required for the following two types of calls:

6-46

•

Emergency calls (E911)

•

Calls between extensions

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Configurable DNS Queries
The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain names are
located and translated into Internet Protocol addresses. A domain name is a
meaningful and easy-to-remember identifier for an Internet address.
The lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet
in a hierarchy of authority within a database of records. There is usually a DNS
server within close proximity to your geographic location that maps the domain
names in your Internet requests or forwards them to other servers in the Internet.
The IP Phones support three methods of DNS lookups allowing it to adapt to
various deployment environments: eNone, eSRV, and eNAPTR&SRV. (See the
following table for a description of each method). When the IP Phone accesses the
Internet, it sends out a DNS query to the proxy to lookup the IP address and the
port, and then waits for a response from the proxy.
You can configure the phone to use any one of these methods by entering the
applicable value in the configuration files:.
Configuration
File Value

DNS Server
Method Used

0

A only

The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP address
and uses the default port number of 5060.

1

SRV & A

The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup to get
the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the
response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no
IP address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A”
DNS lookup to find the IP address.

2

NAPTR & SRV & A First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming Authority Pointer) lookup
to get the “SRV” pointer and service type (such as "aastra.com
SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means the service prefers
to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV query instead of
the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR record is
returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same case,
the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step lookup.

Description

Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port
number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it
sends out and “A” lookup to get it.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a FullyQualified Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone
always sends “A only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.

Configuring the DNS Query Method
You can configure the DNS query method for the phone to use for performing
DNS lookups using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

sip dns query type

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DNS Query
Setting” on page A-268.

6-48

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
An Administrator can configure the phone via the “sip accept out of order
requests” parameter to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the
phone. When this parameter is enabled, the phone no longer verifies that the
sequence numbers increase for each message within a dialog, and does not report
a "CSeq Out of Order" error if they do not increase.
Note: As the default Asterisk configuration does not fully track dialogs
through a reboot, it is recommended that this parameter be enabled when
using the BLF feature with an Asterisk server. If you do not enable this
feature, then rebooting the Asterisk server may cause BLF to stop
working. With this parameter enabled, the BLF key starts working again
when the phone re-subscribes, which by default, are one hour apart.

An Administrator can enable/disable this feature using the configuration files
only.
Enabling/Disabling “Out of Order SIP Requests”
Use the following procedure to enable/disable “out of order SIP requests”.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Ignore Out of
Order SIP Requests” on page A-269.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features

“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891
The phones support the “early-only” parameter in the “Replaces” header
according to RFC3891. When the phone receives a Replaces header with the
early-only parameter, it replaces the existing dialog if the call is still in the early
state. If the call has been answered, then the Replaces request is rejected.
Note: This feature is not supported in outgoing requests.

Reason Header Field in SIP Message
The IP Phones support the receiving of the Reason Header Field in a SIP
CANCEL message, as described in RFC3326. This allows a call that is answered
from somewhere else to still display in the Callers List. Also, the missed calls
indicator and counter do not change.
Limitation
If the call is answered somewhere else, the duration of the call does not display in
the Callers List.

Configurable “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Optional Headers
On the IP Phones, an Administrator can enable or disable whether or not the
optional “Allow” and “Allow-Events” headers are included in the NOTIFY
message from the phone.
SIP NOTIFY messages from the phone may contain optional headers called
“Allow” and “Allow-events”. If the NOTIFY message contains these headers, the
UDP packet returned by the server may be too large and may fragment the packet.
To prevent the fragmenting of the UDP packet, the “Allow” and “Allow-events”
headers may be removed using the parameter, “sip notify opt headers”. If this
parameter is set to “0” (disabled), the optional headers are not included in the SIP
NOTIFY neassage which reduces the size of the packet returned by the server, and
prevents fragmentation of the packet.
The value set for this parameter specifies whether or not to include the optional
headers in the SIP NOTIFY message from the phone.
6-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Configuring Advanced Operational Features

Advanced Operational Features

An Administrator can enable/disable the optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event”
headers using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•

sip notify opt headers

Enablling/Disabling Optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers
Use the following procedure to enable/disable “Allow” and “Allow-Event”
headers.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Optional
“Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers” on page A-269.

Configurable SIP P-Asserted Identity (PAI)
The IP Phones support a private extension to SIP for Asserted Identity within
trusted networks (as defined in RFC 3325). This feature allows a network of
trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of authenticated users, and verify that
phone messages originate from a Trusted Identity. Upon receiving a message from
a caller in the Trusted Network, the IP phone reads the contents of the
P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header field and displays it on the phone UI.
The phones provide the ability for the Administrator to enable or disable the
display of P-Asserted Identity (PAI) information on the phone using the following
parameter in the configuration files:
•

sip pai

Enabling/Disabling P-Asserted Identity (PAI)
Use the following procedure to enable/disable PAI.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “P-Asserted
Identity (PAI)” on page A-270.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

6-51

Configurable Route Header in SIP Packet
The IP Phones support the following parameter:
•

sip remove route

This parameter enables or disables the addition of the Route header in a SIP
packet. Enable this parameter for outbound proxies that do not support Route
headers.
Note: When enabled this will break all support for SIP routing, so if
some other device in the network attempts to add itself to the route it will
fail.

Enabling/Disabling the Route Header in the SIP Packet
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the addition of the Route header in
the SIP packet.

Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Route Header
in SIP Packet” on page A-270.

Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides
methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

page 7-2

Configuration File Encryption Method

page 7-2

Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files

page 7-4

Vendor Configuration File Encryption

page 7-6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

7-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of
storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and
tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords,
registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a
phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only.

Configuration File Encryption Method
Only a System Administrator can encrypt the configurations files for an IP Phone.
System Administrators use a password distribution scheme to manually
pre-configure or automatically configure the phones to use the encrypted
configuration with a unique key.
From a Microsoft Windows command line, the System Administrator uses an
Aastra-supplied encryption tool called "anacrypt.exe" to encrypt the .tuz
file.
Note: Aastra also supplies encryption tools to support Linux platforms
(anacrypt.linux) and Solaris platforms (anacrypt.sunos) if required.

This tool processes the plain text .cfg and aastra.cfg files and creates
triple-DES encrypted versions called .tuz and aastra.tuz. Encryption is
performed using a secret password that is chosen by the administrator.
The encryption tool is also used to create an additional encrypted tag file called
security.tuz, which controls the decryption process on the IP phones. If
security.tuz is present on the TFTP/FTP/HTTP server, the IP phones download it
and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the aastra.tuz and
.tuz files. Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files
need to be stored on the server, no plain-text configuration or passwords are sent
across the network, thereby ensuring security of the configuration data.

7-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must save
the original files.
Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via
security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and
.cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files
aastra.tuz and .tuz are read.

The security feature described above prevents unauthorized parties from reading
or writing the contents of the .tuz file. It also provides the following:
•

Prevents users from using the .tuz file that does not match the user’s
phone MAC address.

•

Renders the .tuz file invalid if the user renames the file.

•

Works with IP phone releases prior to Release 2.2.

•

Provides compatibility between the previous encryption routine and the new
decryption routine.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

7-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
To encrypt the IP phone configuration files:
1.

Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window).

2.

At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press .

C:\> anacrypt.exe -h
Provides encryption of the configuration files used for the family of Aastra IP
phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys.
Copyright (c) 2008, Aastra Technologies, Ltd.

Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J. Erdelsky
Usage:
anacrypt {infile.cfg|-d } [-p password] [-m] [-i] [-v] [-h]

Anacrypt Switch

Description

{infile.cfg | -d }

Specifies that all .cfg files in  should be encrypted

[-p password]

Specifies password used to generate keys

-m

Generate MAC.tuz files that are phone specific. This switch generates files that are

only usable for phones with firmware version 2.2.0 and above.
-i

Generate security.tuz file

-v

Specifies the version of encryption that the anacrypt tool uses. Use version 1 encryption
(i.e., -v1) to generate firmware that is readable by all model phones. Without the -v1

switch, the anacrypt tool generates files that are only readable by phones with
firmware 2.2.0 and above.
-h

Display program help text

Note: Incorrect password produces garbage. For site-specific keyfile
security.cfg the plaintext must match password.

7-4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Examples

The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file.
Example 1
Generating a security.tuz file with password 1234abcd
For firmware version 2.2.0 and up:
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd
For any firmware version:
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd -v1
Example 2
Encrypting a single aastra.cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 3
Encrypting a .cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 4
Encrypting a .cfg file with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption (-m is only supported for firmware version 2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -m -p 1234abcd

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

7-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Example 5
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption and generating a security.tuz file at the same time.(2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -m -i
Example 6
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the and
generating a security.tuz file at the same time for all firmware versions.(any
version)
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -i -v1

Vendor Configuration File Encryption
Some vendors can have specific methods to encrypt files on their configuration
servers. For each phone, the configuration server can generate a random hex string
(encryption key) that is used to encrypt the phone’s MAC-specific configuration
file.
The encryption key is placed in a plain text MAC-specific configuration file that
the server downloads to the phone. After the phone receives the file, it updates the
encryption key.
This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Aastra
method of file encryption.

Note: The aastra.cfg file is not encrypted with this feature.

You can set the phone-specific encryption key using the configuration files only.
For more information about configuration file encryption, contact Aastra
Technical Support.

7-6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

Configuring Vendor Configuration File Encryption
Use the following procedure to configure vendor configuration file encryption on
the IP Phones.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Encryption Setting” on page A-271.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

7-7

Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Upgrading the Firmware

page 8-2

Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI

page 8-2

Using the Restart Feature

page 8-5

Using the Auto-Resync Feature

page 8-7

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware
The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download
configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration
server.
The configuration server should be ready and able to accept connections. For
information on configuration server requirements, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-40.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•

Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location
Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.

•

Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone
automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the
boot process.

•

Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware,
configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature
can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).

Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI
You can use the Aastra Web UI to manually force a firmware update from the
configuration server to a phone in your network by selecting Advanced
Settings->Firmware Update. You can configure the phone to perform the update
using any of the protocols that the phone supports: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.

Note: This procedure downloads an updated  file as
well as any other firmware files that were updated, to your phone.
8-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

Use the following procedure to manually update the firmware on your
phone from the specified configuration server.
Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

In the “File Name” field, enter the firmware file name (.st) that you want to download
to your IP phone. For example, 53i.st (for a 6753i phone).
Note: This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration
server.
IMPORTANT: The renamed 675xi phones still use the old naming convention for the .st files. See the
following table.
IP Phone Model

Associated Firmware

9143i

9143i.st

9480i

9480i.st

9480i CT

9480iCT.st

6730i

6730i.st

6731i

6731i.st

6751i

51i.st

6753i

53i.st

6755i

55i.st

6757i

57i.st

6757i CT

57iCT.st

3

In the “Download Protocol” field, select the protocol from the list to use for downloading the new
firmware. Valid values are:
• TFTP
• FTP
• HTTP
• HTTPS

4

In the “Server” field, enter the IP address in dotted decimal format, of the TFTP configuration server,
or the domain name of the FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS configuration servers (dependant on the protocol
you selected in step 3.) For example: 432.221.45.6.

5

In the “Path” field, enter the path location on the protocol server for where the new firmware resides.
For example, C:\aastra\configserver\firmwareupgrade.

8-4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

6

In the “Port” field, enter the port number of the protocol server. For example, 80 (for HTTP) or 443
(for HTTPS).
Note: This field is not applicable to the TFTP and FTP protocols.

7

(FTP only) In the “Username ” field, enter the username that is used for authentication when the FTP
server is accessed.

8

(FTP only) In the “Password ” field, enter the password that is used for authentication when the FTP
server is accessed.

9

Click

.

This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the
screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful".

Using the Restart Feature
Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and
configuration files stored on the configuration server.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.

Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware

IP Phone UI
Step

Action

2

Select Restart Phone.

3

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
Press # to confirm.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.

Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.

2

Click

8-6

to restart the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

Using the Auto-Resync Feature
The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the
phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP,
HTTP, and HTTPS servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the
Aastra Web UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg).
Note: The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.

An Administrator can enable Auto-Resync using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the configuration files you set the following parameters:
•

auto resync mode - Determines whether the configuration server
automatically updates the phone’s configuration files only, the firmware only,
both the firmware and configuration files, or disables automatic updates. This
parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS servers.

•

auto resync time - Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to
be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and
HTTPS servers.

•

auto resync max delay - Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone
waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync.

•

auto resync days - Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between
checksync operations.

In the Aastra Web UI, you can set the following parameters at the path Advanced
Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync:
•

Mode

•

Time (24 hours)

•

Maximum Delay

•

Days

Setting the “auto resync max delay” (Maximum Delay) and “auto resync days”
(Days) parameters can greatly reduce the load placed on the configuration server
when downloading configurations.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware

Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to configure automatic updates of the IP phone
firmware, configuration files, or both.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18.

.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.

2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are
not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take
precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
4.

The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.

5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.

8-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable auto-resync for the phones in your
network.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync.

Auto-Sync
Parameters

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

2

In the “Mode” field, select the auto-resync mode you want to use to automatically update the phone.
Valid values are:
None
Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files Updates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified
time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware
Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the
files on the server have changed.
Both
Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time
if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an
auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the
Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the
phone becomes idle.

3

In the “Time (24-hour)” field, select the time that you want the update to take place.
Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments).
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the values are in 30-minute
increments only.

4

In the “Maximum Delay” field, specify the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the
scheduled time before starting a checksync. The range is 0 to 1439. Default is 15.

5

In the “Days” field, specify the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations.
The range is 0 to 364. Default is 0.
Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time. A
value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync.

6

Click

to save your settings.

These changes are not dynamic.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.

8-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

7

Click on Operation->Reset.

8

In the "Restart Phone" field click

to restart the IP phone and apply the update.

The update performs automatically at the time you designated.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

8-11

Chapter 9
Troubleshooting

About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you
may have while using the IP phones.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Troubleshooting

page 9-3

Log Settings

page 9-3

Module/Debug Level Settings

page 9-4

Support Information

page 9-7

WatchDog Task Feature

page 9-12

Error Messages Display

page 9-15

Troubleshooting Solutions

page 9-19

Why does my phone display “Application missing”?

page 9-19

Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?

page 9-20

Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?

page 9-20

Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
How do I restart the IP phone?

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

page 9-21
page 9-22

9-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter

Topic

9-2

Page

How do I set the IP phone to factory default?

page 9-23

How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?

page 9-24

How to reset a user’s password?

page 9-25

How do I lock and unlock the phone?

page 9-27

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using the Aastra Web UI, a system
administrator can:
•

Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files

•

Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files

•

Save the current local configuration file to a specified location

•

Save the current server configuration file to a specified location

•

Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)

Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.

Log Settings
Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can specify the location
for which to save files for troubleshooting purposes.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•

log server ip - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.

•

log server port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.

•

log level - The severity level of the logs to be reported to a log file. Log Level
default is Error (3). (Changes to this parameter via the Aastra Web UI require
a reboot).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•

Log IP - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.

•

Log Port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.

Reference
For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-272.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.

Module/Debug Level Settings
The Aastra IP phones provide blog module support that allows enhanced severity
filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be
frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation. Blogs are
defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single page in
reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules
which allow you to log specific information for analyzing.
The following table identifies the blog modules you can set.

9-4

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

LINMGR (Line Manager information)

log module linemgr

UI (User Interface (UI) related)

log module user interface

MISC (Miscellaneous)

log module misc

SIP (Call control SIP stack)

log module sip

DIS (Display drivers)

log module dis

DSTORE (Delayed storage)

log module dstore

EPT (Endpoint module)

log module ept

IND (Indicator module)

log module ind

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

KBD (Keyboard module)

log module kbd

NET (Network module)

log module net

PROVIS (Provisioning module)

log module provis

RTPT (Realtime Transport module)

log module rtpt

SND (Sound module)

log module snd

PROF (Profiler module)

log module prof

XML (Extension Markup Lanaguage)

log module xml

STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) through Network Address
Translation (NAT)

log module stun

Setting Values for the Module/Debug Levels
There are 6 debug levels for the modules. Each debug level has a value you can
use to turn individual levels ON and OFF. The following table identifies these
debug levels and their values. The value of “1” (fatal errors) is the default setting
for all modules.
Debug Level

Value

Fatal Errors

1 (default)

Errors

2

Warnings

4

Init

8

Functions

16

Info

32

All debug levels
OFF

0

All Debug Levels
ON

65535

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Example 1
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value
associated with each level. For example,
Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7

In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the
line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Example 2
Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48
log module dis: 48
log module net: 48
log module snd: 48

In the above example, functions and general information are logged for the
display drivers, network, and sound modules.
Example 3
log module rtpt: 0
log module ind: 65535

In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport
module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module.
You can set the Module/Debug Levels using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Reference
For more information about the debug level configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-272.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.

9-6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Support Information
You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the
location specified in the "Log Settings" section.
Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current
configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary.
In the “Support Information” section, you can:
•

Get local.cfg

•

Get server.cfg

•

Show Task and Stack Status

Aastra Technical Support uses this support information for troubleshooting the IP
phone when required.
Using the Aastra Web UI and selecting “Show Task and Stack Status” displays
the tasks and stack status on the IP phone. This screen also displays the Free
Memory and the Max Block Free Memory currently on the phone as shown in
the following illustration. This information is for troubleshooting purposes only.
.

Free Memory

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Max Memory Block Size

9-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Performing Troubleshooting Tasks
Use the following procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Log Settings” on
page A-272.

9-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.

To set log settings:
2

In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored.

3

In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP"
field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

4

Click

5

Click on Operation->Reset.

6

In the "Restart Phone" field click

to save your settings.

to restart the IP phone.

To set blog modules:
7

Select a module for which you want to have log files created, and sent to a blog.

8

Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module. Valid values are:
Debug Level

Value

Fatal Errors

1 (default)

Errors

2

Warnings

4

Init

8

Functions

16

Info

32

All debug
levels OFF

0

All Debug
Levels ON

65535

The value of “0” turns all debug levels OFF for a module. The value of “65535” turns all debug levels
ON for a module.
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level.
For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user
interface, and SIP call control modules.
9

9-10

Click

to save your settings.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

10

Click on Operation->Reset.

11

In the "Restart Phone" field click

to restart the IP phone.

To perform support tasks:
12

To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on
local.cfg" field.

in the "Get

13

To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on
"Get server.cfg" field.

14

To display task and stack status information, as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free
Memory on the phone, click on
in the "Show Task and Stack Status" field.

in the

Note: The local and server configuration file information and the task and stack status information is
for use by Aastra Technical Support for troubleshooting purposes.

Reference
For information that describes solutions to most common problems using the IP
phones, see the next section, “Troubleshooting Solutions” on page 9-19.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

WatchDog Task Feature
The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “WatchDog” task that
monitors the status of the phones and provides the ability to get stack traces from
the last time the phone failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e., a crash), it
automatically reboots. You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Aastra Web
UI at the path, Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. You can enable/disable the
WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Enabling/Disabling WatchDog
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “WatchDog
Settings” on page A-275.

9-12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog task for the IP
Phones using the Aastra Web UI. You can also view the “Crash Log” generated by
the WatchDog task using the Aastra Web UI.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.

Enable/Disable WatchDog

View Crash Log

Enable/Disable WatchDog Task
2

The “WatchDog” field is enabled by default. To disable the WatchDog task, click in the “Enabled”
box to clear the check mark.

3

Click

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

to save your changes.

9-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Aastra Web UI
View the Crash Log
4

9-14

To view a crash log, in the “Get a Crash Log” field, click the SAVE AS button. You can open the
file immediately, or you can save the Crash Log to your PC.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Error Messages Display
An Administrator can view generated error messages that may have occurred
during startup or reboot of the IP Phones. The IP Phone UI has a selection on the
Phone Status page called, “Error Messages” at the location, Options->Phone
Status->Error Messages. The Aastra Web UI also allows you to view these error
messages at the location Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages.
These options allow you to view error messages generated by modules during
startup only (not after registration has completed). You can use this information
for troubleshooting purposes or for reporting the errors to the Administrator.
The IP Phone stores and displays up to 10 error messages (any extra error
messages beyond 10 are discarded). The time and date of each error message also
displays. After a reboot, the previous error messages are discarded and, if
applicable, new error messages display. If there are no error messages during
startup or after a reboot, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the
screen. Error messages display in the language currently set on the phone.
The following table identifies the possible error messages that may display.
Possible Error Message

Description

Bad Certificate

A Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificate
is not valid. The invalid certificate can be
any of the following:
• root and intermediate certificate
• local certificate
• private key filename
• trusted certificate

802.1x Startup Failed

The Extensible Authentication Protocol TLS
(EAP-TLS) certificates and/or the EAP-MD5
information has failed on the phone.

LLDP Startup Failed

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) failed
during startup of the phone.

HTTP Connection Manager Init Failed

The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
connection manager initialization failed
while updating the configuration on the
phone.

Failed to config Line Manager

The configuration of the Line Manager
module on the phone has failed.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Viewing the Error Messages Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated
during startup.

IP Phone UI
1

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Phone Status.

3

Select Error Messages.

Phone Status

8 and 11-Line
LCD Phones

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

IP&MAC Addresses
LAN Port
PC Port
Firmware Info
Error Messages

- Select
Done -

3-Line LCD Phones

5. Error Messages
Enter

9-16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

IP Phone UI
4

If error messages display, use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to view the messages. If no error
message exist, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the screen.

8 and 11-Line
LCD Phones

Error Messages

Fri Aug 4 1:55 pm

Fri Aug 4 1:57 pm

Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm
Done -

Error Messages

3-Line LCD Phones


Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm
Exit

Error Messages

5

Error Messages

No Error Messages

Done -

No Error Messages

No Error Messages
Exit

No Error Messages

When done viewing, press Done or Exit to exit the Error Messages screen.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting

Viewing the Error Messages Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated
during startup.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages.

Error Messages

2

9-18

Scroll down to the “Error Messages” section to view the error messages that may have generated
during startup or reboot of the IP Phone.
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Solutions

Troubleshooting Solutions
Description
This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur
while using the IP phones.

Why does my phone display “Application missing”?
If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the
application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer
retrieve the required firmware file. In the event that the phone is no longer able to
communicate with the TFTP server in its attempt to re-download the firmware and
the phone cannot locate the application locally, the message "Application
missing" displays.
The phone also displays the following: “Recovery web-client at: ”.
The IP Address displayed is the IP address of the phone. If the phone is unable to
receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP, the phone
auto-assigns itself the default IP 192.168.0.50.
To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance, please perform the
following:
1.

Launch your web browser on your computer.
Note: Your computer needs to be on the same network as your IP Phone.

2.

In the URL, type: “http://” (where IP Address is the IP Address
displayed on the phone). Your browser launches the Aastra IP Phone
Firmware Recovery page.

3.

Call Customer Support and request a .st file.

4.

Copy the file to your TFTP server.

5.

Enter the .st file that is ready for download.

6.

Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server.

7.

Press the Download Firmware button.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions

Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the
firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will
locate the file and reload the application onto the phone.

Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set
up correctly.
The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables
registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using
username@ip address of the phone. The phone displays "No Service".
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2,
etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not
display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.
Check that the "Registrar Server" IP address in the Aastra Web UI at Advanced
Settings->Global SIP is correct. Check the "sip registrar ip" parameter in the
configuration files is correct.

Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
The IP phone displays "Bad Encrypted Config" because encrypted configuration
files are enabled but the decryption process has failed. Specific cases where
decryption fails are:
Reason:
The site-specific password in security.tuz does not match the password used to
encrypt the .tuz or aastra.tuz files.
Fix:
Encrypt the .cfg files to .tuz using the correct password, or replace the security.tuz
with the correct encrypted file.

9-20

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Solutions

Reason:
Neither of the .tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration
server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP).
Fix:
Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration
server.
Reason:
The encrypted .tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version
of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware.
Fix:
Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared
to the phone firmware version.

Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for
the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is
responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or domain name to the
phone automatically. If your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must
manually enter the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into
your IP phone configuration.
For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-112.
For specific protocol parameters you can set in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions

How do I restart the IP phone?
IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Restart Phone.

3

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
Press # to confirm.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.

2

Click

9-22

to restart the phone.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Solutions

How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3

Select Factory Default.

4

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

For 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2

In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click

.

This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions

How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?
IP Phone UI
Step

Action

1

Press

2

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3

Select Erase Local Config.

4

For 3-Line LCD Displays::
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.

on the phone to enter the Options List.

For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays::
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2

In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click

.

This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.

9-24

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Solutions

How to reset a user’s password?
IP Phone UI
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select User Password.

3

Enter the current user password.

4

Press Enter.

5

Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

6

Press Enter.

7

Re-enter the new user password.

8

Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

1

Click on Operation->User Password.

2

In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.

3

In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions

Aastra Web UI
Step

Action

4

In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again.

5

Click

9-26

to save your changes.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Solutions

How do I lock and unlock the phone?
IP Phone UI
Step

Action

Lock the phone:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2

Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.

3

Press Lock to lock the phone.

Unlock the phone:
1

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
2

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
The phone unlocks.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

9-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions

Aastra Web UI
1

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

Lock the phone:
2

In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click

.

The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

4

In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click

.

The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.

9-28

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Appendix A
Configuration Parameters

About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for
the IP phones. The configuration files include  and config.cfg.

Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Setting Parameters in Configuration Files

page A-6

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

page A-7

Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu

page A-7

Network Settings

page A-8

DHCP Option Settings

page A-13

Password Settings

page A-15

Emergency Dial Plan Settings

page A-16

Aastra Web UI Settings

page A-17

Configuration Server Settings

page A-18

Multiple Configuration Server Settings

page A-29

Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings

page A-31

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix

Topic

A-2

Page

Rport Setting

page A-33

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting

page A-34

Local SIP TLS Port

page A-34

HTTPS Client and Server Settings

page A-35

HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings

page A-37

UPnP Settings

page A-41

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings

page A-42

RTCP Summary Reports

page A-47

Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings

page A-51

Time and Date Settings

page A-52

Time Server Settings

page A-59

Custom Time Zone and DST Settings

page A-61

Backlight Mode Settings (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)

page A-71

DHSG Settings (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)

page A-72

Live Dialpad Settings

page A-72

SIP Local Dial Plan Settings

page A-73

SIP Outbound Support

page A-76

Dynamic SIP for Registration and Subscription

page A-77

SIP Basic, Global Settings

page A-78

SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings

page A-87

BLA Support for MWI

page A-98

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging

page A-99

Centralized Conferencing Settings

page A-100

SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference

page A-102

HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS

page A-103

Advanced SIP Settings

page A-104

Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings

page A-113

As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings

page A-116

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings

page A-117

802.1x Support Settings

page A-126

RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings

page A-134
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

About this appendix

Topic

Page

Autodial Settings

page A-139

Voicemail Settings

page A-142

Directory Settings

page A-144

Callers List Settings

page A-146

Customize Callers List and Services Key

page A-147

Call Forward Settings

page A-148

Call Forward Key Mode Settings

page A-149

LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings

page A-151

Missed Calls Indicator Settings

page A-153

XML Settings

page A-154

Action URI Settings

page A-157

XML SIP Notify Settings

page A-163

Polling Action URI Settings

page A-164

Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings

page A-165

Ring Tone Per-Line Settings

page A-167

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting

page A-168

Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls

page A-169

Switch Focus to Ringing Line

page A-170

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout

page A-171

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call

page A-172

Stuttered Dial Tone Setting

page A-173

Call Waiting Settings

page A-174

Message Waiting Indicator Settings

page A-175

DND Key Mode Settings

page A-176

Priority Alert Settings

page A-177

Bellcore Cadence Settings

page A-182

SIP Diversion Display

page A-184

Display of Call Destination for Incoming Calls

page A-185

Language Settings

page A-186

Language Pack Settings

page A-188

Suppress DTMF Playback Setting

page A-198

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix

Topic

Page

Display DTMF Digits Setting

page A-199

Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings

page A-200

Group Paging RTP Settings

page A-204

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings

page A-205

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings

page A-209

ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings

page A-211

Park and Pickup Global Settings (not applicable to 6751i))

page A-212

Mapping Key Settings

page A-214

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

page A-217

Softkey Settings for 8 and 11-Line LCD phones

page A-219

Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, and 6755i

page A-228

Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT

page A-233

Handset Feature Key Settings (9480i CT and 6757i CT)

page A-240

Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i page A-242
(for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Customizing the Key Type List

page A-249

Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys

page A-252

Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)

page A-255

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys

page A-256

BLF List URI Settings

page A-256

Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display

page A-257

Expansion Module 1 through 3

page A-257

Advanced Operational Parameters

page A-259

A-4

Blind Transfer Setting

page A-259

Update Caller ID Setting.

page A-259

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.

page A-260

Single Call Restriction Setting

page A-261

Blacklist Duration Setting

page A-262

Whitelist Proxy Setting

page A-262

XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)

page A-263

Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)

page A-265
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

About this appendix

Topic

Page

Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting

page A-265

XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting

page A-266

Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting

page A-266

User-Agent Setting

page A-267

GRUU and sip.instance Support

page A-267

DNS Query Setting

page A-268

Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests

page A-269

Optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers

page A-269

P-Asserted Identity (PAI)

page A-270

Route Header in SIP Packet

page A-270

Configuration Encryption Setting

page A-271

Troubleshooting Parameters

page A-272

Log Settings

page A-272

WatchDog Settings

page A-275

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files

Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for
configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and .cfg files are stored on the
server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The
.cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that
MAC address. When you restart the IP phone, these files are downloaded to the
phone.
If you make changes to the phone configuration, the changes are stored in a local
configuration on the phone (not on the server).
Configuration changes made to the .cfg file override the configuration
settings in the aastra.cfg file.
Note: Configuration parameters that you enter in the configuration files
are NOT case sensitive.

Reference
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration File Precedence” on page -43.
This section includes the following types of configurable parameters:

A-6

•

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters on page A-7

•

Mapping Key Settings on page A-214

•

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
on page A-217

•

Advanced Operational Parameters on page A-259

•

Troubleshooting Parameters on page A-272

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a
description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides
the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web
UI, or configuration files).

Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
Parameter –
options simple menu

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on
the IP Phone UI.
Full Options Menu

Simplified Options Menu

Call Forward

Call Forward

Preferences

Preferences
Only the following display:
Services (3-Line LCD phones)
Tones
Contrast Level
Live Dialpad
Set Audio (8 and 11-Line LCD
phones only)
Handset Pairing (9480i CT and
6757i CT)

Phone Status

Phone Status

User Password

Removed

Administrator Menu

Removed

Restart Phone

Removed

Phone Lock

Phone Lock

Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu
to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra
Web UI to configure the network settings.
Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (full options menu)

Range

0 (full options menu)
1 (simplified options menu)

Example

options simple menu: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Network Settings
Parameter –
dhcp

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

DHCP
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required
network information. The DHCP server serves the network information
that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone is unable to get any required
information, then you must enter it manually. DHCP populates the
following network information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,, Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP, HTTP Port, HTTPS, HTTPS Port, and FTP servers, and
Timer Servers.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support
Option 66.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

dhcp: 1

Parameter –
ip

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Ip Address
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

ip: 192.168.0.25

A-8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
subnet mask

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Subnet Mask
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address

Default Value

255.255.255.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

subnet mask: 255.255.255.224

Parameter –
default gateway

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Gateway
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address

Default Value

1.0.0.1

Range

Not Applicable

Example

default gateway: 192.168.0.1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dns1

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Primary DNS
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of
an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain
names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding
IP addresses.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

dns1: 192.168.0.5

Parameter –
dns2

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Secondary DNS
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

dns2: 192.168.0.6

A-10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
ethernet port 0

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

LAN Port
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps

Example

ethernet port 0: 3

Parameter –
ethernet port 1

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

PC Port
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 1 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Note: PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps

Example

ethernet port 1: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
pc port passthru enabled

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Enables or disables the PC port.
Note: PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (enable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

pc port passthru enabled: 1

A-12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

DHCP Option Settings
Option 12
Parameter–
hostname

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Hostname
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings

Hostname
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you change this parameter, you must restart your phone for the
change to take affect.

Format

String

Default Value

[]

Range

Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters
Note: The value for this parameter can also be a fully qualified domain
name.

Example

hostname: aastra4

Option 77
Parameter–
dhcp userclass

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

DHCP User Class
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
DHCP User Class
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings

Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the
configuration server with the DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone
for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results
in an automatic reboot.

Format

String

Default Value

““

Range

Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters

Example

dhcp userclass: admin

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Options 159 and 160 - DHCP Option Override
Parameter–
dhcp config option
override

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

DHCP Download Options
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for
determining a configuration server.

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
Download Options
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings

Note: You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect.
Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (Any - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43,

Range

-1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160)
0 (Any)
43
66
159
160

Example

dhcp config option override: 66

A-14

160, 159, 66)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Password Settings
Parameter –
admin password

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.

Format

Integer

Default Value

22222

Range

0 to 4294967295

Example

admin password: 1234567890

Parameter –
user password

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->User Password
Operation->User Password
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Current Password
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to set a new user password for the IP phone.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Default value is an empty string ““ (left blank)

Range

0 to 4294967295

Example

user password: 123

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Emergency Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
emergency dial plan

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Operation->Phone Lock

Description

Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a
caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required.
The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and
110.
911 - A United States emergency number.
999 - A United Kingdom emergency number.
112 - An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile
phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line
telephones.
110 - A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle
East, and South America.
Dial plan(characters)
911
4xx
x+#|xx+*
911|999|112|110|450
911|112|011XX+#|101XX+#|1[2-3]XXXXXXXXX|
[4-5]XXXXXXXXX|[6-7]XXXXXXXXXX,3|
[8-9]XXXXXXXXXXX,2|XX+*|XX+#|
*XXX+#|#XX+#|4xx,2

Length (bytes)
14
18
35
54

325

Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
Format

Integer

Default Value

x+#|xx+*

Range

Up to 512 characters

Example

emergency dial plan: 911|999

A-16

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
options password enabled

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP
phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a
password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user
is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password
prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to
enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu
is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen.
Note: The password to enter is the administrator password configured for
that phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (false; not password protected)
1 (true; password protected)

Example

options password enabled: 1

Aastra Web UI Settings
Parameter –
web interface enabled

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for a single IP phone when this
parameter is entered in the .cfg file.
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for all phones when this parameter
is placed in the aastra.cfg file.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Example

web interface enabled: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Configuration Server Settings
Parameter –
download protocol
Download Protocol
(in Web UI)

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone.

Format

Text

Default Value

TFTP

Range

TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS

Example

download protocol: HTTPS

Parameter –
tftp server

IP phone UI

TFTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Primary TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The TFTP server’s IP address. If DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server
provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this
parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded
into the phone.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address or qualified domain name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

tftp server: 192.168.0.130

A-18

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
tftp path

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters

Example

tftp path: configs\tftp

Parameter –
alternate tftp server

IP phone UI

Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This
will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into
the phone.

Format

IP address or qualified domain name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

alternate tftp server: 192.168.0.132

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->
Alternate TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alternate tftp path

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an
alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters

Example

alternate tftp path: configs\alternate

Parameter –
use alternate tftp
Use Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Select TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.

Format

Not Applicable

Default Value

0

Range

0 or 1

Example

use alternate tftp: 1

A-20

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
ftp server
FTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the
FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and
password.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

ftp server: 192.168.0.131

Parameter –
ftp path

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->FTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP
server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

Up to 64 alphanumeric characters

Example

ftp path: configs\ftp

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
ftp username
FTP User Name
(in Web UI)
Description

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”).

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters

Example

ftp username: 6757iaastra

Parameter –
ftp password

IP phone UI

FTP Password
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters

Example

ftp password: 1234

A-22

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
http server
HTTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server.
See the next parameter (http path).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

http server: 192.168.0.132

Parameter –
http path

IP phone UI

HTTP Path
(in Web UI)
Description

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The HTTP path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.

Format

dir/dir/dir

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters

Example

http path: ipphones/6757i

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
http port
HTTP Port
(in Web UI)
Description

IP Phone UI:

Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTP Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to
the phone over HTTP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

Integer

Default Value

80

Range

1 through 65535

Example

http port: 1025

Parameter –
https server

IP phone UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

HTTPS Server
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter (https path).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

https server: 192.168.0.143

A-24

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
https path

IP phone UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Path
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

HTTPS Path
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

The HTTPS path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTPS root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.

Format

dir/dir/dir

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 63 alphanumeric characters

Example

https path: ipphones/6755i

Parameter –
https port
HTTPS Port
(in Web UI)
Description

IP Phone UI:

Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration
to the phone over HTTPS.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

Integer

Default Value

443

Range

1 through 65535

Example

https port: 1025

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
auto resync mode

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Mode
(in Web UI)
Description

Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the
configuration files only, the firmware only, both the firmware and
configuration files, or disables automatic updates.
This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers.
Valid values are:
None (0) - Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files (1) - Updates the configuration files on the IP phone
automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware (2) - Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the
specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Both (3) - Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at
the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not
overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI
take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text
configuration files.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
0

Range

Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
Firmware
Both
Configuration Files
0 (none)
1 (configuration files only)
2 (firmware only)
3 (configuration files and firmware)

Example

A-26

auto resync mode: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
auto resync time

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Time (24-hour)
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and
HTTPS servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the
values are in 30-minute increments only.
4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files,
the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for
example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00,
the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must
enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only).

Format

hh:mm
00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files)

Default Value

Aastra Web UI
00:00
Configuration Files
00:00

Range

Aastra Web UI
00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments)
Configuration Files
hh = 00 to 23
mm = 00 to 59

Example

auto resync time: 03:24

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
auto resync max delay

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync

Maximum Delay
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled
time before starting a checksync.

Format

Integer

Default Value

15

Range

0 to 1439

Example

auto resync max delay: 20

Parameter–
auto resync days

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync

Days
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync
operations.
Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock
reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to
doing the first checksync.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 364

Example

auto resync days: 1

A-28

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Multiple Configuration Server Settings
Parameter –
firmware server

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the URL of a server (other than the original configuration
server) from which the phones in the network get their firmware.
Note: The default method for the update of firmware to the phones is
from the original configuration server. The Administrator must specify a
correct server URL for the phones to get their firmware information from
that server. If the URL is incorrect, no firmware download occurs to the
phones from the specified server.

Format

String (up to 256 characters)
FTP
“ftp://username:password@0.0.0.0:port/path”
TFTP
“tftp://0.0.0.0:port/path”
HTTP
“http://0.0.0.0:port/path”
HTTPS
“https://0.0.0.0:port/path”

Default Value

Blank

Range

Not Applicable

Example

firmware server:
Leaving this parameter blank downloads all configuration and firmware
files from the original configuration server.
firmware server: tftp://10.30.102.158/test1
The above example uses TFTP to download all firmware files that exist
in the “test1” directory on the specified server, to the phones.

Additional Information
The directory files, language packs, TLS certificate files, 802.1x certificate files,
and HTTPS files can also be downloaded to the phone from a server other than the
configuration server. For each of these types of files, you can specify a URL
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

(server IP address) from which the phone gets these files. You can use existing
parameters on the phone to specify the URL. For more information about this
feature, refer to Chapter 1, the section, “Directory Files, Language Packs, TLS
Certificates, 802.1x Certificates, HTTPS Files and Multiple Configuration
Servers” on page1-47.
For information on configuring the directory, language pack, TLS certificates,
802.1x certificates, and HTTPS parameters, see the applicable parameters in this
Appendix.

A-30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
Parameter –
sip nat ip

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg

NAT IP
(in Web UI)
Description

IP address of the network device that enforces NAT.

Format

IP Address

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip nat ip: 192.245.2.1

Parameter –
sip nat port

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg

NAT SIP Port
(in Web UI)
Description

Port number of the network device that enforces NAT.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip nat port: 51620

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip nat rtp port

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

NAT RTP Port
(in Phone UI and Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent
in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds

Format

Integer

Default Value

51720

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip nat rtp port: 51730

Parameter –
sip nortel nat support

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Nortel NAT Traversal
Enabled
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network
device that enforces NAT.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip nortel nat support: 1

A-32

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip nortel nat timer

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Nortel NAT Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the
Nortel proxy.

Format

Integer

Default Value

30

Range

0 to 2147483647

Example

sip nortel nat timer: 60

Rport Setting
Parameter –
sip rport

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP phone.
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP address and the port from which the
request came.
Note: Configuring the Rport parameter is recommened for clients
behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

sip rport: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting
Parameter –
sip local port

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.

Format

Numeric

Default Value

5060

Range

Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case
of a UDP transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing
UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone
generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric
UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it
listens on the configured SIP local port.

Example

sip local port: 5060

Local SIP TLS Port
Parameter –
sip local tls port

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.

Format

Numeric

Default Value

5061

Range

Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports
being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS
on 443/tcp.

Example

A-34

sip local tls port: 5061

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Parameter –
https client method

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

HTTPS Client Method
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS Client
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on
the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used
protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the
Internet.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

SSL 3.0

Range

TLS 1.0
SSL 3.0 (default)

Example

https client method: TLS 1.0

Parameter –
https redirect http get

IP Phone UI

HTTPS Server - Redirect
HTTP to HTTPS
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enables redirection)

Range

0 (disables redirection)
1 (enables redirection)

Example

https redirect http get: 0

Configuration Files

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->Redirect
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
https block http post xml

IP Phone UI

HTTPS Server - Block XML
HTTP POSTs
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->XML
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is
enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this
parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST
containing an XML parameter header results in the following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS
server through use of the “https://” URL.
Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)

Range

0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
1 (enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)

Example

https block http post xml: 1

A-36

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings
Parameter–
https validate certificates

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

Validate Certificates
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on
SSL certificates before accepting them.
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self
signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0” (disabled) before
upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

https validate certificates: 0

Parameter–
https validate expires

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

Check Certificate
Expiration
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Expires
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of the certificates.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a
certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate.
Note: If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the clock on
the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

https validate expires: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
https validate hostname

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

Check Certificate
Hostnames
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI

Description

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

https validate hostname: 0

A-38

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Hostnames
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
https user certificates

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings

Trusted Certificates
Filename
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This
file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates
are used to validate peer certificates.
Note: You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter in order
for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates.
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the
end of the string. For example:
https user certificates: ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesHTTPSUserCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phonesHTTPSUserCert.pem” is the
filename. If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

Alphanumeric string in the format 

Default Value

Not applicable

Range

Not applicable

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no HTTPS user certificate file:
https user certificates:
The following example downloads the HTTPS user certificate file from the
original configuration server.
https user certificates: phonesHTTPSUserCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesHTTPSUserCert.pem” (HTTPS user certificate file) from the “path”
directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
https user certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesHTTPSUserCert.pem

A-40

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

UPnP Settings
Parameter –
upnp manager

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

UPnP
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->UPnP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP
phone and the UPnP manager will not start.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

upnp manager: 1

Parameter –
upnp gateway

Configuration Files

Description

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the
network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if
the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

upnp gateway: 120.400.003.2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-41

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
upnp mapping lines

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

UPnP Mapping Lines
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a
specific line on the IP phone.
Note: For this feature to work, UPnP must be enabled on the phone
(upnp manager and upnp gateway must be set).

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (UPnP is not mapped to a specific line)

Range

0 to 10

Example

upnp mapping lines: 5
This example indicates that line 5 allows UPnP mapping.

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Global Parameters
Parameter –
tagging enabled
VLAN Enable
(in Web UI)

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->VLAN Enable
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. This is a global setting.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

tagging enabled: 1

A-42

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
priority non-ip

IP phone UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->Priority
->Other
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Priority, Non-IP Packet
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. This is a global setting.

Format

Integer

Default Value

5

Range

0 to 7

Example

priority non-ip: 7

LAN Port (Ethernet Port 0) Parameters
Parameter –
vlan id
VLAN ID
(for LAN Port in
Web UI)

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->VLAN ID
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet
interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet
as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN
ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 to 4094

Example

VLAN id: 300

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-43

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
tos priority map

IP phone UI

SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTP

(for LAN Port in
Web UI)

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->SIP

Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, .cfg

This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos
rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between
the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP
packets.
You enter the tos priority map value as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or
with values outside the ranges, are ignored.

Format

Integer

Default Value

3 (based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTP setting of 46)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTCP setting of 46)

Range

0 to 63 (for DSCP)
0 to 7 (for SIP, RTP, and RTCP priorities)

Example

tos priority map: (26,7)

A-44

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure.
DSCP
Range

DSCP Priority

0-7

0

8-15

1

16-23

2

24-31

3

32-39

4

40-47

5

48-55

6

56-63

7

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-45

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

PC Port (Ethernet Port 1) Parameters
Parameter –
vlan id port 1

IP phone UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->
Passthrough->VLAN ID
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, .cfg

VLAN ID
(for PC Port in
Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the VLAN id port 1 (passthrough port) to 4095, all
untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the passthrough port.
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the
passthrough port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The following example
sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
Note: PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 to 4095

Example

VLAN id port 1: 3

A-46

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
QoS eth port 1 priority

IP phone UI

Priority
(for PC Port in
Web UI)

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 7

Example

QoS eth port 1 priority: 3

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Passthrough
->Priority
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, .cfg

RTCP Summary Reports
Global Parameters
Parameter –
sip rtcp summary reports

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies whether or not to send of RTCP summary reports.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disabled - OFF)
1 (enabled - ON)

Example

sip rtcp summary reports: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-47

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip rtcp summary report
collector

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the hostname server for which to send (collect) the RTCP
summary reports.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

@
Note: Hostname/server string must not exceed 128 characters in length.

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip rtcp summary report collector: collector@example.org

Parameter –
sip rtcp summary report
collector port

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the port address of the hostname server receiving the RTCP
summary reports.

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.
Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 65536

Example

sip rtcp summary report collector port: 5060

A-48

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Line Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN rtcp summary
reports

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(N is a line number from
1 to 9)
Description

Enables/disables the specified line number on the phone for which to send
the RTCP summary reports.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip line1 rtcp summary reports: 1

Parameter –
sip lineN rtcp summary
report collector

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(N is a line number from
1 to 9)
Description

Per-line parameter specifying the hostname of the server receiving the
RTCP summary reports.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

@
Note: Hostname/server string must not exceed 128 characters in length.

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 rtcp summary report collector: collector@example.org

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-49

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN rtcp summary
report collector port

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(N is a line number from
1 to 9)
Description

Per-line parameter specifying the port address of the server receiving the
RTCP summary reports.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 65536

Example

sip line1 rtcp summary report collector port: 5060

A-50

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Parameter –
tos sip

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->SIP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg

SIP
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.

Format

Integer

Default Value

26

Range

0 to 63

Example

tos sip: 3

Parameter –
tos rtp

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg

RTP
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.

Format

Integer

Default Value

46

Range

0 to 63

Example

tos rtp: 2

Parameter –
tos rtcp

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTCP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg

RTCP
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.

Format

Integer

Default Value

46

Range

0 to 63

Example

tos rtcp: 3

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-51

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Time and Date Settings
Parameter –
time format

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Time and Date->Time Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Time Format
(in Phone UI)
Description

This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0”
for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 (12 hr format))
1 (24 hr format)

Example

time format: 0

Parameter –
date format

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Time and Date->Date Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Date Format
(in Phone UI)
Description

This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 (WWW MMM DD) (default)
1 (DD-MMM-YY)
2 (YYYY-MM-DD)
3 (DD/MM/YYYY)
4 (DD/MM/YY)
5 (DD-MM-YY)
6 (MM/DD/YY)
7 (MMM DD)
8 (DD MMM YYYY)
9 (WWW DD MMM)
10 (DD MMM)
11 (DD.MM.YYYY)

Example

date format: 7

A-52

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst config

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Daylight Savings
(in Phone UI)
Description

Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time.

Format

Integer

Default Value

3

Range

0 - OFF
1 - 30 min summertime
2 - 1 hr summertime
3 - automatic

Example

dst config: 0

Parameter –
time zone name

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Time and Date->Time Zone
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Time Zone
(in Phone UI)
Description

Assigns a time zone name to the time server.
Note: Assigning the name “Custom” (with initial cap) in the configuration
files, allows you to create a custom time zone using the additional
parameters in the section “Custom Time Zone and DST Settings” on
page A-61.

Format

Text

Default Value

US-Eastern

Range

See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-54 for specific
time zone names.
Custom (allows you to create a customized time zone - applicable to
configuration files only).

Example

time zone name: US-Central
time zone name: Custom

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-53

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table

A-54

Time Zone Name

Time Zone Code

AD-Andorra
AE-Dubai
AG-Antigua
AI-Anguilla
AL-Tirane
AN-Curacao
AR-Buenos Aires
AS-Pago Pago
AT-Vienna
AU-Lord Howe
AU-Tasmania
AU-Melbourne
AU-Sydney
AU-Broken Hill
AU-Brisbane
AU-Lindeman
AU-Adelaide
AU-Darwin
AU-Perth
AW-Aruba
AZ-Baku

CET
GST
AST
AST
CET
AST
ART
BST
CET
LHS
EST
EST
EST
CST
EST
EST
CST
CST
WST
AST
AZT

BA-Sarajevo
BB-Barbados
BE-Brussels
BG-Sofia
BM-Bermuda
BO-La Paz
BR-Noronha
BR-Belem
BR-Fortaleza
BR-Recife
BR-Araguaina
BR-Maceio
BR-Sao Paulo
BR-Cuiaba
BR-Porto Velho
BR-Boa Vista
BR-Manaus
BR-Eirunepe
BR-Rio Branco
BS-Nassau
BY-Minsk
BZ-Belize

EET
AST
CET
EET
AST
BOT
FNT
BRT
BRT
BRT
BRS
BRT
BRS
AMS
AMT
AMT
AMT
ACT
ACT
EST
EET
CST

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Time Zone Name

Time Zone Code

CA-Newfoundland
CA-Atlantic
CA-Eastern
CA-Saskatchewan
CA-Central
CA-Mountain
CA-Pacific
CA-Yukon
CH-Zurich
CK-Rarotonga
CL-Santiago
CL-Easter
CN-China
CO-Bogota
CR-Costa Rica
CU-Havana
CY-Nicosia
CZ-Prague

NST
AST
EST
EST
CST
MST
PST
PST
CET
CKS
CLS
EAS
CST
COS
CST
CST
EES
CET

DE-Berlin
DK-Copenhagen
DM-Dominica
DO-Santo Domingo

CET
CET
AST
AST

EE-Tallinn
ES-Madrid
ES-Canary

EET
CET
WET

FI-Helsinki
FJ-Fiji
FK-Stanley
FO-Faeroe
FR-Paris

EET
NZT
FKS
WET
CET

GB-London
GB-Belfast
GD-Grenada
GE-Tbilisi
GF-Cayenne
GI-Gibraltar
GP-Guadeloupe
GR-Athens
GS-South Georgia
GT-Guatemala
GU-Guam
GY-Guyana

GMT
GMT
AST
GET
GFT
CET
AST
EET
GST
CST
CST
GYT

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-55

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

A-56

Time Zone Name

Time Zone Code

HK-Hong Kong
HN-Tegucigalpa
HR-Zagreb
HT-Port-au-Prince
HU-Budapest

HKS
CST
CET
EST
CET

IE-Dublin
IS-Reykjavik
IT-Rome

GMT
GMT
CET

JM-Jamaica
JP-Tokyo

EST
JST

KY-Cayman

EST

LC-St Lucia
LI-Vaduz
LT-Vilnius
LU-Luxembourg
LV-Riga

AST
CET
EET
CET
EET

MC-Monaco
MD-Chisinau
MK-Skopje
MQ-Martinique
MS-Montserrat
MT-Malta
MU-Mauritius
MX-Mexico City
MX-Cancun
MX-Merida
MX-Monterrey
MX-Mazatlan
MX-Chihuahua
MX-Hermosillo
MX-Tijuana

CET
EET
CET
AST
AST
CET
MUT
CST
CST
CST
CST
MST
MST
MST
PST

NI-Managua
NL-Amsterdam
NO-Oslo
NR-Nauru
NU-Niue
NZ-Auckland
NZ-Chatham

CST
CET
CET
NRT
NUT
NZS
CHA

OM-Muscat

GST

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Time Zone Name

Time Zone Code

PA-Panama
PE-Lima
PL-Warsaw
PR-Puerto Rico
PT-Lisbon
PT-Madeira
PT-Azores
PY-Asuncion

EST
PES
CET
AST
WET
WET
AZO
PYS

RO-Bucharest
RU-Kaliningrad
RU-Moscow
RU-Samara
RU-Yekaterinburg
RU-Omsk
RU-Novosibirsk
RU-Krasnoyarsk
RU-Irkutsk
RU-Yakutsk
RU-Vladivostok
RU-Sakhalin
RU-Magadan
RU-Kamchatka
RU-Anadyr

EET
EET
MSK
SAM
YEK
OMS
NOV
KRA
IRK
YAK
VLA
SAK
MAG
PET
ANA

SE-Stockholm
SG-Singapore
SI-Ljubljana
SK-Bratislava
SM-San Marino
SR-Paramaribo
SV-El Salvador

CET
SGT
CET
CET
CET
SRT
CST

TR-Istanbul
TT-Port of Spain
TW-Taipei

EET
AST
CST

UA-Kiev
US-Eastern
US-Central
US-Mountain
US-Pacific
US-Alaska
US-Aleutian
US-Hawaii
UY-Montevideo

EET
EST
CST
MST
PST
AKS
HAS
HST
UYS

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-57

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

A-58

Time Zone Name

Time Zone Code

VA-Vatican

CET

YU-Belgrade

CET

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Time Server Settings
Parameter –
time server disabled

Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘

NTP Time Servers
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

time server disabled: 0

Parameter –
time server1

Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘

Time Server 1
(in Web UI)
Description

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg

The primary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request
the time from.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.

Format

IP address or qualified domain name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

time server1: 192.168.0.5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-59

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
time server2

Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘

Time Server 2
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or
cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request
the time from.

Format

IP address or qualified domain name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

time server2: 192.168.0.5

Parameter –
time server3

Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘

Time Server 3
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

The tertiary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary and secondary time servers are
not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server3 will be
used to request the time from.

Format

IP address or qualified domain name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

time server3: 192.168.0.5

A-60

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Custom Time Zone and DST Settings
Note: To use the parameters in this section, the “time zone name”
parameter must be set to “Custom”. See page A-53 for more information.
Parameter –
time zone minutes

Configuration Files

Description

The number of minutes the timezone is offset from UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or
negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has
a value of 300 which is the default..

Format

Integer

Default Value

300

Range

Any positive or negative Integers:
720
660
600
540
480
420
360
300
270
240
210
180
150
120
60
0
-60
-120
-180
-210
-240
-270
-300
-330
-345
-360
-390
-420
-480
-540
-570
-600
-660
-720
-780

Example
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(GMT minus 12 hours)
(GMT minus 11 hours)
(GMT minus 10 hours)
(GMT minus 9 hours - Alaska Standard Time North America )
(GMT minus 8 hours - Pacific Standard Time North America)
(GMT minus 7 hours - Mountain Standard Time North America)
(GMT minus 6 hours - Central Standard Time North America)
(GMT minus 5 hours - Eastern Standard Time North America)
(GMT minus 4.5 hours - Venezuela)
(GMT minus 4 hours)
(GMT minus 3.5 hours - Newfoundland Standard Time
North America)
(GMT minus 3 hours)
(GMT minus 2.5 hours - Newfoundland daylight time)
(GMT minus 2 hours)
(GMT minus 1 hour)
(GMT = 0 hours - Greenwich Mean Time)
(GMT + 1 hour - Central European Time)
(GMT + 2 hours - Eastern European Time Europe)
(GMT + 3 hours)
(GMT + 3.5 hours)
(GMT + 4 hours)
(GMT + 4.5 hours)
(GMT + 5 hours)
(GMT + 5.5 hours)
(GMT + 5.75 hours)
(GMT + 6 hours)
(GMT + 6.5 hours)
(GMT + 7 hours - Christmas Island Time Australia)
(GMT + 8 hours - Australian Western Standard Time)
(GMT + 9 hours)
(GMT + 9.5 hours - Australian Central Standard Time)
(GMT + 10 hours - Australian Eastern Standard Time)
(GMT + 11 hours)
(GMT + 12 hours)
(GMT + 13 hours)

time zone minutes: 300
A-61

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst minutes

Configuration Files

Description

The number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. Valid values
are a positive integer between 0 to 60.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 to 60

Example

dst minutes: 60

Parameter –
dst [start|end] relative date

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and week
parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1).

Format

Boolean

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 (absolute)
1 (relative)

Example

dst [start|end] relative date: 1

A-62

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Absolute Time
Parameter –
dst start month

Configuration Files

Description

The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)

Example

dst start month: 7

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-63

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst end month

Configuration Files

Description

The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)

Example

dst end month: 6

Parameter –
dst start day

Configuration Files

Description

The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 to 31

Example

dst start day: 1

A-64

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst end day

Configuration Files

Description

The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 to 31

Example

dst end day: 31

Parameter –
dst start hour

Configuration Files

Description

The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 (midnight) to 23

Example

dst start hour: 0

Parameter –
dst end hour

Configuration Files

Description

The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 (midnight) to 23

Example

dst end hour: 23

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-65

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Relative Time
Parameter –
dst start month

Configuration Files

Description

The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)

Example

dst start month: 6

A-66

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst end month

Configuration Files

Description

The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)

Example

dst end month: 12

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-67

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst start week

Configuration Files

Description

The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurance "dst start day" in the month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurance "dst start day" in the month
3 = third full week of month
-3 =third last occurance "dst start day" in the month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = fourth last occurrance ""dst start day" in the month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurance "dst start day" in the month

Example

dst start week: 1

Parameter –
dst end week

Configuration Files

Description

The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurance "dst start day" in the month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurance "dst start day" in the month
3 = third full week of month
-3 =third last occurance "dst start day" in the month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = fourth last occurrance ""dst start day" in the month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurance "dst start day" in the month

Example

dst end week: 5

A-68

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst start day

Configuration Files

Description

The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)

Example

dst start day: 1

Parameter –
dst end day

Configuration Files

Description

The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)

Example

dst end day: 7

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-69

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
dst start hour

Configuration Files

Description

The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 (midnight) to 23

Example

dst start hour: 0

Parameter –
dst end hour

Configuration Files

Description

The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

0 (midnight) to 23

Example

dst end hour: 23

A-70

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Backlight Mode Settings (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Parameter –
backlight mode

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backlight
(in Phone UI)
Description

Allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD, Off (always off) or Auto.
The “Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlight after a period
of inactivity. You can set the amount of time before the backlight goes off
using the “Backllight On Time” parameter.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (Auto)

Range

0
1

(Off - Turns the backlight off constant)
(Auto - Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity.)

Note: In the IP Phone UI, the options for this parameter are “Off” and
“Auto” only.
Example

backlight mode: 0

Parameter –
bl on time

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backllight On Time
(in Phone UI)
Description

Allows you to set the amount of time, in seconds, that the backlight
stays ON before turning OFF because of inactivity. This settings is
applicable to the “Auto” mode only.

Format

Integer

Default Value

600 seconds (equals 10 minutes)

Range

1 to 7200 seconds

Example

bl on time: 15

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-71

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

DHSG Settings (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Parameter –
dhsg

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI:

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Preferences->Set Audio->DHSG

Description

Enables and disables the DHSG headset support on the phone.
Note: The phones that support DHSG are: 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i
CT. For more information about installing a DHSG headset on your
phone, see your IP Phone-specific Installation Guide.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disable - DHSG support is OFF)
1 (enable - DHSG support is ON)

Example

dhsg: 1

Live Dialpad Settings
Parameter –
live dialpad

IP phone UI
Configuration Files

Options->Preferences->Live Dialpad
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Live Dialpad
(in Phone UI)
Description

Turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With
live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting
the receiver or pressing the
initiates a call to that number.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (Off)

Range

0 (Off)
1 (On)

Example

live dialpad: 1

A-72

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
sip dial plan

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Local Dial Plan
(in Web UI)
Description

Reference: A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a
user dials to reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan
is as follows:
Reference: SymbolDescription
Reference: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9Digit symbol
Reference: XMatch any digit symbol (wildcard)
Reference: *, #, .Other keypad symbol; # can terminate
a dial string
Reference: |Expression inclusive OR
Reference: +0 or more of the preceding digit symbol
or [] expression
Reference: []Symbol inclusive OR
Reference: -Used only with [], represent a range of
acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8]
Reference: “,” (open/close quotes)In the configuration files, enter the sip
dial
plan value using quotes.
Reference: .;.Used when a secondary dial tone is
required on the phone. (For example,
“9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial
tone presented.
Reference:
Reference: You can configure prefix dialing by adding a prepend digit to
the dial string. For example, if you add a prepend map of
“[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit
number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other
examples of prepend mappings are:
Reference:
Reference: 1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and
terminating with “#”.)
Reference: 6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with
“6”.)
Reference: [4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting
with “4”, “5”, or “6”.

Format

Reference: Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

Reference: X+#|XX+*

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-73

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Range

Reference: Up to 512 alphanumeric characters.
Reference:
Reference: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a
parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”. If
this is the case, the Administrator cannot change the dial plan from the
configuration files. The dial plan must be changed from the Aastra Web
UI.

Example

sip dial plan: "X+#|XXX+*"

Parameter –
sip dial plan terminator

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Send Dial Plan Terminator
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator. If you enable the
use of this parameter, when you configure the IP phone’s dial plan with a
dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound symbol (#)), the phone
waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after to finish
dialing the number on the keypad before making the call.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)

Example

sip dial plan terminator: 1

A-74

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip digit timeout

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Digit Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description

Represents the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on
the IP phone. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a
key on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the
key times out and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive
keys before the timeout occurs.

Format

Integer

Default Value

4

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip digit timeout: 6

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-75

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Outbound Support
Parameter –
sip outbound support

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables and disables whether or not the phone uses Draft 15
(draft-ietf-sip-outbound-15) support for SIP outbound packets.
A SIP User Agent (UA) behind a firewall, reuses an existing connection
(usually the REGISTER outbound connection) for the inbound request if
the proxy supports it. The UA uses keep-alive packets to monitor the
connection status.
Notes:
1. You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.
2. TLS and TCP both support this feature.
3. If the Global SIP parameter “Persistent TLS” is set on the phone,
then only one TLS persistent connection can be established since the
phone uses the local port 5061 for connection. If the Global SIP
parameter “TLS” is set on the phone, more than one connection can be
setup since the phone uses a random local port for connection.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip outbound support: 1

A-76

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Dynamic SIP for Registration and Subscription
Parameter –
dynamic sip

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the dynamic SIP functionality on the phone.
If enabled, this parameter allows an Administrator to change the account
information on a phone (i.e..,registrar, username, registrar port,
password, proxy, outbound proxy, proxy port, backup proxy,
authentication name, backup registrar) and have it dynamically update
to the phone when the phone is inactive (phone not being used) without
having to reboot the phone. During the re-registration process, the
phone unsubscribes and dynamically re-subscribes as required.
If disabled, the phone updates its account infomration and the phone
reboots upon the user saving an LCD page or leaving a menu.
Notes:
1. This parameter does not make previous changes dynamic.
Changes apply dynamically only AFTER setting this parameter to
enable.
2. ONLY BLF and MWI events support dynamic subscription on the
phones.
3. This feature does not effect the DND and CFWD state of a line.
4. This feature does not support the addition and deletion of accounts.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

dynamic sip: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-77

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Basic, Global Settings
SIP Global Authentication Settings
Parameter –
sip screen name

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Screen Name
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the user’s name of the phone.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip screen name: Joe Smith

Parameter –
sip screen name 2

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Screen Name 2
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.
Format

Alphanumeric characters.

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

Example

sip screen name 2: Lab Phone

A-78

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip user name

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Phone Number
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip user name: 1010

Parameter –
sip display name

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Caller ID
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip display name: Joe Smith

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-79

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip auth name

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Authentication Name
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip auth name: 5553456

Parameter –
sip password

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Password
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The password that will be used to register at the registrar.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip password: 12345

A-80

Options->Administrator Menu->>SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip bla number

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP
phones.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip bla number: 1010

Parameter –
sip mode

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line mode
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
• Generic - Normal line
• BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
• Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
• BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA

Example

sip mode: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-81

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Global Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip proxy ip

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Proxy Server
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not applicable

Example

sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.101

Parameter –
sip proxy port

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Proxy Port
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The proxy server's port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip proxy port: 5060

A-82

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip backup proxy ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102

Parameter –
sip backup proxy port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The backup proxy’s port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip backup proxy port: 5060

Parameter –
sip outbound proxy

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

outbound proxy server
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.

Format

IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-83

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip outbound proxy port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

outbound proxy port
(in Web UI)
Description

The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip outbound proxy port: 5060

Parameter –
sip registrar ip

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Registrar Server
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip registrar ip: 192.168.0.101

A-84

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip registrar port

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Registrar Port
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

The registrar's port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip registrar port: 5060

Parameter –
sip backup registrar ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-85

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip backup registrar port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip backup registrar port: 5060

Parameter –
sip registration period

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description

The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 2147483647

Example

sip registration period: 3600

A-86

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 or 1-6
depending on your model phone. Line settings are not applicable to the 6751i.
SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN screen name

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Screen Name
(in Web UI)
Description

Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the phone user's name.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 screen name: Joe Smith

Parameter –
sip lineN screen name 2

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Screen Name 2
(in Web UI)
Description

Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 screen name 2: Lab Phone

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-87

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN user name

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Phone Number
(in Web UI)
Description

Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
When configuring per-line BLA on an ININ server, the username must be
incremented as shown in the example for the "sip lineN bla number"
parameter on page A-90.
Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 user name: 1010

Parameter –
sip lineN display name

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Caller ID
(in Web UI)
Description

Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 display name: Joe Smith

A-88

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN auth name

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Authentication Name
(in Web UI)
Description

Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 auth name: 5553456

Parameter –
sip lineN password

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Password
(in Web UI)
Description

The password that will be used to register at the registrar.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

sip line1 password: 12345

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-89

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN bla number

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared on specific lines on
the IP phone.
For Sylantro Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on a Sylantro server, the value set for
the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the
sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group. For
example, if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a
per-line basis for the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
For ININ Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the
sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip
lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the
phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is
10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc.
you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the ININ server as
follows:
sip line1 user name: 10101(# for phone 1 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 10102(# for phone 2 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for phone 3)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).

Format

Integer

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

Sylantro Server:
sip line1 bla number: 1010
ININ Server:
sip line 1 bla number: 1010

A-90

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN mode

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line Mode
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
• Generic - Normal line
• BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
• Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
• BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
• If the softkeys on the 6757i/6757i CT or the programmable keys on
the 6753i are set as line keys, and you configure that line key for
BLA, the key is configured to use BLA.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA

Example

sip line1 mode: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-91

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Per-Line Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip lineN proxy ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not applicable

Example

sip line1 proxy ip: 192.168.0.101

Parameter –
sip lineN proxy port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The proxy server's port number

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 proxy port: 5060

A-92

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN backup proxy ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102

Parameter –
sip lineN backup proxy port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The backup proxy’s port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 backup proxy port: 5060

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-93

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Outbound Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.

Format

IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13

Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Outbound Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip outbound proxy port: 5060

A-94

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN registrar ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 registrar ip: 192.168.0.101

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-95

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN registrar port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The registrar's port number

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 registrar port: 5060

Parameter –
sip lineN backup registrar ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->LineN->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description

The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.

Format

IP address or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102

A-96

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN backup registrar
port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->LineN->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description

The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip line1 backup registrar port: 5060

Parameter –
sip lineN registration period

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description

The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 2147483647

Example

sip line1 registration period: 3600

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-97

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

BLA Support for MWI
Parameter –
sip mwi for bla account

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings

MWI for BLA Account
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables a BLA configured line to send an MWI SUBSCRIBE
message for the BLA account.
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the
phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla
account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription
for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for
the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled,
the priority for displaying MWI does not change.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip mwi for bla account: 1

A-98

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging
Global Setting
Parameter –
sip sca bridging

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables/disables SCA bridging on the phone-side on a global basis.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disabled )
1 (enabled)

Example

sip sca bridging: 1

Per-Line Setting
Parameter –
sip lineN sca bridging

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(N is a line number from
1 to 9)
Description

Enables/disables SCA bridging on the phone-side on a per-account
basis using a specific SCA-configured line.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disabled )
1 (enabled)

Example

sip line1 sca bridging: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-99

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Centralized Conferencing Settings
Global Setting
Parameter –
sip centralized conf

Aastra Web UI

Advanced->Global SIP Settings->
Basic SIP Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Conference Server URI
(in Web UI)
Description

Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP
phone as follows:
•

To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).

•

To enable SIP centralized conferencing, then do one of the following
actions:

— If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to
reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to
one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@: . For example, if the proxy server address is
206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting this
parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
conf@206.229.26.60:10060
—

To reach the media server using a different address/port than
that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following:
conf@: 

Format

String

Default Value

Blank

Example

sip centralized conf: conf

A-100

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Per-Line Setting
Parameter –
sip lineN centralized conf

Aastra Web UI

Advanced->Line <1 thru 9>->
Basic SIP Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Conference Server URI
(in Web UI)
Description

Enable or disable per-line SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone
as follows:
•

To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).

•

To enable SIP centralized conferencing on a specific line, do one of
the following actions:
—

If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to
reach the media server via the proxy server, set this field to
one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)

By setting this field to conf, you specify conf@: . For example, if the proxy server address
is 206.229.26.60 and the proxy port used is 10060, then by setting
this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
conf@206.229.26.60:10060.
—

To reach the media server using a different address/port than
that specified by the proxy, set this field to the following:
conf@: 

Format

String

Default Value

Blank

Examples

sip line3 centralized conf: conf

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-101

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference
Parameter –
sip join support

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the phone to allow a conference to be set up with a
join header as described in RFC 3911.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip join support: 1

A-102

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS
Parameter –
http digest username

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication.
The server uses this username for authentication purposes when loading
configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a
“Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey.
Notes:
1. The Username field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =,
_, etc. You can also specify domain names (i.e., user@domain).
2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest
authentication parameters.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters

Example

http digest username: mysuername

Parameter –
http digest password

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication.
The server uses this password for authentication purposes when loading
configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a
“Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey.
Notes:
1. The Password field accepts special characters, such as, @, #, %, =,
_, etc.
2. You must reboot the phone after setting the HTTP/HTTPS digest
authentication parameters.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Example

http digest password: mypassword

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-103

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
http digest force login

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables and disables the display of a LOGIN key on the phone’s idle
screen.
Note: After the server has authenticated the phone, this parameter must
be set to “0” in order for the server to send the default profile to the phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

http digest force login: 1

Advanced SIP Settings
Parameter –
sip explicit mwi subscription

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Explicit MWI Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description

If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service
Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells
the user there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and
disable MWI by setting this parameter to the following:
"0" to disable
"1" to enable

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

sip explicit mwi subscription: 1

A-104

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

sip explicit mwi subscription
period
Explicit MWI Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description

The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times
out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period
ends.

Format

Integer

Default Value

86400

Range

30 - 214748364

Example

sip explicit mwi subscription period: 30

.
Parameter –
sip send mac

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description

Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of
the phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip send mac: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-105

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip send line

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description

Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the line number that
is being registered.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip send line: 1

Parameter –
sip session timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Session Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these
re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions.
See RFC4028 for details.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip session timer: 30

A-106

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip T1 timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

T1 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).

Format

Integer

Default Value

500

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip T1 timer: 600

Parameter –
sip T2 timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

T2 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE
server transaction takes to respond to a request.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip T2 timer: 8

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-107

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip transaction timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Transaction Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver
(registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone
does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this
parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out.

Format

Integer

Default Value

4000

Range

4000 to 64000

Example

sip transaction timer: 6000

A-108

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip transport protocol

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Transport Protocol
(in Web UI)
Description

The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP
phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks
to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone
uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is
disabled, then the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used,
you must specify the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted
Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information about Persistent TLS, see “Transport Layer
Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-117.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 - UDP

Range

Valid values are:
0 - User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
1 - UDP
2 - TCP
4 - Transport Layer Security (TLS)

Example

sip transport protocol: 4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-109

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip registration retry timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registration Failed Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration
attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1800 (30 minutes)

Range

30 to 1800

Example

sip registration retry timer: 30

Parameter –
sip registration timeout retry
timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registration Timeout Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it
re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a
minimum timer of 30 seconds.

Format

Integer

Default Value

120

Range

30 to 214748364

Example

sip registration timeout retry timer: 150

A-110

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip registration renewal timer

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Registration Renewal Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the
registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the
registrar to renew the registration.

Format

Integer

Default Value

15

Range

0 to 214748364
The value set for this parameter should be between 0 and the value set
for the registration period.

Example

Parameter –
sip blf subscription period

sip registration renewal timer: 10

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP
->Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

BLF Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the
BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a
reboot of the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

3600

Range

120 (2 minutes is the minimum value)

Example

sip blf subscription period: 2000

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-111

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip acd subscription period

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP
->Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

ACD Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/
firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

3600

Range

120 (2 minutes is the minimum value)

Example

sip acd subscription period: 2000

Parameter–
sip bla subscription
period

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings

BLA Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a
BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone
uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message
received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default
value of 300 seconds.

Format

Integer

Default Value

300

Range

0 to 3700
Note: When set to zero (0), the phone uses BLA expiry value specified in
subscribe message.

Example

A-112

sip bla subscription period: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings
Global Parameters
Parameter –
sip missed call summary
subscription

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Missed Call Summary
Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially
directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You
configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls
sip missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives
notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed
calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially
directed to (phone B in the above example).

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip missed call summary subscription: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-113

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip missed call summary
subscription period

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled
with a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit
set for this parameter, it sends the subscription again.
To disable this parameter, leave the field blank or set the field to zero (0).

Format

Integer

Default Value

86400

Range

0 to 99999999

Example

sip missed call summary subscription period: 70000

A-114

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Per-Line Parameter
Parameter –
sip lineN missed call
summary subscription

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Missed Call Summary
Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially
directed to.
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You
configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls
phone B, the server forwards the call to phone C. If you enable the sip
missed call summary subscription parameter, phone B receives
notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed
calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially
directed to (phone B in the above example).

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip line1 missed call summary subscription: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-115

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN as-feature-event
subscription

Aastra Web UI:

Description

Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side
DND, CFWD, or ACD features.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

sip line1 as-feature-event subscription: 1

Parameter –
sip as-feature-event
subscription period

Aastra Web UI:

Description

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the
phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it
loses subscription.

Format

Integer

Default Value

3600

Range

5 to 2147483648

Example

sip as-feature-event subscription period: 600

A-116

Advanced Settings->LineN->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Basic Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings
To configure TLS, you must enter the “sip transport protocol” parameter with a
value of “4” (TLS). See the “sip transport protocol” description on page A-109.
Also enter the following parameters in the configuration files to configure TLS:

Parameter –
sips persistent tls

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that
connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for
Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the
phones are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone,
this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection.
This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call.
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound
proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network
Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per
phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured
outbound proxy.
2. If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also
specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate
Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sips persistent tls: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-117

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sips root and intermediate
certificates

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Root and Intermediate
Certificates Filename
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and
zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of
certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the local
certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that
authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files
(most likely just CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
sips root and intermediate certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesRootCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phonesRootCert.pem” is the filename. If
you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.
Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.

Format

.pem

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

A-118

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no root and intermediate certificate file:
sips root and intermediate certificates:
The following example downloads the root and intermediate certificate file
from the original configuration server.
sips root and intermediate certificates: phonesRootCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesRootCert.pem” (root and intermediate certificate file) from the
“path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
sips root and intermediate certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesRootCert.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-119

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sips local certificate

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Local Certificate Filename
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses
the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
sips local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesLocalCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phonesLocalCert.pem” is the filename. If
you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.
Note: The certificate file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.

Format

.pem

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

A-120

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no local certificate file:
sips local certificate:
The following example downloads the local certificate file from the original
configuration server.
sips local certificate: phonesLocalCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesLocalCert.pem” (local certificate file) from the “path” directory on
server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
sips local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesLocalCert.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-121

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sips private key

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Private Key Filename
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the
TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no private key
• To download a private key from the original configuration server
• To download a private key from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
sips trusted certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesPrivatekey.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phonesPrivateKey.pem” is the filename.
If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.
Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific private
key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.

Format

.pem

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

A-122

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no private key file:
sips private key:
The following example downloads the private key file from the original
configuration server.
sips private key: phonesPrivateKey.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesPrivateKey.pem” (private key file) from the “path” directory on
server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
sips private key: ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesPrivateKey.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-123

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sips trusted certificates

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->TLS Support
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Trusted Certificates
Filename
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate files to use when the phone
uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s
trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is
connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A which
has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate
signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS or Persistent TLS.
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
sips trusted certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesTrustedCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phonesTrustedCert.pem” is the filename.
If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.
Note: The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom
certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.

Format

.pem

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

A-124

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no trusted certificate file:
sips trusted certificates:
The following example downloads the trusted certificate file from the
original configuration server.
sips trusted certificates: phonesTrustedCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phonesTrustedCert.pem” (trusted certificate file) from the “path” directory
on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
sips trusted certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phonesTrustedCert.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-125

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

802.1x Support Settings
Use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the configuration files.
For EAP-MD5 use:

•

eap type

•

identity

•

md5 password

•

pc port passthrough enabled

For EAP-TLS use:

A-126

•

eap type

•

identity

•

802.1x root and intermediate certificates
(use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates)

•

802.1x local certificate
(use 1 local certificate)

•

802.1x private key
(1 private key that corresponds to local certificate)

•

802.1x trusted certificates
(0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2))

•

pc port passthrough enabled

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
pc port passthru enabled

IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

PC Port PassThru Enable/
Disable
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the PC port.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (enable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

pc port passthru enabled: 1

Parameter –
eap type

IP Phone UI:

EAP Type
(in Web UI)

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->802.1x Mode
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (MD5)
2 (TLS)

Example

eap type: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-127

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
identity

IP Phone UI:

Identity
(in Web UI)

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra
Web UI at the path Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

identity: phone1

Parameter –
md5 password

IP Phone UI:

MD5 Password
(in Web UI)
Description

Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link->
802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-MD5 Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra
Web UI at the path Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5 Password. The password
displays as “*******”.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

md5 password: password1

A-128

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
802.1x root and intermediate
certificates

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Root and Intermediate
Certificates
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate
certificates related to the local certificate.
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME
at the end of the string. For example:
802.1x root and intermediate certificates:ftp://
admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/phones802RootCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phones802RootCert.pem” is the
filename. If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-129

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example

The following example downloads no 802.1x root and intermediate
certificate file:
802.1x root and intermediate certificates:
The following example downloads the 802.1x root and intermediate
certificate file from the original configuration server.
802.1x root and intermediate certificates: phones802RootCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phones802RootCert.pem” (802.1x root and intermediate certificate file)
from the “path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
802.1x root and intermediate certificates:ftp://
admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/phones802RootCert.pem

A-130

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
802.1x local certificate

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Local Certificate
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate.
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME
at the end of the string. For example:
802.1x local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phones802LocalCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phones802LocalCert.pem” is the
filename. If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

The following example downloads no local certificate file:
802.1x local certificate:
The following example downloads the local certificate file from the
original configuration server.
802.1x local certificate: phones802LocalCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phones802LocalCert.pem” (802.1x local certificate file) from the “path”
directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
802.1x local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phones802LocalCert.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-131

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
802.1x private key

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Private Key
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the file name that contains the private key.

Format

String

Default Value

ANDN/A

Range

N/A

Example

802.1x private key: filename.pem

A-132

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
802.1x trusted certificates

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->
EAP-TLS Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Trusted Certificates
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the file name that contains the trusted certificates.
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no certificates
• To download a certificate from the original configuration server
• To download a certificate from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME
at the end of the string. For example:
802.1x trusted certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phones802TrustedCert.pem
where “path” is the directory and “phones802TrustedCert.pem” is the
filename. If you do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

The following example downloads no 802.1x trusted certificate file:
802.1x trusted certificates:
The following example downloads the 802.1x trusted certificate file from
the original configuration server.
802.1x trusted certificates: phones802TrustedCert.pem
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“phones802TrustedCert.pem” (802.1x trusted certificate file) from the
“path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
802.1x trusted certificates:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/
phones802TrustedCert.pem

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-133

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
Global Settings
Parameter –
sip rtp port
RTP Port Base
(in IP Phone UI)

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Options->Administrator Menu->
SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

RTP Port
(in Web UI)
Description

Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent
in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds

Format

Integer

Default Value

3000

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip rtp port: 3000

A-134

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip use basic codecs

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Basic Codecs
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP
phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 - Disable
1 - Enable

Example

sip use basic codecs: 1

Parameter –
sip out-of-band dtmf

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band
DTMF
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces
the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 - Disable
1 - Enable

Example

sip out-of-band dtmf: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-135

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip customized codec

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Customized Codec Preference
List
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use
the preferred Codecs for this IP phone.

Format

Comma-separated list of semicolon-separated values

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Valid values for the syntax are:
payload
0 for G.711 m-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)

5, 10, 15, 20........90

silsupp

on, off

Example

sip customized codec:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off

Parameter –
sip dtmf method

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (RTP)

Range

0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)

Example

sip dtmf method: 1

A-136

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip srtp mode

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
RTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

RTP Encryption
(in Web UI)
Description

This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone, as
follows:
•

If set to 0, then disable SRTP.

•

If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred.

•

If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (SRTP Disabled)

Range

0 (SRTP Disabled)
1 (SRTP Preferred)
2 (SRTP Only)

Example

sip srtp mode: 1

Parameter –
sip silence suppression

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Silence Suppression
(in Web UI)
Description

Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone
negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip silence suppression: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-137

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN dtmf method

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone for a specific line.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (RTP)

Range

0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)

Example

sip line1 dtmf method: 1

Parameter –
sip lineN srtp mode

Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line <1-9>->RTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this line, as follows:
•

If set to -1, then use the global setting for this line. (This is the
default setting.)

•

If set to 0, then disable SRTP.

•

If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred.

•

If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

-1
0
1
2

Example

sip line1 mode: 1

A-138

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Autodial Settings
Global Settings
Parameter –
sip autodial number

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Autodial Number
(in Web UI)
Description

Globally specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials
when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. An empty (blank)
value disables autodial on the phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Blank

Range

Any valid SIP number

Examples

sip autodial number: 8500

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-139

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip autodial timeout

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Autodial Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description

Globally specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a
preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone
cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set
to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of
seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you
lift the handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 120

Examples

sip autodial timeout: 30

Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN autodial number

Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Autodial Number
(in Web UI)
Description

On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the SIP phone number that
the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle.
Valid values can be:
-1
Blank
Valid SIP Number

(Default) The phone uses the global
autodial setting for this line.
(Empty field) Disables autodial on this line.
Dials the SIP number specified for this line.

Format

Integer

Default Value

-1

Range

Any valid SIP number.

Examples

sip line1 autodial number: 8500

A-140

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip lineN autodial timeout

Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

AutoDial Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description

On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is
lifted from the IP phone cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift the handset. If this parameter is set
to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the specified number of
seconds before dialing the preconfigured number (warmline) when you
lift the handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 120

Examples

sip line1 autodial timeout: 30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-141

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Voicemail Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN vmail

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Note: The value of "N" is 1 - 9
or 1-6 depending your your
model phone. Line settings
are not applicable to the
6751i.
Description

Use this parameter in the .cfg file to configure the phone to dial a
specific number to access an existing voicemail account on a Service
Provider’s server. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for
listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a
server for this feature to be enabled.
When no registered voicemail accounts are registered to the phone, the
display shows "List Empty".
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the
number of voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen,
either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are
truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number/URI string.

Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

0 to 99

Example

sip line1 vmail: *97
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account.

A-142

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip vmail

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the phone number of the voicemail system connected to the
sip account. This parameter specifies the phone number you dial from
your phone to retrieve your voicemail.
Configuring this parameter allows you to call the voice mail system
directly from the "voicemail" application via the IP Phone UI under the
“Services” menu of the IP Phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

sip vmail: 5553435

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-143

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Directory Settings
Parameter –
directory 1

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description

The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Note: You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no directory
• To download a directory from the original configuration server
• To download a directory from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv
where “path” is the directory and “companylist.csv” is the filename. If you
do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

The following example downloads no directory:
directory 1:
The following example downloads a company directory from the original
configuration server:
directory 1:companylist.csv
The following example downloads a company directory file from the
specified server in the “path” directory:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv

A-144

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
directory 2

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description

The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Note: You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no directory
• To download a directory from the original configuration server
• To download a directory from another specified server
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at
the end of the string. For example:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv
where “path” is the directory and “companylist.csv” is the filename. If you
do not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

The following example downloads no directory:
directory 2:
The following example downloads a company directory from the original
configuration server:
directory 2:companylist.csv
The following example downloads a company directory file from the
specified server in the “path” directory:
directory 2: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-145

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
directory disabled

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the Directory on the IP phone.
If this parameter is set to 0, users can access the Directory List via the IP
phone UI. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display
on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 6757i and 6757i
CT the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

directory disabled: 1

Callers List Settings
Parameter –
callers list disabled

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the Callers List.
If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users.
If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller
information to the Caller List. For 6757i and 6757i CT phones, the "Caller
List" option on the IP phone is removed from the Services menu, and the
Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

callers list disabled: 1

A-146

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Customize Callers List and Services Key
Parameter –
services script

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing services after
pressing the Services key. When this parameter is set, it overrides the
standard function of the Services key.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

services script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml

Parameter –
callers list script

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing the Callers List after
pressing the Callers List key. When this parameter is set, it overrides
the standard function of the Callers List key.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

callers list script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-147

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Call Forward Settings
Parameter –
call forward disabled

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the ability to configure Call Forwarding. If this
parameter is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call
Forwarding via the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call
Forward" options. If this parameter is set to 1, all "Call Forward" options
are removed from the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI, preventing the
ability to configure Call Forwarding.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

call forward disabled: 1

A-148

Options->Call Forward
Basic Settings->Account Configuration
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Call Forward Key Mode Settings
Parameter –
call forward key mode

Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Sets the mode for how the phone uses “call forwarding” (CFWD)
• account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account
basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
• phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration
for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to
all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to
the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on
the phone.
• custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific
account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On 3-Line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to ALL
On or ALL Off. On 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, you can set all
accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the
account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed,
you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path
Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for an
account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in order for
the mode to be enabled.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (account)

Range

0 (account)
1 (phone)
2 (custom)

Example

call forward key mode: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-149

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Example
The following is an example of configuring the CFWD key mode in the
configuration files:
call forward key mode: 2
softkey1 type: callforward
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy

In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for CFWD on line 1 (account 1)
with a “custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays CFWD screens for
which you can customize on the phone.

A-150

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings
Parameter–
lldp

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI

LLDP Support
(IP Phone UI)

Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet&VLAN->
LLDP Support
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings

LLDP
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

lldp: 0

Parameter–
lldp interval

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings

LLDP Packet Interval
(in Web UI)
Description

The amount of time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data
Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables this parameter.

Format

Integer

Default Value

30

Range

0 to 2147483647

Example

lldp interval: 60

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-151

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
use lldp elin

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General

Use LLDP ELIN
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number
(ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

use lldp elin: 0

A-152

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Missed Calls Indicator Settings
Parameter –
missed calls indicator
disabled

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the Missed Calls Indicator. If the "missed calls
indicator disabled" parame.ter is set to 0, the indicator increments as
unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If the "missed calls indicator
disabled" parameter is set to 1, the indicator is disabled and will NOT
increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

missed calls indicator disabled: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-153

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

XML Settings

Parameter –
xml get timeout

Configuration Files

Description

Allows you to specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits
for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET
connection. If the far side accepts the GET connection but never returns
a response, it blocks the phone until it is rebooted. If you enter a value
greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times out and will not be
blocked.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (never timeout)

Range

0 to 214748364 seconds

Example

xml get timeout: 20

Parameter –
xml application URI

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, .cfg

XML Application URI
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the XML application you are loading into the IP phone configuration.

Format

HTTP server path or fully qualified Domain Name

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php

A-154

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
xml application title

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, .cfg

XML Application Title
(in Web UI)
Description

This parameter allows you to rename the XML application in the IP phone
UI (Services->4. Custom Feature). By default, when you load an XML
application to the IP phone, the XML application title is called "Custom
Feature". The "xml application title" parameter allows you to change that
title.
For example, if you are loading a traffic report XML application, you could
change this parameter title to "Traffic Reports", and that title will display in
the IP phone UI as Services->4. Traffic Reports.

Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

xml application title: Traffic Reports

Parameter –
xml application post list

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg

XML Push Server List
(Approved IP Addresses)
(in Web UI)
Description

The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone.

Format

IP address in dotted decimal format and/or Domain name address

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

xml application post list: 10.50.10.53,
dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-155

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
xml beep notification

Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

XML Beep Support
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables a BEEP notification on the phone when a status
message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus) containing a “beep” attribute
arrives to the phone.
Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (ON)

Range

0 (OFF)No beep is audible even if the beep attribute is present in
the XML object.
1 (ON)The phone beeps when an XML object with the “beep”
attribute arrives to the phone.

Example

xml beep notification: 0

Parameter –
xml status scroll delay

Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Status Scroll Delay (seconds)
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone.
Note: Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.

Format

Integer

Default Value

5

Range

1 to 25

Example

xml status scroll delay: 3

A-156

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Action URI Settings
Parameter –
action uri startup

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Startup
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup
event occurs. This parameter can use any of the following variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri startup: http://10.50.10.140/startup

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-157

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
action uri registered

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Successful Registration
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a
successful registration event occurs. This parameter can use the
following variables:
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
Note: The “action uri registered” parameter executes on the first
successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone.

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri registered: http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth
name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$

A-158

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
action uri registration
event

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Action URI

Registration Event
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration
event change occurs. This parameter uses the following variables to
determine the state of the event:

$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$
$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$
Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated (for
example, a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout
state.)
Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Any valid URI

Example

action uri registration event: http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/
actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®co
de=$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-159

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
action uri incoming

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Incoming Call
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
incoming call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LOCALIP$$

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri incoming: http://10.50.10.140/
incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$

Parameter –
action uri outgoing

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Outgoing Call
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
outgoing call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$

A-160

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
action uri offhook

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Offhook
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
offhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables:
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri offhook: http://10.50.10.140/offhook

Parameter –
action uri onhook

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Onhook
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
onhook event occurs. This parameter can use the following variables:
$$LOCALIP$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LINESTATE$$
Note: The “LocalIP”, “CallDuration”, and “CallDirection” variables allow
for enhanced information in call records and billing applications.

Format

Fully qualified URI

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Up to 128 ASCII characters

Example

action uri onhook: http://10.50.10.140/onhook

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-161

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
action uri disconnected

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from
the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state.
This parameter uses the following variables to determine the state of the line:
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$

Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Any valid URI

Example

action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/
disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$

A-162

Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

XML SIP Notify Settings
Parameter –
sip xml notify event

Aastra Web UI:

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP
NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy
parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP
NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted
server), the phone rejects the message.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 - disabled
1 - enabled

Example

sip xml notify event: 1

Parameter –
action uri xml sip notify

Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is
received by the phone. This parameter can use the following variable:
$$LOCALIP$$
Note: The sip xml notify event parameter must be enabled.

Format

HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

action uri xml sip notify: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-163

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Polling Action URI Settings
Parameter –
action uri poll

Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds.

Format

HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

action uri poll: http://myserver.com/myappli.xml

Parameter –
action uri poll interval

Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the
"action uri poll".

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

N/A

Example

action uri poll interval: 60

A-164

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Parameter –
ring tone

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Options->Preferences->Tones->Set Ring Tone
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Global Ring Tone
(in Web UI)
Description

Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set
to one of six distinct rings.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Aastra Web UI:
Tone 1
IP Phone UI:
Tone 1
Configuration Files: 0 (Tone 1)

Range

Aastra Web UI & IP Phone UI
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Configuration Files
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)

Example

ring tone: 3

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-165

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
tone set

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Options->Preferences->Tones->Tone Set
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Tone Set
(in Web UI)
Description

Globally sets a tone set for a specific country.

Format

Text

Default Value

US

Range

Australia
Europe (generic tones)
France
Germany
Italy
Mexico
Brazil
Russia
United Kingdom (UK)
US (also used in Canada)

Example

tone set: Germany

A-166

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
lineN ring tone

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, .cfg

N=1 through 9
Line N
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone
can be set to one of six distinct rings.
Note: LineN is applicable to lines 1 through 9. Not applicable to the
6751i.

Format

Integer

Default Value

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files:

Range

Aastra Web UI
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent

Global
-1 (Global)

Configuration Files
-1 (Global)
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Example

line1 ring tone: 3

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-167

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting
Parameter –
incoming call cancels dialing

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Incoming Call Interrupts
Dialing
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables how the phone handles incoming calls while the
phone is dialing out.
When you enable this parameter (1 = true), an incoming call interrupts the
outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to
answer the incoming call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the
phone does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number
you were dialling continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the
incoming call to a free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all
remaining lines are busy) and the LED for that line blinks. You have a
choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer the incoming call on another
line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that display. If you choose to
answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish the call, and then
hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and finish
dialing out.
Notes:
1. On 3-Line LCD phones (not applicable to the 6751i), you must use the
up and down arrow keys to ignore or answer the call.
2. On all phone models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the
phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call,
you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required.
After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.

A-168

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Description (Cont’d)

Transfer/Conference Call Behavior
If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your
phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted
(regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or
disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to
an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the
incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still displays your dialing screen.
Intercom Behavior
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing
in config files) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call,
the enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow
Barge In” setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing
intercom call. On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge
In” and “Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or
conference the call. However, the incoming call goes to an available idle
line, and the LED blinks while you are dialing the second half of the
conference or transfer.
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (or incoming call cancels dialing
in config files) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle
line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all
conditions.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

incoming call cancels dialing: 1

Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls
Parameter –
sip ignore status code

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the status code that is sent in the response to the server when
a user ignores an incoming call.

Format

Integer

Default Value

486

Range

Valid SIP final negative response code (Refer to RFC3261)

Example

sip ignore status code: 486

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-169

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Parameter –
switch focus to ringing line

Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while
the phone is in the connected state.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

switch focus to ringing line: 1

A-170

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
Parameter–
preferred line

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General

Preferred Line
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the preferred line to switch focus to when incoming or outgoing
calls end on the phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

0 (none - disables the preferred line focus feature)
1 to 9

Example

preferred line: 2

Parameter–
preferred line timeout

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Basic Settings->Preferences->General

Preferred Line Timeout
(seconds)
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred
line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration
of inactivity on an active line.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately)

Range

0 to 999

Example

preferred line timeout: 30

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-171

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
Parameter –
goodbye cancels incoming
call

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Goodbye Key Cancels
Incoming Call
(in Web UI)
Description

Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone.
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), the Goodbye key rejects
the incoming call. When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), the
Goodbye key hangs up the active call.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when
an active call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as
“answer” and softkey 2 as “ignore”. You can press the required softkey
as applicable.
For 3-Line LCD phones:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when
an active call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the
LCD window. The phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the
DOWN arrow key, the phone answers the incoming call.
Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

goodbye cancels incoming call: 0

A-172

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
Parameter –
stutter disabled

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Stuttered Dial Tone
(in Web UI)
Description

Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

stuttered disabled: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-173

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Call Waiting Settings

Parameter –
call waiting

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Call Waiting
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to enable or disable Call Waiting on the IP phone.
If you enable call waiting (default), the user has the option of accepting a
second call while currently on the first call. If you disable call waiting, and
a user is currently on a call, a second incoming call is automatically
rejected by the phone with a busy message.
If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any
further incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call
Forward No Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then
forward the call according to the rule configured. The phone can only:
• -transfer the currently active call
or
• accept transferred calls if there is no active calls.
If call waiting is disabled:
• on the 6757i CT base, and the handset is currently on a call, all
additional incoming calls are rejected on the handset.
• intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected.
• pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls.
• the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the
incoming call is automatically rejected.
• the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls.
• the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are
made to the phone at one time.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

call waiting: 0

A-174

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
call waiting tone

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Play Call Waiting Tone
(in Web UI)
Description

Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an
active call and a new call comes into the phone.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the Call Waiting
parameter is enabled.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enabled)

Example

call waiting tone: 0

Message Waiting Indicator Settings
Parameter –
mwi led line

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Message Waiting Indicator
Line
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) on a single
line or on all lines on the phone. For example, if you set this parameter to
3, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you set this
parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on any line
on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
Note: To enable MWI for all lines in the configuration files, set this
parameter to zero (0). The enable MWI for all lines in the Aastra Web UI,
select “All” in the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0 (all lines)

Range

0 to 9

Example

mwi led line: 3

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-175

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

DND Key Mode Settings
Parameter –
dnd key mode

Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Sets the mode for how the phone uses “do not disturb” (DND):
•

account

•

phone

•

custom

Sets DND for a specific account.
DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone.
DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or
OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after
pressing the DND key, that list the account(s)
on the phone. The user can select a specific
account for DND, turn DND ON for all accounts,
or turn DND OFF for all accounts.

Notes:
1. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode
setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to
“Phone”.
2. You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature. To
configure a DND key, see “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/
Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-217.
Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (phone)

Range

0 (account)
1 (phone)
2 (custom)

Example

dnd key mode: 2

Example
The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the
configuration files:
dnd key mode: 2
softkey1 type: dnd
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy

In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a
“custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you
can customize on the phone.

A-176

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Priority Alert Settings
Parameter –
priority alerting enabled

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Enable Priority Alerting
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming
calls and call-waiting calls.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

priority alerting enabled: 0

For Sylantro Server only
Parameter –
alert auto call distribution
auto call distribution
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert auto call distribution: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-177

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alert community 1
community-1
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert community-1” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert community 1: 3

Parameter –
alert community 2

Aastra Web UI:

community-2
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert community-2” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert community 2: 4

A-178

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alert community 3

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

community-3
(in Web UI)
Description

When an "alert community-3” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert community 3: 1

Parameter –
alert community 4

Aastra Web UI:

community-4
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert community-4” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert community 4: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-179

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alert external
alert external
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert external: 4

Parameter –
alert emergency

Aastra Web UI:

alert emergency
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert emergency: 4

A-180

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alert group
Group
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert group: 4

Parameter –
alert internal

Aastra Web UI:

alert internal
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert internal: 4

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-181

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
alert priority
alert priority
(in Web UI)

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Normal ringing

Range

0
1
2
3
4
5

Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent

Example

alert priority: 4

Bellcore Cadence Settings
Parameter–
bellcore cadence dr2

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr2.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.

Format

Integer

Default Value

800,400, 800,4000

Range

N/A

Example

bellcore cadence dr2: 800, 400, 800, 4000

A-182

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
bellcore cadence dr3

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr3.
Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.

Format

Integer

Default Value

400,200,400,200,800,4000

Range

N/A

Example

bellcore cadence dr3: 400,200,400,200,800,4000

Parameter–
bellcore cadence dr4

Configuration Files

Description

Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr4.

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format

Integer

Default Value

300,200,1000,200,300,4000

Range

N/A

Example

bellcore cadence dr4: 300,200,1000,200,300,300,200,4000

Parameter–
bellcore cadence dr5

Configuration Files

Description

Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr5.

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not
repeat”.
Format

Integer

Default Value

500,-1

Range

N/A

Example

bellcore cadence dr5: 500,-1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-183

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

SIP Diversion Display
Global Setting
Parameter –
sip diversion display

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Global parameter that enables/disables the display of the Caller ID and/
or caller name, and reason for diversion on the phones LCD for an
outgoing call that is being diverted to another destination. The phone
that receives the diverted call displays the Caller ID of the original call
destination.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 (disabled - do not display diversion information to the phone’s LCD)
1 (enabled - display diversion information to the phone’s LCD)

Example

sip diversion display: 0

Per-Line Setting
Parameter –
sip lineN diversion display

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(N is a line number from
1 to 9)
Description

For a specific line on the phone, this parameter enables/disables the
display of the Caller ID and/or caller name, and reason for diversion on
the phones LCD for an outgoing call that is being diverted to another
destination. The phone that receives the diverted call displays the Caller
ID of the original call destination.
Note: You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 (disabled - do not display diversion information to the phone’s LCD)
1 (enabled - display diversion information to the phone’s LCD)

Example

sip line1 diversion display: 0

A-184

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Display of Call Destination for Incoming Calls
Parameter –
show call destination name

Configuration Files

Description

Enable/disables the display of the call destination name to the LCD on
the phone during incoming calls.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0
1

Example

show call destination name: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

(disabled)
(enabled)

A-185

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Language Settings
Parameter –
language

IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Options->Language
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings->Webpage Language
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Webpage Language
(in Web UI)

Configuration File

Description

The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web
UI.
Valid values for all phones are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
5 (Portuguese)
6 (Russian)
Valid values for CT cordless handsets are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
Note: All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the
IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see
“Loading Language Packs” on page -36.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 4 (all phones)
0 to 2 (for CT handsets)

Example

language: 2
language: 3
language: 4

A-186

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter–
input language

IP Phone UI:
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Language->Input Language
Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Input Language
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone.
Entering a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and
characters in the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML applications via
the keypad on the phone, in the language(s) specified.

Format

Text

Default Value

English

Range

Valid values are:
• English
• French
• Français
• German
• Deutsch
• Italian
• Italiano
• Spanish
• Español
• Portuguese
• Português
• Russian
• Русский

Example

input language: French
input language: Español

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-187

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Language Pack Settings
Parameter –
language N

Aastra Web UI
Configuration File

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings
.cfg

Language N
(in Web UI)
Where “N” can be 1, 2, 3, or
4
Description

The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
lang_de.txt
(German)*
lang_es.txt
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt
(Italian)
lang_pt.txt
(Portuguese)
lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
lang_ru.txt
(Russian)
You can use this parameter in three ways:
• To download no language packs
• To download a language pack(s) from the original configuration
server
• To download a language pack(s) from another specified server

Notes:
1. The languages packs you load are dependant on available language
packs from the configuration server. For more information about loading
language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page -36.
2. You must reboot the phone to load a language pack.
3. To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A
FILENAME at the end of the string. For example:
language 1:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/lang_de.txt
where “path” is the directory and “lang_de.txt” is the filename. If you do
not specify a filename, the download fails.
See examples for each below.

A-188

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Format

lang__.txt
or
lang_.txt
Note: For valid values for  and , see “Language
Codes (from Standard ISO 639)” on page A-190 and “Country Codes
(from Standard ISO 3166)” on page A-190.

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

The following example downloads no language pack file:
language 1:
The following example downloads the German language pack to the
phones from the original configuration server:
language 1: lang_de.txt
The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file
“lang_de.txt” (German language pack) from the “path” directory on server
1.2.3.4 using port 50:
language 1:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/lang_de.txt

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-189

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

The following table identifies the language code to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639)
Language

Language Code

English

en

European French

fr

French Canadian

fr_ca

European Spanish

es

Mexican Spanish

es_mx

German

de

Italian

it

Portuguese

pt

Brazillian Portuguese

br_pt

Russian

ru

The following table identifies the country codes to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166)
Country

Country Code

AFGHANISTAN
ÅLAND ISLANDS
ALBANIA
ALGERIA
AMERICAN SAMOA
ANDORRA
ANGOLA
ANGUILLA
ANTARCTICA
ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA
ARGENTINA
ARMENIA
ARUBA
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
AZERBAIJAN

AF
AX
AL
DZ
AS
AD
AO
AI
AQ
AG
AR
AM
AW
AU
AT
AZ

A-190

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

BAHAMAS
BAHRAIN
BANGLADESH
BARBADOS
BELARUS
BELGIUM
BELIZE
BENIN
BERMUDA
BHUTAN
BOLIVIA
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
BOTSWANA
BOUVET ISLAND
BRAZIL
BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
BULGARIA
BURKINA FASO
BURUNDI

BS
BH
BD
BB
BY
BE
BZ
BJ
BM
BT
BO
BA
BW
BV
BR
IO
BN
BG
BF
BI

CAMBODIA
CAMEROON
CANADA
CAPE VERDE
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
CHAD
CHILE
CHINA
CHRISTMAS ISLAND
COCOS (KEELING) ISLANDS
COLOMBIA
COMOROS
CONGO
CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE
COOK ISLANDS
COSTA RICA
CÔTE D'IVOIRE
CROATIA
CUBA
CYPRUS
CZECH REPUBLIC

KH
CM
CA
CV
KY
CF
TD
CL
CN
CX
CC
CO
KM
CG
CD
CK
CR
CI
HR
CU
CY
CZ

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-191

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

DENMARK
DJIBOUTI
DOMINICA
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC

DK
DJ
DM
DO

ECUADOR
EGYPT
EL SALVADOR
EQUATORIAL GUINEA
ERITREA
ESTONIA
ETHIOPIA

EC
EG
SV
GQ
ER
EE
ET

FALKLAND ISLANDS (MALVINAS)
FAROE ISLANDS
FIJI
FINLAND
FRANCE
FRENCH GUIANA
FRENCH POLYNESIA
FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES

FK
FO
FJ
FI
FR
GF
PF
TF

GABON
GAMBIA
GEORGIA
GERMANY
GHANA
GIBRALTAR
GREECE
GREENLAND
GRENADA
GUADELOUPE
GUAM
GUATEMALA
GUERNSEY
GUINEA
GUINEA-BISSAU
GUYANA

GA
GM
GE
DE
GH
GI
GR
GL
GD
GP
GU
GT
GG
GN
GW
GY

HAITI
HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS
HOLY SEE (VATICAN CITY STATE)
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
HUNGARY

HT
HM
VA
HN
HK
HU

A-192

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

ICELAND
INDIA
INDONESIA
IRAN, ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF
IRAQ
IRELAND
ISLE OF MAN
ISRAEL
ITALY

IS
IN
ID
IR
IQ
IE
IM
IL
IT

JAMAICA
JAPAN
JERSEY
JORDAN

JM
JP
JE
JO

KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
KIRIBATI
KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF
KOREA, REPUBLIC OF
KUWAIT
KYRGYZSTAN

KZ
KE
KI
KP
KR
KW
KG

LAO PEOPLE'S DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC
LATVIA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
LIBERIA
LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA
LIECHTENSTEIN
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBOURG

LA
LV
LB
LS
LR
LY
LI
LT
LU

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-193

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

MACAO
MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF
MADAGASCAR
MALAWI
MALAYSIA
MALDIVES
MALI
MALTA
MARSHALL ISLANDS
MARTINIQUE
MAURITANIA
MAURITIUS
MAYOTTE
MEXICO
MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF
MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF
MONACO
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MONTSERRAT
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
MYANMAR

MO
MK
MG
MW
MY
MV
ML
MT
MH
MQ
MR
MU
YT
MX
FM
MD
MC
MN
ME
MS
MA
MZ
MM

NAMIBIA
NAURU
NEPAL
NETHERLANDS
NETHERLANDS ANTILLES
NEW CALEDONIA
NEW ZEALAND
NICARAGUA
NIGER
NIGERIA
NIUE
NORFOLK ISLAND
NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS
NORWAY

NA
NR
NP
NL
AN
NC
NZ
NI
NE
NG
NU
NF
MP
NO

OMAN

OM

A-194

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

PAKISTAN
PALAU
PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED
PANAMA
PAPUA NEW GUINEA
PARAGUAY
PERU
PHILIPPINES
PITCAIRN
POLAND
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO

PK
PW
PS
PA
PG
PY
PE
PH
PN
PL
PT
PR

QATAR

QA

RÉUNION
ROMANIA
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
RWANDA

RE
RO
RU
RW

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-195

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

SAINT HELENA
SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS
SAINT LUCIA
SAINT PIERRE AND MIQUELON
SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES
SAMOA
SAN MARINO
SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
SERBIA
SEYCHELLES
SIERRA LEONE
SINGAPORE
SLOVAKIA
SLOVENIA
SOLOMON ISLANDS
SOMALIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS
SPAIN
SRI LANKA
SUDAN
SURINAME
SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN
SWAZILAND
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC

SH
KN
LC
PM
VC
WS
SM
ST
SA
SN
RS
SC
SL
SG
SK
SI
SB
SO
ZA
GS
ES
LK
SD
SR
SJ
SZ
SE
CH
SY

TAIWAN, PROVINCE OF CHINA
TAJIKISTAN
TANZANIA, UNITED REPUBLIC OF
THAILAND
TIMOR-LESTE
TOGO
TOKELAU
TONGA
TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO
TUNISIA
TURKEY
TURKMENISTAN
TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS
TUVALU

TW
TJ
TZ
TH
TL
TG
TK
TO
TT
TN
TR
TM
TC
TV

A-196

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Country

Country Code

UGANDA
UKRAINE
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
UNITED KINGDOM
UNITED STATES
UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS
URUGUAY
UZBEKISTAN

UG
TA
AE
GB
US
TM
UY
UZ

VANUATU
Vatican City State
VENEZUELA
VIET NAM
VIRGIN ISLANDS, BRITISH
VIRGIN ISLANDS, U.S.

VU
see HOLY SEE
VE
VN
VG
VI

WALLIS AND FUTUNA
WESTERN SAHARA

WF
EH

YEMEN

YE

Zaire

see CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC
REPUBLIC OF THE
ZM
ZW

ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-197

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
Parameter –
suppress dtmf playback

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Suppress DTMF Playback
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is
dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys.
When you disable the suppression of DTMF playback and you press a
softkey or programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays each digit as dialed in the LCD window. When you enable the
suppression of DTMF playback, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing the
call to be dialed faster.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

suppress dtmf playback: 0

A-198

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Display DTMF Digits Setting
Parameter –
display dtmf digits

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Display DTMF Digits
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP
phone.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate
when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone”
dialing. Each key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific
frequencies. One tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones
and the other from a low frequency group.
If enabled, this parameter displays the digits on the IP phone display if you
are dialing from the keypad, or from a softkey or programmable key. This
parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

display dtmf digits: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-199

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings
Parameter –
sip intercom type

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Type
(in Web UI)
Description

Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying
the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed.

Format

Integer

Default Value

For Aastra Web UI:
Off
For Configuration Files:
3 - Off

Range

For Aastra Web UI:
Phone-Side
Server-Side
Off
For Configuration Files:
1 - Phone-Side
2 - Server-Side
3 - Off

Example

A-200

sip intercom type: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip intercom prefix code

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Prefix Code
(in Web UI)
Description

The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom
calls. This parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls.
Note: The example below shows *96 for the prefix code which is used for
Sylantro servers.

Format

String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

sip intercom prefix code: *96

Parameter –
sip intercom line

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the configuration from,
when making the Intercom call. The IP phone uses the first available line
for physically making the call but uses the configuration from the line you
set for this parameter.
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set with the Server-Side
option to enable the "sip intercom line" parameter.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

Line 1 through 9

Example

sip intercom line: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-201

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Incoming Intercom Settings
Parameter –
sip allow auto answer

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Auto-Answer
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an
Intercom call. If auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays
a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call. If auto-answer
is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy
signal to the caller.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false - do not allow auto-answer)
1 (true - allow auto-answer)

Example

sip allow auto answer: 0

Parameter –
sip intercom mute mic

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Microphone Mute
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone for Intercom calls
made by the originating caller.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false - microphone is not muted)
1 (true - microphone is muted)

Example

sip intercom mute mic: 1

A-202

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
sip intercom warning tone

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Play Warning Tone
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the phone receives an
incoming intercom call on an active line.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false - warning tone will not play)
1 (true - warning tone will play)

Example

sip intercom warning tone: 0

Parameter –
sip intercom allow barge in

Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Allow Barge In
(in Web UI)
Description

Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming intercom calls while
the phone is on an active call.
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), which is the default value,
an incoming intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by
placing the active call on hold and automatically answering the intercom
call.
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), and there is an active call,
the phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the
call warning tone.
Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, it takes affect on the phone
immediately.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

sip intercom allow barge in: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-203

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter –
paging group listening

Aastra Web UI:

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Group Paging RTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the multicast address(es) and the port on which the phone
listens for incoming multicast RTP packets.
Note: If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the
phone.

Format

IP Address in dotted decimal format/Port #

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

paging group listening: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000 0

Example
The following is an example of configuring RTP streaming for Paging
applications using the configuration files:
paging group listening: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000
softkey1 type: multicast
softkey1 label: Group 1
softkey1 value: 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000

A-204

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
Parameter –
headset tx gain

Configuration Files

Description

This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the headset microphone to t he far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

-10 db to +10 db

Example

headset tx gain: -5

Parameter –
headset sidetone gain

Configuration Files

Description

This is the is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone
signal from the headset microphone to the headset speaker. The amount
of sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

-10 db to +10 db

Example

headset sidetone gain: -1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-205

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
handset tx gain

Configuration Files

Description

This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the handset microphone to the far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

-10 db to +10 db

Example

handset tx gain: -5

Parameter –
handset sidetone gain

Configuration Files

Description

This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal
from the handset microphone to the handset speaker. The amount of
sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

-10 db to +10 db

Example

handset sidetone gain: -1

A-206

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
handsfree tx gain

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. The amount of
Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and
echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you to
adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and deployment
environment.
Note: The example below increases the speakerphone mic transmit gain
by 10 db.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

-10 db to +10 db

Example

handsfree tx gain: 10

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-207

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
audio mode

IP Phone UI
Configuration Files

Description

Allows you to configure how the "handsfree" key on the IP phone operates.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0

Speaker - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two
modes by pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to
using the handset by placing the handset on the cradle and
picking it up again.

1

Headset - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls
can be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d
/fkey.

2

Speaker/headset - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By
pressing the d /f key, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.

3

Headset/speaker - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the
handsfree speakerphone, and the handset.

Example

A-208

Options->Set Audio
aastra.cfg, .cfg

audio mode: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
Parameter –
directed call pickup

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Directed Call Pickup
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

directed call pickup: 1

Parameter –
directed call pickup prefix

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->
Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Directed Call Pickup by Prefix
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows you to enter a specific prefix string (depending on what is
available on your server), that the phone automatically dials when
dialing the Directed Call Pickup number.
For example, for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the
“directed call pickup prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed
Call Pickup after pressing a BLF or BLF/List softkey, the phone
prepends the *98 value to the designated extension of the BLF or BLF/
List softkey when dialing out.
Notes:
1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over
BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call
Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server,
the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix
code exists in the configuration.
2. You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List.
3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension
number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension =
1234).
4. Symbol characters are allowed (for example “*”).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-209

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Format

Integer

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

directed call pickup prefix: *98

Parameter –
play a ring splash

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Play a Ring Splash
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the playing of a short "call waiting tone" when there is
an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the host tone is idle,
the tone plays a "ring splash".

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

play a ring splash: 1

A-210

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings
Parameter –
acd auto available

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
->Auto Call Distribution Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Auto Available
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

acd auto available: 1

Parameter –
acd auto available timer

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
->Auto Call Distribution Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Auto Available Timer
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP phone status
switches back to “available.”

Format

Integer

Default Value

60 (seconds)

Range

0 to 120 (seconds)

Example

acd auto available timer: 60

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-211

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Park and Pickup Global Settings (not applicable to 6751i))
Parameter –
sprecode

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Park Call
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you
want to park an incoming call. The applicable value is dependant on the
type of server in the network:
Server
Asterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX

Park Values*
70
*98
*68
callpark

*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value



Range

See applicable values in the table above.

Example

sprecode: *68

A-212

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
pickupsprecode

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Pick Up Parked Call
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you
want to pickup a parked call. The applicable value is dependant on the
type of server in the network:
Server

Pickup Values*

Asterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX

70
*99
*88
pickup

*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Format

Alphanumeric characters

Default Value



Range

See applicable values in the table above.

Example

pickupsprecode: *88

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-213

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Mapping Key Settings
This section provides the hard key settings you can use to enable and disable the
Redial, Conf, and Xfer keys on the IP phone.
Parameter –
redial disabled

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the Redial key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Redial key is ignored, and the dialed number is not
saved to the "Redial List".

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

redial disabled: 1

Parameter –
conference disabled

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the Conf key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Conf key is ignored.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

conference disabled: 1

A-214

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters

Parameter –
call transfer disabled

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Xfer key is ignored.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false), 1 (true)

Example

call transfer disabled: 1

Parameter –
map redial key to

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Map Redial Key To
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Redial key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing on the 6757i CT
Base Station, the Redial key on the 6757i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Redial key on the handset is not configured for
speeddial.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

map redial key to: 5551234

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-215

Parameter –
map conf key to

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Map Conf Key To
(in Web UI)
Description

Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing on the 6757i CT Base
Station, the Conf key on the 6757i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Conf key on the handset is not configured for speeddial.

Format

Integer

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

map conf key to: 5551267

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/
Expansion Module Key Parameters
This section provides the softkey, programmable key, feature key, and expansion
module key parameters you can configure on the IP phones. The following table
provides the number of keys you can configure for each model phone and
expansion module, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Softkeys

Expansion Module
Keys

Programmable
Keys

Lines
Available

Handset
Keys
Available

9143i

-

Not Applicable

7

9

-

9480i

6

Not Applicable

-

9

-

9480i CT

6

Not Applicable

-

9

15

6730i

-

Not Applicable

8

6

-

6731i

-

Not Applicable

8

6

-

6753i

-

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6***

9

-

6755i

6 Bottom Keys

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6 Top Keys

9

-

-

9

-

-

9

15

IP Phone
Model

60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i

12 Top and
Bottom Softkeys

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

6757i CT

12 Top and
Bottom Softkeys

36 to 108* on Base
Station
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model M675i)

*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-217

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

***On the 6753i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed
only if Administrator allows.

Note: When entering definitions for softkeys, the “#” sign must be
enclosed in quotes.

A-218

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Softkey Settings for 8 and 11-Line LCD phones
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
softkeys available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT models.
See the table above for applicable values.
Parameter –
softkeyN type

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Type
(in Web UI)
Description

The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
• none - Indicates softkey key is disabled.
• line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
• speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
Speeddial is applicable to the M670i and M675i also. You can
configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by pressing that
softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial key to dial
prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers automatically dial
when you press the softkey, and the phone waits for you to enter the
remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
• dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI). You must also
set the DND key mode. See
• blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key. Maximum of 50 BLFs are
applicable to the M670i and M675i also.
• list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
• acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
• dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
• xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-219

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
callforward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
speeddial/conf - Indicates the softkey is configured to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a conference key.
dir - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory List.
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey.

The softkeys are added in order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any
hard-coded keys have been added. If a particular soft key is not defined,
it is ignored.
Format

Text

Default Value

none

A-220

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Range

none
line
speeddial
dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI)
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
callforward
blf/xfer
speeddial/xfer
speeddial/conf
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
dir
icom
services
phonelock
paging
empty

Example

softkey1 type: line
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey3 type: lcr
softkey4 type: xml
Directed Call Pickup on Extension 2200
softkey2 type: dcp
softkey2 label: dcp2200
softkey2 value: 2200
softkey2 states: incoming outgoing idle connected
Group Call Pickup on group_A
softkey3 type: dcp
softkey3 label: gcp_A
softkey3 value: groupcallpickup
softkey3 states: incoming outgoing idle connected

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-221

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
softkeyN label

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Label
(in Web UI)
Description

The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “softkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
• speeddial
• blf
• acd
• dcp
• xml
• flash
• sprecode
• park
• pickup
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• dir
• callers
• icom
• services
• paging
Notes:
1. For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the softkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value is
entered for the softkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is used.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.

Example

softkey1 label: “Line 9”
softkey2 label: “info”
softkey3 label: flash
softkey4 label: “johnsmith”

A-222

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
softkeyN value

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Value
(In Web UI)
Description

This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “softkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
• speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial softkey; you then
enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the
phone.)
• blf
• sprecode
• park
• pickup
• dcp
• xml
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• paging
Notes:
1. For speeddial - Value is the phone number, extension, or prefix
number to enter for the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -241. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Examples for
Models with 8 and 11-Line LCDs” on page -239.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
•
$$PROXYURL$$
•
$$LINESTATE$$
•
$$LOCALIP$$
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
•
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
•
$$CALLDURATION$$
•
$$CALLDIRECTION$$

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-223

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

N/A

Example

softkey1 value: 9
softkey2 value: 411
softkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
softkey5 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)

A-224

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
softkeyN line

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “softkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
• speeddial
• blf
• blf/list
• acd
• dcp
• park
• pickup
• lcr
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 through 9

Example

softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 line: 5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-225

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
softkeyN states

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Idle, Connected, Incoming,
Outgoing, Busy
(in Web UI)
Description

Displays the status of the phone when a softkey is pressed. You can
enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter.
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey.
In the following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated
with softkey 12:
softkey12 type: speeddial
softkey12 label: voicemail
softkey12 value *89
softkey12 states: outgoing
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys
are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle screen at
all.

Format

Text

Default Value

For softkey type - None:
All states disabled
For softkey types - Line, DND, speeddial, BLF, BLF List, dcp, XML,
lcr, CallForward, BLF/Xfer, Speeddial/Xfer, Speeddial/Conf,
Directory, Callers List, Icom, Services, empty:
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing
For softkey type - Flash:
All states disabled
For softkey type - Sprecode, Park:
connected
For softkey type - Pickup:
idle, outgoing
For softkey type - acd:
idle

A-226

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Range

Valid values are:
idle
The phone is not being used.
connected
The line currently being displayed is
in an active call (or the call is on hold)
incoming
The phone is ringing.
outgoing
The user is dialing a number, or the
far-end is ringing.
busy
The current line is busy because the line is in use or
the line is set as “Do Not Disturb”
Note: For softkey type, Pickup, values can be: just idle, just outgoing, or
idle outgoing.

Example

softkey1 states: idle incoming outgoing
softkey2 states: connected

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-227

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i, and 6755i
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
programmable keys available on the phone models. See the table on page 217 for
the applicable values.
Parameter –
prgkeyN type

Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Type
(in Web UI)
Description

A-228

The type of programmable key to configure. Valid types are:
• none - Indicates no setting for programmable key.
• line - Indicates programmable key is configured for line use.
• speeddial - Indicates programmable key is configured for speeddial
use. You can configure a programmable key to speeddial a specific
number by pressing that key. Optionally, you can also configure a
speeddial key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix
numbers automatically dial when you press the programmable key,
and the phone waits for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
• dnd - Indicates programmable key is configured for do not disturb
on the phone. This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web
UI).
• blf - Indicates programmable key is configured for Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) use. User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
• list - Indicates programmable key is configured for BLF list use.
User can dial out on a BLF List configured key. You can also use the
“BLF List URI” parameter to specify a URI for the phone to access
for the BLF List.
• acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto Call Distribution”
in the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server
to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users
(agents).
• dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
• xml - Indicates programmable key is configured to accept an XML
application for accessing customized XML services. You can also
specify an XML softkey URL for this option.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

•

•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

flash - Indicates programmable key is set to generate a flash event
when it is pressed. The IP phone generates flash events only when
a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example,
when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates programmable key is configured to
automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For
example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by
pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service provided
by the server.
park - Indicates programmable key is configured to park incoming
calls when pressed.
pickup - Indicates programmable key is configured to pick up
parked calls when pressed.
lcr - Indicates programmable key is configured for “last call return”
when pressed.
callforward - Indicates the programmable key is configured for
accessing the Call Forward features on the phone. A Call
Forwarding Mode must be enabled to use this softkey. “Account”
mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the programmable key is configured to transfer
calls AND configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the programmable key is configured to
transfer calls AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
speeddial/conf - Indicates the programmable key is configured to
be used as a speeddial key AND as a conference key.
dir - Indicates programmable key is configured to access the
Directory List.
callers - Indicates programmable key is configured to access the
Callers List.
conf - Indicates programmable key is configured as a conference
key. Enter as “conf” in configuration files.
xfer- Indicates programmable key is configured as a Transfer key
for transferring calls. Enter as “xfer” in configuration files.
services - Indicates the programmable key is set to be used as the
Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the programmable key is set to be used to
lock/unlock the phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling.
empty - Indicates programmable key is configured to force a blank
entry on the IP phone display for a specific programmable key.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-229

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Range

none
line
speeddial
dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI)
blf
list (“BLF/List” in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
callforward
directory
callers(“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
conf
xfer
blf/xfer
speeddial/xfer
speeddial/conf
phonelock
services
paging
empty

Example

prgkey3 type: speeddial

A-230

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
prgkeyN value

Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Value
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the value you assign to the programmable key.
The “prgkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
• speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial programmable key;
you then enter the rest of the number from the
keypad on the phone.)
• line
• blf
• sprecode
• dcp
• xml
• park
• pickup
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• paging
Notes:
1.
For speeddial - Value is the phone number, extension, or prefix
number to enter for the programmable key.
2.
For line - Value is optional; for example L4.
3.
For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
4.
For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
5.
For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
•
$$PROXYURL$$
•
$$LINESTATE$$
•
$$LOCALIP$$
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
•
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
•
$$CALLDURATION$$
•
$$CALLDIRECTION$
6.
For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -241. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section “Examples for
Models with 3-Line LCDs (not applicable to 6751i)” on page -240.

Format

String

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-231

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

prgkey3 value: 411
prgkey4 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)

Parameter–
prgkeyN line

Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the line associated with the programmable key you are
configuring.
The “prgkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
• speeddial
• blf
• blf/List
• acd
• dcp
• park
• pickup
• lcr
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 through 9

Example

prgkey3 line: 1
prgkey4 line: 5

A-232

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN type

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Top Softkeys->Type
(in Web UI)
Description

The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
• none - Indicates softkey is disabled.
• line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
• speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by
pressing that softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial
key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey, and the phone waits
for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
• dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
• blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
• list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
• acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
• dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
• xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-233

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
callforward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
speeddial/conf - Indicates the softkey is configured to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a conference key.
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in
order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have
been added. If a particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.

Format

Text

Default Value

none

A-234

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Range

none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
callforward
park
pickup
blf/xfer
speeddial/xfer
speeddial/conf
lcr
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
directory
icom
services
phonelock
paging
empty

Example

topsoftkey1 type: line
topsoftkey2 type: speeddial
topsoftkey3 type: lcr
topsoftkey4 type: xml

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-235

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
topsoftkeyN label

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Top Softkeys->Label
(in Web UI)
Description

The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
• speeddial
• blf
• acd
• dcp
• xml
• flash
• sprecode
• park
• pickup
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• paging
• directory
• callers list
• icom
• services
Notes:
1. For the 6757i and 6757i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft
key label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the topsoftkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value
is entered for the topsoftkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is
used.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.

Example

topsoftkey1 label: “Line 9”
topsoftkey2 label: “info”
topsoftkey4 label: “johnsmith”

A-236

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
topsoftkeyN value

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Top Softkeys->Value
(In WEb UI)
Description

This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
• speeddial (you can enter a speeddial number for this field;
optionally, you can also enter a prefix for the
speeddial value to allow the phone to dial the prefix
after you press the speeddial programmable key;
you then enter the rest of the number from the
keypad on the phone.)
• blf
• sprecode
• park
• pickup
• dcp
• xml
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• paging
Notes:
1. For speeddial - Value is the phone number, extension, or prefix
number to enter for the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page -241. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Examples for
Models with 8 and 11-Line LCDs” on page -239.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
•
$$PROXYURL$$
•
$$LINESTATE$$
•
$$LOCALIP$$
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
•
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
•
$$CALLDURATION$$
•
$$CALLDIRECTION$$

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-237

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

N/A

Example

topsoftkey1 value: 9
topsoftkey2 value: 411
topsoftkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
topsoftkey5 value: 12345+ (example of a speeddial prefix)

A-238

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
topsoftkeyN line

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Top Softkeys->Line
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “topsoftkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
• speeddial
• blf
• blf/list
• acd
• dcp
• park
• pickup
• lcr
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 through 9

Example

topsoftkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey2 line: 5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-239

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Handset Feature Key Settings (9480i CT and 6757i CT)
Parameter –
featurekeyN type

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Type
(in Web UI)
Description

The type of feature key to configure. Valid types are:
• none - Indicates feature key is disabled.
• line - Indicates the feature key is configured for line use. Value can
be: line1, line2, line3, line4, line5, line6, line7, line8, or line9.
• xfer- Indicates feature key is configured for transferring a call.
• conf - Indicates feature key is configured for conference calling.
• public - Indicates feature key is configured to toggle from public to
private mode. A public and private softkey can be used when at a line
item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the
Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the
Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a
maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
• icom - Indicates the feature key is set to be used to make an
intercom call.
• dir - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Directory List.
• callers - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Callers List.
• park- Indicates the feature key is configured to park incoming calls
when pressed.
• pickup- Indicates the feature key is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
• flash - Indicates the feature key is set to generate a flash event when
it is pressed CT handsets. The IP phone generates flash events only
when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for
example, when the call is not on hold).

Format

Text

Default Value

None

Range

none
line1, line2, line3, line4, line5, line6, line7, line8, line9
transfer
conference
public
icom
directory
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
park
pickup
flash

A-240

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Example

featurekey1 type: line3
featurekey2 type: public
featurekey3 type: park
featurekey4 type: pickup

Parameter –
featurekeyN label

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Label
(in Web UI)
Description

The text label that displays on the IP phone for the feature key.
Notes:
1. For the 6757i CT phones, an icon appears beside the feature key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If a feature key is configured but no label is set, the IP phone sets the
label to the English, French, or Spanish translation of the chosen
action. The language used is based on the current language of the
cordless handset.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

featurekey1 label: Line 9
featurekey2 label: Public
featurekey4 label: John Smith

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-241

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i,
6757i CT) and M675i (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Parameter –
expmodX keyN type

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Type
(in Web UI)
Description

A-242

The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
• none - Indicates softkey is disabled.
• line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
• speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number by
pressing that softkey. Optionally, you can also configure a speeddial
key to dial prefix numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey, and the phone waits
for you to enter the remaining numbers to dial out.
Note: When there is an active call, the speeddial keys send DTMF
digits through the active voice path. To dial out, you have to first put
the active call on hold and then press the speeddial key.
• dnd - Indicates softkey is configured for do not disturb on the phone.
This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
• blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
• list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key. You can also use the “BLF List URI” parameter to
specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List.
• acd - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for auto call distribution (called “Auto call distribution” in
the Aastra Web UI). The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
• dcp - (for Sylantro Servers only) Indicates the programmable key is
configured for either directed call pickup or group call pickup (called
“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI). The Directed Call
Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept or pickup a
call on a monitored extension or a group of monitored extensions.
• xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.
• flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP
phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there
is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Format

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

Default Value

sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
callforward - Indicates the softkey is configured for accessing the
Call Forward features on the phone. A Call Forwarding Mode must be
enabled to use this softkey. “Account” mode is the default.
blf/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls AND
configured for BLF on a single key.
speeddial/xfer - Indicates the softkey is configured to transfer calls
AND configured for speeddialing to a specific number.
speeddial/conf - Indicates the softkey is configured to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a conference key.
callers - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
icom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key.
services - (not available on the 6753i) Indicates the softkey is set to
be used as the Services key.
phonelock - Indicates the softkey is set to be used to lock/unlock the
phone.
paging - Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone.
Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol
(RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without
involving SIP signaling.
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in
order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have
been added. If a particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.

none

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-243

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Range

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Example

expmod1 key1 type: line
expmod1 key2 type: speeddial
expmod1 key3 type: blf
expmod1 key4 type: list

A-244

none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI)
dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
callforward
blf/xfer
speeddial/xfer
speeddial/conf
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
directory
icom
services (not available on the 6753i)
phonelock
paging
empty

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
expmodX keyN label

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Label
(in Web UI)
Description

The text label that displays on the softkey for the Expansion Module.
The “expmodX keyN label” parameter can be set for the following
softkey types only:
• speeddial
• blf
• acd
• dcp
• xml
• flash
• sprecode
• park
• pickup
• directory
• callers list
• icom
• services
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf
• paging
Notes:
1. For 8 and 11-Line LCD phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.

Format

Text

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.

Example

expmod1 key1 label: “Line 9”
expmod2 key1 label: “info”
expmod3 key1 label: “johnsmith”

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-245

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
expmodX keyN value

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Value
(In WEb UI)
Description

The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey on the
Expansion Module.
The “expmodX keyN value” parameter can be set for the following
softkey types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

speeddial
blf
dcp
xml
sprecode
park
pickup
directory
callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI)
icom
services (not available on 6753i)
blf/xfer
speeddial/xfer
speeddial/conf
paging

Notes:
1. For the 6757i and 6757i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft
key label that indicates the status of the line.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
•
$$PROXYURL$$
•
$$LINESTATE$$
•
$$LOCALIP$$
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
•
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
•
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
•
$$CALLDURATION$$
•
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Format

String

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

N/A

A-246

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Example

expmod1 key1 value: 9
expmod1 key2 value: 411
expmod1 key3 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-247

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter –
expmodX keyN line

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Line
(in Web UI)
Description

This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring on the
Expansion Module. The number of applicable lines available is
dependent on the specific IP phone model.
The “expmodX keyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
• speeddial
• blf
• blf/list
• acd
• dcp
• lcr
• park
• pickup
• blf/xfer
• speeddial/xfer
• speeddial/conf

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

1 through 9

Example

expmod1 key1 line: 1
expmod1 key2 line: 5

A-248

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Customizing the Key Type List
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
Parameter –
softkey selection list

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify which key types to display and the order in which to
display them in the “Type” list for softkeys, programmable keys, and/or
expansion module keys when configuring the keys in the Aastra Web UI.
If no value is specified for this “softkey selection list” parameter, the
key “Type” list displays ALL of the key types by default in the Aastra Web
UI.
:
1.
Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone’s
environment are ignored.
2.
The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as
Keys 1 and 2 on the 6753i and 9143i, and as 5 and 6 on the 6730i and
6731i unless specifically changed by your Administrator.
3.
An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the
key types in the configuration files.
4.
Any key type already configured on a phone displays in that key’s
“Type” list, in addition to the values specified for this parameter.
5.
After configuring specific key types for a phone, the key types in
the Aastra Web UI display the same for both the User and Administrator
Web interfaces for that phone.

Format

Alpha Characters in a comma separated list

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-249

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Default Value
•

none

•

callforward

•

line

•

blf/xfer

•

speeddial

•

speeddial/xfer

•

dnd

•

speeddial/conf

•

blf

•

directory

•

list

•

callers

•

acd

•

conf
(6730i, 6731i, 6753i, 9143i)

•

dcp

•

xfer
(6730i, 6731i, 6753i, 9143i)

•

xml

•

icom

•

flash

•

services

•

sprecode

•

phonelock

•

park

•

paging

•

pickup

•

empty
(6755i, 6757i,
6757 CT, 9480i, 9480i CT)

•

lcr

Range

Any of the key types in the “Default Value” field above.

Example

softkey selection list: blf, speeddial, line, xml

A-250

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Handset Feature Keys (for CT Models ONLY)
Parameter –
feature key selection list

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify which key types to display and the order in which to
display them in the “Type” list for the feature keys (CT models only)
when configuring the keys in the Aastra Web UI.
If no value is specified for this “feature key selection list” parameter,
the key “Type” list displays ALL of the key types by default in the Aastra
Web UI.
:
1.
Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone’s
environment are ignored.
2.
An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the
key types in the configuration files.
3.
Any key type already configured on a phone displays in that key’s
“Type” list, in addition to the values specified for this parameter.
4.
After configuring specific key types for a phone, the key types in
the Aastra Web UI display the same for both the User and Administrator
Web interfaces for that phone.

Format

Alpha Characters in a comma separated list

Default Value
•

none

•

park

•

line

•

pickup

•

icom

•

conf

•

dir

•

private

•

callers

•

public

•

xfer

•

flash

Range

Any of the key types in the “Default Value” field above.

Example

feature key selection list: line, dir, callers

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-251

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Parameter–
softkeyN locked

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Locks the specified softkey on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, or 6757i
CT IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or
configuring the softkey. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server
settings and ignores any previous local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
• softkeyN type
• softkeyN label
• softkeyN value
• softkeyN line
• softkeyN states

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

softkey1 locked: 1

Parameter–
topsoftkeyN locked

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Locks the specified top softkey on the 6757i or 6757i CT IP phone.
Locking the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey.
When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
• topsoftkeyN type
• topsoftkeyN label
• topsoftkeyN value
• topsoftkeyN line

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

topsoftkey1 locked: 1

A-252

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter–
prgkeyN locked

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Locks the specified programmable key on the 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6753i,
or 6755i IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or
configuring the programmable key. When a key is locked, the phone uses
the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
• prgkeyN type
• prgkeyN value
• prgkeyN line

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

prgkey1 locked: 1

Parameter–
featurekeyN locked

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Locks the specified feature key on the CT handset. Locking the key
prevents a user from changing or configuring the feature key. When a key
is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous
local configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
• featurekeyN type
• featurekeyN label

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

featurekey1 locked: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-253

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Parameter–
expmodX keyN locked

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Locks the specified top softkey on the 5-Series Expansion Module
attached to the IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing
or configuring the softkey on the expansion module. When a key is
locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local
configuration.
Affects the following parameters:
• expmodX keyN type
• expmodX keyN value
• expmodX keyN line

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disable)

Range

0 (disable)
1 (enable)

Example

expmod1 key4 locked: 1

A-254

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)
Parameter–
prgkey1 locked

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to lock or unlock the Save key on the 6753i IP Phone. When the
Save key is unlocked, a User can change the function of the key using the
Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the key using
the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note:
1. The save function on the 6753i IP Phone is limited to Key 1 only.
2. Changing the function from the Save key to another function, removes
the ability to save items on the IP phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (lock)

Range

0 (unlock)
1 (lock)

Example

prgkey1 locked: 0

Parameter–
prgkey2 locked

Configuration Files

Description

Allows you to lock or unlock the Delete key on the 6753i IP Phone. When the
Delete key is unlocked, a User can change the function of the key using the
Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the key using
the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Note:
1. The delete function on the 6753i IP Phone is limited to Key 2 only.
2. Changing the function from the Delete key to another function, removes
the ability to delete items on the IP phone.
Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (lock)

Range

0 (unlock)
1 (lock)

Example

prgkey2 locked: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-255

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys
Parameter –
speeddial edit

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a speeddial key or edit
a speeddial key.
The default is enabled (Yes) allowing you to create and edit speeddial
keys on the phone using the Press-and-hold feature, softkeys,
programmable keys, expansion module keys and key pad, speeddial
menu in the IP Phone UI, and the SAVE TO key.
If this parameter is set to disabled (No), it blocks the user from using
any of the features on the phone to create or edit a speeddial key.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (Enabled)

Range

0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)

Example

speeddial edit: 0

BLF List URI Settings
Parameter–
list uri

Aastra Web UI

BLF List URI
(in Web UI)

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the URI that the phone uses to access the BLF list on the Broadsoft
server when the BLF list key is pressed. When you specify a URI for this
parameter, the phone uses the Internet to access the BLF list on the
Broadsoft server.

Format

HTTP server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name

Default Value

Not Applicable

Range

Not Applicable

Example

list uri: my6757i-blf-list@as.broadworks.com

A-256

Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
Operation->Programmable Keys->Services
Operation->Expansion Module Keys->Services
aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display

Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column
Display
Expansion Module 1 through 3
Parameter–
expmodXpageNleft

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify a customized heading for the M675i expansion
module, in the left column of a specific page. You can specify the following
options for this parameter:
Expansion Module 1
expmod1page1left (Expansion Module 1, Page 1, left column)
expmod1page2left (Expansion Module 1, Page 2, left column)
expmod1page3left (Expansion Module 1, Page 3, left column)
Expansion Module 2
expmod2page1left (Expansion Module 2, Page 1, left column)
expmod2page2left (Expansion Module 2, Page 2, left column)
expmod2page3left (Expansion Module 2, Page 3, left column)
Expansion Module 3
expmod3page1left (Expansion Module 3, Page 1, left column)
expmod3page2left (Expansion Module 3, Page 2, left column)
expmod3page3left (Expansion Module 3, Page 3, left column)

Format

Text String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

expmod1page1left: Personnel Ext

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-257

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display

Parameter–
expmodXpageNright

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to specify a customized heading for the M675i expansion
module, in the right column of a specific page. You can specify the
following options for this parameter:
Expansion Module 1
expmod1page1right (Expansion Module 1, Page 1, right column)
expmod1page2right (Expansion Module 1, Page 2, right column)
expmod1page3right (Expansion Module 1, Page 3, right column)
Expansion Module 2
expmod2page1right (Expansion Module 2, Page 1, right column)
expmod2page2right (Expansion Module 2, Page 2, right column)
expmod2page3right (Expansion Module 2, Page 3, right column)
Expansion Module 3
expmod3page1right (Expansion Module 3, Page 1, right column)
expmod3page2right (Expansion Module 3, Page 2, right column)
expmod3page3right (Expansion Module 3, Page 3, right column)

Format

Text String

Default Value

N/A

Range

N/A

Example

expmod1page1right: Operations Ext

A-258

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

Advanced Operational Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set
advanced operational features on the IP phones.

Blind Transfer Setting
Parameter –
sip cancel after blind transfer

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software
prior to release 1.4. This method sends the CANCEL message after the
REFER message when blind transferring a call.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip cancel after blind transfer: 1

Update Caller ID Setting.
Parameter –
sip update callerid

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables the updating of the Caller ID information during a
call.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip update callerid: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-259

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.
Parameter –
force web recovery mode
disabled

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables the forcing web recovery mode feature. If this
parameter is set to "1", you cannot force web recovery. If this parameter
is set to "0", press 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays to
force the web recovery mode.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (false)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

force web recovery mode disabled: 1

Parameter –
max boot count

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the number of faulty boots that occur before the phone is forced
into Web recovery mode.

Format

Integer

Default Value

10

Range

0 to 32767

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Zero (0) disables the max boot count feature.
Example

A-260

max boot count: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

Single Call Restriction Setting
Parameter –
two call support

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Two Call Support
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables or disables the single media path restriction between the
6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and the handset.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active
calls from the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless
handset. If this feature is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at
a time either from the base unit or from the handset.
When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on either the
base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can
negotiate complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding
audio at a time.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 - Disable
1 - Enable

Example

two call support: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-261

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

Blacklist Duration Setting
Parameter –
sip blacklist duration

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Blacklist Duration
(Aastra Web UI)
Description

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on
the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a
failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time.
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.

Format

Integer

Default Value

300 (5 minutes)

Range

0 to 9999999

Example

sip blacklist duration: 600

Whitelist Proxy Setting
Parameter –
sip whitelist

Aastra Web UI

Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Whitelist Proxy
(Aastra Web UI)
Description

This parameter enables/disables the whitelist proxy feature, as follows:
•
•

Set to 0 to disable the feature.
Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP
phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP
phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip whitelist: 1

A-262

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)
Parameter–
redial script

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies a redial script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Redial key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the redial action.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

redial script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/redial.php

Parameter–
xfer script

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies an Xfer script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Xfer key GETs the specified URI from the server instead of
starting the transfer action.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

xfer script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/xfer.php

Parameter–
conf script

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies an Conf script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Conf key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the conference action.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

conf script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/conf.php

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-263

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

Parameter–
icom script

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies an Icom script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Icom key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in
performing the Intercom action.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

icom script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/icom.php

Parameter–
voicemail script

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies an Voicemail script for the phone to use. When this parameter is
set, selecting the voicemail option from the Services Menu GETs the
specified URI from the server instead of starting the Voicemail application.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

voicemail script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/voicemail.php

A-264

aastra.cfg, .cfg

aastra.cfg, .cfg

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)
Parameter–
options script

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies an Options script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set,
pressing the Options Key (or Services Key on the 6751i) GETs the specified
URI from the server.
Note: Pressing and holding the Options key (or the Services Key on the
6751i) displays the local Options Menu on the phone.

Format

String

Default Value

empty

Range

Any valid URI

Example

options script: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/options.xml

Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting
Parameter–
auto offhook

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/
dialing state, if the handset is off-hook for more than 2 seconds, and the call
ends.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled - phone is prevented from entering the off-hook dialing state)
1 (enabled - allows phone to enter the off-hook dialing state)

Example

auto offhook: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-265

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting
Parameter–
xml lock override

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the method to use for overriding a locked phone when XML
applications are sent to the phone. There are three settings for this
parameter:
0 Phone prevents XML POSTs and XML GETs from being received or sent.
1 Phone allows XML POSTs; however, XML GETs by pressing the XML
keys (softkeys/programmable keys/extension module keys) are not
allowed.
2 Phone allows XML POSTs to the phone as well as XML GETs to/from the
phone by pressing the XML keys (softkeys/programmable keys/
extension module keys).

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

0 to 2

Example

xml lock override: 1

Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting

Parameter –
sip symmetric udp signaling

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060 to send SIP
UDP messages. The value “1” (which is the default) enables the phone
to use port 5060. The value “0” (zero) disables the phone from using
port 5060 and allows the phone to choose a random port to send SIP
UDP messages.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip symmetric udp signaling: 0

A-266

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

User-Agent Setting

Parameter –
sip user-agent

Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and
Server SIP headers in the SIP stack.
The value of “0” prevents the UserAgent and Server SIP header from
being added to the SIP stack. The value of “1” allows these headers to
be added.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (true)

Range

0 (false)
1 (true)

Example

sip user-agent: 0

GRUU and sip.instance Support
Parameter –
sip gruu

Configuration Files

Description

Enables or disables Globally Routable User-Agent URI (GRUU)
support on the IP Phone according to draft-ietf-sip-gruu-15. If this
parameter is disabled, parsing of inbound GRUU's for transfer are still
enabled.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip gruu: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-267

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

DNS Query Setting
Parameter–
sip dns query type

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Specifies the Domain Name Service (DNS) query method to use when the
phone performs a DNS lookup.

Format

Integer

Default Value

1

Range

0

A only - The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP
address and uses the default port number of 5060.

1

SRV & A - The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup
to get the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the
response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no IP
address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A” DNS
lookup to find the IP address.

2

NAPTR & SRV & A - First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming
Authority Pointer) lookup to get the “SRV” pointer and service type
(such as "aastra.com SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means
the service prefers to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV
query instead of the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR
record is returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same
case, the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step
lookup.
Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port
number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it sends out
and “A” lookup to get it.

Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a Fully- Qualified
Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone always sends “A
only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.
Example

A-268

sip dns query type: 2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests
Parameter–
sip accept out of order
requests

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables a workaround for non-compliant SIP devices (for example, Asterisk)
which do not increment the CSeq numbers in SIP requests sent to the
phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0 (disabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip accept out of order requests: 1

Optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers
Parameter –
sip notify opt headers

Configuration Files

Description

Enables and disables whether or not the “Allow” and Allow-Events”
optional headers are included in the SIP NOTIFY messages sent from
the phone to the server.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 (disabled - optional headers are removed from the SIP NOTIFY
message)
1 (enabled - no change; optional headers are included in SIP NOTIFY
message)

Example

sip notify opt headers: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-269

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters

P-Asserted Identity (PAI)
Parameter –
sip pai

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables or disables whether the SIP PAI displays to the IP phone.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

sip pai: 0

Route Header in SIP Packet
Parameter –
sip remove route

Configuration Files

aastra.cfg, .cfg

Description

Enables and disables the addition of the Route header in a SIP packet.
Enable this parameter for outbound proxies that do not support Route
headers.
Note: When enabled this will break all support for SIP routing, so if some
other device in the network attempts to add itself to the route it will fail.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

0

Range

0 (disable - adds the Route header to the packet)
1 (enable - removes the Route header from the packet)

Example

sip remove route: 1

A-270

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Advanced Operational Parameters

Configuration Encryption Setting
Parameter–
config encryption key

Configuration Files

Description

Specifies the phone-specific encryption key that the configuration server
uses to encrypt in a MAC-specific configuration file.

Format

String

Default Value

Not applicable

Range

String length of 4 to 32 alphanumeric characters

Example

config encryption key: 123abcd

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

aastra.cfg, .cfg

A-271

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters

Troubleshooting Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set
logging and support settings for troubleshooting purposes.

Log Settings
Parameter –
log server ip

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Log IP
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.

Format

IP address

Default Value

0.0.0.0

Range

Not Applicable

Example

log server ip: 192.168.3.2

Parameter –
log server port

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Log Port
(in Web UI)
Description

Specifies the IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
This is the IP port that transmits information from the IP phone to the IP
address location.

Format

Integer

Default Value

0

Range

Any valid IP port

Example

log server port: 2

A-272

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting Parameters

Parameters –
log module 

Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files

Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Module/Debug Level
aastra.cfg, .cfg

Module/Debug Level
(in Web UI)
Description

Allows enhanced severity filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that
can be frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation.
Blogs are defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single
page in reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated
into modules which allow you to log specific information for analyzing:
Module Name (configuration files)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

linemgr (line manager information)
user interface
misc (miscellaneous)
sip (call control SIP stack)
dis (display driver)
dstore (delayed storage)
ept (endpoint)
ind (indicator)
kbd (keyboard)
net (network)
provis (provisioning)
rtpt (Real Time Transport)
snd (sound)
prof (profiler)
xml (Extension Markup Language)
stun (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through
Network Address Translation (NAT)

Format

Integer

Default Value

1 (fatal errors)

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-273

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters

Range

Examples

Debug Level

Value

Fatal Errors

1 (default)

Errors

2

Warnings

4

Init

8

Functions

16

Info

32

All debug
levels OFF

0

All Debug
Levels ON

65535

Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module.
Example 1
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value
associated with each level. For example,
Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are
logged for the line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Example 2
Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48
log module dis: 48
log module net: 48
log module snd: 48
In the above example, functions and general information are logged for
the display drivers, network, and sound modules.
Example 3
log module rtpt: 0
log module ind: 65535
In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time
Transport module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module.
You can set the Module/Debug Levels using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.

A-274

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Troubleshooting Parameters

WatchDog Settings
Parameter–
watchdog enable

Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI

aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting

WatchDog
(in Web UI)
Description

Enables/disables the use of the WatchDog task for the IP Phones.

Format

Boolean

Default Value

1 (enabled)

Range

0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)

Example

watchdog enable: 0

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

A-275

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters

A-276

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Appendix B
Configuring the IP Phone
at the Asterisk IP PBX

About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes how to setup a user’s phone with an extension to make
and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX.

Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX

page B-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

B-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX

IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
The following configuration illustrates how to create a user with an extension to
make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX. This configuration is
defined in the sip.conf file present along with the other configuration files that are
created when Asterisk is installed. Usually, the configuration files can be found at
the /etc/asterisk directory.

;This is used in the “extensions.conf” file to identify this
;physical phone when issuing Dial commands.
[phone1]
;The type to use for the 6757i is “friend”.
;”Peer” is used when the Asterisk is contacting a proxy,
;”user” is used for phones that can only make calls
;and “friend” acts as both a peer and a user.
type=friend
;If your host has an entry in your DNS then you just enter the
;machines name in the host= field.
host=dynamic
defaultip=192.168.1.1 ;default IP address that the phone is
;configured to
;The password that phone1 will use to register with this PBX
secret=1234
dtmfmode=rfc2833;Choices are inband, rfc2833, or info
mailbox=1000 ;Mailbox for message waiting indicator
;If a phone is not in a valid context you will not be

B-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX

;able to use it. In this example' sip' is used. You can use
;whatever you like, but make sure they are the same, you will
;need to make an entry in your extensions.conf file (which we
;will get to later)
context=sip
callerid="Phone 1" <1234>

After this is defined in the “sip.conf” file, some information has to be entered in
the “extensions.conf” file present in the same directory as the “sip.conf” file. The
following definition in the file under the [sip]section/context completes defining
the extension for the 6757i phone.

Table 1:
exten -> 1234,1,Dial(SIP/phone1,20)

This definition completes configuring the 6757i phone at the IP PBX system.
To verify whether the extension has been successfully registered at the IP PBX
system, enter the Asterisk console and reload Asterisk. Use the command “sip
show peers” at the console. This will display the extensions that are registered at
the IP PBX system.

Table 2:
Name/username Host
phone1/phone1 192.168.1.1
Unmonitored

Mask
(D) 255.255.255.255

Port
5060

Status

This completes the basic set-up for the 6757i phone with 1234 extension at
the Asterisk IP PBX system. Refer to Asterisk documentation for set-up on
extended or advanced features such as voice mail and call forwarding, etc.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

B-3

Appendix C
Sample Configuration Files

About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample configuration files for the 6757i, 6757i CT, and
6753i.

Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Sample Configuration Files

page C-2

6757i Sample Configuration File

page C-2

6757i CT Sample Configuration File

page C-12

6753i Sample Configuration File

page C-29

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

Sample Configuration Files
This section consists of the sample configuration files necessary to configure the
IP phones. The general format is similar to configuration files used by several
Unix-based programs. Any text following a number sign (#) on a line is
considered to be a comment, unless the # is contained within
double-quotes. Currently, Boolean fields use 0 for false and 1 for true.

6757i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# ===========================
# Date: October 20th, 2005
# Phone Model: 6757i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# ".cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#

C-2

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# The Aastra 6757i, 6757iCT, and 6753i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the ".cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the ".cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the ".cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address
# for which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the ".cfg" file.
#------------------------------------------------------------------

# DHCP Setting
# ==============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-3

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# Network Settings
## = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.
#ip:

# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the ".cfg" file if
# setting this manually.

#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:

# Time Server Settings
## =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:

# Enable time server and enter at

#time server2:

# least one time server IP address or

#time server3:

# qualified domain name

# Time Server Disabled:
#

0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.

#

1 = true, means the time server is disabled.

# NAT Settings
# ===============
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
C-4

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1

# 1 = enabled

#sip nortel nat timer: 60

# seconds between keep alive messages

# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0

# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.

# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890

# Additional Network Settings
# =============================
#sip rtp port: 3000

# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.

#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# Configuration Server Settings
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-5

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

## = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP

# valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP

## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1

# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.

## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131

# can be IP or FQDN

#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 6757iaastra

## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com

# can be IP or FQDN

#http path: firmware

#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# Dial Plan Settings
# =====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
C-6

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

#
#

(1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan

#

(2) The "#" symbol has been pressed

#

(3) A timeout occurs

#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#

0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols

#

x

: matches any digit (0...9)

#

+

: matches 0 or more repetitions of the

#
#

: previous expression
[]

#

: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a

#

: range

#

()

: expression grouping

#

|

: either or

#
#
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3

# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds

# Example dial plans
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*"

# this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character

#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-7

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#sip dial plan terminator: 1

# enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string

#------------------------------------------------------------------

# General SIP Settings
#===========
#sip session timer: 30

# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality

#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1

# limit codecs to G711 and G729

#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0

# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)

# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
#

These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard

#

key lines on the phone. That is:

#
#

L1 to L4 on the 6757i and 6757iCT

#

L1 to L3 on the 6753i

#
#

These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line

#

settings.

#
#

C-8

See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

sip screen name: Joe Smith

# the name display on the phone's screen

sip user name: 4256

# the phone number

sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78

# the number to reach voicemail on

sip auth name: jsmith

# account used to authenticate user

sip password: 12345

# password for authentication account

sip mode: 0

# line type:
#

0 - generic,

#

1 - BroadSoft SCA line

#

2 - Nortel line

sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060

# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups

sip registrar ip: aastra.com

# IP address or FQDN of registrar

sip registrar port: 0

# as proxy port, but for the registrar

sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds

# Per-line SIP Settings
# ======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
#
#

- the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
settings above

sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-9

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

sip line3 vmail: *78

# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60

#------------------------------------------------------------------# Softkey Settings
#
# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# ".cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 6757i or 6757iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific (".cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
C-10

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.
# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#

number of characters for this value is 10 for

#

speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf

# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#

0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and

#

'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.

#

If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want

#

to monitor.

# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#

softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4

#

are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard

#

key line/call appearances)

# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND
# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5
# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-11

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

softkey8 line: 1
# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list

6757i CT Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# =========================

# Date: October 26th, 2005

# Phone Model: 6757iCT

# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.

# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# ".cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#
# The Aastra 6757i, 6757iCT, and 6753i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the

C-12

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# "aastra.cfg" file and the ".cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the ".cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while the
# ".cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address for
# which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the ".cfg" file.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# DHCP Setting
# ============

#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.

# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-13

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# Network Settings
# ================

# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.

C-14

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

#ip:

# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the ".cfg" file if
# setting this manually.

#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:

# Time Server Settings
# ====================

#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:

# Enable time server and enter at

#time server2:

# least one time server IP address or

#time server3:

# qualified domain name

# Time Server Disabled:
#

0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.

#

1 = true, means the time server is disabled.

# NAT Settings
#=============

# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.

#sip nortel nat support: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

# 1 = enabled

C-15

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#sip nortel nat timer: 60

# seconds between keep alive messages

# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address

#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0

# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.

# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.

#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890

# Additional Network Settings
#============================

#sip rtp port: 3000

# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.

#------------------------------------------------------------------

# Configuration Server Settings
# =============================

C-16

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP

download protocol: TFTP

# valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP

## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1

# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.

## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131

# can be IP or FQDN

#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 6757iaastra

## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com

# can be IP or FQDN

#http path: firmware

#------------------------------------------------------------------

# Dial Plan Settings
# ==================
#
# Notes:
#

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-17

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
#

(1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan

#

(2) The "#" symbol has been pressed

#

(3) A timeout occurs

#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#

0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols

#

x

: matches any digit (0...9)

#

+

: matches 0 or more repetitions of the

#
#

: previous expression
[]

: matches any number inside the brackets

#

: can be used with a "-" to represent a

#

: range

#

()

: expression grouping

#

|

: either or

#
#
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.

sip digit timeout: 3

# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds

# Example dial plans
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*"

# this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character

#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning

C-18

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91

#sip dial plan terminator: 1

# enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string

#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# General SIP Settings
# ====================

#sip session timer: 30

# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality

#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging

#sip use basic codecs: 1

# limit codecs to G711 and G729

#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0

# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)

# Global SIP User Settings
# ========================
#
# Notes:
#

These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard

#

key lines on the phone. That is:

#

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-19

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#

L1 to L4 on the 6757i and 6757iCT

#

L1 to L3 on the 6753i

#
#

These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line

#

settings.

#
#

See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works

sip screen name: Joe Smith

# the name display on the phone's screen

sip user name: 4256

# the phone number

sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78

# the number to reach voicemail on

sip auth name: jsmith

# account used to authenticate user

sip password: 12345

# password for authentication account

sip mode: 0

# line type:
#

0 - generic,

#

1 - BroadSoft SCA line

#

2 - Nortel line

sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060

# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups

sip registrar ip: aastra.com

# IP address or FQDN of registrar

sip registrar port: 0

# as proxy port, but for the registrar

sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds

# Per-line SIP Settings
# =====================

C-20

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
#
#

- the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
settings above

sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78

# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server

sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60

#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# Softkey Settings
# ================

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-21

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# ".cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.

# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 6757i or 6757iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific (".cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.

# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#

number of characters for this value is 10 for

#

speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf

# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#

0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and

#

'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.

#

If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want

#

to monitor.

# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#

softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4

#

are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard

#

key line/call appearances)

# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8

C-22

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69

# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND

# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5

# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
softkey8 line: 1

# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list

#-------------------------------------------------------------------

# Cordless Handset Feature Keys
# =============================

# Notes:
#
# In addition to the configuration parameters that exist on the 6757i
# phone, following are the parameters specific to the 6757i Cordless
# phones' handset. These parameters can be defined either int the

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-23

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# aastra.cfg or the .cfg files.
#
# The feature keys are displayed when the user presses the F button
# on the cordless phone's hand set. If any changes to the features
# keys are made using these parameters the feature keys that exist on
# the hand set have to be refreshed. To refresh the feature keys
# simply open a new line or press one of the feature keys that are
# available from the hand set. After a couple of seconds the cordless
# should get the new list from the base set. There are 15 feature
# keys that can be configured for the cordless hand set. Each feature
# key has the following settings. N corresponds to the feature key
# that is being configured for and ranges from 0-14. Feature key N
# En label: "String" Feature key N Fr label: "Fr-String" Feature key
# N Sp label: "Sp-String" Feature key N control: 1
# integer value Feature key N hs event: 1

#Takes an

#Takes an integer value

# Feature key N base event: 1 #Takes an integer value

#key list version: 1
# The parameter value has to be incremented by one whenever the
# parameters that carry the feature keys change. The range is from
# 1-254. After reaching 254 start over from 1.

#Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
# English label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language is
# set to use English

#Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
# French label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use French

#Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
# Spanish label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Spanish

C-24

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

Feature key 0 Gr label: "Gr-Line 1"
# German label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use German

Feature key 0 It label: "It-Line 1"
# Italian label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Italian

#Feature key 0 control: 1
# 1 - Make the key configurable by the user through the phone and
#

the phone's web client

# 2 - Locks the key from user modifications. User cannot modify
#

this key from the handset or the phone's web client.

# 4 - Hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys list in the
#

cordless handset

# 6 - Lock and hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys
#

list in the cordless handset and do not let the user modify

#

this key using the phone or the web client.

#Feature key 0 hs event: 7
# These events are for handset specific events. Events can be local
# to the handset like directory/caller's list, intercom etc. or may
# be an event that is sent to the base set for fruther processing.
# When this key is configured as a base event then the base set
# will process the value of this key in conjunction with the value
# configured for the "Feature key N base event". Where N is the
# feature key is being configured for.
# In addition to the values listed below the valid values are
# [7-23]. The values [7-23] indicate generic handset events. If
# you are using values within this range make sure to use the value
# only once.
# The events local to the handset are as follows:
#

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-25

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#

58 - Menu (Options)

#

59 - Feature Key

#

60 - Redial

#

61 - Directory

#

62 - Callers' list

#

63 - Services

#

86 - Icom

#Feature key 0 base event: 1
# Indicates a corresponding action to perform on the base set when
# the "Feature key N hs event" is set to any value between 7-23.
#
#

1 - Seize base set's line1

#

2 - Seize base set's line2

#

3 - Seize base set's line3

#

4 - Seize base set's line4

#

5 - Seize base set's line5

#

6 - Seize base set's line6

#

7 - Seize base set's line7

#

8 - Seize base set's line8

#

9 - Seize base set's line9

#

10 - Seize base set's line0

#

11 - Send the base set's transfer event

#

12 - Send the base set's conference event

#

13 - Make feature list public

# Example configuration
key list version: 1

Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
Feature key 0 control: 0

C-26

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

Feature key 0 hs event: 7
Feature key 0 base event: 1

Feature key 1 En label: "Conf."
Feature key 1 Fr label: "Fr-Conf."
Feature key 1 Sp label: "Sp-Conf."
Feature key 1 control: 1
Feature key 1 hs event: 8
Feature key 1 base event: 12

Feature key 2 En label: "Xfer"
Feature key 2 Fr label: "Fr-Xfer."
Feature key 2 Sp label: "Sp-Xfer."
Feature key 2 control: 2
Feature key 2 hs event: 9
Feature key 2 base event: 11

Feature key 3 En label: "Icom"
Feature key 3 Fr label: "Fr-Icom"
Feature key 3 Sp label: "Sp-Icom"
Feature key 3 control: 1
Feature key 3 hs event: 86
Feature key 3 base event: 13

Feature key 4 En label: "Opt"
Feature key 4 Fr label: "Fr-Opt"
Feature key 4 Sp label: "Sp-Opt"
Feature key 4 hs event: 58
Feature key 4 control: 1
Feature key 4 base event: 13

Feature key 5 En label: "Callers"
Feature key 5 Fr label: "Fr-Callers"
Feature key 5 Sp label: "Sp-Callers"

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-27

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

Feature key 5 hs event: 62
Feature key 5 control: 1
Feature key 5 base event: 13

Feature key 6 En label: "Top"
Feature key 6 Fr label: "Fr-Top"
Feature key 6 Sp label: "Sp-Top"
Feature key 6 hs event: 17
Feature key 6 control: 1
Feature key 6 base event: 13

Feature key 7 En label: "Redial"
Feature key 7 Fr label: "Fr-Redial"
Feature key 7 Sp label: "Sp-Redial"
Feature key 7 hs event: 60
Feature key 7 control: 4
Feature key 7 base event: 13

Feature key 8 En label: "Dir."
Feature key 8 Fr label: "Fr-Dir."
Feature key 8 Sp label: "Sp-Dir."
Feature key 8 hs event: 61
Feature key 8 control: 2
Feature key 8 base event: 13

Feature key 9 En label: "Services"
Feature key 9 Fr label: "Fr-Services"
Feature key 9 Sp label: "Sp-Services"
Feature key 9 hs event: 63
Feature key 9 control: 1
Feature key 9 base event: 13

C-28

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

6753i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
#= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Date: October 26th, 2005
# Phone Model: 6753i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# ".cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide
# for the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and
# valid ranges.
#
# The Aastra 6757i, 6757iCT, and 6753i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the ".cfg" file. These two
# configuration files can be used to configure all of the settings
# of the phone with the exception of assigning a static IP address
# to a phone and line settings, which should only be set in the ".cfg" file.
#

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-29

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the ".cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC
# address for which the file is named (for example,
# "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will
# be overridden by settings which also appear in the ".cfg" file.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------

# DHCP Setting
# =============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------

# Network Settings
# = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration
# you may still have to set the dns address.

C-30

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

#ip:

# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the ".cfg" file if
# setting this manually.

#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:

# Time Server Settings
# =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:

# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name.

# Time Server Disabled:
#

0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.

#

1 = true, means the time server is disabled.

# NAT Settings
# = = = = = = =
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set
# the following two parameters for the phone to function
# correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

# 1 = enabled
C-31

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#sip nortel nat timer: 60

C-32

# seconds between keep alive messages

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0

# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.

# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890

# Additional Network Settings
# ============================
#sip rtp port: 3000

# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.

#-----------------------------------------------------------------

# Configuration Server Settings
# = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols
# are supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP

# valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-33

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

C-34

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1

# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.

## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131

# can be IP or FQDN

#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 6757iaastra

## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com

# can be IP or FQDN

#http path: firmware

#----------------------------------------------------------------

# Dial Plan Settings
# ====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
#

(1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan

#

(2) The "#" symbol has been pressed

#

(3) A timeout occurs

#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the
# following:
# syntax:
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-35

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

#

C-36

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

#

0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols

#

x

: matches any digit (0...9)

#

+

: matches 0 or more repetitions of the

#
#

: previous expression
[]

: matches any number inside the brackets

#

: can be used with a "-" to represent a

#

: range

#

()

: expression grouping

#

|

: either or

#
#
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3

# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds

# Example dial plans
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*"

# this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character

#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91

#sip dial plan terminator: 1

# enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string

#-----------------------------------------------------------------

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-37

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

# General SIP Settings
# ======================
#sip session timer: 30

# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality

#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for
# sip messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1

# limit codecs to G711 and G729

#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0

# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)

# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
#

These settings are used as the default configuration for the

#

hard key lines on the phone. That is:

#
#

L1 to L4 on the 6757i and 6757iCT

#

L1 to L3 on the 6753i

#
#

These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line

#

settings.

#
#
#

See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this
works

sip screen name: Joe Smith # the name display on the phone's screen
sip user name: 4256

# the phone number

sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78

C-38

# the number to reach voicemail on

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

sip auth name: jsmith

# account used to authenticate user

sip password: 12345

# password for authentication account

sip mode: 0

# line type:
#

0 - generic,

#

1 - BroadSoft SCA line

#

2 - Nortel line

sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060

# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups

sip registrar ip: aastra.com

# IP address or FQDN of registrar

sip registrar port: 0

# as proxy port, but for the registrar

sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds

# Per-line SIP Settings
# =======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
#
#

- the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
settings above

sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78

# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-39

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files

sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60

#----------------------------------------------------------------# Programmable Key Settings
# ===========================
# Programmable keys can be set either server wide or unique to each
# phone.
# Setting programmable keys as line/call appearances should be done
# in the ".cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 7 programmable keys that can be configured
# on the 6753i phone, and only 2 on the phone. These can be
# set up through either of the 2 configuration files, depending on
# whether this is to be server wide ("aastra.cfg") or phone
# specific (".cfg"). Each prgkey needs to be numbered from
# 1 - 7, for example "prgkey2 type:
# speeddial". Programmable keys can be set up as speeddials or as
# additional call/line appearances or as feature keys and have a
# type, value and line associated with it as seen here in the
# default programmable settings.
# PRGKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
C-40

nnn-nnnn-nnn

Sample Configuration Files

# PRGKEY VALUE: If prgkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#

0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and

#

'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.

#

If prgkey type is blf it is the extension you want

#

to monitor.

# PRGKEY LINE:

This is line associated with the prgkey. For line

#

prgkeys the value must be between 4 and 9 (1 - 3

#

are already hardcoded as the L1, L2 and L3 hard

#

key line/call appearances).

# Speed Dials
prgkey1 type: speeddial
prgkey1 value: *8
prgkey2 type: speeddial
prgkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
prgkey3 type: dnd
# Line appearance
prgkey4 type: line
prgkey4 line: 5
# blf
prgkey5 type: blf
prgkey5 value: 4559
prgkey5 line: 1
# list
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey7 type: list

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

C-41

Appendix D
Sample BLF Softkey Settings

About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server
and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server.

Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Sample BLF Softkey Settings

page D-2

Asterisk BLF

page D-2

BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF

page D-3

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

D-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample BLF Softkey Settings

Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Asterisk BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Asterisk BLF support on Aastra IP phones.
6757i and 6757i CT Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF

softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1

type: blf
value: 9995551212
label: John
line: 1

6753i Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF

D-2

prgkey1
prgkey1
prgkey1
prgkey1

type: blf
value: 9995551212
label: John
line: 1

prgkey7
prgkey7
prgkey7
prgkey7

type: blf
value: 9995551313
label: Jane
line: 1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Sample BLF Softkey Settings

BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Broadsoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp Field support on Aastra IP phones.
6757i and 6757i CT Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One softkey must be defined of type “list” for EACH monitored
user. So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 softkeys must be defined
of type list.

softkey1 type: list
softkey1 label:
softkey1 value:
softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 type: list
softkey2 label:
softkey2 value:
softkey2 line: 1
list uri: sip:my6757i-blf-list@as.broadsoft.com

6753i Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One prgkey must be defined of type “list” for each monitored user.
So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 prgkeys must be defined of type
list.

prgkey5 type: list
prgkey5 line: 1
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey7 line: 1
list uri: sip:my53i-blf-list@as.broadsoft.com

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

D-3

Appendix E
Sample Multiple Proxy Server
Configuration

About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration.

Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Multiple Proxy Server Configuration

page E-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

E-1

IP Phone Administrator Guide
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration

Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple proxy servers can be configured in the aastra.cfg file or the .cfg
file. In the example below, the default proxy setting is used if no specific setting is
specified in the line configuration. Line2 and line3 are used for the global proxy
configurations, while line1 and line4 use their own specific settings.
Note: The phones include support for RFC3327, SIP extension header
for phones to discover intermediate proxies. This feature is always
enabled on the phone.
#sip settings
sip proxy ip: #.#.#.#
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:3600
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0

sip dial plan: "x+#""
#line info
# Fill in all necessary information below carefully. Populate all
lines even if there is only
# one account
#line 1
sip line1 auth name:
sip line1 password:
sip line1 mode: 0
sip line1 user name:
sip line1 display name:
sip line1 screen name:
sip line1 proxy ip: &.&.&.&
sip line1 proxy port: 5060
sip line1 registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip line1 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:600
sip nortel nat support:1
sip nortel nat timer:120
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0

E-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Multiple Proxy Server Configuration

Continued.....
#line 2
sip line2
sip line2
sip line2
sip line2
sip line2
sip line2

auth name:
password:
mode: 0
user name:
display name:
screen name:

#line 3
sip line3
sip line3
sip line3
sip line3
sip line3
sip line3

auth name:
password:
mode: 0
user name:
display name:
screen name:

#line 4
sip line4 auth name:
sip line4 password:
sip line4 mode: 0
sip line4 user name:
sip line4 display name:
sip line4 screen name:
sip line4 proxy ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 proxy port: 5060
sip line4 registrar ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:500
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:1
sip broadsoft hold:1
sip broadsoft conference:1

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

E-3

Limited Warranty

If replacement parts are used in making repairs, these parts may be refurbished, or
may contain refurbished materials. If it is necessary to replace the telephone set, it
may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color. If it
should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning
telephone set under this warranty, the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the
repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety (90) days from the
date of pick up, or the date of shipment to you, of the repaired or replacement set,
or until the end of the original warranty period, whichever is later. Proof of the
original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for
warranty repairs.
Exclusions
Aastra Telecom does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the
equipment of any particular telephone company. This warranty does not extend to
damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation, alteration,
accident, neglect, abuse, misuse, fire or natural causes such as storms or floods,
after the telephone is in your possession.
Aastra Telecom shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages,
including, but not limited to, loss, damage or expense directly or indirectly arising
from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone, either separately or in
combination with other equipment. This paragraph, however, shall not apply to
consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or
bought for use primarily for personal, family or household purposes.
This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Aastra Telecom with
respect to breach of warranty, and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the
sole warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied,
including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Warranty-1

Limited Warranty

Aastra Telecom warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a
one (1) year period from the date of original purchase. If there is a defect or
malfunction, Aastra Telecom shall, at its option, and as the exclusive remedy,
either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge, if returned within the
warranty period.

IP Phone Administrator Guide

Limited Warranty

Warranty Repair Services
Should the set fail during the warranty period:
In North America, please call 1-800-574-1611 for further information.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative for return instructions.
You will be responsible for shipping charges, if any. When you return this
telephone for warranty service, you must present proof of purchase.
After Warranty Service
Aastra Telecom offers ongoing repair and support for this product. This service
provides repair or replacement of your Aastra Telecom product, at Aastra
Telecom's option, for a fixed charge. You are responsible for all shipping charges.
For further information and shipping instructions:
In North America, contact our service information number: 1-800-574-1611.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative.
Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized
agents, or by others who are legally authorized. This restriction applies during and
after the warranty period. Unauthorized repair will void the warranty.

Warranty-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Index
Index

802.1x Support 6-31
802.1x local certificate 3-90
802.1x private key 3-91
802.1x root and intermediate certificates 3-90
802.1x trusted certificates 3-91
certificates and private key info 6-31
configuring using the Aastra Web UI 6-39
configuring using the config files 6-33
configuring using the IP Phone UI 6-34
eap-type 3-89
identity 3-89
md5 password 3-90

Auto Call Distribution (ACD) key 5-148
auto-answer 5-104, A-201
about 5-103
auto-answer, delay before 5-104

B
backlight mode (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) A-70
barge in 5-105, A-202
Basic Preferences 3-19

A
Aastra Web UI
advanced settings description 2-15
basic settings description 2-14
enabling and disabling 2-16
operation description 2-12
status description 2-12
account configuration 3-35
account mode 3-35
custom mode 3-36
phone mode 3-36
ACD
subscription period 5-196
action URIs 3-72, 5-330
action URIs, configuring 5-335
adapter, optional equipment for 6731i and 6751i 1-5
Administration Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii
administrator options 3-1, 4-2
"Allow" and "Allow-Event" headers 6-50
auto call distribution
acd auto available 3-30
acd auto available timer 3-30
subscription period 5-196
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Basic settings
Call Forward Mode 3-23
call waiting 3-21
digit timeout 3-19
display dtmf digits 3-20
DND key mode 3-22
goodbye key cancels incoming call 3-22
incoming call interrupts dialing 3-21
LLDP ELIN 3-23
local dial plan 3-19
MWI Line 3-22
park call (sprecode) (global setting) 3-20
pickup parked call (pickupsprecode global
setting) 3-20
play call waiting tone 3-21
preferred line 3-22
preferred line timeout 3-22
send dial plan terminator 3-19
status scroll delay 3-21
stuttered dial tone 3-21
suppress dtmf playback 3-20
switch focus to ringing line 3-21
UPnP mapping lines 3-22
xml beep support 3-21
beep, for xml applicaton 5-318
Bellcore cadences 5-125
Index-1

Index

Bellcore ring tones 5-125

customized preference list of 4-97

BLA subscription period 5-224

conf key 5-151, 5-159

BLA support for MWI 5-227

conference
transfer remaining parties when conference
ends 5-368

blacklist duration 6-22
BLF
configuring 5-171
directed call pickup 5-130
on Asterisk 5-170
on BroadSoft 5-170
overview 5-168
setting 5-168
subscription period 5-174
subscription period, configuring 5-174, 5-196
BLF key 5-147
BLF List,setting 5-169
BLF subscription period 5-174
BLF/List key 5-148
BLF/Xfer key 5-150, 5-176
Brazilian cadences 5-126
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
about BLA 5-218
configuring 5-219

C
cadence settings, Bellcore A-181
cadences, configuring 5-127
call destination for incoming calls 5-290
call forward key 5-150

conference key 1-8, 1-18, 1-21
enabling/disabling 5-114
mapping as speeddial 5-115
Conference softkey 1-31, 1-35
conferencing, SIP Join feature 5-367
config server
alternate TFTP 3-76
auto resync days 3-83
auto resync max delay 3-82
auto resync mode 3-81
auto resync time 3-82
download path (HTTPS path) 3-80
download port (HTTPS port) 3-80
download protocol 3-75
download server (HTTPS sserver) 3-80
FTP password 3-78
FTP path 3-78
FTP server 3-77
FTP username 3-78
HTTP path 3-79
HTTP port 3-79
HTTP server 3-79
primary TFTP 3-76
select TFTP 3-77
TFTP path 3-76, 3-77
XML application post list 3-83

call waiting 5-67

configuration
file precedence 1-43
methods for performing 2-2

call waiting tone 5-68

configuration file, description of 1-41

call waiting tones 5-129

configuration files
installing 1-44
using 2-17

call forwarding 5-249

callers list
downloading to phone 5-298
enabling/disabling 5-296
overview 5-293
using on phone 5-296
Callers List key 1-30, 1-35

configuration server 4-112
configuring 4-112
configuration server settings 3-75

callers list key 1-8, 1-17, 1-20, 5-150, 5-158
CancelAction, for XML applciations 5-319
Codecs 4-96
Index-2

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

D

limitations for 5-307
overview 5-302
using 5-308

default gateway 3-39
DHCP 3-38, 4-4
configuring 3-5, 4-5
download preference 4-20
not using 1-38
Option 12 4-11
Option 159 and 160 4-17
Option 77 User Class 4-14
Options 60, 66, and 43 4-8
using 1-38
using option 43 to customize the phone 4-9
DHCP config option override (configuration
files) 3-41

Index

delete key 1-9, 1-18, 1-21, 1-27

DND
account-based 5-207
configuring 5-201
DND key 5-148
DNS caching 4-23
DNS1 3-39
DNS2 3-40
DSCP 3-50, 4-56
DTMF digits
configuring display of 5-65, 5-68
displaying 5-65
DTMF methods 4-99

dhcp user class 3-41

DTMF playback, configuring suppression for 5-63

dial plan
configuring 5-57

DTMF, out-of-band 4-98

dial plan, emergency 5-16
dial plan, emergency dial plan and pattern
matching 5-17

DTMF, suppressing playback 5-63
dynamic sip, registration and subscription 4-76

E

dial plans
overview 5-53

Early-Only parameter in Replaces Header 6-50

Dial softkey 1-31, 1-35

emergency dial plan, defining 5-16

dial tones, stuttered
about 5-70
configuring 5-70, 5-77, 5-85, 5-88, 5-90

empty key 5-152

DiffServ QoS 4-54
Directed call pickup
configuring 5-133
description of 5-130
directed call pickup
enable/disable 3-29
play ring splash 3-29
prefix setting 3-29
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) key 5-148
Directory key 1-30, 1-35
directory key 1-9, 1-18, 1-21, 5-151, 5-158
directory list
download behavior 5-307
downloading procedures 5-311
downloading to server 5-306
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

encryption
methods for 7-2
overview 7-2
procedure for 7-4
Ethernet cable 1-4
expansion module, customizing columns for 5-376,
A-256
expansion module, M670i 1-6
expansion module, M675i 1-6

F
feature keys 5-142
configuring 5-156, A-239
feature keys, configuring 5-161
feature keys, guidelines for programming 5-157
firmware
Index-3

Index

configuration server requirement for 1-40
description of 1-41
installation considerations 1-38
installation methods 1-38
installing 1-44
firmware update
by restarting the phone 8-5
using the Aastra Web UI 8-2
using the auto-resync feature 8-7
firmware updates 3-84
flash key 5-149, 5-160

G
General Preferences 3-19
Goodbye Key
canceling incoming call using 5-85
goodbye key 1-8, 1-17, 1-20

I
Icom key 5-151
icom key 5-158
incoming call interrupts dialing 5-76
Installation 1-17, 1-23, 1-26
Installation Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii
intercom feature
configuring 5-105
incoming calls 5-104
outgoing calls 5-103
Intercom key 1-35
intercom settings, incoming
allow barge in 3-24
auto-answer 3-24
microphone mute 3-24
play warning tone 3-24

GRUU support 6-43

intercom settings, outgoing
line 3-25
prefix code 3-25
type 3-25

H

intercom warning tone A-202

Group Call Pickup (GCP) key 5-148

handsfree key 1-9
hold key 1-8, 1-17, 1-20

IP phone UI 2-2

K

hostname 3-40
HTTP and HTTPS support 2-6

key descriptions 1-12

HTTP/HTTPS and Broadsoft CMS 2-8

key list in Web UI, customizing 5-163

HTTPS
client functions 2-7
client/server configuration 4-40
security method for A-35, A-36
server functions 2-7
using via Aastra Web UI 2-9

key mapping
map conf key to 3-26
map redial key to 3-26

HTTPS certificate expiration 3-48
HTTPS certificate hostname 3-49
HTTPS client method 3-47
HTTPS Server block XML HTTP posts 3-46
HTTPS server redirect 3-46
HTTPS settings 3-46
HTTPS trusted certificates filename 3-49
HTTPS validate certificates 3-48
Index-4

key mapping, enable/disable Redial, Xfer, Conf
Keys 5-114
key press simulation, XML URI 5-359
key redirection (redial, conf, xfer, icom,
voicemail) 5-356
keys
callers list 1-17, 1-20
conference 1-18, 1-21
delete 1-18, 1-21
directory 1-18, 1-21
goodbye 1-17, 1-20
hold 1-17, 1-20
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

locking keys, on the IP phone 5-49
locking keys, procedures 5-50
locking softkeys and programmable keys A-251,
A-256
locking/unlocking the phone 5-10

M
Mexican cadences 5-126
microphone mute A-201

L
LAN Port 3-40
Language
language 1 thru 4 3-34

missed calls indicator
accessing and clearing 5-301
enabling/disabling 5-300
overview 5-300
Model 6751i 1-16, 1-19, 1-22

language
overview 5-34
specifying on IP phone 5-37
WebPage Language 3-33, 3-34

Model 6753i 1-25

language pack settings A-187

Model 6757i Cordless Handset 1-36

language settings A-185

Model 6757i CT 1-32

language, input 5-41
keypad alpabet tables 5-41
specifying in XML applications 5-47
specifying using the Aastra Web UI 5-46
specifying using the configuration files 5-44
specifying using the IP Phone UI 5-44

Model 9143i 1-7

last call return (lcr)
configuring 5-245
how it works 5-245
lcr key 5-150
line key 5-147, 5-158
line keys 1-18, 1-21
line settings 3-70
line/call appearance keys 1-9
LLDP 3-42
lldp packet interval 3-42
LLDP-MED and ELIN 5-98
local dial plan
dial plan terminator 5-55
secondary dial tone 5-56
lockIn, for xml applications 5-319

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Model 6755i 1-28
Model 6757i 1-32

Model 9480i 1-11
Model 9480i CT 1-11
Model 9480i CT Cordless Handset 1-14

N
NAP SIP port 3-43
NAT
configuring 4-32
configuring NAT address and port 4-35
Nortel Networks 4-32
overview 4-30
router configuration 4-31
NAT IP 3-43
NAT RTP port 3-44
navigation keys 1-8, 1-17, 1-20
network configuration 4-4
network parameters A-8
network settings, advanced 3-41, 3-46, 4-30
DHCP download options 3-41
DHCP user class 3-41
Index-5

Index

line 1-18, 1-21
navigation 1-17, 1-20
options 1-17, 1-20
programmable 1-18, 1-21
redial 1-17, 1-20
save 1-18, 1-21
services 1-18, 1-21
speaker 1-17, 1-20
transfer 1-18, 1-21
volume control 1-17, 1-20

Index

HTTPS block XML HTTP Posts 3-46
HTTPS certificate expiration 3-48
HTTPS certificate hostname 3-49
HTTPS Client Method 3-47
HTTPS redirect 3-46
HTTPS trusted certificates filename 3-49
LLDP packet interval 3-42
LLDP support 3-42
NAT IP 3-43
NAT RTP port 3-44
NAT SIP Port 3-43
Nortel NAT 3-44
Nortel NAT timer 3-44
NTP time servers 3-44, 3-45
Time Servers 1 thru 3 3-45
UPnP 3-43
upnp gateway 3-43
network settings, basic 3-38, 4-4
DHCP 3-38
Ethernet (PC Port and LAN Port) 3-40
gateway 3-39
hostname 3-40
IP Address 3-38
primary DNS 3-39
secondary DNS 3-40
subnet mask 3-39
network settings, configuring 4-24
none key 5-147, 5-158
Nortel NAT timer 3-44
Nortel NAT traversal enabled 3-44
Nortel Proxy 4-31
NTP time servers 3-45

O
operational features 5-5
operational features, advanced 6-3
configuring line number 6-5
configuring MAC address 6-5
configuring message sequence for blind
transfer 6-7
options
via Aastra Web UI 3-6
via Configuration Files 3-8
via IP Phone UI 3-3
Index-6

options key 1-9, 1-17, 1-20
Options key redirection 5-357
options menu, simplified A-7
out of sequence errors, ignoring 6-49

P
paging
configuring group RTP settings 5-110
group RTP setting description 5-108
Paging key 5-152
paging RTP
paging listen addresses 3-26
parameters
6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT softkeys A-218
802.1x support settings A-125
Aastra Web UI A-17
acd auto-available timer A-210
ACD subscription period A-111
Action URIs A-156
advanced SIP A-103
as-feature-event subscription A-115
audio transmit and receive adjustment
settings A-204
auto-answer settings A-199
backlight mode (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) A-70
BLA support for MWI A-97
blacklist duration A-261
BLF list URI A-255
BLF subscription period A-110
blind transfer setting A-258
boot sequence recover mode A-259
call forward key mode A-148
call forward settings A-147
call waiting settings A-173
Callers List settings A-145
centralized conferencing A-99
configuration encryption setting A-270
configuration server A-18
custom time zone and dst settings A-61
customized callers list and services keys A-146
customzing Aastra Web UI Key List A-248
DHCP option settings A-13
dial plan A-72
directed call pickup A-208
directory settings A-143
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

RTCP summary reports A-47
RTP, Codec, DTMF global settings A-133
show call destination name A-184
silence suppression settings A-136
single call restriction setting A-260
sip diversion display (global setting) A-183
SIP join feature A-101
sip lineN diversion display (per-line
setting) A-183
sip notify opt headers A-268
sip outbound support A-75
sip pai A-269
SIP registration retry timer A-109
sip sca bridging (global setting) A-98
softkeys, programmable keys, feature keys A-216
stuttered dial tone setting A-172
Suppress DTMF Playback A-197
switch focus to ringing line A-169
symmetric UDP signaling A-265
time and date A-52
time server A-59
top softkeys A-232
ToS A-51
Transport Layer Security (TLS) A-116
updating caller ID A-258
UPnP A-41
user-agent setting A-266
VLAN A-42
voicemail A-141
whitelist proxy A-261
XML key redirection (redial, xfer, conf, icom,
voicemail) A-262
XML override for a locked phone A-265
XML settings A-153
XML SIP notify A-162
parameters, list of configurable A-7
time server settings A-59
parameters, setting in configuration files A-6
park key 5-149, 5-159
park/pickup
about parked/pickup calls 5-59, 5-234
configuring a static configuration 5-61
configuring programmable configuration using
config files 5-236
configuring programmable configuration using Web
UI 5-238
programmable configuration of 5-234
Index-7

Index

DND key mode A-175
dns query setting A-267
DSCP A-51
DTMF digits A-198
dynamic sip A-76
emergency dial plan A-16
expansion module keys A-241
global ring tone settings A-164
global SIP A-77
goodbye key cancels incoming call A-171
group paging RTP settings A-203
GRUU Support A-266
handset feature keys A-239
HTTP/HTTPS authentication with Broadsoft
CMS A-102
HTTPS client and server settings A-35
HTTPS server certificate validation A-37
incoming call interrupts dialing A-167
incoming intercom A-201
Intercom settings A-199
language A-185
language pack A-187
live dialpad A-71
LLDP ELIN A-150
local SIP TLS port A-34
local SIP UDP/TCP port A-34
locking SAVE and DELTE keys (6753i) A-254
locking softkeys and programmable keys A-251
MAC Address/Line Number A-104
mapping key A-213
message waiting indicator A-174
missed call summary subscription period A-113
missed call summary subscription, global A-112
missed call summary subscription, per-line A-114
Missed Calls Indicator settings A-152
NAT A-31
out of order SIP requests A-268
outgoing intercom A-199
park and pickup global settings A-211
password A-15
per-line ring tone settings A-166
per-line SIP A-86
polling action URIs A-163
preferred line A-170
preferred line timeout A-170
priority alert settings A-176
programmable keys (6753i, 6755i) A-227
rport A-33

Index

static configuration of 5-59
using on the IP phone 5-243
parrameters
sip lineN sca bridging (per-line setting) A-98
P-Asserted Identity (PAI) 6-51
pass-thru port 3-40
password, resetting user’s 5-7
passwords
for a user 5-5
for an administrator 5-9
PC Port 3-40
phone lock key 5-152
Phone Status
Firmware Version 3-10
IP&MAC Address 3-10
LAN Port 3-10
PC Port 3-10

R
Reason Header field in SIP message 6-50
redial key 1-8, 1-17, 1-20
enabling/disabling 5-114
mapping as speeddial 5-115
repair 0-2
requirements, IP phone 1-39
restarting IP phone 3-13
ring tone
global ring tone 3-27
patterns used for 5-124
per-line ring tone 3-27
tone set setting 3-27
ring tone sets 5-120
configuring 5-121

pickup key 5-149, 5-159

ring tones 5-118
configuring 5-121
ring tone 3-27
tone set 3-27

play warning tone 5-104

Rport 3-44

PoE 1-4

rport, configuring 4-65

preferred line 5-81

RTCP summary reports 4-105

preferred line timeout 5-81

RTP
basic codecs for 4-96
configuring 4-95, 4-101
customized codec preference list 4-97
dtmf method 4-99
encryption method (SRTP) 4-99
out-of-band DTMF 4-98
RTP port 4-96
silence suppression 4-100

phone status settings 3-9

priority alerting
about 5-123
configuring 5-127
priority alerting settings
auto call distribution 3-28
community 1 thru 4 3-28
emergency 3-28
enabling 3-27
external 3-28
group 3-27
internal 3-28
priority 3-28
programmable keys 5-142
about 1-18, 1-21
configuring 5-153
public key 5-160

Q

rtp encryption 4-99
RTP port 4-96
RTP settings 3-67, 3-69

S
SAVE and DELETE keys, locking (6753i) A-254
save key 1-9, 1-18, 1-21, 1-27
SBG and ALG proxy 4-31
screen timeout, for XML 5-318

QoS 4-54
Index-8

scroll delay 5-318
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Services key 1-30, 1-35
services key 1-18, 1-21, 5-151

SIP
advanced settings 4-86
configuring 4-78
overview of 4-70
parameter precedence 4-73
SIP diversion display 5-288
sip outbound support 4-74
SIP settings
autodial number 3-69
autodial timeout 3-69
autodial, use global settings 3-69
RTP port 3-67
SIP settings, advanced 3-60
acd subscription period 3-65
as-feature-event subscription 3-61
as-feature-event subscription period 3-61
bla subscription period 3-65
blacklist duration 3-65
BLF subscription period 3-65
explicit mwi subscription 3-60
explicit mwi subscription period 3-60
local SIP UDP/TCP Port 3-63, 3-64
missed call summary subscription 3-60
missed call summary subscription period 3-61
registration failed retry timer 3-64
registration renewal timer 3-64
registration timeout retry timer 3-64
send line number in REGISTER message 3-62
send MAC address in REGISTER message 3-61
session timer 3-62
timer 1 and timer 2 3-62
transaction timer 3-62
transport protocol 3-63
whitelist proxy 3-66
XML SIP Notify 3-66
SIP settings, basic 3-55
auth name 3-56
BLA number 3-56
caller ID 3-55
display name 3-55
line mode 3-56
password 3-56
41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Index

shared call appearance (SCA call bridging 5-230
silence suppression 4-100

phone number 3-55
screen name 3-55
screen name 2 3-55
user name 3-55
SIP settings, network
backup proxy port 3-57
backup proxy server 3-57
backup registrar port 3-59
backup registrar server 3-59
outbound proxy port 3-58
outbound proxy server 3-58
proxy port 3-57
proxy server 3-57
registrar port 3-58
registrar server 3-58
registration period 3-59
SIP Settings, RTP
Basic Codecs 3-67
customized Codec preference list 3-68
DTMF method 3-68
Force RFC2833 Out of Band DTMF 3-67
RTP encryption 3-68
RTP port 3-67
silence suppression 3-68
Softkey settings A-216
softkeys 5-142
configuring 5-153
Softkeys and Programmable Keys
locking 5-50, 5-376
softkeys and programmable keys
locking A-251
softkeys, state-based 5-143
speaker key 1-17, 1-20
speeddial key 5-147
speeddial keys
enabling/disabling ability to add and edit 5-167
prefixes for 5-166
Speeddial/Conf key 5-150, 5-182
Speeddial/Xfer key 5-150, 5-176
sprecode key 5-149
SRV lookup, configuring 4-75
status message beep
configuring in configuration files and Web
UI 5-320
Index-9

Index

status message scrolling
configuring in configuration files and Web
UI 5-321

Tx/Rx adjustments
about 5-361
configuring 5-362

subnet mask 3-39

type of service
RTCP 3-50
RTP 3-50
SIP 3-50

switch focus to ringing line 5-79

T
time and date
date format 3-31
NTP time servers 3-31
time format 3-31
Time Server 1 3-32
Time Server 2 3-32
Time Server 3 3-32

U

time and date, configuring 5-23

upnp manager 3-43

time servers, configuring 4-67

User Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii

time zone and dst settings, custom 5-20, A-61
absolute A-62
relative time A-65

usernames
administrator 2-11, 3-6, 4-3
configuring for FTP server 4-118
configuring for SIP authentication 4-80
for FTP A-22
for SIP authentication 4-71, 4-72, A-78, A-87
global BLA 5-219
per-line BLA 5-220
user 2-11

TLS (Transport Layer Security) 6-26
configuring using the Aastra Web UI 6-29
configuring using the config files 6-28
SIP asserted identify (Sylantro Servers) 6-27
TLS support
sip persistent tls 3-86
sip transport protocol 3-85
sips local certificate 3-87
sips private key 3-88
sips root and intermediate certificates 3-87
sips trusted certificates 3-88
ToS 4-54
ToS, DSCP 3-50
transfer key 1-8, 1-18, 1-21
Transfer softkey 1-31, 1-35
troubleshooting 9-3
error messages 9-15
log settings 9-3
log settings for A-271
module/debug level settings 9-4
solutions to common problems 9-19
support information 9-7
watchdog feature 9-12
WatchDog tasks for A-274

Index-10

upgrading, firmware 8-2
UPnP
configuring 4-51, A-41
description of 4-50
upnp gateway 3-43

V
VLAN 3-51
configuring 4-54
DSCP Range 4-56
global priority non-IP packet 3-51
global VLAN enable 3-51
LAN Port SIP, RTP, RTCP Priority 3-52
LAN Port VLAN ID 3-51
PC Port priority 3-53
PC Port VLAN ID 3-53
priority mapping 4-56
voicemail
overview 5-313
using 5-315
voicemail, configuring 5-313

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

volume
control keys 1-17, 1-20
volume key 1-8

Index

W
warranty 0-1
warranty exclusions 0-1
whilte list proxy 6-24

X
xfer key 5-151, 5-159
Xfer key, enabling/disabling 5-114
XML
action URIs 5-330
configuring on IP phone 5-322
configuring SIP Notify for empty message 5-349
creating customized services 5-316
customized services 5-316
disconnected action URI 5-341
enabling/disabling SIP Notify 5-346
key redirection 5-356
off-hook interaction with XML applications 5-359
Options key redirection (Services key on
6751i) 5-357
override for a locked phone 5-360
polling action URIs 5-339
procedure for configuring 5-323
push from the server 5-321
push requests 5-323
scroll delay for status messages 5-321
SIP Notify events 5-344
softkey URIs 5-350
status message beep 5-320
using customized services 5-328
xml beep support 5-72, 5-74
XML Get timeout 5-318
XML key 5-149

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

Index-11

Third Party Copyright Compliance
This product contains software provided under license to Aastra Telecom by one or more third
parties. In addition to the Aastra SLA shown above, use and distribution of this product is subject to
the following license terms:
Expat XML Parser
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
M5T SIP Stack - M5T
Portions of this software are © 1997 - 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation ("M5T( tm )").
All intellectual property rights in such portions of the software and documentation are owned by M5T and are protected
by Canadian copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. M5T and its suppliers
retain all rights not expressly granted.
MD5 RSA
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also
granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the
suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any
kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

41-001160-04 Rev 02, Release 2.5

OpenSSL
License Issues
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original
SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open
Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
/* ============================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*/
Original SSLeay License
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/

41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco
Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
•

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.

•

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

•

Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION).
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software
The VxWorks Run-Time software module is Copyright (c) WindRiver Systems Inc, all rights reserved. It is licensed for
use, not sold. All use of this product and the VxWorks Run-Time module is subject to agreement with the following
EULA terms
With respect to the Run-Time Module, Wind River and its licensors are third party beneficiaries of the End User License
Agreement and that the provisions related to the Run-Time Module are made expressly for the benefit of, and are
enforceable by, Wind River and its licensors.
Activities expressly prohibited: (i) copying the Run-Time Module, except for archive purposes consistent with the End
User’s archive procedures; (ii) transferring the Run-Time Module to a third party apart from the Target Application; (iii)
modifying, decompiling, disassembling, reverse engineering or otherwise attempting to derive the Source Code of the
Run-Time Module; (iv) exporting the Run-Time Module or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S.
and foreign export laws and regulations; and (v) using the Run-Time Module other than in connection with operation of
the Target Application.
Aastra Telecom and Wind River Systems: (i) Retain ownership of all copies of the Run-Time Module; (ii) expressly
disclaim all implied warranties, including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a
particular purpose, title and non-infringement; (iii) exclude liability for any special, indirect, punitive, incidental and
consequential damages; and (iv) require that any further distribution of the Run-Time Module be subject to the same
restrictions set forth herein.

41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

UPnP - Intel
INTEL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (Final, Site License)
IMPORTANT - READ BEFORE COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
Do not use or load this software and any associated materials (collectively, the "Software") until you have carefully read
the following terms and conditions. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this Agreement. If you
do not wish to so agree, do not install or use the Software.
LICENSE. You may copy the Software onto your organization's computers for your organization's use, and you may
make a reasonable number of back-up copies of the Software, subject to these conditions:
1. You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the Software except as provided in this
Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software.
2. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software.
3. You may not sublicense the Software.
4. The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set out here,
as set out in a license accompanying those portions.
OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS. Title to all copies of the Software remains
with Intel or its suppliers. The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other
countries, and international treaty provisions. You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software. Intel may
make changes to the Software, or to items referenced therein, at any time without notice, but is not obligated to support
or update the Software. Except as otherwise expressly provided, Intel grants no express or implied right under Intel
patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights. You may transfer the Software only if the recipient
agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software.
LIMITED MEDIA WARRANTY. If the Software has been delivered by Intel on physical media, Intel warrants the
media to be free from material physical defects for a period of ninety days after delivery by Intel. If such a defect is
found, return the media to Intel for replacement or alternate delivery of the Software as Intel may select.
EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
"AS IS" WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links
or other items contained within the Software.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR LOST INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER
LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS
AGREEMENT.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy
the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel.
APPLICABLE LAWS. Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of California, excluding its
principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods. You may not export
the Software in violation of applicable export laws and regulations. Intel is not obligated under any other agreements
unless they are in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Intel.
GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is provided with "RESTRICTED RIGHTS."
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR52.227-14 and
DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor. Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgment of
Intel's proprietary rights therein. Contractor or Manufacturer is Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa
Clara, CA 95052.

41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4

SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide
Models 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 67xxi Series
© 2009 Aastra Telecom Inc.
If you’ve read this owner’s manual and consulted the Troubleshooting section and
still have problems, please visit our website at www.aastratelecom.com or call 1-800-574-1611
for technical assistance.
41-001160-04, Rev 02
Release 2.5
October 2009



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2009:11:26 11:35-05:00
Create Date                     : 2009:10:21 14:14:24Z
Metadata Date                   : 2009:11:26 11:35-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Creator                         : Aastra Telecom, 2007
Description                     : IP Phone Admin Guide.pdf
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:f91b8f31-9da0-4399-a09e-1541e292fa35
Instance ID                     : uuid:034053d5-7508-4ba8-8972-61af15279dba
Page Count                      : 1140
Subject                         : IP Phone Admin Guide.pdf
Author                          : Aastra Telecom, 2007

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools